Loading...
Vision Center PlansMONTICELLO, MINNESOTA STORE NO.: 3624.241 0. a EXISTING SQ FIT: DATE: Sc -q r" 20311091 08/07/2020 DRAWING INDEX GENERAL Ct COVER SHEET ARCHITECTURAL VC1 VISION CENTER VC1.1 VISION CENTER ELEVATIONS VC12 REFLECTED CEILING PLANS AND DETAILS VC2 SECTIONS VC3 EQUIPMENT (FOR REFERENCE ONLY) MECHANICAL VCMP1 VISION CENTER MECHANICAL PLUMBING AND FIRE PROTECTION PLAN ELECTRICAL VCE1 VISION CENTER LIGHTINGS PLANS AND SCHEDULES VCE2 VISION CENTER POWER PLANS AND SCHEDULES 15 143) (12 Ill �10� 9 8�7) l I T � � � 11 � � �. �• � KEY PLAN 113Z'= 1'-0" NORTH ARCHITECTURAL: MECHANICAUELECTRICAUPLUMBING: BUILDING REVIEW: STORE ADDRESS: pb2 architecture + engineering pb2 architecture + engineering CITY OF MONTICELLO WALMART STORE NO. 3624.241 2809 AJAX AVENUE SUITE 100 2809 AJAX AVENUE SUITE 100 BUILDING & ZONING 9320 CEDAR STREET MONTICELLO, MINNESOTA ROGERS, ARKANSAS 72758 ROGERS, ARKANSAS 72758 505 WALNUT STREET, STE 1 MONTICELLO, MINNESOTA (479) 636-3545 (479) 636-3545 MONICELLO, MN 55362 ORDERING OF MATERIALS TO PROHIBIT DELAYS OF THE CONSTRUCTION 2 (763)271-3253 BUILDING CODE SUMMARY NAME OF PROJECT: STREET ADDRESS: PROPOSED USE: CODES: BUILDING CODE: MECHANICAL CODE: PLUMBING CODE: ELECTRICAL CODE: FIRE CODE: ACCESSIBILITY CODE ENERGY: L�T$�11fJ;�L�CN'a TYPE OF CONTRUCTION: ALLOWABLE AREA:- FIRE REAFIRE PROTECTION: MONTICELLO, MINNESOTA VISION CENTER SPECIAL PROJECT 9320 CEDAR STREET MONTICELLO, MINNESOTA RETAIL 2015 MINNESOTA BUILDING CODE 2015 MINNESOTA MECHANICAL CODE PLUMBING CODE 2017 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE 2015 MINNESOTA FIRE CODE ACCESSIBILITY CODE ENERGY CODE M -MERCANTILE; WHOLESALE OR RETAIL STORE (MAIN USE) - SECT. 309.1 S1 -STORAGE AREA - SECT. 3112 VB UNPROTECTED (SPRINKLERED) PER SECT. 602.5 AND TABLES 601 AND 602 SECTION 507.3 UNLIMITED BUILDING IS EQUIPPED THROUGHOUT WITH AN AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEM AND IS SURROUNDED ON ALL SIDES BY 60 FEET MINIMUM OF PERMANENT OPEN SPACE AND COMPLIES WITH SECTION 507.3. UNLIMITED AREA CRITERIA IN APPLICABLE. �4 T I i -SKI - - jj G -_ p I ( D\17) a>•A APPROVED FILE COPY • REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE • SUBJECT TO FIELD INSPECTION Date: SI&OatoreIF: 10 0 Ll 10 10 W n W Z W 0 V) F, I� El p+enb2 hitecture gineering 2809 Ajax Aver R;e Suite 100 Rogers Arkansas 72758 Phone: 479.636.3545 Fcvc: 479.636.1209 Architect of Record William Douglas Hufley Minnesota License No. 40383 N W Iy N �ZC7 U% LL �NWFgwW� DZUI �aa~tb�t�ir�oowc� z62CO0 22 �oa gQ�g 6N�g'eo��� a `��� ��gsH, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1. ALL WORK SHALL BE DONE INA SAFE MANNER AND IN STRICT ACCORDANCE 10. WHERE EXISTING FINISHES ARE TO REMAIN, CLEAN, REPAIR, PATCH, AND/OR PROTO CYCLE: WITH THE LOCAL AND/OR STATE BUILDING CODES, AND ALL APPLICABLE CODES, DOCUMENT DATE: REPAINT AS NECESSARY TO BLEND WITH ADJACENT SURFACES. COORDINATE REGULATION, ORDINANCES, AND AUTHORITIES HAVING JURISDICTION. WITH WALMART CONSTRUCTION MANAGER 2. EACH CONTRACTOR AND THEIR SUB -CONTRACTORS ARE RESPONSIBLE FOR 11. THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR THE TIMELY HAVING A THOROUGH KNOWLEDGE OF ALL DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN ORDERING OF MATERIALS TO PROHIBIT DELAYS OF THE CONSTRUCTION 2 THEIR RELATED FIELD. THE FAILURE TO ACQUAINT HIMSELF WITH THIS SCHEDULE OF THIS PROJECT. IT IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR Z KNOWLEDGE DOES NOT RELIEVE HIM OF ANY RESPONSIBILITY FOR PERFORMING TO COORDINATE DELIVERY OF MATERIALS IN A TIMELY MANNER. HIS WORK PROPERLY. NO ADDITIONAL COMPENSATION SHALL BE ALLOWED LEI cel O a BECAUSE OF CONDITIONS THAT OCCUR DUE TO FAILURE TO FAMILIARIZE 12. THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL RESPOND TO ALL REQUIREMENTS OF THE WORKERS WITH THIS KNOWLEDGE. v U ARCHITECT FOR VERIFICATIONS, RESPONSES AND SUBMISSIONS. 3. THE EXISTING BUILDING SHALL BE PROTECTED FROM MOISTURE, DUST AND 13. DURING ENTIRE CONSTRUCTION PERIOD, PROVIDE ONE U.L. LISTED 2A-20BC DRY O DEBRIS. INSTALL DUST PARTITIONS OR DRAPES AS REQUIRED AND/OR DIRECTED Q CHEMICAL FIRE EXTINGUISHER, OR ONE STANDARD U.L. LISTED 2-1/2 GALLON BY THE WALMART CONSTRUCTION MANAGER TO KEEP DUST AND MOISTURE {Y WATER (E-10) AND ONE U.L. LISTED 106C CARBON DIOXIDE FIRE EXTINGUISHER FROM THE OPERATING AREAS OF THE STORE. MOUNTED TOGETHER IN EACH 3000 SQUARE FOOT OF WORK AREA OR FRACTION THEREOF (MINIMUM OF TWO AVAILABLE IN ALL CONSTRUCTION AREAS 4. ANY DAMAGE TO WALIVART PROPERTY, WHICH OCCURS DURING THE PROCESS AT ALL TIMES). 7 G OF CONSTRUCTION, SHALL BE REPAIRED/REPLACED AT NO ADDITIONAL COST TO WALMART, THIS INCLUDES ALL MERCHANDISE. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PAY 14. IF MODIFICATION TO SPRINKLER SYSTEM IS REQUIRED, THE GENERAL WALMART THE RETAIL COST FOR ALL DAMAGED MERCHANDISE. CONTRACTOR SHALL HIRE A LICENSED SPRINKLER CONTRACTOR. THE CONTRACTOR IS TO SUBMIT SIGNED AND SEALED SPRINKLER DRAWINGS FOR 5. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL KEEP WORK AREA CLEAN AND FREE OF DEBRIS AND z Z APPROVAL TO THE AHJ PRIOR TO ANY ALTERATION OF THE AUTOMATIC SHALL REMOVE ALL TRASH AND DEBRIS FROM THE CONSTRUCTION AREA DAILY. SPRINKLER SYSTEM. mzB vuroN csNrEx saEClAl aI:aJECT NO FLAMMABLE MATERIALS OR LIQUIDS MAY BE STORED IN THE EXISTING BUILDING OR CONSTRUCTION AREAS. 15. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL MAINTAIN THE INTEGRITY OF THE EXISTING BUILDING SECURITY AT ALL TIMES. THIS INCLUDES KEEPING THE BUILDING SECURE FROM 6. REMOVE ANY EXISTING ITEMS, SERVICES, FINISHES OR SURFACES AS REQUIRED PERSONS, ENVIRONMENTAL ELEMENTS OR HAZARDS. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL FOR THE INSTALLATION OF NEW CONSTRUCTION. PROVIDE FURRING FOR BE RESPONSIBLE TO MAINTAIN THE INTEGRITY OF ALL EXISTING SECURITY CONDUITS AND PIPING, SHOWN OR NOT, AND FINISH OUT FURRING TO MATCH SYSTEM. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL OBTAIN PERMISSION FROM THE STORE ADJACENT FINISHES. MANAGER PRIOR TO THE MODIFICATION OF ANY EXISTING SECURITY SYSTEM FOR THE OPENING (DEMOLITION) OF ANY EXTERIOR WALL. 7. ALL ADJACENT TENANT SPACES SHALL REMAIN IN SERVICE DURING DEMOLITION AND CONSTRUCTION. 16. FIRE ALARM DRAWINGS TO BE FURNISHED AND INSTALLED BY WALMART ALARM SERVICES. 8. SCHEDULE ALL WORK TO KEEP DISRUPTIONS TO THE STORE OPERATIONS AT A MINIMUM. COORDINATE UTILITY DISRUPTIONS WITH THE WALMART STORE 17. CONTRACTOR TO MAINTAIN ACCESS TO ALL EMERGENCY EGRESS EXITS DURING MANAGER. CONSTRUCTION OPERATIONS. 9. REPAIR, RE-ROUTE, AND EXTEND ALL SERVICES, PIPING, CONDUIT OF EXISTING 18. CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBLE FOR PERMITS AND TRADE LICENSES THROUGH ITEMS AND EQUIPMENT AS REQUIRED DURING THE CONSTRUCTION PROCESS LOCAL JURISDICTION. FOR THE COMPLETE INSTALLATION AND OPERATIONS OF NEW EQUIPMENT. THIS INCLUDES ALL ITEMS SHOWN OR NOT SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS. RESET EXISTING EQUIPMENT OR RELATED ITEMS AS REQUIRED FOR PROPER OPERATION. SITE VERIFICATION DEMOLITION NOTES REQUIREMENTS 1. THE ARCHITECT HAS PREPARED THESE DRAWINGS BASED ON THE EXISTING 1. CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR ALL JOBSITE SAFETY AND COMPLIANCE BUILDING CONDITIONS. IT IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR TO WITH REGULATIONS. CONTRACTOR SHALL INSTALL TEMPORARY WALL, DUST VERIFY ALL EXISTING CONDITIONS PRIOR TO THE SUBMISSION OF HIS BID AND BARRICADES AND CONSTRUCTION BARRIERS AND TAKE ALL PRECAUTIONS TO THE COMMENCEMENT OF ANY WORK. NO ADDITIONAL COMPENSATION WILL BE PROTECT CUSTOMERS AND ASSOCIATES FROM CONSTRUCTION OPERATIONS. PAID DUE TO THE CONTRACTOR'S FAILURE TO ACQUAINT HIMSELF WITH EXISTING SITE CONDITIONS WHICH INCLUDE, BUT ARE NOT LIMITED TO EXISTING 2. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL FIELD VERIFY THE EXTENT OF DEMOLITION. IF WALL, CEILINGS, OR UTILITIES. DISCREPANCIES ARE FOUND, CONTACT THE ARCHITECT AND WALMART CONSTRUCTION MANAGER. 2. ANY DISCREPANCY WITH THE EXISTING SITE CONDITIONS ANDIOR THE DRAWINGS SHALL BE BROUGHT TO THE ATTENTION OF THE ARCHITECT FOR 3. WHEN UTILITIES ARE REMOVED, CAP AND SEAL A MINIMUM OF 8" BELOW CLARIFICATION AND INSTRUCTION. THESE CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS HAVE FINISH FLOOR OR A MINIMUM OF 6' ABOVE FINISH CEILING. BEEN DESIGNED AND DRAWN ASSUMING EXISTING BUILDING CONDITIONS MATCH THE ORIGINAL DRAWINGS. THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR, IMMEDIATELY 4. SAW CUTTING OF EXISTING CONCRETE WILL BE COORDINATED WITH STORE UPON ARRIVAL AT THIS SITE, SHALL VERIFY ALL EXISTING STRUCTURAL COLUMN MANAGER FOR APPROPRIATE HOURS TO MINIMIZE CUSTOMERS DIMENSIONS, STRUCTURAL BEARING HEIGHTS, EXISTING DIMENSION, AND DISTURBANCE. NO JACKHAMMERS ARE ALLOWED. ROOFING CONDITIONS (INCLUDING PARAPETS). IF DISCREPANCIES ARE FOUND BETWEEN WHAT IS SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS AND EXISTING FIELD 5. GENERAL CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR REMOVAL OF CONSTRUCTION CONDITIONS, CONTACT THE WALMART CONSTRUCTION MANAGER AND THE WASTE AND DEBRIS. DO NOT USE STORE DUMPSTERS. PREVENT CUSTOMERS ARCHITECT IMMEDIATELY TO DETERMINE WHAT ACTION SHOULD BE TAKEN TO AND ASSOCIATES FROM CONTACT WITH CONSTRUCTION WASTE. MATCH EXISTING CONDITIONS. 6. COORDINATE LOCATION OF DUMPSTER ON SITE WITH WALMART CM. 3. ALL UTILITY LOCATIONS SHOWN ARE APPROXIMATE. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL FIELD VERIFY THE EXACT LOCATION OF ALL EXISTING UTILITIES (WHETHER SHOWN OR NOT) PRIOR TO THE SUBMISSION OF HIS BID OR THE COMMENCEMENT OF CONSTRUCTION. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL NOTIFY THE WALMART CONSTRUCTION MANAGER AND THE ARCHITECT OF THE DISCOVERY OF EXISTING UTILITIES NOT SHOWN OR NOTED ON THE DRAWINGS. 4. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY EXACT LOCATIONS AND DEPTHS OF UNDERGROUND UTILITY SERVICES PRIOR TO ANY EXCAVATION. 5. REPORT ANY DISCREPANCIES FOUND IN THE FIELD IMMEDIATELY TO WALMART AND THE ARCHITECT PRIOR TO MAKING ANY MODIFICATIONS OR ORDERING OF ANY MATERIALS. GENERAL SCOPE OF WORK -VISION CENTER SALES AREA: REMODEL INCLUDING NEW MILLWORK AND LIGHTS -VISION CENTER DOCTORS OFFICES: PAINT, FIX AND CLEAN AS NOTED a>•A APPROVED FILE COPY • REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE • SUBJECT TO FIELD INSPECTION Date: SI&OatoreIF: 10 0 Ll 10 10 W n W Z W 0 V) F, I� El p+enb2 hitecture gineering 2809 Ajax Aver R;e Suite 100 Rogers Arkansas 72758 Phone: 479.636.3545 Fcvc: 479.636.1209 Architect of Record William Douglas Hufley Minnesota License No. 40383 N W Iy N �ZC7 U% LL �NWFgwW� DZUI �aa~tb�t�ir�oowc� z62CO0 22 �oa gQ�g 6N�g'eo��� a `��� ��gsH, CHECKED BY: KD DRAWN BY: DZ PROTO: %0 PROTO CYCLE: 07/01Y2020 DOCUMENT DATE: 08/07/2020 OR �0 Wz 2 Z : o Z LEI cel O a G v U z RZ t"? O O W Q {Y 0 (� 7 G U N O z Z ca 0 mzB vuroN csNrEx saEClAl aI:aJECT CHECKED BY: KD DRAWN BY: DZ PROTO: 195 PROTO CYCLE: 07/01Y2020 DOCUMENT DATE: 08/07/2020 I HEREBY CERTIFY THAT THIS PLAN, SPECIFICATION, OR REPORT WAS PREPARED BY ME OR UNDER MY DIRECT SUPERVISION AND THAT I AM A DULY LICENSED ARCHITECT UNDER THE LAWS OF THE. STATE OF MINNESOTA. WILLIAM DOUGLAS HURLEY DATE. 08.06.2020 LICENSE NUMBER'. 40383 DOCUMENTS THAT DO NOT HAVE THE ARCHITECT OR ENGINEER OF RECORD SEAL AND SIGNATURE SHALL BE CONSIDERED NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION COVER SHEET SHEET: C1 701 ADJUSTMENTS WALLS • PAINT ALL WALLS P207, LINO • INSTALL NEW BASE RB5 FLOOR • PIECE REPLACE LOOSE, BLISTERED OR DAMAGED WOOD PLANK PVC FLOORING • TRANSITION STRIPS FURNISHED AND INSTALLED BY CONTRACTOR. REFERENCE 8-VC2 CEILING • CLEAN CEILING TILES, GRID, AIR GRILLES/DIFFUSERS, SECURITY GLOBES, SPRINKLER HEADS, AND LIGHT LENSES. REPLACE ANY DAMAGED ITEMS. MILLWORK • ALL NEW OWNER FURNISHED, GC INSTALLED CASEWORK CONFIRM WITH WALMART CM BEFORE REMOVING EXISTING BULKHEAD SIGN. PATCH AND REPAIR SUBSTRATES. A NEW BULKHEAD SIGN WILL BE FURNISHED BY WALMART AND INSTALLED BY THIRD PARTY EXTERIOR ENTRY ELEVATION 1/4" = 1'-0" ITEMS TO BE RELOCATED FROM THE EXISTING VISION CENTER: STORE PLANNING TO RELOCATE EQUIPMENT. GC TO RELOCATE MILLWORK AND CONNECT TEMPORARY POWER. WM TO INSTALL TEMPORARY DATA. COORDINATE WITH VC MANAGER. CURRENT POS CASH WRAP: • REGISTER • PIN PAD • SCANNER • PRINTER/ FAX • CISCO PHONE • BLACK BOX FOR HIPAA STORAGE OR SHREDDER • I PADS FITTING TABLE: • ONE BOSS TERMINAL WITH PRIVACY SCREEN • 2-3 CHAIRS • PATIENT MIRRORS FILING CABINETS: • 2 DRAWER FILING CABINET FOR CURRENT PATIENT RECORDS AWAITING ORDER PICK UP / CAN ALSO BE USED FOR STORAGE OF CONTACT LENSES CABINET: • ONE TRAY PROCESSING LOCKING CABINET TO STORE DISPENSING TRAYS FOR PATIENT ORDERS / CAN ALSO BE USED FOR STORAGE OF CONTACT LENSES OPTICAL EQUIPMENT: • LENSOMETER • FRAME WARMER • CURRENT TOOLS FOR ADJUSTMENTS (TOOLS, SCREWS, PARTS, ETC) • ULTRASONIC CLEANER • TRACER • PUPILOMETER • TC70 OR MC40 SPACE ON CASH WRAP AREA TO DISPLAY: • LICENSES (VC AND OPTICIAN LICENSES AS REQUIRED BY LAW) • HOURS OF OPERATIONS SIGN • HIPAA, LEP, ADA AND OTHER COMPLIANCE SIGNS Trn Arlt -NMA MX/ C1 f"kI Trn Arlf-fMA f7\/ fill A.1 IA IOTA. I FITION TEMPORARY VISION CENTER PLAN - ALTERNATE OPTION 1/4" = 1'-0" 700 OPTICAL SALES WALLS • PAINT ALL WALLS P207, LINO • REFERENCE PLAN FOR LOCATIONS OF ACCENT WALL COLOR, P208 • INSTALL NEW BASE R135 • MATCH ADJACENT WALL TEXTURE AT NEW WALLS FLOOR • REMOVE ALL PVC FLOORING. EXISTING CONCRETE TO BE POLISHED CONCRETE • TRANSITION STRIPS FURNISHED AND INSTALLED BY CONTRACTOR. REFERENCE 8-VC2 CEILING • INSTALL ALL NEW ACT -3 TILE AND INTERMEDIATE TEES AS REQUIRED TO EXISTING GRID TO REMAIN AT NEW LIGHT FIXTURES • REFERENCE ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL FOR NEW LIGHT AND DIFFUSER LOCATIONS • REFERENCE FIRE PROTECTION FOR MODIFICATIONS TO THE SPRINKLER SYSTEM • INSTALL NEW CEILING FEATURE, EXISTING GRID TO REMAIN MILLWORK • ALL NEW OWNER FURNISHED, GC INSTALLED CASEWORK 706,706 VISION EXAM WALLS • PAINT ALL WALLS P207, LINO • REFERENCE PLAN FOR LOCATIONS OF ACCENT WALL COLOR, P208 • PLASTIC BASE IS EXISTING TO REMAIN, REPLACE DAMAGED PORTIONS • REPAIR DAMAGED WALLS FLOOR • PIECE REPLACE LOOSE, BLISTERED OR DAMAGED WOOD PLANK PVC FLOORING CEILING • CLEAN CEILING TILES, GRID, AIR GRILLES/DIFFUSERS, SECURITY GLOBES, SPRINKLER HEADS, AND LIGHT LENSES. REPLACE ANY DAMAGED ITEMS. MILLWORK • EXISTING CASEWORK TO REMAIN, LINO PARTITION TYPES PARTITION LEGEND MATCH ADJACENT EXISTING WALL. DEMOLITION NOTES LO SHEET NOTES REFERENCE SIDE OPPOSITE SIDE DETAIL. 1. ALL WALL COVERING TO BE REMOVED FROM 11. IF SOUND ATTENUATION INSULATION DOES NOT 2 - 2 1/2" METAL STUD EXISTING WALLS. PATCH AND REPAIR ALL 1. ALL ELECTRICAL WORK INCLUDING DATA AND FOR FURRING DETAIL NUMBER GYPSUM BOARD SURFACES TO MATCH ADJACENT 6 - 6" METAL 8 8" CMU POWER DISCONNECTION BY GC. ATTACHMENT CEILING. AND READY TO RECEIVE FINISHES. 2. REMOVAL OF POWER POLES AND 12. UNLESS FLOOR BOXES ARE STILL IN SERVICE 2. REMOVE ALL ELECTRICAL OUTLETS ABOVE o a REINSTALLATION OF NEW POLES BY GC. DATA METAL STUDS SET X -2061 EXISTING SLAT WALL. REMOVE OUTLET BOX, LINES BY OTHERS. 1/2" OFF FACE OF FP SW -7000 IBIS WHITE z CONDUIT, AND ELECTRICAL WIRE BACK TO 3. GENERAL CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBLE FOR ALL EXTERIOR WALL XX.X o NEAREST J -BOX. CAP WIRE AT J -BOX. LU ELECTRICAL AND PLUMBING WORK. LINO SHEET NUMBER DATA OUTLETS. PATCH AND REPAIR SUBSTRATE PATCH AND REPAIR WALL TO MATCH ADJACENT. 4. GC RESPONSIBLE FOR ANCHORING ALL MILLWORK FOR NEW FLOOR FINISHES. LU TO PREVENT OVERTURNING, REFERENCE ALL NEW WALLS IN OPTICAL SALES SHALL HAVE 1/2" Z0 ON FACE OF WALL w MILLWORK MANUFACTURERS INSTRUCTIONS FOR AS OCCURS PFC NOTES 14. CLEAT HEIGHTS. PLAN: z 5. CAULK ALL COUNTERS AND BACKSPLASHES TO BATT INSULATION NUMBER 2020 VISION CENTER SPECIAL PROJECT SURFACES IN OFFICES TO RECEIVE MATCHING THE WALL AT EXTERIOR INDICATES STUD ORANGE PEEL TEXTURE IF EXISTING. 6. PATCH AND REPAIR WALLS AT ANY REMOVED 1. WORK SHALL BE ACCOMPLISHED IN A MANNER WALLS ONLY HEIGHT ELECTRICAL BOXES. LETTER NO NUMBER THAT WILL NOT AFFECT CURRENT VISION 7. ALL NEW COUNTERS, CASEWORK, SHELVES, 1/2" PLYWOOD INDICATES INDICATES STUD CENTER OPERATIONS. MILLWORK, DISPENSERS, ARE TO BE FURNISHED BY USE 1/2" WATER PARTITION TYPE O HEIGHT TO REF PLANS AND 2. AL ALL NECESSARY PRECAUTIONS SHALL BE PAINT ALL HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES WALMART AND INSTALLED BY GC. RESISTANT M ROOF BOTTOM SHEET VC1 TO PROTECT VISION CENTER EQUIPMENT DURING 8. COMPUTER SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT GYPSUM BOARD 12 DECK, ALL WOOD MATERIAL SHOWN IN DETAILS ON THIS REPAIR WORK. FURNISHED AND INSTALLED BY OWNER LINO. AT WET AREAS SHEET SHALL BE FIRE RETARDAN TREATED WOOD 3. GENERAL CONTRACTORS SHALL LEAVE VISION 9. INTERIOR PLAN DIMENSIONS ARE TO FACE OF (FRTW) IN ACCORDANCE WITH INTERNATIONAL NUMBER INDICATES C CENTER IN A CLEAN AND OPERATIONAL MANNER FINISH AT EXISTING WALLS. AT THE END EACH WORK SESSION. 10. IF SOUND ATTENUATION INSULATION DOES NOT H REFERENCE SIDE STUD SIZE AS 4. PATCH AND REPAIR ANY EXISTING DAMAGED EXIST IN EXISTING EXAM ROOM WALLS ADJACENT FOLLOWS: 71 APPLICABLE "WOOD STUDS". WALLS AND PREPARE TO RECEIVE FINISHES TO TO RESTROOM, INSTALL CONTINUOUS SOUND 702, 703, AND 707 VISION CENTER WALLS • PAINT ALL WALLS P207, LINO • REFERENCE PLAN FOR LOCATIONS OF ACCENT WALL COLORS P208 • PLASTIC BASE IS EXISTING TO REMAIN, REPLACE DAMAGED PORTIONS • REPAIR DAMAGED WALLS FLOOR • PIECE REPLACE LOOSE, BLISTERED OR DAMAGED WOOD PLANK PVC FLOORING CEILING • CLEAN CEILING TILES, GRID, AIR GRILLES/DIFFUSERS, SECURITY GLOBES, SPRINKLER HEADS, AND LIGHT LENSES. REPLACE ANY DAMAGED ITEMS. MILLWORK • EXISTING CASEWORK TO REMAIN LINO 4'-0" HIGH ALUMINUM EXISTING BULKHEAD CORNER GUARD TYPICAL ALL OUTSIDE CORNERS 4- VC1 --------------------------------------------------- 91 ------------ D 9'-10 7/8" OPTICAL 12'-5" SALESFF 700 $ 8„ 9'-11 3/8" P208 " SANTAMARGHERITN' QUARTZ LYSKAMM P208 TOPS 0 Cl) I I I I I II II I / Z POWER POLE OWNER > 0 FURNISHED, GC INSTALLED 41A I I I I o 7 VC2 H3 10 POWER POLE OWNER FURNISHED, GC INSTALLED N 2- VC1.1 CEILING FEATURE ® REF SHEET VC1.2 LO N LINE OF FLOORING TRANSITION 0 ADJUSTMENTS _ 701 Li 5- VC1.1 B ❑ N U 9 H3 U 0 EO P208 v ❑ PRETEST 703 7 VC2 00 I- r` OPPOSITE SIDE 1 - 1 5/8" METAL STUD MATCH ADJACENT EXISTING WALL. DZ LO ATTENUATION INSULATION FLOOR TO CEILING. PROTO CYCLE: 07/01/2020 DOCUMENT DATE: 08/07/2020 11. IF SOUND ATTENUATION INSULATION DOES NOT 2 - 2 1/2" METAL STUD 0 0 EXIST IN EXISTING EXAM ROOM CEILING, INSTALL 3 - 3 5/8" METAL STUD NEW SOUND ATTENUATION INSULATION ABOVE THE 6 - 6" METAL 8 8" CMU COLOR LEGEND CEILING. - 0. 12. UNLESS FLOOR BOXES ARE STILL IN SERVICE 12 - 12" CMU N o a EXISTING FLOOR BOXES IN VISION CENTER TO BE LU U -2061 ABANDONED, REF ELECTRICAL FOR DEMOLITION REF SPECS FOR STUD GAUGE AND SPACING FP SW -7000 IBIS WHITE z o d N EXISTING CIRCUITRY. REMOVE AND INFILL J J wa Df LU o ABANDONED FLOOR RECESSED ELECTRICAL AND LU P207] SW -1465 CONTEMPORARY GREY DATA OUTLETS. PATCH AND REPAIR SUBSTRATE NEW STUD WALL m FOR NEW FLOOR FINISHES. LU 13. ALL NEW WALLS IN OPTICAL SALES SHALL HAVE 1/2" Z0 ON ❑� P208 SW -6953 CANDID BLUE w PLYWOOD UNDER 1/2" GYPSUM BOARD. C G m � 14. PATCH AND REPAIR ALL WALL AREAS TO MATCH EXISTING CMU WALL z ADJACENT SURFACES AND FINISHES. NEW WALL m O � 2020 VISION CENTER SPECIAL PROJECT SURFACES IN OFFICES TO RECEIVE MATCHING ORANGE PEEL TEXTURE IF EXISTING. 15. INSTALL BASE AFTER INSTALLATIONS OF OWNER FURNISHED CABINETS. 16. RELOCATE EXISTING PAPER TOWEL AND SOAP DISPENSERS. 17. PAINT ALL HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES P206 INCLUDING DOCTORS AREA. 18. ALL WOOD MATERIAL SHOWN IN DETAILS ON THIS SHEET SHALL BE FIRE RETARDAN TREATED WOOD (FRTW) IN ACCORDANCE WITH INTERNATIONAL BUILDING CODE SECTION 603.1. THIS INCLUDES ALL REFERENCES TO "BLOCKING", ' NAILERS", "PLYWOOD", "SHEATHING", AND IF APPLICABLE "WOOD STUDS". 19. DO NOT DISTURB / MOVE DOCTORS EQUIPMENT IN EXAM / PRETEST. CAREFULLY PAINT AROUND AND DO NOT REPLACE FLOOR TILE THAT WOULD DISTURB DOCTORS EQUIPMENT. 20. PROVIDE ADEQUATE PROTECTION FOR EQUIPMENT. TEMPORARY SECURITY PARTITION REF 9-VC2 REFERENCE DETAIL FOR TEMPORARY PLAN 3-VC1 (—r — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — --j EXISTING BULKHEAD 7 TO REMAIN ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- D CASHWRAP, FITTING TABLE, AND JOB TRAYS TO BE RELOCATED AND USED AS A TEMPORARY KIOSK REMOVE ALL PVC FLOORING ON OPTICAL SALES FLOOR WHERE SHOWN HATCHED. EXISTING CONCRETE FLOORING TO BE EXPOSED. REF SPECS 03366\ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \� �\ REMOVE EXISTING CASEWORK, REPAIR AND PREPARE TO ,A\ RECEIVE NEW FINISHES WHERE DAMAGED TYPICAL ALL VISION CENTER ROOMS REMOVE ALL CEILING TILES, REPAIR EXISTING CEILING GRID TO REMAIN.vA\\\\\\\\\\\\ REMOVE EXISTING FLOOR FINISHES AND PREPARE CONCRETE FOR NEW FINISHES.v\\\\\\\ REMOVE EXISTING WALL BASE AND WALL GUARDS, PREPARE WALLS FOR NEW FINISHES. REMOVE EXISTING FIXTURES TYPICAL OPTICAL SALES ILINE OF FLOORING TRANSITION II L EXISTING WALLS TO REMAIN TYP � � JI I EXISTING DOORS TO REMAIN TYP T.. VISION CENTER FLOOR PLAN VISION CENTER DEMO PLAN 1/4" = 1'-0" 1/4" = T-0" C EXISTING FLOORING TO REMAIN IN DOCTOR'S OFFICES EXISTING WALL GUARDS TO REMAIN EXISTING CEILING PANEL AND GRID TO REMAIN p+enb2 hitecture gineering 2809 Ajax Avenue Suite 100 Rogers Arkansas 72758 Phone: 479.636.3545 Fax: 479.636.1209 Architect of Record William Douglas Hurley Minnesota License No. 40383 LU 1waI � o W °�ZL 63 wF- U) 0 ~U) W ~ wd Z HZ m w.. =�LWWo"ow0 � a¢¢oo�wWOzo�w a�o Jz¢<lwl ¢ nim –n}¢z¢�WUFF-- O cntnw,oOF2=>U~� LL Z tiz�N��0 F -0T0 O z-goww�:< ZJ00¢ I= z0-gpOF-QQzTWF-QO QQW OOw�QLU Ow<�ZN 0ULU �ZJUcnJKW00E aO Or�¢�FaSz2U)1: TC 0OC<D LL WWSw �D2Uotna0 �_9j I ISSUE BLOCK I CHECKED BY: KD DRAWN BY: DZ LO 00 PROTO CYCLE: 07/01/2020 DOCUMENT DATE: 08/07/2020 C �Q O O 0 0 U)Oz LU LUz z z� 0. ZJ O N o a _ G G LU U N � O OO 2 z o d N J J wa Df LU o LU W 0 UQ m ❑ LU Z0 ON co 0') w C G m � z m O � 2020 VISION CENTER SPECIAL PROJECT I ISSUE BLOCK I CHECKED BY: KD DRAWN BY: DZ PROTO: 195 PROTO CYCLE: 07/01/2020 DOCUMENT DATE: 08/07/2020 I HEREBY CERTIFY THAT THIS PLAN, SPECIFICATION, OR REPORT WAS PREPARED BY ME OR UNDER MY DIRECT SUPERVISION AND THAT I AM A DULY LICENSED ARCHITECT UNDER THE LAWS OF THE STATE OF MINNESOTA. SIGNATURE. TYPED OR PRINTED NAME: WILLIAM DOUGLAS HURLEY DATE: 08.06.2020 LICENSE NUMBER: 40383 DOCUMENTS THAT DO NOT HAVE THE ARCHITECT OR ENGINEER OF RECORD SEAL AND SIGNATURE SHALL BE CONSIDERED NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION VISION CENTER SHEET: VC1 N r` 0 N ADJUSTMENTS ELEVATION 1/2" = 1'-0" OWNER FURNISHED, GC INSTALLED MILLWORK OWNER FURNISHED, GC INSTALLED COUNTER AND BACKSPLASH " BASE RB5 OWNER FURNI INSTALLED MIL OWNER FURNI INSTALLED CO BACKSPLASH OWNER FURNI INSTALLED CO SUPPORT BRA B ADJUSTMENTS ELEVATION 7" 111111 11 1111 111111 1111 \A/ITLJ I"— 11A" „� OPTICAL SALES ELEVATION 1/2" = T-0" P207 FRAME BOARD WITH ACRYLIC DISPLAY SHELVES OWNER FURNISHED, GC INSTALLED Fi OWNER FURNISHED, GC INSTALLED MILLWORK T-11 1/4" 5 3/4" 1'-5 7/8" OWNER FURNISHED, GC INSTALLED WALL MOUNTED SIGNAGE, TYP. OWNER FURNISHED, GC INSTALLED MIRROR N P208 OWNER FURNISHED, GC INSTALLED SHADOW BOX OWNER FURNISHED, GC INSTALLED MIRROR OWNER FURNISHED, GC INSTALLED MILLWORK EQ EQ 11'- 1/4" OPTICAL SALES ELEVATION 1/2" = T-0" FRAME BOARD WITH ACRYLIC DISPLAY SHELVES OWNER FURNISHED, GC INSTALLED WALL MOUNTED SIGNAGE, TYP. OWNER FURNISHED, GC INSTALLED MIRROR F P208 OWNER FURNISHED, GC INSTALLED SHADOW BOX OWNER FURNISHED, GC INSTALLED MIRROR , 1'-5 7/8" 16" MIRROR FRAME BOARD WITH ACRYLIC DISPLAY SHELVES It 4" BASE RB5 EQ T-11 1/4" 5 7/8" 14'-5" OPTI CAL SALES ELEVATION 1/2" = T-0" OWNER FURNISHED, GC INSTALLED MILLWORK EQ rc0 ii FRAME BOARD WITH ACRYLIC DISPLAY SHELVES FURNISHED BY OWNER, INSTALLED BY GC T-6" FRAME BOARD WITH ACRYLIC DISPLAY SHELVES 55/8" T-11 1/4" 7 3/4" 11 1/4" 1'-6" P207 p+enb2 hitecture gineering 2809 Ajax Avenue Suite 100 Rogers Arkansas 72758 Phone: 479.636.3545 Fax: 479.636.1209 Architect of Record William Douglas Hurley Minnesota License No. 40383 O � 7 X00 wWLL0 ui W L cnz��zUO0zD Z) o x-LL(rafwaw��z W �H wH7~UwW,8'0O�� W m�~<fuwaw U''jni a O aOCo�UjU50CO 0z0I,<LLF z 3:iz wIr00w0> 0 Owx�vo0z O2aLU§�r Z) HHO o O�O�wDawo0000E� z- 3 (n LUW �g U) � 2°oc�naou� -jH<F ISSUE BLOCK CHECKED BY: KD DRAWN BY: DZ rn 00 PROTO CYCLE: 07/01/2020 DOCUMENT DATE: 08/07/2020 O OO a o w w Wz z_ z z W � N o d G G U N o O2z z00 °? o 0 J J wX X° N W 1-- U) 0 U� " Z O 0 M LU W C c m � z ED O 2020 VISION CENTER SPECIAL PROJECT ISSUE BLOCK CHECKED BY: KD DRAWN BY: DZ PROTO: 195 PROTO CYCLE: 07/01/2020 DOCUMENT DATE: 08/07/2020 I HEREBY CERTIFY THAT THIS PLAN, SPECIFICATION, OR REPORT WAS PREPARED BY ME OR UNDER MY DIRECT SUPERVISION AND THAT I AM A DULY LICENSED ARCHITECT UNDER THE LAWS OF THE STATE OF MINNESOTA. SIGNATURE: 4-41 TYPED OR PRINTED NAME: WILLIAM DOUGLAS HURLEY DATE: 08.06.2020 LICENSE NUMBER: 40383 DOCUMENTS THAT DO NOT HAVE THE ARCHITECT OR ENGINEER OF RECORD SEAL AND SIGNATURE SHALL BE CONSIDERED NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION VISION CENTER ELEVATIONS SHEET: VC1.1 10'-0" AFF DETAIL PROVIDED FOR BIDDING PURPOSES. REFER TO MANUFACTURERS INSTRUCTIONS AND MANUFACTURERS ENGINEERED DRAWINGS FOR INSTALLATION OF CEILING FEATURE ENSURE CEILING PANELS LAY FLAT AT TWIST CLIPS BINDING POST SCREW 1/4-20 PAN HEAD BOLT WITH LOCK WASHER — U-CHANNEL R. PERIMETER SOFFIT TWIST CLIP FOR 15/16" CEILING GRID 92 CEILING FEATURE - DIRECT MOUNT B 1 1/2" = 1'-0" 10'-0" AFF EXISTING CEILING GRID PERIMETER SOFFIT 1' - 0" TYP. EXISTING CEILING LINE BINDING POST SCREW 1/4-20 PAN HEAD BOLT WITH LOCK WASHER U -CHANNEL LAMLITE CEILING BEAM L 10 1/2" oe BOTH ENDS TYPICAL U -CHANNEL MENDING PLATE U -CHANNEL PLAN 51/2" ELEVATION U -CHANNEL SPLICE CONNECTION 1/4-20 PAN HEAD BOLTS TWIST CLIP FOR 15/16" CEILING GRID DETAIL PROVIDED FOR BIDDING PURPOSES. REFER TO MANUFACTURERS INSTRUCTIONS AND MANUFACTURERS ENGINEERED DRAWINGS FOR INSTALLATION OF CEILING FEATURE CEILING FEATURE - DIRECT MOUNT A 1 1/2" = 1'-0" EXISTING CEILING GRID LAMLITE CEILING BEAMS SUSPENDED LED LINEAR SLOT LIGHT REF ELECTRICAL GLOBE PENDANT LIGHT FIXTURE REF ELECTRICAL 6'-6" AFF LAMLITE CEILING BEAMS GLOBE PENDANT LIGHT FIXTURE REF ELECTRICAL 6'-6" AFF NEW ACT3 CEI LIN( PANELS IN EXISTIP GRID TO REMAIN ADD INTERMEDIA? ACT GRID AT NEW LIGHT FIXTURES CEILING FEATURE(S) ARE OWNER FURNISHED, GC INSTALLED. COORDINATE MODIFICATIONS TO FIRE PROTECTION CEILING GRID IS EXISTING TO REMAIN, VERIFY CEILING GRID IS LEVEL AND SQUARE PRIOR TO ATTACHMENT OF CEILING FEATURE. CONTACT WALMART CM IF THE EXISTING CEILING GRID REQUIRES CORRECTION. ENSURE ALL CEILING TILES LAY FLAT AT TWIST CLIPS AND THE GRID IS LEVEL AFTER CEILING FEATURE IS INSTALLED. REFERENCE MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL, AND FIRE PROTECTION FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. REFLECTED CEILING PLAN 1/4" = 1'-0" p+enb2 hitecture gineering 2809 Ajax Avenue Suite 100 Rogers Arkansas 72758 Phone: 479.636.3545 Fax: 479.636.1209 Architect of Record William Douglas Hurley Minnesota License No. 40383 ILLI 3 0 0 itWOr� o z W aZU� uw) o � w�i&(D-V tz��:l Z) w I= LLLLJ SWI,>.�<3I,a0aUO) �m 0 aV5LLJ SU) OF0WSU5 aZY 0 ILL �9ZOo?6z¢W�IyO�Z¢ U)u1 LL OU�0~¢Val aJ� Wr- Ein ZN Z) Z(J2Z- WWWWEU2� rnW 0�2FaaZa�gw I ISSUE BLOCK I CHECKED BY: KD DRAWN BY: Dz LO %0 PROTO CYCLE: 07/01/2020 DOCUMENT DATE: 08/07/2020 O OO � Q 0 o � LU LU wz z_ Z ZJ O LUN o a _ G G U N � O OO 2 z o d N J J wa Of LJ o LU � 0 UQ m vv w ZO ON 0') w C G m � z m O 2020 VISION CENTER SPECIAL PROJECT I ISSUE BLOCK I CHECKED BY: KD DRAWN BY: Dz PROTO: 195 PROTO CYCLE: 07/01/2020 DOCUMENT DATE: 08/07/2020 I HEREBY CERTIFY THAT THIS PLAN, SPECIFICATION, OR REPORT WAS PREPARED BY ME OR UNDER MY DIRECT SUPERVISION AND THAT I AM A DULY LICENSED ARCHITECT UNDER THE LAWS OF THE STATE OF MINNESOTA. SIGNATURE: TYPED OR PRINTED NAME: WILLIAM DOUGLAS HURLEY DATE 08.06.2020 LICENSE NUMBER: 40383 DOCUMENTS THAT DO NOT HAVE THE ARCHITECT OR ENGINEER OF RECORD SEAL AND SIGNATURE SHALL BE CONSIDERED NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION REFLECTED CEILING PLANS AND DETAILS SHEET: VC1.2 NOTE: THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL REPAIR/REPLACE ANY DAMAGED FLOOR TILE DUE TO INSTALLATION OR REMOVAL OF TEMPORARY SECURITY ENCLOSURE. CONTINUOUS SEALANT 2x WOOD PLATE 1/2" C/D EXT. PLYWOOD SCREWED TO STUDS OVER 6 MIL CLEAR POLY SHEETS EXISTING WALL TO REMAIN PAINT DUST WALLS TO MATCH ADJACENT IF DUST WALLS TO BE IN PLACE MORE THAN TWO WEEKS. COORDINATE WITH WALMART CONSTRUCTION MANAGER SALES 2x4 STUDS @ 24" OC (TYPICAL) PAINT TO MATCH ADJACENT WALLS - CONTINUOUS SEALANT BOTH SIDES OF SILL PLATE 2x4 TREATED WOOD SILL PLATE oz m 0 Z z w a- 0 O (D Z U) X w 2'-0" MAX DEMO AREA TEMPORARY SECURITY CLOSURE 3/4" = 1'-0" "SANTAMARGHERITA' QUARTZ ISTRIA COUNTERTOP AND BACKSPLASH CONTINUOUS SEALANT OWNER FURNISHED GC INSTALLED COUNTER AND BACKSPLASH OWNER FURNISHED GC INSTALLED BASE CABINET 4" BASE RB5 1 MILLWORK BASE (OWNER FURNISHED, GC INSTALLED) - STONE AS APPLICABLE DOOR AND FRAME AS SCHEDULED CONCRETE SLAB ALUMINUM TRANSITION STRIP GC FURNISHED AND INSTALLED ALIGN LEADING EDGE OF TRANSITION STRIP WITH THE BULKHEAD ABOVE WHERE APPLICABLE. L — — — — — — — - EXISTING LVT/PVC (OR VCT) / FLOORING 4' a'd -.d I -dea - a �b - a FLAT HEAD COUNTER -SUNK SCREWS AT PRE -DRILLED LOCATIONS TRANSITION STRIP 12" = 1'-0" 2' - 1" "SANTAMARGHERITA" QUARTZ ISTRIA COUNTERTOP AND BACKSPLASH CONTINUOUS SEALANT OWNER FURNISHED GC INSTALLED COUNTER AND BACKSPLASH OWNER FURNISHED GC INSTALLED COUNTER BRACKET PER MANUFACTURERS INSTRUCTIONS, SECURED TO STUD 4" BASE RB5 1 MILLWORK COUNTER (OWNER FURNISHED, GC INSTALLED) - STONE 1" = T-0" 10'-0" CEILING HEIGHT X EXISTING CEILING GRID AND TILE TO REMAIN. INSTALL NEW WALL TIGHT TO THE CEILING GRID, MAXIMUM 1/8" GAP. MAINTAIN GAP BETWEEN NEW STUDS AND EXISTING ACOUSTICAL GRID TO PREVENT INTERFERENCE, CAREFULLY INSTALL NEW WALL FINISHES TIGHT TO THE CEILING GRID MAXIMUM 1/8" GAP. SECURE NEW FURRED WALL TO WALL TRACK AT EVERY STUD SECURE NEW METAL STUD TRACK TO EXISTING WALL AT EVERY STUD NEW STUD WITH 1/2" GYPSUM ON 1/2" PLYWOOD, FIELD VERIFY EXISTING STUD WITH 1/2" GYPSUM ON 1/2" PLYWOOD, FIELD VERIFY SECURE MILLWORK TO WALL PER MANUFACTURERS INSTRUCTIONS WITH CLIPS PROVIDED, BY GC ALL WOOD MATERIAL SHOWN SHALL BE FIRE RETARDANT TREATED WOOD (FRTW) IN ACCORDANCE WITH INTERNATIONAL BUILDING CODE SECTION 603.1. THIS INCLUDES ALL REFERENCES TO "BLOCKING", "NAILERS", "PLYWOOD", "SHEATHING", AND IF APPLICABLE "WOOD STUDS". EXCLUDES MILLWORK TO CONCRETE FLOOR v." FEATURE WALL DETAIL 1 1/2" = T-0" OWNER FURNISHED GC INSTALLED CLEATS, TYP OF (2) CLEAT DIMENSIONS FURNISHED ARE FOR REFERENCE, CONFIRM CLEAT MOUNTING HEIGHTS WITH MANUFACTURERS INSTRUCTIONS OWNER FURNISHED GC INSTALLED UPPER CABINET MILLWORK UPPER ADUSTMENTS (OWNER FURNISHED. GC INSTALLED 1" = T-0" D, GC )RK 2" GYPSUM FIELD VERIFY D WITH 1/2" /2" PLYWOOD, MILLWORK SINK (OWNER FURNISHED, GC INSTALLED) -STONE 1" = T-0" 3N TOP OF SLAT WALL FIXTURE H ADJACENT FRAME BOARDS. AT DIMENSIONS FURNISHED FOR REFERENCE, CONFIRM AT MOUNTING HEIGHTS WITH JUFACTURERS INSTRUCTIONS WNER FURNISHED GC JSTALLED SLAT WALL FIXTURE WNER FURNISHED GC JSTALLED CLEATS, TYP F (3) CLEAT DIMENSIONS FURNISHED ARE FOR REFERENCE, CONFIRM CLEAT MOUNTING HEIGHTS WITH MANUFACTURERS INSTRUCTIONS 4" BASE RB5 MILLWORK ACCESSORY - SLAT WALL 6 % 1" = 1'-0" CLEAT DIMENSIONS FURNISHED ARE FOR REFERENCE, CONFIRM CLEAT MOUNTING HEIGHTS WITH MANUFACTURERS INSTRUCTIONS OWNER FURNISHED GC INSTALLED CLEATS, TYP OF (2) OWNER FURNISHED GC INSTALLED UPPER CABINET MILLWORK UPPER ADUSTMENTS SINK (OWNER FURNISHED, GC INSTALLED) 1" = 1'-0" p+enb2 hitecture gineering 2809 Ajax Avenue Suite 100 Rogers Arkansas 72758 Phone: 479.636.3545 Fax: 479.636.1209 Architect of Record William Douglas Hurley Minnesota License No. 40383 LU Do TwOrO a� w W w wzz��z�03z0 Cn O ~ W~ w w d z H z �.. =�ww0'`0Lu 100 � aQQ�O0�ww0z0�w �oJz¢gwawQcn0,m 0_wwww z¢� w 0 F= d Y O LL cncnWQZ �oOFO=>0~w Z �tizwN05000LUFOF0 O c7 w2zo�Ow�awcoo< F_ zd0��0�QQz���QO QQW OOw�QLU LU OU) zN Z) zULU LU0JUcoJKWa0E3: 0_ 00z Or0¢-�FaSzztwnzg TCo000D11LL Uww5W �02U0tna0 ISSUE BLOCK CHECKED BY: KD DRAWN BY: DZ PROTO: 00 PROTO CYCLE: 07/01/2020 DOCUMENT DATE: 08/07/2020 C--) �Q O O 0 0 cn LU w wZ z z 0 ZJ O N o a _ G G LU U N (0 O�zd z O o o J J wa Of w F__ o LU � 0 UQ 0 �0 ILL! ZN 0 N 0') o' w C G m � z m O 2020 VISION CENTER SPECIAL PROJECT ISSUE BLOCK CHECKED BY: KD DRAWN BY: DZ PROTO: 195 PROTO CYCLE: 07/01/2020 DOCUMENT DATE: 08/07/2020 1 HEREBY CERTIFY THAT THIS PLAN, SPECIFICATION, OR REPORT WAS PREPARED BY ME OR UNDER MY DIRECT SUPERVISION AND THAT I AM A DULY LICENSED ARCHITECT UNDER THE LAWS OF THE STATE OF MINNESOTA. SIGNATURE: _1 49_c—_�o TYPED OR PRINTED NAME: WILLIAM DOUGLAS HURLEY DATE: 08.06.2020 LICENSE NUMBER: 40383 DOCUMENTS THAT DO NOT HAVE THE ARCHITECT OR ENGINEER OF RECORD SEAL AND SIGNATURE SHALL BE CONSIDERED NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION SECTIONS SHEET: VC2 6 EQUIPMENT— ADJUSTMENTSCASHWRAP M I RROF nV-%1A=r-3 Mt -%l M! SOAP AND PAPER TOWEL DISPENSER EQUIPMENT - CASHWRAP --------------------------------------------------------- --------------------------------------------------------- 11 \ \ EQU I PMENT — LOW TABLE ®o V-196 D-VCO4 V-197 D-VC06 ®m \ \ n/-\%A1=M nf-\i c nnioof_\o 3, EQUIPMENT - FAMILY TABLE Mt -NI n i17o Mf -NI c 2 ) EQUIPMENT - CASHWRAP B El L - - - L - - - I V-195 V-191 V-192 F -D -VCO2 D-VC03-] 8 8 W*r ® L 0 V-193 D-REG98 D-VC01 D-VC05 o®[] '� JA \ \ D-VCTV-2 F 0 0 V-967 V-964 D-OPT01 \ � 7 7 0 f ---I f ---I F7 0 V-295 V-966 D-EMR02 D-VCTV-1 VOICE SCHEDULE CABLE LOCATION -DESCRIPTION TYPE PH PHONE MODEL RESTRICT Y/N/TOLL V-191 VISION CENTER DESK 2 7960 N V-192 VISION CENTER DESK 2 7960 N V-193 VISION CENTER DESK 1 7960 N V-194 VISION CENTER DESK 1 7960 N V-195 VISION CENTER WALL 1 7960 N V-196 VISION CENTER DESK 2 7960 N V-197 VISION CENTER DESK 2 7960 N V-295 VISION CENTER DESK 1 7960 N V-964 VISION CENTER FAX 2 TV 2 V-965 VISION CENTER MODEM 2 V-966 VISION CENTER MODEM 1 � V-969 VISION CENTER FAX 2 DATA SCHEDULE CABLE LOCATION -DESCRIPTION TYPE PH D-VC01 VISION CENTER PRT 2 D -VCO2 VISION CENTER TERM 2 D-VC03 VISION CENTER TERM 2 D-VC04 VISION CENTER TERM 2 D-VC05 VISION CENTER VC0013 2 D-VC06 VISION CENTER TERM 2 D-VC07 VISION CENTER PRT 2 D-REG98 VISION CENTER REG 2 D-OPT01 VISION CENTER TERM 1 D-EMR01 VISION CENTER PC 2 D-EMR02 VISION CENTER PC 2 D-VCTV-1 VISION CENTER TV 2 D-VCTV-2 VISION CENTER TV 2 D-VCTV-3 VISION CENTER TV 2 \0 D-VC07 ❑ D-EMR01 D-EMR02 V-194 V-965 D-EMR01 VISION CENTER VOICE/DATA PLAN 3/16" = 1'-0" EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE VC0001 REGISTER PRINTER VC0002 CASH DRAWER VC0003 DEBIT READER VC0005 POS SCAN GUN VC0006 SHREDDER VC0007 FLAT PANEL MONITOR VC0008 KEYBOARD AND MOUSE VC0009 DESK PHONE VC0010 MONITOR ARM VC0011 REGISTER KEYPAD MONITOR VC0012 COMPACT FRAME WARMER VC0013 DIGITAL DISPLAY VC0014 REGISTER CPU VC0015 MINI CPU VC0016 FRAME WARMER VC0017 SENSORMATIC VC0018 PHOTO COPIER VC0019 SENSORMATIC CPU VC0031 HAND EDGER VC0032 POS FLAG DISPLAY VC0034 REMOTE TRACER VC0035 CLEANER VC0036 MANUAL LENSOMETER VC0037 MANUAL LENSOMETER STAND VC0038 CREDENTIALS BOARD VC0039 BLUETOOTH IMAGER OPT SCAN GUN OWNER FURNISHED, GC INSTALLED CASEWORK AW1-48 48" WIDE ACCESSORY FIXTURE BRS-2 ADA COMPLIANT SINK CABINET BW -3 BACKWRAP CCW -1 COMBINATION CASHWRAP FSP -1 FREE STANDING PRODUCT FIXTURE FT3WS FAMILY TABLE WORKSTATION FT -1 FAMILY TABLE LAF-1 LOOSE ACCESSORY FIXTURE LT -1 LOW TABLE LTWS-1 LOW TABLE WORKSTATION MFW1 1OFT MONITOR FOCAL WALL PA1-L1 2 DOOR BASE CABINET PA1-U2 2 DOOR UPPER CABINET (36" TALL) PA1-U3 2 DOOR UPPER CABINET (20" TALL) PWF-1 PERIMETER FOCAL WALL PWNF1-2 PERIMETER NON-FOCAL WALL PWNF-1 PERIMETER NON-FOCAL WALL - SINGLE TPC -1 TRAY PROCESSING CABINET WS -1 FIXTURE WELCOME STATION LAF-1 ---------------------------------------------------------------------- ----------------------------------------------------------------------- o ----------------------------------------------------------------------- --------------------------------------------------------------------- � f WS -1 M008 ;0039 vcoo38 I 0Tj 0 1 :5 'l L�i�il � VC0034 DB � I VC0012 , i J r ---I r - - VISION CENTER EQUIPMENT PLAN 1/4" = T-0" �8 p+enb2 hitecture gineering 2809 Ajax Avenue Suite 100 Rogers Arkansas 72758 Phone: 479.636.3545 Fax: 479.636.1209 Architect of Record William Douglas Hurley Minnesota License No. 40383 LIJ LU 0 ��I EDWLL0} ui LLl L �z� z��Qzcn °w �w��LUn LZ 4I�.w w 1:1(f DDi a601 O aCf) 0I_ a} w7 '� u'J Z 3:12WRg6UOW U 0 N � Z g�U)00U_ 5j � �� �Z_j �Wo0E d 0 UJ 0 O a�w �:�0goFuLia6 �W�z',wa5 ISSUE BLOCK CHECKED BY: KD DRAWN BY: DZ rn \\ �Q 07/01/2020 DOCUMENT DATE: 08/07/2020 (::::D C O COLL]Wz Z_ Z � O O w N O d \ U ~r�i � o �° J Jam° W WN 1 N W 1-- U) o U� Q ZL) ED L) 0 0(y) w � m Z) z m O 2020 VISION CENTER SPECIAL PROJECT ISSUE BLOCK CHECKED BY: KD DRAWN BY: DZ PROTO: 195 PROTO CYCLE: 07/01/2020 DOCUMENT DATE: 08/07/2020 J Z O W U Z LU 0. W H LU ry 0. O H EQUIPMENT (FOR REFERENCE ONLY) SHEET: VC3 SPRINKLER HEAD DEFLECTOR LOCATED OUTSIDE THE VISION CENTER CEILING FEATURE FOOTPRINT SHALL BE LOWERED AS FOLLOWS: • SPRINKLER LOCATED 0'-0" TO LESS THAN V-0" = DEFLECTOR ELEVATION 0'-9" • SPRINKLER LOCATED V-0" TO LESS THAN 2'-0" = DEFLECTOR ELEVATION 0'-5" • SPRINKLER LOCATED 2'-0" TO LESS THAN 3'-0" = DEFLECTOR ELEVATION 0'-2" • SPRINKLER LOCATED GREATER THAN 3'-0" = NO MODIFICATION REQUIRED. • LOWERED/ADJUSTED SPRINKLERS WILL REQUIRE A LISTED 2 OR 3 PC ESCUTCHEON THAT IS COMPATIBLE WITH THE ADJUSTED LENGTH AND SHALL MATCH THE COLOR OF THE ADJACENT EXISTING ESCUTCHEONS. r \/I C'T IA if-, VISION CENTER SPRINKLER PLAN 1/4" = V-0" IUSTMENTS 8 NEW SINK FURNISHED BY WALMART. INSTALLATION AND FINAL CONNECTION BY GC. CONNECT TO EXISTING DWV AND WATER SERVICE. REPLACE TAILPIECE, P -TRAP, SUPPLY LINES AND SHUT-OFF VALVES. 15.401 15.402 15.403 15.404 15.405 L15.406 DEMO SINK IN MILLWORK BEING DEMOLISHED. VISION CENTER PLUMBING PLAN 1/4" = V-0" EQUIVALENT NOMINAL PIPE SIZES GENERAL NOTES GENERAL FP NOTES PLAN SIZE POLYPROPYLENE PEX MECHANICAL SYMBOLS (COPPER) HOT WATER COLD WATER 1. THE SPRINKLER SYSTEM IS EXISTING TO REMAIN. IF SS SANITARY SEWER 1/2" 1/2" 1/2" 1/2" w 3/4" 3/4" 3/4" 1" GW GREASE WASTE w SUBMIT A REQUEST FOR INFORMATION (RFI). 1 1/4" 18"x12" RECTANGULAR DUCT 18" WIDE INSTALLATION IN ALL RESPECTS AND READY FOR Z LU BY 12" DEE P 1 1/4" 1 1/2" 1 1/4" 1 1/2" STATE AND LOCAL CODES AND MANUFACTURERS SPRINKLER OR IF THE RELOCATION AND ADJUSTMENT 1 1/2" 2" 1 1/2" 2" RULES PER NFPA 13 CANNOT BE APPLIED, AN RFI ST 2" 2 1/2" 2" N/A 12" 0 12" DIAMETER ROUND DUCT 2 1/2" 3" 2 1/2" N/A o N WORK TO KEEP DISRUPTIONS TO STORE ZCD 3" 3 1/2" 3" N/A 3. INSTALLATION SHALL COMPLY WITH THE EXISTING AND NEW CONSTRUCTION. PAY ALL LOCAL/STATE ADOPTED EDITION OF NFPA 13. ORD OVERFLOW ROOF DRAIN LINE NECESSARY FEES AND PERMITS. SUPPLY DUCT IN SECTION 4" 1 6" 4" 1 N/A _ DOMESTIC COLD WATER 2020 VISION CENTER SPECIAL PROJECT NOTE: REFER TO SPECIFICATIONS FOR UNDERGROUND SERVICES (GAS, SEWER, DOMESTIC APPROVED MANUFACTURERS. WATER, FIRE SPRINKLER, ETC.), PROVIDE ALL RETURN OR EXHAUST DUCT IN MATERIALS AND LABOR AS REQUIRED TO MAINTAIN - - SECTION 5. SPRINKLER SYSTEMS ARE MONITORED BY AN OFF- ELBOW WITH TURNING VANES THEIR PROPER OPERATION. SITE CENTRAL STATION INCLUDING TAMPER TEE WITH TURNING VANES SWITCHES ON ALL CONTROL VALVES AND FLOW - - - ROUND (OR OVAL) ELBOW 5. EXISTING PIPE SIZES AND LOCATIONS HAVE NOT SWITCHES. I VOLUME/BALANCE DAMPER BEEN FIELD VERIFIED. CONTRACTOR IS IW SUPPLY AIR DIFFUSER WITH RESPONSIBLE TO FIELD VERIFY LOCATION AND SIZES 6 PENETRATIONS OF RATED WALLS OR ASSEMBLIES ROUND SUPPLY DUCT . SHALL BE "FIRE CAULKED" WITH APPROVED CAULKING RETURN OR EXHAUST AIR DIFFUSER PER METHODS REQUIRED BY THE AUTHORITY HAVING T TEPID OR TEMPERED WATER WITH ROUND DUCT JURISDICTION, AND PROJECT SPECIFICATIONS. 24"x24" BRANCH DUCT AND/OR NECK SIZE F CD DIFFUSER OR GRILLE TYPE FILTERED WATER 450 CFM 7. THE FIRE PROTECTION ENGINEER OF RECORD WILL O THERMOSTAT NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR THE CONTRACTOR'S SO TIMER FAILURE TO CARRY OUT THE CONSTRUCTION WORK G NATURAL GAS S# TEMP SENSOR IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, CONNECT TO EXISTING HARD DRAWN COPPER JOINED WITH WROUGHT NOR SHALL THEY BE REQUIRED TO SUPERVISE THE ETR EXISTING TO REMAIN COPPER FITTINGS. MAKE JOINTS USING LEAD-FREE CONDUCT OF THE WORK, THE CONSTRUCTION FD FIRE DAMPER CEILING RETURN GRILLE MODULE SIZE 24x24 MATCH EXISTING NECK SIZE AND CFM SIMILAR TO TUTTLE & BAILEY PR MODEL PERFORATED RETURN GRILLE WITH ROUND NECK AND LT FRAME STYLE CEILING DIFFUSER MODULE SIZE 2424 MATCH EXISTING NECK SIZE AND CFM SIMILAR TO TUTTLE & BAILEY PP MODEL PERFORATED DIFFUSER WITH ROUND NECK AND LT FRAME STYLE TYP OF 4 CONTRACTOR TO FIELD VERIFY SITE SPECIFIC CONDITIONS AT THE OPTICAL SALES AREA CEILING. IF THERE IS A CONFLICT IN LOCATING THE CEILING FEATURE WHILE MAINTAINING THE EXISTING SPRINKLER AND DUCTWORK LAYOUT, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL CONTACT THE ARCHITECT OF RECORD THROUGH THE RFI PROCESS. CONTRACTOR TO REPLACE ALL CEILING DIFFUSERS AND RETURN AIR GRILLES AT VISION CENTER OPTICAL SALES. CONNECT TO EXISTING DUCTWORK AND MATCH EXISTING CFM. ALL OTHER CEILING DIFFUSERS, RETURN AIR GRILLES, EXHAUST GRILLES, AND TRANSFER GRILLES ARE EXISTING TO REMAIN (ETR). FIELD VERIFY EXISTING BRANCH SIZES FOR CONNECTION TO NEW DIFFUSERS IN VISION CENTER OPTICAL SALES. EXISTING BRANCH SIZES SHALL BE USED FOR CONNECTION TO NEW DIFFUSER. DO NOT UPSIZE EXISTING DUCTWORK. DUCTWORK AND AIR DEVICES ARE ETR IN DOCTORS AREA. CLEAN ALL EXISTING AIR DEVICES. ----------------------------------------- --------------------------------T&P RELIEF VALVE ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 7 - --------------------------------------- -- -------------------------------- TMV THERMOSTATIC MIXING VALVE mm ,\--CEILING FEATURE REF ARCH WAITING �i ® FD:) FLOOR DRAIN COQ C RD ROOF DRAIN/OVERFLOW ROOF DRAIN OPTICAL SALES ®C FS FLOOR SINK FCO FLOOR CLEANOUT �O YCO YARD CLEANOUT FPWH FREEZE PROOF WALL HYDRANT HB HOSE BIBB 0-11 WCO WALL CLEANOUT CONNECT TO EXISTING ETR EXISTING TO REMAIN 0 77 7/7,,/-/-7-/ 7-/-7 DEMO PIPE AREA OF SLAB CUT Fill VBF VENT BELOW FLOOR I� ADJUSTMENTS CD ETR S11 ETR RAG ETR EXAM #2 ,\--CEILING FEATURE REF ARCH CD ETR PRETEST EXAM #1 VISION CENTER MECHANICAL PLAN 1/4" = V-0" EXISTING CONDITIONS WERE TAKEN FROM ORIGINAL DRAWINGS AND MAY NOT REFLECT EXACT "AS -BUILT" CONDITIONS. CONTRACTOR SHALL FIELD VERIFY ALL EXISTING CONDITIONS PRIOR TO SUBMITTING FINAL BIDS. CONTRACTOR SHALL CAREFULLY COORDINATE NEW WORK AND DEMOLITION WITH ALL OTHER DISCIPLINES AND EXISTING CONDITIONS. KEYNOTES 15.401 CONNECT TO NEAREST DOMESTIC COLD WATER PIPE OF EQUAL OR LARGER SIZE. VERIFY SIZE AND LOCATION AT SITE. PROVIDE SHUT-OFF VALVE IN NEW PIPE AT POINT OF CONNECTION. 15.402 CONNECT TO EXISTING HOT WATER PIPE OF EQUAL OR LARGER SIZE. VERIFY SIZE AND LOCATION AT SITE. PROVIDE SHUT-OFF VALVE IN NEW PIPE AT POINT OF CONNECTION. 15.403 CONNECT TO EXISTING SANITARY PIPE OF EQUAL OR LARGER SIZE. VERIFY SIZE, LOCATION, ELEVATION, AND FLOW DIRECTION AT SITE. 15.404 CONNECT TO EXISTING VENT PIPE OF EQUAL OR LARGER SIZE. VERIFY SIZE AND LOCATION AT SITE. 15.405 PROPERLY CAP, PLUG AND CONCEAL ANY PIPING LEFT IN PLACE. CAP ABANDONED SEWER PIPING A MINIMUM OF 8" BELOW FINISHED FLOOR. MATCH EXISTING FLOOR CONSTRUCTION AND FINISHES. RE: ARCHITECTURAL PLANS. REMOVE UNUSED WATER AND VENT PIPING ABOVE CEILING AND CAP REMAINING PIPE. 15.406 PLUMBING CONTRACTOR TO MAKE ALL NECESSARY DISCONNECTS AND RECONNECTS OF PLUMBING FIXTURES BEING RELOCATED OR NEW. EACH SUBCONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR HAVING A THOROUGH KNOWLEDGE OF ALL DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN THEIR RELATED FIELD. THE FAILURE TO ACQUAINT THEMSELF WITH THIS KNOWLEDGE DOES NOT RELIEVE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF PERFORMING THE WORK PROPERLY. NO ADDITIONAL COMPENSATION SHALL BE ALLOWED BECAUSE OF CONDITIONS THAT OCCUR DUE TO FAILURE TO FAMILIARIZE WORKERS WITH THIS KNOWLEDGE. p+enb2 hitecture gineering 2809 Ajax Avenue Suite 100 Rogers Arkansas 72758 Phone: 479.636.3545 Fax: 479.636.1209 Engineer of Record Joshua Dale McCall, P.E. Minnesota License No. 53286 Z) I l r J 0 O LU w 0 1- O ww°oma Cn o zw� wzcsz¢ o ro��z�M�zn� HWOW W w Z W WOW d Z� H Z Cc Q F w W L -L O OW . W Ov Cc w¢F J�a�Q�pw w oa w nwm 0 ��w �¢O�0 tea}¢ z¢�z Oo�¢Cw7=o 0 -Rm0z>zw1zi-z Z W ADCC 1--->Z=0.0-O< J jai -j 0 FJ)Mzo 0<w W zN_> W z 2ZJU m JwwZ)0N SOI w-0co w a�xgDz0wo< 0W0Zzl-i-o <0w0_Z)I­-w !C1)��Uo=naOwwQ¢r U F - z F- J U) z O U GENERAL NOTES GENERAL FP NOTES PLUMBING SYMBOLS W 3 O 1. GENERAL NOTES ARE APPLICABLE TO ALL 1. THE SPRINKLER SYSTEM IS EXISTING TO REMAIN. IF SS SANITARY SEWER MECHANICAL/PLUMBING DRAWINGS. ALTERATIONS OTHER THAN LOWERING OR C=) �O w 00 2. PROVIDE ALL MATERIALS FOR A COMPLETE RELOCATING EXISTING HEADS ARE REQUIRED, GW GREASE WASTE w SUBMIT A REQUEST FOR INFORMATION (RFI). Z Lu z INSTALLATION IN ALL RESPECTS AND READY FOR Z LU INTENDED USE AND IN STRICT ACCORDANCE WITHOW 2. IF THE CEILING FEATURE IS INSTALLED ON TOP OFA z OIL WASTE STATE AND LOCAL CODES AND MANUFACTURERS SPRINKLER OR IF THE RELOCATION AND ADJUSTMENT Oo° RECOMMENDATIONS. RULES PER NFPA 13 CANNOT BE APPLIED, AN RFI ST STORM SEWER Jv0 w C:) MUST BE SUBMITTED FOR DIRECTION AND 0 U� — 3. STORE MUST BE KEPT IN OPERATION. ARRANGE ALL CLARIFICATION. �- o N WORK TO KEEP DISRUPTIONS TO STORE ZCD RD ROOF DRAIN LINE OPERATIONS TO A MINIMUM. COORDINATE WITH 3. INSTALLATION SHALL COMPLY WITH THE EXISTING AND NEW CONSTRUCTION. PAY ALL LOCAL/STATE ADOPTED EDITION OF NFPA 13. ORD OVERFLOW ROOF DRAIN LINE NECESSARY FEES AND PERMITS. 4. IF NEW CONSTRUCTION DISRUPTS EXISTING 4. PROVIDE FIRE PROTECTION AS REQUIRED BY CODE _ DOMESTIC COLD WATER 2020 VISION CENTER SPECIAL PROJECT FOR ANY TEMPORARY STRUCTURES BUILT DURING UNDERGROUND SERVICES (GAS, SEWER, DOMESTIC CONSTRUCTION. WATER, FIRE SPRINKLER, ETC.), PROVIDE ALL MATERIALS AND LABOR AS REQUIRED TO MAINTAIN - - DOMESTIC HOT WATER 5. SPRINKLER SYSTEMS ARE MONITORED BY AN OFF- THEIR PROPER OPERATION. SITE CENTRAL STATION INCLUDING TAMPER SWITCHES ON ALL CONTROL VALVES AND FLOW - - - DOMESTIC HOT WATER RETURN 5. EXISTING PIPE SIZES AND LOCATIONS HAVE NOT SWITCHES. BEEN FIELD VERIFIED. CONTRACTOR IS IW IRRIGATION WATER RESPONSIBLE TO FIELD VERIFY LOCATION AND SIZES 6 PENETRATIONS OF RATED WALLS OR ASSEMBLIES OF ALL EXISTING PIPING THAT IS BEING CONNECTED . SHALL BE "FIRE CAULKED" WITH APPROVED CAULKING TO OR MODIFIED. PER METHODS REQUIRED BY THE AUTHORITY HAVING T TEPID OR TEMPERED WATER JURISDICTION, AND PROJECT SPECIFICATIONS. 6. PLUMBING CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE ONE YEAR F WARRANTY FOR PROPER SEWER SYSTEM FILTERED WATER 7. THE FIRE PROTECTION ENGINEER OF RECORD WILL OPERATION. NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR THE CONTRACTOR'S FAILURE TO CARRY OUT THE CONSTRUCTION WORK G NATURAL GAS 7. WATER PIPING ABOVE GRADE SHALL BE TYPE "L" IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, HARD DRAWN COPPER JOINED WITH WROUGHT NOR SHALL THEY BE REQUIRED TO SUPERVISE THE A COMPRESSED AIR COPPER FITTINGS. MAKE JOINTS USING LEAD-FREE CONDUCT OF THE WORK, THE CONSTRUCTION SOLDER AND ANON -CORROSIVE, PASTE -TYPE FLUX. PROCEDURES AS SET FORTH BY THE GENERAL MAKE PIPING CONNECTIONS TO A FIXTURE WITH CONTRACTOR, SUB -CONTRACTORS, THEIR CD CONDENSATE DRAIN CHROME -PLATED SEAMLESS BRASS TUBE. INSULATE RESPECTIVE EMPLOYEES, OR ANY OTHER PERSON AT HOT &COLD WATER PIPING WITH RIGID GLASS FIBER THE JOBSITE OTHER THAN THE ENGINEERING FIRM'S RO REVERSE OSMOSIS WATER A MINIMUM OF 1/2" THICK WITH WHITE ALL -SERVICE OWN EMPLOYEES. JACKET (VAPOR RETARDER). 8THE CONTRACTOR MUST REVIEW ALL V PLUMBING VENT 8. CAP ALL PIPING OPENINGS DURING CONSTRUCTION . CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PRIOR TO BID. SHOULD UNTIL FINAL CONNECTIONS TO EQUIPMENT AND MODIFICATION TO THESE PLANS BECOME NECESSARY VAC PLUMBING VACUUM ACCESSORIES ARE MADE. TO PROPERLY COORDINATE THE SYSTEM WITH, 9. AT CONTRACTOR'S OPTION (U.N.0), IN LIEU OF OTHER TRADES, IT WILL BE THE CONTRACTOR'S I UNION RESPONSIBILITY TO OBTAIN APPROVAL OF THESE COPPER WATER PIPING, PEX OR AQUATHERM PIPING CHANGES BY THE AHJ, AND THE FIRE PROTECTION MAY BE USED. REFER TO EQUIVALENT NOMINAL ENGINEER OF RECORD. IN ADDITION TO OBTAINING A9^- 0* GAS PRESSURE REGULATOR PIPE SIZES SCHEDULE AND SPECIFICATIONS. THE NECESSARY APPROVALS, THE CONTRACTOR 10. PROVIDE SEISMIC BRACING BASED ON APPROPRIATE MUST MAKE NOTE OF ALL FIELD OR COORDINATION GAS COCK CHANGES ON THE INSTALLATION DRAWINGS. ONCE SEISMIC ZONE REQUIREMENTS PER SMACNA COMPLETE, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL SUPPLY ONE PUBLISHED SEISMIC DETAILS, LOCAL AND NATIONAL COPY OF AS -BUILT DRAWINGS TO THE FIRE C ELBOW - TURNED DOWN CODES. CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY INCLUDES PROTECTION ENGINEER OF RECORD FOR THEIR USE. STRUCTURAL ENGINEER'S CERTIFICATION ON DETAILS SUBMITTED FOR PERMITTING. 9. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL DIVERT ALL DRAIN AND ELBOW - TURNED UP INSPECTORS TEST CONNECTION DISCHARGE AWAY 11. BUILDING COMPONENTS ABANDONED BY THE SCOPE FROM FINISHED SURFACES AND PIPE TO APPROVED TEE TURNED DOWN OF WORK SHALL BE SECURED TO PREVENT FALLING, DRAIN LOCATIONS. THE CONTRACTOR WILL BE LOOSENING, OR CREATING DAMAGE OF ANY KIND IN BACKCHARGED FOR ANY REPAIR, REPLACEMENT, OR TEE - TURNED UP THE FUTURE. CLEANING OF RUST STAINS ON PAVEMENT/CONCRETE DUE TO WATER DISCHARGE FROM SPRINKLER SYSTEM DRAIN DOWNS. BALL VALVE 10. ALL HANGER CONNECTIONS SHALL BE MADE TO THE �� FLOW CONTROL VALVE TOP CHORD OF STRUCTURAL JOIST UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. USE OF SELF TAPPING AND POWER DRIVING THREADED ROD ANCHORS INTO ROOF DECK PLUG VALVE OR STRUCTURE IS PROHIBITED UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. CHECK VALVE SHUT-OFF VALVE IN VERTICAL LINE BACKFLOW PREVENTER M WATER METER WHA WATER HAMMER ARRESTOR THERMOMETER ----------------------------------------- --------------------------------T&P RELIEF VALVE ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 7 - --------------------------------------- -- -------------------------------- TMV THERMOSTATIC MIXING VALVE mm ,\--CEILING FEATURE REF ARCH WAITING �i ® FD:) FLOOR DRAIN COQ C RD ROOF DRAIN/OVERFLOW ROOF DRAIN OPTICAL SALES ®C FS FLOOR SINK FCO FLOOR CLEANOUT �O YCO YARD CLEANOUT FPWH FREEZE PROOF WALL HYDRANT HB HOSE BIBB 0-11 WCO WALL CLEANOUT CONNECT TO EXISTING ETR EXISTING TO REMAIN 0 77 7/7,,/-/-7-/ 7-/-7 DEMO PIPE AREA OF SLAB CUT Fill VBF VENT BELOW FLOOR I� ADJUSTMENTS CD ETR S11 ETR RAG ETR EXAM #2 ,\--CEILING FEATURE REF ARCH CD ETR PRETEST EXAM #1 VISION CENTER MECHANICAL PLAN 1/4" = V-0" EXISTING CONDITIONS WERE TAKEN FROM ORIGINAL DRAWINGS AND MAY NOT REFLECT EXACT "AS -BUILT" CONDITIONS. CONTRACTOR SHALL FIELD VERIFY ALL EXISTING CONDITIONS PRIOR TO SUBMITTING FINAL BIDS. CONTRACTOR SHALL CAREFULLY COORDINATE NEW WORK AND DEMOLITION WITH ALL OTHER DISCIPLINES AND EXISTING CONDITIONS. KEYNOTES 15.401 CONNECT TO NEAREST DOMESTIC COLD WATER PIPE OF EQUAL OR LARGER SIZE. VERIFY SIZE AND LOCATION AT SITE. PROVIDE SHUT-OFF VALVE IN NEW PIPE AT POINT OF CONNECTION. 15.402 CONNECT TO EXISTING HOT WATER PIPE OF EQUAL OR LARGER SIZE. VERIFY SIZE AND LOCATION AT SITE. PROVIDE SHUT-OFF VALVE IN NEW PIPE AT POINT OF CONNECTION. 15.403 CONNECT TO EXISTING SANITARY PIPE OF EQUAL OR LARGER SIZE. VERIFY SIZE, LOCATION, ELEVATION, AND FLOW DIRECTION AT SITE. 15.404 CONNECT TO EXISTING VENT PIPE OF EQUAL OR LARGER SIZE. VERIFY SIZE AND LOCATION AT SITE. 15.405 PROPERLY CAP, PLUG AND CONCEAL ANY PIPING LEFT IN PLACE. CAP ABANDONED SEWER PIPING A MINIMUM OF 8" BELOW FINISHED FLOOR. MATCH EXISTING FLOOR CONSTRUCTION AND FINISHES. RE: ARCHITECTURAL PLANS. REMOVE UNUSED WATER AND VENT PIPING ABOVE CEILING AND CAP REMAINING PIPE. 15.406 PLUMBING CONTRACTOR TO MAKE ALL NECESSARY DISCONNECTS AND RECONNECTS OF PLUMBING FIXTURES BEING RELOCATED OR NEW. EACH SUBCONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR HAVING A THOROUGH KNOWLEDGE OF ALL DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN THEIR RELATED FIELD. THE FAILURE TO ACQUAINT THEMSELF WITH THIS KNOWLEDGE DOES NOT RELIEVE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF PERFORMING THE WORK PROPERLY. NO ADDITIONAL COMPENSATION SHALL BE ALLOWED BECAUSE OF CONDITIONS THAT OCCUR DUE TO FAILURE TO FAMILIARIZE WORKERS WITH THIS KNOWLEDGE. p+enb2 hitecture gineering 2809 Ajax Avenue Suite 100 Rogers Arkansas 72758 Phone: 479.636.3545 Fax: 479.636.1209 Engineer of Record Joshua Dale McCall, P.E. Minnesota License No. 53286 Z) I l r J 0 O LU w 0 1- O ww°oma Cn o zw� wzcsz¢ o ro��z�M�zn� HWOW W w Z W WOW d Z� H Z Cc Q F w W L -L O OW . W Ov Cc w¢F J�a�Q�pw w oa w nwm 0 ��w �¢O�0 tea}¢ z¢�z Oo�¢Cw7=o 0 -Rm0z>zw1zi-z Z W ADCC 1--->Z=0.0-O< J jai -j 0 FJ)Mzo 0<w W zN_> W z 2ZJU m JwwZ)0N SOI w-0co w a�xgDz0wo< 0W0Zzl-i-o <0w0_Z)I­-w !C1)��Uo=naOwwQ¢r U F - z F- J U) z O U ISSUE BLOCK CHECKED BY: JDM DRAWN BY: DCZ PROTO CYCLE: --- DOCUMENT DATE: 08-07-2020 I HEREBY CERTIFY THAT THIS PLAN, SPECIFICATION, OR REPORT WAS PREPARED BY ME OR UNDER MY DIRECT SUPERMSION AND THAT I AM A DULY LICENSED ENGINEER UNDER THE LAWS OF THE STATE OF MINNESOTA. SIGNATURE: �c 61e pR PRINTED NAME: UA J DALE MCCALL DATE: 8/6/2020 LICENSE NUMBER: 53286 DOCUMENTS THAT DO NOT HAVE THE ARCHITECT OR ENGINEER OF RECORD SEAL AND SIGNATURE SHALL BE CONSIDERED NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION VISION CENTER MECHANICAL PLUMBING AND FIRE PROTECTION PLAN SHFFT- VCMP1 U W 3 O 00 Q Q C=) �O w 00 U) a- LU w Z Lu z Z LU Ill NZ N z 0 C Cn Oo° Jww Ir Jv0 w C:) 0 U� — o C0 CD �- o N ZCD N Occ LU CIO z m O 2020 VISION CENTER SPECIAL PROJECT ISSUE BLOCK CHECKED BY: JDM DRAWN BY: DCZ PROTO CYCLE: --- DOCUMENT DATE: 08-07-2020 I HEREBY CERTIFY THAT THIS PLAN, SPECIFICATION, OR REPORT WAS PREPARED BY ME OR UNDER MY DIRECT SUPERMSION AND THAT I AM A DULY LICENSED ENGINEER UNDER THE LAWS OF THE STATE OF MINNESOTA. SIGNATURE: �c 61e pR PRINTED NAME: UA J DALE MCCALL DATE: 8/6/2020 LICENSE NUMBER: 53286 DOCUMENTS THAT DO NOT HAVE THE ARCHITECT OR ENGINEER OF RECORD SEAL AND SIGNATURE SHALL BE CONSIDERED NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION VISION CENTER MECHANICAL PLUMBING AND FIRE PROTECTION PLAN SHFFT- VCMP1 ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS LEGEND 03,29.19 (SYMBOLS APPLY ONLY WHEN USED ON DRAWINGS) SYMBOL DESCRIPTION O/O ❑ LIGHT FIXTURE (WALL MOUNTED/CEILING MOUNTED) 0 LIGHT FIXTURE ® LIGHT FIXTURE, NIGHT LIGHT VOLUMETRIC LIGHT FIXTURE TRACK LIGHTING / ® EXIT FIXTURE (WALL MOUNTED/CEILING MOUNTED) / o0a EMERGENCY LIGHT (WALL MOUNTED/CEILING MOUNTED) / EMERGENCY LIGHT REMOTE HEADS j (WALL MOUNTED/CEILING MOUNTED) $ SINGLE POLE SWITCH $3 3 -WAY SWITCH $4 4 -WAY SWITCH $K KEYED SWITCH $D DIMMER SWITCH $VS VARIABLE SPEED SWITCH $M MANUAL MOTOR SWITCH SINGLE POLE OCCUPANCY S SENSOR SWITCH $OS2 DOUBLE POLE OCCUPANCY SENSOR SWITCH CEILING ((ED) SENSOR SWITCH MOUNTED OCCUPANCY RECEPTACLE,DUPLEX RECEPTACLE, DUPLEX, MOUNTED HORIZONTALLY RECEPTACLE, GFI © RECEPTACLE, DUPLEX FLUSH FLOOR RECEPTACLE, DUPLEX ISOLATED GROUND FLUSH FLOOR RECEPTACLE, DOUBLE DUPLEX }L RECEPTACLE,DUPLEX ll ISOLATED GROUND RECEPTACLE, DOUBLE DUPLEX, ISOLATED GROUND RECEPTACLE, SIMPLEX TWIST LOCK, L5 -15R, LINO RECEPTACLE, SIMPLEX TWIST LOCK, ISOLATED GROUND, L5 -15R, UNO RECEPTACLE, DUPLEX TWIST LOCK, L5 -15R, UNO RECEPTACLE, DUPLEX TWIST LOCK, ISOLATED GROUND, L5 -15R, LINO III RECEPTACLE, SPECIAL d) RECEPTACLE, SIMPLEX RECEPTACLE, PLUG -MOLD O JUNCTION BOX (WALL MOUNTED/CEILING MOUNTED) THERMOSTAT (WALL MOUNTED/CEILING MOUNTED) ALARM JUNCTION BOX, (WALL MOUNTED/CEILING MOUNTED) ALARM JUNCTION BOX, ® FOR REMOTE TEST/RESET (WALL MOUNTED/CEILING MOUNTED) OS SMOKE DETECTOR NON-FUSED DISCONNECT FUSED DISCONNECT EQUIPMENT CONNECTION POINT (PROVIDED WITH EQUIPMENT) CIRCUIT, CONCEALED IN WALLS OR CEILING; E INDICATES EXISTING WIRING CIRCUIT, CONCEALED IN SLAB FLOOR, E INDICATES EXISTING WIRING CIRCUIT, EXPOSED, E INDICATES EXISTING WIRING .----------- LOW VOLTAGE WIRING F___I CONDUIT SLEEVE a FLUSH MOUNTED PANELBOARD SURFACE MOUNTED PANELBOARD - TELEPHONE / DATA BOX FOR ISD LOW VOLTAGE CABLE V BOX FOR OTHER TELEPHONE, FLUSH FLOOR O MOTOR 0/(2) TELEPOWER POLE PUSH BUTTON B❑ BUZZER SS SAIL SWITCH �� JUNCTION BOX I Ci K I HORN/STROBE DH DOOR HOLD OPEN TC TIME CLOCK ABBREVIATIONS a, b, c LOWER CASE LETTERS INDICATE SWITCHING CONFIGURATION AFF ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR AFG ABOVE FINISHED GRADE C CONDUIT CCT CIRCUIT CF CEILING FAN CW CASH WRAP EC ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR EF EXHAUSTFAN ETR EXISTING TO REMAIN EWC ELECTRIC WATER COOLER G GROUND GC GENERAL CONTRACTOR GFEP GROUND FAULT EQUIPMENT PROTECTION GFI GROUND FAULT CIRCUIT INTERRUPTER HD HAND DRYER IG ISOLATED GROUND LCU LIGHTING CONTROL UNIT NL NIGHT LIGHT NTS NOT TO SCALE REC REFRIGERATION ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR RC REFRIGERATION CONTRACTOR RH RADIANT HEATER SC SECURITY CAMERA TR TAMPER RESISTANT TYP TYPICAL UH UNIT HEATER UNO UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE WH WATER HEATER WP WEATHER PROOF WR WEATHER RESISTANT LIGHT FIXTURE SCHEDULE "OW" FIXTURES AND LAMPS ARE FURNISHED BYTHE OWNER FOR INSTALLATION BYTHE CONTRACTOR. "GC" FIXTURES AND LAMPS ARE FURNISHED AND INSTALLED BYTHE CONTRACTOR. - SUPPLIED VENDOR/ TYPE BY DESCRIPTION MANUFACTURER MODEL VOLTAGE INPUT VA COLOR TEMP LIGHT SOURCE - LAMP QTY MOUNTING COUNT 19 OW EMERGENCY LIGHT REXEL INC EVHG61DP-WM W/ T BAR HANGER 1_2_0/277 3 VA RELAY INTEG L LED - WALL / CEILING 2 85 OW 13" GLOBE PENDANT LIGHT WITH MEDIUM BASE LAMP SOCKET, CORD MOUNT, WHITE FINISH REGENCY P4406-29 120 14 VA 3000k 14A21 DIM/83 [GRq (LED A19 LAM , 1600L) - SUSPENDED 4 87 OW 3 LIGHT RECESSED MUTIPLE, WHITE FINISH REGENCY XAR13Nrn20/25c-25c-25c/30K/14001WHNVH 1201277 51 VA 3000K MODU R LED - RECESSED 38 89 OW UNDER CABINET LIGHTING - 22" QUALSERV RT5HO-LED22-30FR-2-000 120 12 VA 3000K INTEGRAL LED - SURFACE 2 91 OW 4FT SUSPENDED LED LINEAR SLOT LIGHT REGENCY OLS-D-LED-2-S-4'0"-750L-DIMI0-MVOLT-30K-85-WH 120/277 27 VA 3000K INTEGRAL LED - SUSPENDED 3 92 OW 8FT SUSPENDED LED LINEAR SLOT LIGHT REGENCY _ OLS-D-LED-2-S-8'0"-750L-DIMI0-MVOLT-30K-85-WH_ 120/277 54 VA 3000K INTEGRAL LED - SUSPENDED 3 94 OW UNDER CABINET LIGHTING - 58" QUALSERV RT5HO-LED58-30FR-2-000 120 1 24 VA 3000K INTEGRAL LED - SURFACE 1 REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL EXISTING LIGHT SWITCHES DRAWINGS FOR INSTALLATION OF SHOWN SHALL REMAIN TYPE 85, 91 AND 92 LIGHT FIXTURES. UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. REFERENCE ARCHITECTURAL TYPE 87 LIGHT FIXTURES ALONG PLANS FOR TYPE 91 HI & 92 LIGHT PERIMETER TO BE AIMED AT PRODUCT FIXTURE MOUNTING HEIGHT. BY GENERAL CONTRACTOR. OCCUPANCY SENSORS SHOULD TYPE 85 PENDANT LIGHT FIXTURES TO BE PROGRAMMED FOR MAXIMUM BE CENTERED OVER TABLES. REF p AVAILABLE TIME DELAY SETTING. ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS FOR C7 LOWER CASE LETTER DESIGNATION EXACT LOCATION OF ALL TABLES. CORRESPONDS TO LIGHT SWITCH CONTROL, TYP OF OPTICAL SALES LIGHTING. REFER TO THE VISION CENTER FURNISH AND INSTALL (3) HUBBELL POWER PLAN FOR THE LIGHT ATP1500C OCCUPANCY SENSORS WITH SWITCH AND RECEPTACLE CONTROL UNIT AND MODULE IN SERIES LOCATION FOR THE ADJUSTMENTS WITH WALL MOUNTED SWITCHES, LAB UNDERCABINET LIGHTING. oor � vnciF ,..I a a 1 3 TYPE 91 & 92 SUSPENDED LINEAR LIGHT FIXTURES TO BE CENTERED BETWEEN CEILING FEATURE BORDER AND SLATS. REF ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS. WHEN REQUIRED, ADJUST LIGHTING LAYOUT TO AVOID EXISTING SPRINKLER LOCATIONS. POWER CORD AND LIGHT FIXTURE CONNECTORS FOR UNDERCABINET LIGHTING IN ADJUSTMENTS WILL BE FURNISHED BY MANUFACTURER FOR INSTALLATION BY CONTRACTOR. TYPE 89 & 94 LIGHT FIXTURES TO BE PROVIDED BY OWNER AND FURNISHED WITH MILLWORK. INSTALL LIGHT FIXTURES ON UNDERNEATH SIDE OF CABINETS AND PROVIDE LIGHT SWITCH CONTROL AS SHOWN. a -POWER POLE FOR REFERENCE, TYP O b a F11 C PRETEST (I- - WAITING 6.125 U_ Y I 16 489 I I 1 I REF -VCEi - 3 ---- L CONTACTS 0 0 0 0 EXAM #2 EXAM #1 VISION CENTER LIGHTING PLAN ! 1/4" = V-0- GND ICT H2P-18 NEUTRAL (OPT SALES LTG ONLY) , ,__ SWITCH "a" SWITCH "b" SW ITCH "C" 120V OR 277V REF LIGHTING PLANS FOR SWITCH "d" REF LIGHTING PLANS FOR (WHITE) EXACT LOCATION (BI (RED) BBELL -RELAY (RED) (BLACK) HUBBELL -+24V (BLACK) RELAY (BLACK) (WHITE) CONTROL (BLUE) UNIT CU300A 120V OR 277V REF LIGHTING PLANS FOR EXACT LOCATION TO ADDITIONAL ATP1500C (WHITE) -- OCCUPANCY SENSORS (BI -_-_ (MAX OF 4 PER RELAY UNIT) BBELL -RELAY REF LIGHTING PLANS FOR (BLACK) QUANTITY AND LOCATIONS -+24V (RED) CONTROL L(R W UNITAAR20P w a TO LIGHTS TO LIGHTS SWITCHED HOT TO "a" LIGHTS HOT TO "V' IL.112"T1 SWITCHED HOT TO "c" LIGHTS SWITCHED HOT TO "d" LIGHTS MANUAL LIGHT SWITCH CONTROL, REF LIGHTING PLANS FOR LOCATION, TYP ----s SW ITCHED HOT TO "e" LIGHTS HOT SWITCH "e" TO VISION CENTER PANELJtGND TRA TO LIGHTS (LIGH1 ING CCT LVC-15) TO LIGHTS OCCUPANCY SENSOR WIRING DIAGRAM NTS r8 HUBBELL TO ADDITIONAL ATP1500C OCCUPANCY -- OCCUPANCY SENSORS SENSOR -_-_ (MAX OF 4 PER RELAY UNIT) ATP1500CNSOR REF LIGHTING PLANS FOR QUANTITY AND LOCATIONS -+24V MANUAL LIGHT SWITCH CONTROL, REF LIGHTING PLANS FOR LOCATION, TYP ----s SW ITCHED HOT TO "e" LIGHTS HOT SWITCH "e" TO VISION CENTER PANELJtGND TRA TO LIGHTS (LIGH1 ING CCT LVC-15) TO LIGHTS OCCUPANCY SENSOR WIRING DIAGRAM NTS r8 (K VISION- CENTER DEMO LIGHTIN I G PLAN APPROVED FILE COPY • REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLLAACE • WbIECTTO FIELD INSPECTION Uxc:_ sijn we: GENERAL LIGHTING NOTES 1.3120 1. EXIT SIGN MOUNTING A. WALL FIXTURE: CENTER 12" ABOVE DOOR OPENING. B. CEILING FIXTURE: ON CEILING OR AT HEIGHT SPECIFIED ON DRAWINGS. C. PENDANT FIXTURE: MATCH HEIGHT OF EXISTING PENDANT MOUNTED EXIT SIGNS. D. VERIFY MOUNTING HEIGHT WITH AHJ. E. COORDINATE LOCATIONS OF EXIT SIGNS TO ENSURE STORE SIGNAGE DOES NOT OBSTRUCT THEIR VIEW. F. THE USE OF TRITIUM BASED RADIOACTIVE EXIT SIGNAGE IS PROHIBITED. 2. EMERGENCY LIGHT FIXTURE INSTALLATION A. WALL FIXTURE: 12" BELOW FINISHED CEILING OR +10'-0" IN AREAS OF EXPOSED STRUCTURE, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. B. PENDANT FIXTURE: BOTTOM CHORD OF BAR JOIST OR AT HEIGHT SPECIFIED ON DRAWINGS. C. REMOTE HEAD FIXTURE: HEADS CENTERED ABOVE DOOR OPENING +9'-0", UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE AND BATTERY PACK MOUNTED ON INTERIOR SIDE OF WALL 12" BELOW FINISHED CEILING OR AT BAR JOIST IN AREAS OF EXPOSED STRUCTURE. D. REFER TO MANUFACTURER'S WRITTEN INSTRUCTIONS. ALLOW BATTERY TO CHARGE CONTINUOUSLY FOR A MINIMUM OF 24 HOURS BEFORE INITIAL TESTING. E. AFTER EMERGENCY LIGHT HAS BEEN POWERED DO NOT TURN OFF FOR EXTENDED PERIODS OF TIME. 3. EXIT SIGNS, EMERGENCY LIGHTS AND NIGHT LIGHTS SHALL NOT BE SWITCHED. 4. PROVIDE SEPARATE BOXES FOR GANGED SWITCHES ON SEPARATE BRANCH CIRCUITS. KEYNOTES 16.100 PROVIDE BI -LEVEL LIGHTING BY ALTERNATING SWITCH LEGS BETWEEN LIGHT FIXTURES. (CHECKERBOARD) 16.125 EXISTING LIGHT FIXTURES TO REMAIN UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. 16.126 EXISTING LIGHT FIXTURE TO BE DEMOLISHED. 16.129 CONNECT TO EXISTING CIRCUIT PREVIOUSLY SERVING AREA LIGHTING THAT WAS REMOVED. MAINTAIN EXISTING CIRCUIT CONTROL UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. PROVIDE CONSTANT HOT FOR EMERGENCY EXIT AND LOCALLY CONTROLLED LIGHT FIXTURES. 16.131 CONNECT TO EXISTING CIRCUIT. 16.470 FURNISH AND INSTALL NEW 20 AMP, 120 VOLT CIRCUIT(S). FEED FROM PANELBOARD AS INDICATED. PROVIDE 2OA-1 P CIRCUIT BREAKER IF NEEDED. E.C. SHALL MATCH MANUFACTURER, TYPE AND AIG RATINGS OF EXISTING CIRCUIT BREAKERS. 16.489 RELOCATE, EXTEND, AND RECONNECT CIRCUITRY AND ELECTRICAL DEVICES FOR RELOCATED AND/OR NEW EQUIPMENT. VERIFY CONDITION OF BRANCH CIRCUITRY, CONDUIT AND WIRE TO ENSURE THEY MEET ALL U.L. RATINGS AND REPLACE AS REQUIRED. VERIFY FINAL LOCATION OF RELOCATED/NEW EQUIPMENT WITH WALMART CONSTRUCTION MANAGER PRIOR TO ROUGH -IN. PROVIDE LISTED HANDLE -TIE BETWEEN CIRCUIT BREAKERS SHARING COMMON NEUTRAL FOR SIMULTANEOUS TRIP. TYP OF ALL CIRCUITS SHOWN ON ALL ELECTRICAL SHEETS. EXISTING CONDITIONS WERE TAKEN FROM ORIGINAL DRAWINGS AND MAY NOT REFLECT EXACT "AS -BUILT" CONDITIONS. CONTRACTOR SHALL FIELD VERIFY ALL EXISTING CONDITIONS PRIOR TO SUBMITTING FINAL BIDS. CONTRACTOR SHALL CAREFULLY COORDINATE NEW WORK AND DEMOLITION WITH ALL OTHER DISCIPLINES AND EXISTING CONDITIONS. TYPICAL OF ALL ELECTRICAL SHEETS. EACH SUBCONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR HAVING A THOROUGH KNOWLEDGE OF ALL DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN THEIR RELATED FIELD. THE FAILURE TO ACQUAINT THEMSELF WITH THIS KNOWLEDGE DOES NOT RELIEVE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF PERFORMING THE WORK PROPERLY. NO ADDITIONAL COMPENSATION SHALL BE ALLOWED BECAUSE OF CONDITIONS THAT OCCUR DUE TO FAILURE TO FAMILIARIZE WORKERS WITH THIS KNOWLEDGE. TYPICAL OF ALL ELECTRICAL SHEETS. p+enb2 hitecture gineering 2809 Ajax Avenue Suite 100 Rogers Arkansas 72758 Phone: 479.636.3545 Fax: 479.636.1209 Engineer of Record Keith Allen Williams, P.E. Minnesota License No. 45549 W ¢ yw 9fwep Zw F- w N WuiU azZa W w tz�¢wEWz cc - IL W 3ro O td` tw=g3i CpnTMZNW Z aLL.=OOn1¢U'aWCaWp O 3 wn �O ZZ NSZZ c3-aw3a Wa0ga 3,J gm°oifflz-a paw QaW �Z JUUI-iwWoO¢3 A Mp a02w—D_�z wwa Awa €2�zrtm2g W<,3 a II a7FW ~ oma 0¢w¢W w wWDM TF �F. (J I]ma Ow IC wx<I- EXISTING LIGHT SWITCHES SHOWN SHALL f I REMAIN UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. O Oa r� © C:0 ; v O O W w a z m w w JL11 L—J z �� z Z LU W N0 z F- 1 r-----1 rIre r i l tl 1 G I I I I d > I,I I_ -__..--J L ----J L I II W W EI Fo 2,X4,tTROFFER3G co LYG� HTIN I I J I I TYP OF 10 (\ �✓ 1 J 1 I � N N �) I I I I II I I r----� r -----I r ---� O CO I� C II L - J L - -J L - J II - - - - - J - J - -�� -� - �T-0 OPTICAL ��/ I 2020 VISION CENTER SPECIAL PROJECT L _J UY -J SALES L I __J I I III I I r----1 I-----� r1---_1 I,I L ----J L_ ---J L I,I I I I I WALL WASH I I I I I'� LIGHTS I 16.126 I WALL WASH TYP OF 10 I I LIGHTS J 16.126 I 1 I TYP OF 6 I I r--7 -_r- _0_ —'1"' 77 --II'— � LJ — — --I- — — — —-k--I ----j LI_== j —�--- 1 s.48s I I REF 2-VCEi 0 oI o o I PRETEST o ADJUSTMENTS -- rr — IA 1 U__J L _ 1 - _ rr -ITYP 16.125 II J_ _j O pt7=!� 3 11 S3 CONTACTS 0 0 acl EXAM #2 EXAM #1 i (K VISION- CENTER DEMO LIGHTIN I G PLAN APPROVED FILE COPY • REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLLAACE • WbIECTTO FIELD INSPECTION Uxc:_ sijn we: GENERAL LIGHTING NOTES 1.3120 1. EXIT SIGN MOUNTING A. WALL FIXTURE: CENTER 12" ABOVE DOOR OPENING. B. CEILING FIXTURE: ON CEILING OR AT HEIGHT SPECIFIED ON DRAWINGS. C. PENDANT FIXTURE: MATCH HEIGHT OF EXISTING PENDANT MOUNTED EXIT SIGNS. D. VERIFY MOUNTING HEIGHT WITH AHJ. E. COORDINATE LOCATIONS OF EXIT SIGNS TO ENSURE STORE SIGNAGE DOES NOT OBSTRUCT THEIR VIEW. F. THE USE OF TRITIUM BASED RADIOACTIVE EXIT SIGNAGE IS PROHIBITED. 2. EMERGENCY LIGHT FIXTURE INSTALLATION A. WALL FIXTURE: 12" BELOW FINISHED CEILING OR +10'-0" IN AREAS OF EXPOSED STRUCTURE, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. B. PENDANT FIXTURE: BOTTOM CHORD OF BAR JOIST OR AT HEIGHT SPECIFIED ON DRAWINGS. C. REMOTE HEAD FIXTURE: HEADS CENTERED ABOVE DOOR OPENING +9'-0", UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE AND BATTERY PACK MOUNTED ON INTERIOR SIDE OF WALL 12" BELOW FINISHED CEILING OR AT BAR JOIST IN AREAS OF EXPOSED STRUCTURE. D. REFER TO MANUFACTURER'S WRITTEN INSTRUCTIONS. ALLOW BATTERY TO CHARGE CONTINUOUSLY FOR A MINIMUM OF 24 HOURS BEFORE INITIAL TESTING. E. AFTER EMERGENCY LIGHT HAS BEEN POWERED DO NOT TURN OFF FOR EXTENDED PERIODS OF TIME. 3. EXIT SIGNS, EMERGENCY LIGHTS AND NIGHT LIGHTS SHALL NOT BE SWITCHED. 4. PROVIDE SEPARATE BOXES FOR GANGED SWITCHES ON SEPARATE BRANCH CIRCUITS. KEYNOTES 16.100 PROVIDE BI -LEVEL LIGHTING BY ALTERNATING SWITCH LEGS BETWEEN LIGHT FIXTURES. (CHECKERBOARD) 16.125 EXISTING LIGHT FIXTURES TO REMAIN UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. 16.126 EXISTING LIGHT FIXTURE TO BE DEMOLISHED. 16.129 CONNECT TO EXISTING CIRCUIT PREVIOUSLY SERVING AREA LIGHTING THAT WAS REMOVED. MAINTAIN EXISTING CIRCUIT CONTROL UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. PROVIDE CONSTANT HOT FOR EMERGENCY EXIT AND LOCALLY CONTROLLED LIGHT FIXTURES. 16.131 CONNECT TO EXISTING CIRCUIT. 16.470 FURNISH AND INSTALL NEW 20 AMP, 120 VOLT CIRCUIT(S). FEED FROM PANELBOARD AS INDICATED. PROVIDE 2OA-1 P CIRCUIT BREAKER IF NEEDED. E.C. SHALL MATCH MANUFACTURER, TYPE AND AIG RATINGS OF EXISTING CIRCUIT BREAKERS. 16.489 RELOCATE, EXTEND, AND RECONNECT CIRCUITRY AND ELECTRICAL DEVICES FOR RELOCATED AND/OR NEW EQUIPMENT. VERIFY CONDITION OF BRANCH CIRCUITRY, CONDUIT AND WIRE TO ENSURE THEY MEET ALL U.L. RATINGS AND REPLACE AS REQUIRED. VERIFY FINAL LOCATION OF RELOCATED/NEW EQUIPMENT WITH WALMART CONSTRUCTION MANAGER PRIOR TO ROUGH -IN. PROVIDE LISTED HANDLE -TIE BETWEEN CIRCUIT BREAKERS SHARING COMMON NEUTRAL FOR SIMULTANEOUS TRIP. TYP OF ALL CIRCUITS SHOWN ON ALL ELECTRICAL SHEETS. EXISTING CONDITIONS WERE TAKEN FROM ORIGINAL DRAWINGS AND MAY NOT REFLECT EXACT "AS -BUILT" CONDITIONS. CONTRACTOR SHALL FIELD VERIFY ALL EXISTING CONDITIONS PRIOR TO SUBMITTING FINAL BIDS. CONTRACTOR SHALL CAREFULLY COORDINATE NEW WORK AND DEMOLITION WITH ALL OTHER DISCIPLINES AND EXISTING CONDITIONS. TYPICAL OF ALL ELECTRICAL SHEETS. EACH SUBCONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR HAVING A THOROUGH KNOWLEDGE OF ALL DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN THEIR RELATED FIELD. THE FAILURE TO ACQUAINT THEMSELF WITH THIS KNOWLEDGE DOES NOT RELIEVE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF PERFORMING THE WORK PROPERLY. NO ADDITIONAL COMPENSATION SHALL BE ALLOWED BECAUSE OF CONDITIONS THAT OCCUR DUE TO FAILURE TO FAMILIARIZE WORKERS WITH THIS KNOWLEDGE. TYPICAL OF ALL ELECTRICAL SHEETS. p+enb2 hitecture gineering 2809 Ajax Avenue Suite 100 Rogers Arkansas 72758 Phone: 479.636.3545 Fax: 479.636.1209 Engineer of Record Keith Allen Williams, P.E. Minnesota License No. 45549 W ¢ yw 9fwep Zw F- w N WuiU azZa W w tz�¢wEWz cc - IL W 3ro O td` tw=g3i CpnTMZNW Z aLL.=OOn1¢U'aWCaWp O 3 wn �O ZZ NSZZ c3-aw3a Wa0ga 3,J gm°oifflz-a paw QaW �Z JUUI-iwWoO¢3 A Mp a02w—D_�z wwa Awa €2�zrtm2g W<,3 a II a7FW ~ oma 0¢w¢W w wWDM TF �F. (J I]ma Ow IC wx<I- ISSUE BLOCK CHECKED BY: KAW DRAWN BY: HS PROTO CYCLE: 07-01-2020 DOCUMENT DATE: 08-07-2020 THAT hA5 PLAN. IN:PORT WAS OR UNDEN MY N AND hIAT I AM A OINEER UNDER THE •E OF MINNESOTA -4 DOCUMENTS THAT DO NOT HAVE THE ARCHITECT OR ENGINEER OF RECORD SEAL AND SIGNATURE SHALL BE CONSIDERED NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION VISION CENTER LIGHTING PLANS AND SCHEDULES SHEET- VCE1 j Q Q O Oa r� © C:0 ; v O O W w a z m w w JL11 L—J z �� z Z LU W N0 z OCr Q O Z > J W W co V o N N Z LU LU O CO C D Z m G O 2020 VISION CENTER SPECIAL PROJECT ISSUE BLOCK CHECKED BY: KAW DRAWN BY: HS PROTO CYCLE: 07-01-2020 DOCUMENT DATE: 08-07-2020 THAT hA5 PLAN. IN:PORT WAS OR UNDEN MY N AND hIAT I AM A OINEER UNDER THE •E OF MINNESOTA -4 DOCUMENTS THAT DO NOT HAVE THE ARCHITECT OR ENGINEER OF RECORD SEAL AND SIGNATURE SHALL BE CONSIDERED NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION VISION CENTER LIGHTING PLANS AND SCHEDULES SHEET- VCE1 j ELECTRICAL CIRCUITRY BY E.C. TO POWER POLE (REF POWER PLANS FOR CIRCUIT QUANTITIES AND INFORMATION) EXISTING CEILING GRID LAMLITE CEILING BEAMS FURNISHED BY OWNER, INSTALLED BY GC NEW TABLE FURNISHED BY OWNER, INSTALLED BY GC. NEW CASEWORK FURNISHED BY OWNER, INSTALLED BY GC MANUFACTURER'S ELECTRICAL JUNCTION BOX ON POWER POLE LVC (EXISTING) SERVES: VISION CENTER LOCATION: VISION CENTER VOICE/DATA ROUGH -IN SCHEDULE 09.27.19 PANELBOARD DROP ROUGH -IN NOTES: 208Y/120 V, 3PH, 4W 100 A, M.L.O. (FED FROM 60A BKR IN PANEL 1_26) 16.454 DESCRIPTION WIRE BRKR PL A B C PL BRKR WIRE DESCRIPTION ALL JUNCTION BOXES TO BE ROUGHED IN AT SCHEDULED HEIGHT UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE ON DRAWINGS. 1 receptacles (13) 4. 20 A 1 1.08 T0.72 0.18 0.00 0.58 1.20 0.72 0.00 0.00-F-0.-00-1space 1.68 1.20 2.04 0.26 0.10 1.80 L0.72 0.00 0.00 0.00 1.50 1.80 1.80 1.20 0.18 0.00 0.36 0.00 0.00 0.00 1 20 A 7. pretest recept (13) 2 3 receptacles (13) AREAS OPEN TO STRUCTURE. 20 A 1 1 20 A TERMINATION. WORKSTATION RECEPTS (19) 4 5 receptacles (13) CONNECTION DETAIL. 20 A 1 1 20 A FURNISH AND INSTALL NEW 20 AMP, 120 VOLT WRKSTATION FRAME WRMER (19) 6 7 existing load (22) ROOF OR THE EXTERIOR SIDE OF THE EXTERIOR WALLS. 20 A 1 1 20 A TWO WEEKS IN ADVANCE OF THE STORE POWER reception (13) 8 9 tint bath (13) 12. ONLY FEEDER CIRCUITS NOTED ON THE ONE LINE DIAGRAM AND 20 A 1 1 20 A #4 elec med records (13) 10 11 edger (13) #4 20 A 1 1 20 A ELECTRICAL CONNECTION POINT. WORKSTATION RECEPTS 12 13 existing load (22) BREAKERS. 20 A 1 1 20 A D. CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY ALL WALL FINISH THICKNESS W RKSTATION RECEPTS 14 15 OPT SLS PND/ADJST UC LTS PER SPECIFICATIONS. INSTALLATION OF NEW EQUIPMENT 20 A 1 1 20 A ROUTE CIRCUIT THROUGH EXISTING LCU CABINET WORKSTATION FRAME WARMER 16 17 OPT SALES RCPTS 20 A 1 -- -- EXISTING UNDERGROUND SERVICES (ELECTRICAL, TELEPHONE, space 18 19 ADJUSTMENTS PLUGMOLD (4) IMMEDIATELY TO COORDINATE RESOLUTION. 20 A 1 PANELBOARDS HAVE CIRCUIT BREAKER KNOCKOUTS OR OTHERWISE REWORK THESE SERVICES TO MAINTAIN THEIR SHALL MATCH MANUFACTURER, TYPE AND AIC space 20 21 ADUSTMENTS PLUGMOLD (4) PROPERLY COVERED AND THAT ALL TRIM IS IN GOOD 20 A 1 4. ELECTRONIC FIRE PROTECTION/SECURITY ALARM PROVIDE COMPLETE TYPEWRITTEN PANELBOARD space 22 23 ADJUSTMENTS RECEPTS 20 A 1 REFER TO PANELBOARD NOTE (11). 16.492 space 24 25 space 2. PROVIDE SEALS AT RACEWAY PENETRATIONS AS FOLLOWS: EQUIPMENT, CONDUIT AND CONDUCTORS AS INDICATED ON CIRCUIT DESIGNATIONS SHOWN ON DRAWINGS. ADDITION, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE, THE 2. 26 27 space DEMOLITION PLANS THE EXTENT OF ELECTRICAL RELAYS, TIME SWITCHES, LIGHTS, DEVICES, ETC., WHICH WILL BOARDS SHALL MATCH THE TYPE AND AIC RATING OF NOT BE REUSED. space 28 29 space o72s19 3. STOPPING. AREA): CUT WIRING LOOSE AND REMOVE FROM RACEWAY(S), BOXES, CONDUITS, AND WIRING BACK TO ALL EXISTING ELECTRICAL PANELBOARDS AFFECTED space 30 TOTAL CONNECTED TOTAL CONNECTED TOTAL LOAD PER NEC ARTICLE 220 FEEDER LOAD 4.48 37.33 19.12 19.15 7.80 68.05 KVA KVA 6.84 60.03 53.08 53.15 KVA AMPS AMPS AMPS 4"X4"X2-1/8" MINIMUM. 1. TERMINATE GROUND ON ISOLATED GROUND BUS. NEW ESCUTCHEON PLATE FURNISHED BY OWNER, INSTALLED BY GC NEW POWER POLE FURNISHED BY OWNER, INSTALLED BY GC NEW ESCUTCHEON PLATE FURNISHED BY OWNER, INSTALLED BY GC REFERENCE MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS FOR MOUNTING IN CABINET GENERAL POWER RECEPTACLES FOR LISTED PLUGMOLD CONNECTION. DEDICATED RECEPTACLE FOR SECOND FRAME WARMER, IF PRESENT AT WORKSTATION. OTHERWISE, GENERAL POWER RECEPTACLE. DEDICATED RECEPTACLE FOR FRAME WARMER, IF SHOWN AT WORKSTATION. IF NO WARMER, GENERAL POWER RECEPTACLE REFERENCE MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS FOR MOUNTING IN CABINET VISION CENTER POWER POLE DETAIL NTS EXISTING ELECTRICAL 8 DEVICES NOT SHOWN SHALL REMAIN ALL ALARM DEVICES SHALL BE EXISTING TO REMAIN. SUBMIT RFI FOR ANY EXISTING ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL PERMANENTLY INSTALL OWNER FURNISHED POWER STRIP TO MILLWORK AND CONNECT TO POWER POLE. FRAME WARMERS ARE NOT TO BE PLUGGED INTO POWER STRIP. ELECTRICAL DEVICES THAT CONFLICT WITH NEW MILLWORK. ____________________ --------------------- - ----_ ------------------------ 0 -------------------- f Fri COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION OF POWER POLES WITH PRE -MANUFACTURED HOLES PROVIDED IN TABLES AND CASH WRAPS. REF ARCHITECTURAL PLANS FOR EXACT LOCATIONS OF TABLES AND CASH WRAPS. e. VISION CENTER JUNCTION BOX AT - POWER POLE, TYP STRUCTURE, TYP OF 5 J 16.470 LVC 6 TYP OF 3 3 LC -4 VCE2 1 .470 o LVC-16 LVC-14 1 ° ® J 16.470 16.470 LVC-12 i 16.470 OPTICAL SALES +52" +44" 16.455 +44" 16.454 GFI, .44" LIGHT SWITCH AND GFI RECEPTACLE LVC-21 HORIZONTALLY FOR UNDERCABINET 16.475 16.475 I IGHTING3, MOUNT LIGHT 21AI TGH AT LVC-23 +44" AND GFI RECEPTACLE 16.470 HORIZONTALLY AT +52" I tl� ETR E I ETR PRETEST ADJUSTMENTS WAITING ------- I 'ONTACTS LVC-17- 16.470 16.454 +44" 16.455 +44" E R CONNECT TO NEW UNDERCABINET PAN L LIGHTING CIRCUIT TO OPTICAL LVIS SALES LIGHTING CIRCUIT LVC-15 NEW I I I VISION CENTER POWER PLAN 1/4" = 1 '-0" II II II .I KEYNOTES GENERAL POWER NOTES POWER INTERRUPTION NOTE GENERAL NOTES 07.26.19 11.30.18 VOICE/DATA ROUGH -IN SCHEDULE 09.27.19 TELEPOWER POLE(S): MOUNT JUNCTION BOX(ES) TO DROP ROUGH -IN NOTES: -a 16.454 FLUSH MOUNT JUNCTION BOX AT +20" (UNO) WITH (1) 3/4" CONDUIT STUBBED 12" ABOVE LAY -IN CEILING. -b TOP SIDE OF BOTTOM CHORD OF BAR JOIST. INSTALL FLUSH MOUNT JUNCTION BOX AT +20" (UNO) WITH (1) 3/4" CONDUIT ROUTED TO NEAREST ACCESSIBLE CEILING SPACE. -c FOR A COMPLETE INSTALLATION IN ALL RESPECTS, READY FOR SURFACE MOUNT JUNCTION BOX AT +66" (UNO) WITH (1) 3/4" CONDUIT STUBBED TO ACCESSIBLE CEILING SPACE. SCHEDULE GENERAL NOTES: 1. ALL JUNCTION BOXES SHALL BE DOUBLE GANG WITH SINGLE GANG PLASTER RING UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE ON SCHEDULE. 2. ALL JUNCTION BOXES TO BE ROUGHED IN AT SCHEDULED HEIGHT UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE ON DRAWINGS. 3. ALL CONDUITS SHALL BE TERMINATED WITH BUSHINGS. 4. PROVIDE PULL WIRE WITH EACH EMPTY RACEWAY (JUNCTION BOX/CONDUIT) INSTALLED. 5. CONDUIT RUNS SHALL HAVE NO MORE THAN 90 DEGREES OF TRANSITION BETWEEN PULL BOXES. 6. WHERE CONDUIT(S) TRAVERSE AREAS WITH CEILINGS OPEN TO STRUCTURE, CONDUIT(S) SHALL BE CONCEALED AS WELL AS POSSIBLE FROM VIEW PANELBOARD NOTE (22). FROM CUSTOMER AREA. 7. FOR CONDUIT RUNS SCHEDULED WITH 1-1/2" OR LARGER CONDUIT UTILIZE LARGE RADIUS SWEEPS AT POINTS OF TRANSITION. 8. ACCESSIBLE CEILING SPACE SHALL BE CONSIDERED 12 INCHES ABOVE A LAY -IN CEILING OR ABOVE BAR JOIST ACCESSIBLE BY A SCISSOR LIFT FOR RECOMMENDATIONS. PAY ALL NECESSARY FEES AND PERMITS. AREAS OPEN TO STRUCTURE. EXISTING ELECTRICAL 8 DEVICES NOT SHOWN SHALL REMAIN ALL ALARM DEVICES SHALL BE EXISTING TO REMAIN. SUBMIT RFI FOR ANY EXISTING ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL PERMANENTLY INSTALL OWNER FURNISHED POWER STRIP TO MILLWORK AND CONNECT TO POWER POLE. FRAME WARMERS ARE NOT TO BE PLUGGED INTO POWER STRIP. ELECTRICAL DEVICES THAT CONFLICT WITH NEW MILLWORK. ____________________ --------------------- - ----_ ------------------------ 0 -------------------- f Fri COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION OF POWER POLES WITH PRE -MANUFACTURED HOLES PROVIDED IN TABLES AND CASH WRAPS. REF ARCHITECTURAL PLANS FOR EXACT LOCATIONS OF TABLES AND CASH WRAPS. e. VISION CENTER JUNCTION BOX AT - POWER POLE, TYP STRUCTURE, TYP OF 5 J 16.470 LVC 6 TYP OF 3 3 LC -4 VCE2 1 .470 o LVC-16 LVC-14 1 ° ® J 16.470 16.470 LVC-12 i 16.470 OPTICAL SALES +52" +44" 16.455 +44" 16.454 GFI, .44" LIGHT SWITCH AND GFI RECEPTACLE LVC-21 HORIZONTALLY FOR UNDERCABINET 16.475 16.475 I IGHTING3, MOUNT LIGHT 21AI TGH AT LVC-23 +44" AND GFI RECEPTACLE 16.470 HORIZONTALLY AT +52" I tl� ETR E I ETR PRETEST ADJUSTMENTS WAITING ------- I 'ONTACTS LVC-17- 16.470 16.454 +44" 16.455 +44" E R CONNECT TO NEW UNDERCABINET PAN L LIGHTING CIRCUIT TO OPTICAL LVIS SALES LIGHTING CIRCUIT LVC-15 NEW I I I VISION CENTER POWER PLAN 1/4" = 1 '-0" II II II .I KEYNOTES GENERAL POWER NOTES POWER INTERRUPTION NOTE GENERAL NOTES 07.26.19 11.30.18 8 EXISTING ELECTRICAL DEVICES NOT SHOWN SHALL REMAIN. ELECTRICAL DEVICES AND BRANCH GATE KEY CONTROL UNUSED CIRCUITRY TO REMAIN, IF CIRCUITRY 16.775 EXISTING 16.492 ___ _REF_.2-_VCE2___________- ------------------------ ---- 0 I E====� I II I OPTICAL SALES I � � I I � � I I REMOVE ALL POWER POLES / �) \ AND ELECTRICAL DEVICES _ ABOVE +5'-0" IN OPTICAL SALES I EXISTING FLOOR BOXES IN OPTICAL SALES AREA I TO BE ABANDONED (REF ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS). DEMOLISH EXISTING BRANCH CIRCUITRY FROM FLOOR BOXES TO NEAREST JUNCTION BOX AS REQUIRED. CONTACTS I I I I I 1. TELEPOWER POLE(S): MOUNT JUNCTION BOX(ES) TO COORDINATE ALL WORK THAT REQUIRES POWER 1. FURNISH AND INSTALL ALL MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT, AND LABOR, 16.454 PROVIDE A RECESSED SINGLE GANG BOX WITH 770 FT. TOP SIDE OF BOTTOM CHORD OF BAR JOIST. INSTALL INTERRUPTIONS TO THE STORE WITH THE STORE 11. FOR A COMPLETE INSTALLATION IN ALL RESPECTS, READY FOR 385 FT. WIREMOLD V2448 SINGLE -GANG DEVICE BOX LOAD. REMOVE CIRCUIT BREAKER AND REPLACE FURNISHED POWER POLE AND TERMINATE WIRING MANAGER AND THE WALMART CONSTRUCTION MANAGER WITH BLANK COVER. UPDATE TYPEWRITTEN CIRCUIT INTENDED USE AND IN STRICT ACCORDANCE WITH NEC, NESC, #6 AND BLANK COVER PLATE TO SERVE PLUGMOLD CIRCUITS HAVE #8 AND LARGER WIRE SPECIFIED, #10 AWG WIRE TO JUNCTION BOX. PROVIDE UNISTRUT SUPPORTS A MINIMUM OF 48 HOURS IN ADVANCE OF ALL STORE SHALL BE USED FOR THE FINAL CONNECTION (15 -FT MAXIMUM). STATE, AND LOCAL CODES, AND MANUFACTURER'S PANELBOARD NOTE (22). STRIP. #3 AND HARDWARE TO SECURE TELEPOWER POLE POWER INTERRUPTIONS. IN ADDITION, IF THE MAIN 12. RECOMMENDATIONS. PAY ALL NECESSARY FEES AND PERMITS. 16.455 INSTALL FURNISHED WIREMOLD V24GB SERIES EMERGENCY/NIGHT LIGHTING TO UNSWITCHED PLUMB TO BUILDING STRUCTURE. REF POWER POLE ELECTRICAL SWITCHGEAR REQUIRES WORK AND DOES TERMINATION. 10. PROVIDE UL LISTED HANDLE TIES ON ALL MULTIWIRE BRANCH #4 PLUGMOLD FED FROM SURFACE DEVICE BOX. CIRCUITS PER NEC REQUIREMENTS. CONNECTION DETAIL. NOT HAVE A MAIN SERVICE DISCONNECTING MEANS, #6 A. NO CIRCUITRY SHALL BE ALLOWED TO BE ROUTED ACROSS THE 16.470 FURNISH AND INSTALL NEW 20 AMP, 120 VOLT 14. ROUTE CIRCUIT THROUGH CONTACTOR. COORDINATE WITH THE UTILITY COMPANY A MINIMUM OF #10 ROOF OR THE EXTERIOR SIDE OF THE EXTERIOR WALLS. ONLY THE TOP AND BOTTOM CHORDS FOR SUPPORTING THE CIRCUIT(S). FEED FROM PANELBOARD AS 2. PROVIDE LIQUID -TIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT TWO WEEKS IN ADVANCE OF THE STORE POWER ANSUL SYSTEM. B. ALL EQUIPMENT SHALL BE UL LISTED WHERE APPLICABLE. #3 INDICATED. PROVIDE 20A-1 P CIRCUIT BREAKER 12. ONLY FEEDER CIRCUITS NOTED ON THE ONE LINE DIAGRAM AND AND WIRING FROM DISCONNECT SWITCH OR INTERRUPTION. IF STORE IS NOT OPEN 24 HOURS PER BRANCH CIRCUITS NOTED BY LEGEND SHALL BE INSTALLED UNDER C. ARRANGE ALL WORK TO MINIMIZE DISRUPTIONS TO STORE #4 IF NEEDED. E.C. SHALL MATCH MANUFACTURER, 17. JUNCTION BOX TO EQUIPMENT KNOCKOUT OR DAY, ALL STORE POWER INTERRUPTIONS ARE TO BE #4 OPERATIONS. COORDINATE ALL DISRUPTIONS WITH WALMART SPECIFICATION SECTION 16.100 FOR UNDER SLAB. TYPE AND AIC RATINGS OF EXISTING CIRCUIT PROVIDE U.L. LISTED OVERCURRENT DEVICE TO ELECTRICAL CONNECTION POINT. ACCOMPLISHED AFTER NORMAL STORE BUSINESS COORDINATE AND MAINTAIN MANUFACTURER'S CONSTRUCTION MANAGER AND STORE MANAGER. #4 BREAKERS. LOCAL CODES. 19. HOURS. PROVIDE TEMPORARY POWER AS REQUIRED 14. EXISTING ELECTRICAL AND ALARM: D. CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY ALL WALL FINISH THICKNESS 16.475 FURNISH AND INSTALL NEW 20 AMP, 120 VOLT AMP,10 3. WHERE EQUIPMENT NAMEPLATE PROTECTIVE PER SPECIFICATIONS. INSTALLATION OF NEW EQUIPMENT #8 BEFORE INSTALLING BOXES. FURNISH AND INSTALL EXTENDED DEVICES, OR LIGHTING TO REMAIN, BUT NOT SHOWN ON CIRCUIT(S). FEED FROM PANELBOARD M ROUTE CIRCUIT THROUGH EXISTING LCU CABINET DEVICE RATING DIFFERS FROM SIZE PROVIDED, SHALL BE COMPLETED AND THE POWER SYSTEM TESTED UTILIZING EXISTING RELAY AND CONTROLS. UPDATE BOXES OR BOX EXTENDERS WHERE REQUIRED. INDICATED. PROVIDE P CIRCUIT B. IF DEMOLITION OR NEW CONSTRUCTION WILL DISRUPT NOTIFY WALMART CONSTRUCTION MANAGER AND RE -ENERGIZED PRIOR TO THE TIME ESTABLISHED BY EXISTING UNDERGROUND SERVICES (ELECTRICAL, TELEPHONE, E. CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY THAT ALL AFFECTED BREAKER FOR PERSONNEL PROTECTION. E.C. 21. IMMEDIATELY TO COORDINATE RESOLUTION. THE STORE MANAGER AND THE WALMART PANELBOARDS HAVE CIRCUIT BREAKER KNOCKOUTS OR OTHERWISE REWORK THESE SERVICES TO MAINTAIN THEIR SHALL MATCH MANUFACTURER, TYPE AND AIC BREAKER CONTROL. EXISTING OPERATION. CONSTRUCTION MANAGER. PROPERLY COVERED AND THAT ALL TRIM IS IN GOOD 22. RATINGS OF EXISTING CIRCUIT BREAKERS. 4. ELECTRONIC FIRE PROTECTION/SECURITY ALARM PROVIDE COMPLETE TYPEWRITTEN PANELBOARD CONDITION, ALLOWING NO ACCESS TO LIVE PARTS. IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE AND PLACE ON INTERIOR SYSTEMS REMAIN OPERATIONAL AT ALL TIMES. BOXES AND CONDUITS SHOWN ON POWER PLANS D. DISPOSE OF ALL REMOVED MATERIALS, UNLESS OTHERWISE REFER TO PANELBOARD NOTE (11). 16.492 E.C. SHALL COORDINATE WITH GENERAL CONTRACTOR AND ARCHITECTURAL 1. SHALL BE PROVIDED UNDER THIS CONTRACT. IN PANELBOARD NOTES () 2. PROVIDE SEALS AT RACEWAY PENETRATIONS AS FOLLOWS: EQUIPMENT, CONDUIT AND CONDUCTORS AS INDICATED ON CIRCUIT DESIGNATIONS SHOWN ON DRAWINGS. ADDITION, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE, THE 2. NEW OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES PLACED A. FIRE RATED WALLS: SEAL PER SPECIFICATIONS FOR FIRE DEMOLITION PLANS THE EXTENT OF ELECTRICAL RELAYS, TIME SWITCHES, LIGHTS, DEVICES, ETC., WHICH WILL BOARDS SHALL MATCH THE TYPE AND AIC RATING OF NOT BE REUSED. EXISTING OVERCURRENT PROTECTION DEVICES IN DEMOLITION. REMOVE UNUSED DEVICES, FOLLOWING GENERAL NOTES APPLY: o72s19 3. STOPPING. AREA): CUT WIRING LOOSE AND REMOVE FROM RACEWAY(S), BOXES, CONDUITS, AND WIRING BACK TO ALL EXISTING ELECTRICAL PANELBOARDS AFFECTED A. ALL ALARM JUNCTION BOXES SHALL BE B. NEUTRALIZATION AREA: SEAL PER MECHANICAL DETAIL. WALLS OR FLOORS SHALL BE REMOVED BACK TO FINISHED ORIGINATING JUNCTION BOXES OR SURFACE AND CAPPED INSIDE. REPAIR SURFACE(S) TO MATCH 4"X4"X2-1/8" MINIMUM. 1. TERMINATE GROUND ON ISOLATED GROUND BUS. ADJACENT. AFFECTED PANELBOARDS. PANELBOARDS. REFERENCE POWER PLANS FOR 4. B. ALARM RACEWAYS SHALL BE 3/4" MINIMUM WITH REMOVED SHALL ALSO BE REMOVED. REMOVE CIRCUIT 3. PROVIDE A SEPARATE EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTOR (SIZE BREAKER AND REPLACE WITH FILLER PLATE. UPDATE CIRCUITRY TO BE REUSED. DEMOLITION SHALL PULL WIRE AND INSULATING BUSHINGS AT END 2. INSTALL LOCKING DEVICE (LOCK -OFF FOR PER NEC) IN PVC TYPE CONDUIT, POWER AND LIGHTING CIRCUITS, "SPACE". NOT AFFECT ACTIVE CIRCUITS. IF CIRCUIT IS D. DEMOLISHED FLUORESCENT LIGHT FIXTURES: REFER TO SELECTIVE SITE DEMOLITION SPECIFICATION FOR DISPOSAL OF OF VERTICAL RACEWAY RUN. MAINTENANCE). LOCKING DEVICE SHALL BE UL LIGHT FIXTURE. ISOLATED GROUND CIRCUITS, OR AS SHOWN ON PLANS. CONDUIT DEMOLISHED ALL THE WAY TO PANELBOARD, C. VERTICAL RACEWAYS FROM ALARM BOXES LISTED. MANUFACTURER SHALL MATCH EXISTING SHALL BE SECURED TO PREVENT FALLING, LOOSENING, OR SHALL BE SIZED PER NEC BASED ON THWN 600 VOLT COPPER INTENDED TO BE MINIMUM ACCEPTABLE WIRE SIZE. REMOVE CIRCUIT BREAKER AND REPLACE WITH SHALL BE EITHER CONCEALED INSIDE WALL OR PANELBOARD MANUFACTURER. SINGLE CONDUCTORS, PLUS THE EQUIPMENT GROUNDING ALL RACEWAY AND CONDUIT SLEEVES FOR DATA AND PHONE FILLER PLATER. UPDATE TYPEWRITTEN CIRCUIT LENGHTS (IN FEET) ARE INTENDED TO BE MAXIMUM. SURFACE MOUNTED (TO MATCH JUNCTION BOX CONDUCTOR. DIRECTORY IDENTIFYING CIRCUIT AS "SPACE". MOUNTING). ALL VERTICAL RUNS SHALL BE 3. INSTALL LOCKING DEVICE (LOCK -ON FOR CRITICAL COORDINATE EXACT REQUIREMENTS WITH TURNED 90 -DEGREES AT TOP SIDE OF BOTTOM LOAD). 4. WIRING DEVICES: DEVICE MOUNTING HEIGHTS ARE FROM FINISHED EXISTING CONDITIONS PRIOR TO BID. CHORD OF BAR JOIST AND EXTENDED FLOOR TO CENTER OF OUTLET BOX UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE ON HORIZONTALLY TO A LOCATION ACCESSIBLE BY 4. GFI BREAKER FOR PERSONNEL PROTECTION (5MA). PLANS. COORDINATE THE STANDARD MOUNTING HEIGHTS WITH 16.775 E.C. SHALL DISCONNECT, EXTEND, AND VERTICAL FLOOR TYPE LIFT. MASONRY: RECONNECT ALL ELECTRICAL CIRCUITRY FOR 5. GFI BREAKER FOR EQUIPMENT PROTECTION (30MA). A. SWITCHES +44" NEW OR RELOCATED EQUIPMENT. REFERENCE 5. UPON COMPLETION OF ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION B. RECEPTACLES +20" POWER PLANS AS APPLICABLE. VERIFY AND PRIOR TO ENERGIZING CIRCUIT: 6. CONDUCTOR SIZE HAS BEEN INCREASED FOR C. VOICE/DATA +20" CONDITION OF BRANCH CIRCUIT, CONDUIT, AND A. INSPECT WIRE AND CABLE FOR PHYSICAL VOLTAGE DROP. SIZE EQUIPMENT GROUNDING WIRE PRIOR TO USE TO ENSURE THAT THEY DAMAGE. CONDUCTOR PROPORTIONATELY PER NEC. 5. WIRING SHALL INCLUDE FINAL CONNECTION TO ALL EQUIPMENT IN MEET ALL U.L. RATINGS AND REPLACE AS B. PERFORM CONTINUITY TEST. CONFORMANCE WITH EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER WIRING DIAGRAMS. REQUIRED. COORDINATE THIS PROCESS WITH C. VERIFY PROPER PHASING CONNECTION TO ALL 7. REFER TO ONE -LINE DIAGRAM FOR AVAILABLE FAULT CONSTRUCTION MANAGER TO MINIMIZE THREE PHASE MOTOR LOADS. CURRENT FOR INTERRUPT RATINGS. 6. CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR PROVIDING COMPLETE DOWNTIME. LABEL ALL ASSOCIATED PANELBOARD IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULES FOR PANELBOARDS PANELBOARD SCHEDULES TO REFLECT LOAD 8. REFER TO ONE -LINE DIAGRAMS FOR WIRE SIZES. AFFECTED BY REMODEL. DESCRIPTIONS. 8 EXISTING ELECTRICAL DEVICES NOT SHOWN SHALL REMAIN. ELECTRICAL DEVICES AND BRANCH GATE KEY CONTROL UNUSED CIRCUITRY TO REMAIN, IF CIRCUITRY 16.775 EXISTING 16.492 ___ _REF_.2-_VCE2___________- ------------------------ ---- 0 I E====� I II I OPTICAL SALES I � � I I � � I I REMOVE ALL POWER POLES / �) \ AND ELECTRICAL DEVICES _ ABOVE +5'-0" IN OPTICAL SALES I EXISTING FLOOR BOXES IN OPTICAL SALES AREA I TO BE ABANDONED (REF ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS). DEMOLISH EXISTING BRANCH CIRCUITRY FROM FLOOR BOXES TO NEAREST JUNCTION BOX AS REQUIRED. CONTACTS F ---L-- I I I I I I - - I - - - - - - - - - - - - F ---L-- I F 7. NEW OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES INSTALLED IN EXISTING #8 WAITING h UJVJ I IVICIV I J ETR I I I I L -j L -j VISION CENTER DEMO POWER PLANT 1/4" = V-0" 9. FACTORY WIRED TO LOAD. 7. NEW OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES INSTALLED IN EXISTING #8 #6 PANELBOARDS OR DISTRIBUTION BOARDS SHALL MATCH THE TYPE 10. BREAKER SHALL BE HIGH MAGNETIC TYPE. AND AIC RATING OF EXISTING OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE 770 FT. 6-10 AMPS DEVICES. 11. FIELD VERIFY BREAKER IS NOT CONNECTED TO ANY 385 FT. 11-15 AMPS LOAD. REMOVE CIRCUIT BREAKER AND REPLACE 8. BRANCH CIRCUIT CONDUCTORS SHALL BE MINIMUM #12 AWG 165 FT. WITH BLANK COVER. UPDATE TYPEWRITTEN CIRCUIT UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE IN SCHEDULES. WHERE 20A BRANCH #6 DIRECTORY IDENTIFYING CIRCUIT AS "SPACE". IF AN CIRCUITS HAVE #8 AND LARGER WIRE SPECIFIED, #10 AWG WIRE 25-30 EXISTING LOAD IS CONNECTED, REFER TO SHALL BE USED FOR THE FINAL CONNECTION (15 -FT MAXIMUM). #8 PANELBOARD NOTE (22). #4 #3 9. WHERE BRANCH CIRCUITS ARE GROUPED, SIZE CONDUIT AND 12. DUAL TAP SOLENOID OPERATED BREAKER. CONNECT DERATE CURRENT CARRYING CONDUCTORS PER NEC. #3 EMERGENCY/NIGHT LIGHTING TO UNSWITCHED 35-50 GROUND TERMINATION. 10. PROVIDE UL LISTED HANDLE TIES ON ALL MULTIWIRE BRANCH #4 #4 CIRCUITS PER NEC REQUIREMENTS. 13. EXISTING CIRCUIT. #6 #4 #3 11. SUPPORTS FROM STRUCTURE: NO ATTACHMENT OF ANY TYPE 14. ROUTE CIRCUIT THROUGH CONTACTOR. SHALL BE MADE TO BRIDGING OR JOIST WEB MEMBERS. UTILIZE #10 #6 ONLY THE TOP AND BOTTOM CHORDS FOR SUPPORTING THE 15. PROVIDE INTERLOCK WIRING WITH EXHAUST HOOD ELECTRICAL SYSTEM INSTALLATIONS. PHASE ANSUL SYSTEM. #4 #3 #2 12. ONLY FEEDER CIRCUITS NOTED ON THE ONE LINE DIAGRAM AND 16. RELOCATED CIRCUIT FROM EXISTING PANELBOARD. BRANCH CIRCUITS NOTED BY LEGEND SHALL BE INSTALLED UNDER #4 #4 SLAB. PROVIDE EXTERIOR COATED GRC BENDS ON ALL CONDUIT 17. PROVIDE BLANK CIRCUIT BREAKER FILLER PLATE RUNS THAT HAVE 45 DEGREE BENDS OR GREATER. REFER TO #4 FOR EXPOSED SPACE IN PANELBOARD. SPECIFICATION SECTION 16.100 FOR UNDER SLAB. 18. PROVIDE U.L. LISTED OVERCURRENT DEVICE TO 13. SEISMIC ZONE REQUIREMENTS: PROVIDE EXPANSION COUPLINGS GROUND COORDINATE AND MAINTAIN MANUFACTURER'S AND BRACING FOR ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT AS REQUIRED BY #4 SERIES RATED SYSTEM. LOCAL CODES. 19. EXISTING CIRCUIT BREAKER TO REMAIN. VERIFY 14. EXISTING ELECTRICAL AND ALARM: #2 CONDITION OF CIRCUIT BREAKER TO ENSURE THAT IT A. WHERE DEMOLITION OR NEW CONSTRUCTION INTERRUPTS #2/0 IS OPERATIONAL AND MEETS ALL U.L. RATINGS. EXISTING ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS FEEDING EXISTING EQUIPMENT, #8 #6 DEVICES, OR LIGHTING TO REMAIN, BUT NOT SHOWN ON 20. ROUTE CIRCUIT THROUGH EXISTING LCU CABINET DRAWINGS, PROVIDE LABOR AND MATERIALS TO REWORK UTILIZING EXISTING RELAY AND CONTROLS. UPDATE CIRCUITRY, AS REQUIRED, TO MAINTAIN EXISTING OPERATION. LCU IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE WITH LOAD B. IF DEMOLITION OR NEW CONSTRUCTION WILL DISRUPT IDENTIFICATION. EXISTING UNDERGROUND SERVICES (ELECTRICAL, TELEPHONE, PARKING LOT LIGHTING CIRCUITRY, ETC.) PROVIDE ALL 21. SOLENOID OPERATED CIRCUIT BREAKER. REFER TO MATERIALS AND LABOR AS REQUIRED TO REROUTE, SLEEVE, ENERGY MANAGEMENT PLANS FOR CIRCUIT OR OTHERWISE REWORK THESE SERVICES TO MAINTAIN THEIR BREAKER CONTROL. EXISTING OPERATION. C. EXERCISE CAUTION AROUND ALARM AND SECURITY CABLES 22. TRACE EXISTING CIRCUIT, IDENTIFY LOAD AND DURING DEMOLITION AND CONSTRUCTION. PROTECT ALARM PROVIDE COMPLETE TYPEWRITTEN PANELBOARD AND SECURITY CABLES FROM ACCIDENTAL DAMAGE SO THAT IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE AND PLACE ON INTERIOR SYSTEMS REMAIN OPERATIONAL AT ALL TIMES. OF PANELBOARD DOOR. IF CIRCUIT ISA "SPARE", D. DISPOSE OF ALL REMOVED MATERIALS, UNLESS OTHERWISE REFER TO PANELBOARD NOTE (11). NOTED. 15. EXISTING ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION: GENERAL NOTES: 1. E.C. SHALL ADD OR REARRANGE CIRCUIT BREAKERS A. GENERAL: REMOVE OR RELOCATE EXISTING ELECTRICAL WITHIN PANELBOARDS AS REQUIRED TO MATCH NEW EQUIPMENT, CONDUIT AND CONDUCTORS AS INDICATED ON CIRCUIT DESIGNATIONS SHOWN ON DRAWINGS. THE DRAWINGS, OR ONLY AS REQUIRED BY DEMOLITION. 2. NEW OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES PLACED REMOVE ALL PANELBOARDS, DISCONNECT SWITCHES, BOXES, IN EXISTING PANELBOARDS OR DISTRIBUTION RELAYS, TIME SWITCHES, LIGHTS, DEVICES, ETC., WHICH WILL BOARDS SHALL MATCH THE TYPE AND AIC RATING OF NOT BE REUSED. EXISTING OVERCURRENT PROTECTION DEVICES IN B. CONDUIT AND WIRING TO BE ABANDONED IN CEILING SPACES SAID BOARD. AND OTHER NON-PUBLIC AREAS (I.E., THROUGH STOCKROOM 3. E.C. SHALL TRACE ALL ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS FOR AREA): CUT WIRING LOOSE AND REMOVE FROM RACEWAY(S), ALL EXISTING ELECTRICAL PANELBOARDS AFFECTED LEAVING RACEWAY(S) IN PLACE. CONDUIT TO BE ABANDONED IN BY THE REMODEL AND IDENTIFY LOADS ON EACH WALLS OR FLOORS SHALL BE REMOVED BACK TO FINISHED CIRCUIT. PROVIDE A COMPLETE TYPEWRITTEN SURFACE AND CAPPED INSIDE. REPAIR SURFACE(S) TO MATCH PANELBOARD IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE FOR ALL ADJACENT. AFFECTED PANELBOARDS. C. ALL CIRCUIT BREAKERS SERVING BRANCH CIRCUITS TO BE 4. ALL OVERCURRENT DEVICES ARE NEW UNLESS REMOVED SHALL ALSO BE REMOVED. REMOVE CIRCUIT NOTED OTHERWISE. BREAKER AND REPLACE WITH FILLER PLATE. UPDATE TYPEWRITTEN CIRCUIT DIRECTORY IDENTIFYING CIRCUIT AS "SPACE". 20A WIRE SIZING SCHEDULE D. DEMOLISHED FLUORESCENT LIGHT FIXTURES: REFER TO SELECTIVE SITE DEMOLITION SPECIFICATION FOR DISPOSAL OF LIGHT FIXTURE. E. BUILDING COMPONENTS ABANDONED BY THE SCOPE OF WORK ALL WIRE SIZES SHOWN ON PANEL SCHEDULES ARE SHALL BE SECURED TO PREVENT FALLING, LOOSENING, OR INTENDED TO BE MINIMUM ACCEPTABLE WIRE SIZE. CREATING DAMAGE OF ANY KIND IN THE FUTURE. THE FOLLOWING SCHEDULE IS TO BE USED TO SIZE 16. DATA AND PHONE CONDUIT INSTALLATION MILESTONE DATE: WIRE FOR 20 AMP CIRCUITS (120 AND 277 VOLT). ALL RACEWAY AND CONDUIT SLEEVES FOR DATA AND PHONE LENGHTS (IN FEET) ARE INTENDED TO BE MAXIMUM. CABLING TO BE INSTALLED 3 WEEKS PRIOR TO CONTRACT SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION DATE 120 VOLT #12 #10 #8 #6 1-5 AMPS 200 FT. 325 FT. 490 FT. 770 FT. 6-10 AMPS 100 FT. 160 FT. 245 FT. 385 FT. 11-15 AMPS 70 FT. 110 FT. 165 FT. 255 FT. 277 VOLT #12 #10 #8 #6 1-5 AMPS 480 FT. 760 FT. 1170 FT. 1865 FT. 6-10 AMPS 240 FT. 380 FT. 585 FT. 930 FT. 11-15 AMPS 160 FT. 250 FT. 390 FT. 620 FT. 17. ETHERNET CABLE: A. FURNISH AND INSTALL JUNCTION BOXES AS SHOWN ON PLANS. PROVIDE CONDUIT AS REQUIRED BY LOCAL CODES AND/OR ORDINANCES. B. ETHERNET CABLE IS FURNISHED BY OTHERS. C. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL INSTALL CABLE IN POWER POLES. D. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL INSTALL OTHER CABLE AS DIRECTED BY WALMART CONSTRUCTION MANAGER. GROUND WIRE SIZING CHART BREAKER AMPACITY WIRE WIRE SIZE 15-20 PHASE #12 #10 #8 #6 #4 OwwU) GROUND #12 #10 #8 #6 #4 "Ozo -zoQ w-jOmEomol-ozw PHASE #10 #8 #6 #4 #3 25-30 GROUND #10 #8 #6 #4 #3 PHASE #8 #6 #4 #3 #2 35-50 GROUND #10 #8 #4 #4 #4 60 PHASE #6 #4 #3 #2 #1 GROUND #10 #6 #6 #4 #4 PHASE #6 #4 #3 #2 #1 70 GROUND #8 #4 #4 #3 #2 80-90 PHASE #4 #3 #2 #1 #1/0 GROUND #8 #6 #4 #4 #3 PHASE #3 #2 #1 #1/0 #2/0 100 GROUND #8 #6 #4 #4 #3 WIRE SIZES PER NEC 250.122 (B) 2 architecture +engineering 2809 Ajax Avenue Suite 100 Rogers Arkansas 72758 Phone: 479.636.3545 Fax: 479.636.1209 Engineer of Record Keith Allen Williams, P.E. Minnesota License No. 45549 ISSUE BLOCK CHECKED BY: KAW DRAWN BY: HS PROTO CYCLE: 07-01-2020 DOCUMENT DATE: 08-07-2020 I HEREBY CERTIFY THAT THIS PLAN, SPECIFICATION, OR REPORT WAS PREPARED BY ME OR UNDER MY DIRECT SUPERVISION AND THAT I AM A DULY LICENSED ENGINEER UNDER THE LAWS OF THE STATE OF MINNESOTA. SIGNATURE TY -4 PES OR PRINTED NAME: KEITH A. WWAMS DATE: 08/06/2020 LICENSE NUMBER: 45549 DOCUMENTS THAT DO NOT HAVE THE ARCHITECT OR ENGINEER OF RECORD SEAL AND SIGNATURE SHALL BE CONSIDERED NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION VISION CENTER POWER PLANS AND SCHEDULES HEEVCE2 w ww U W U) �Z)O w zwwca,O�3 W 2z��znD �zr Fowc(zwcr QoowEwzzo�W %0 aaa wQ OwwU) pUwwo" Eo¢O�OWW0"-na20 z ¢Z��w Z� oz¢oNo�cc"'Wo�oH uO?zM1zz O � "Ozo -zoQ w-jOmEomol-ozw w D_ w LU M¢U 2zJU 0_ Xcnowx 0Or woawxa�z0 nOx< H U)wzzF�O�¢owiD�w U) �D2OOoccf) owQ�ww¢r ISSUE BLOCK CHECKED BY: KAW DRAWN BY: HS PROTO CYCLE: 07-01-2020 DOCUMENT DATE: 08-07-2020 I HEREBY CERTIFY THAT THIS PLAN, SPECIFICATION, OR REPORT WAS PREPARED BY ME OR UNDER MY DIRECT SUPERVISION AND THAT I AM A DULY LICENSED ENGINEER UNDER THE LAWS OF THE STATE OF MINNESOTA. SIGNATURE TY -4 PES OR PRINTED NAME: KEITH A. WWAMS DATE: 08/06/2020 LICENSE NUMBER: 45549 DOCUMENTS THAT DO NOT HAVE THE ARCHITECT OR ENGINEER OF RECORD SEAL AND SIGNATURE SHALL BE CONSIDERED NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION VISION CENTER POWER PLANS AND SCHEDULES HEEVCE2 Q ~ U w O %0 0 D_ O Ow Q U O O w D_ zm w EJ�--/�� �I�J z T ~ � Z w LU If U Z N O 0<0 az LU W J U Iz D WoOq 0-) o 0 N O N z LU LU 0 m C z m G O 2020 VISION CENTER SPECIAL PROJECT ISSUE BLOCK CHECKED BY: KAW DRAWN BY: HS PROTO CYCLE: 07-01-2020 DOCUMENT DATE: 08-07-2020 I HEREBY CERTIFY THAT THIS PLAN, SPECIFICATION, OR REPORT WAS PREPARED BY ME OR UNDER MY DIRECT SUPERVISION AND THAT I AM A DULY LICENSED ENGINEER UNDER THE LAWS OF THE STATE OF MINNESOTA. SIGNATURE TY -4 PES OR PRINTED NAME: KEITH A. WWAMS DATE: 08/06/2020 LICENSE NUMBER: 45549 DOCUMENTS THAT DO NOT HAVE THE ARCHITECT OR ENGINEER OF RECORD SEAL AND SIGNATURE SHALL BE CONSIDERED NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION VISION CENTER POWER PLANS AND SCHEDULES HEEVCE2 Wa I m a r t:;: PROJECT MANUAL VISION CENTER REMODEL For WAL-MART STORES, INC. STORE PLANNING Sam Walton Development Complex 2001 S.E. 10th Street Bentonville, Arkansas 72716-0550 DOCUMENT 00007 - SEALS PAGE ARCHITECT OF RECORD William Douglas Hurley 2809 Ajax Avenue, Suite 100 Rogers, Arkansas 72758 I HEREBY CERTIFY THAT THIS PLAN, SPECIFICATION, OR REPORT WAS PREPARED BY ME OR UNDER MY DIRECT SUPERVISION AND THAT I AM A DULY LICENSED ARCHITECT UNDER THE LAWS OF THE STATE OF MINNESOTA. SIGNATURE: , 4!9z TYPED OR PRINTED NAME: WILLIAM DOUGLAS HURLEY DATE: 08.06.2020 LICENSE NUMBER: 40383 Architect of Record 00007-1 08.06.2020 Date SEALS PAGE (Continued) MECHANICAL ENGINEER OF RECORD Joshua Dale McCall 2809 Ajax Avenue, Suite 100 Rogers, Arkansas 72758 CERTIFY THAT THIS PLAN, IICATON, OR REPORT WAS RED BY ME OR UNDER MY T SUPERNSION AND THAT I AM A LICENSED ENGINEER UNDER THE OF THE STATE OF MINNESOTA, /106, OR PRINTED NAME: UA DALE MCCALL DATE: 8/6/2020 LICENSE NUMBER: 53286 Engineer of Record 00007-3 111i11114MIX11 Date SEALS PAGE (Continued) ELECTRICAL ENGINEER OF RECORD Keith Allen Williams 2809 Ajax Avenue, Suite 100 Rogers, Arkansas 72758 HEREBY CERTIFY THAT THIS PLAN, 3ECIFICATION, OR REPORT WAS 2EPARED BY ME OR UNDER MY RECT SUPERVISION AND THAT I AM A JLY LICENSED ENGINEER UNDER THE AWS OF THE STATE OF MINNESOTA. 4 TYPEQ OR PRINTED NAME: KEITH A. WIWAMS DATE: 08/06/2020 Engineer of Record 00007-5 08.06.2020 Date UniSpec II - Store Planning 032720 SECTION 00010 - TABLE OF CONTENTS INTRODUCTORY INFORMATION 00001 Project Title Page 00007 Seals Page 00010 Table of Contents BIDDING REQUIREMENTS Bidding Requirements (including Invitation to Bids, Instructions to Bidders, and Bid Forms) may be obtained through the on- line Wal-Mart Bidding System and are not included in the Project Manual. CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS Contracting Requirements (including Construction Contract Between Wal-Mart and Contractor, Bond, and Certificate Forms) are issued by the Owner (Wal-Mart) under separate cover and are not included in the Project Manual. DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01100 Summary 01131 Alterations Project Procedures 01230 Alternates 01255 Request For Information 01310 Construction Management and Coordination 01312 Progress Meetings 01320 Construction Progress Documentation 01330 Submittal Procedures 01351 Regulatory Compliance 01452 Contractor's Quality Control 01500 Temporary Facilities and Controls 01550 Tension Pole Dust Barrier Systems 01600 Product Requirements 01731 Cutting and Patching 01740 Cleaning 01770 Contract Closeout DIVISION 2 - SITE CONSTRUCTION 02023 Selective Site Demolition DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE 03366 PVCNCT Removal and Polished Concrete Floor Finishes for Interior Slabs 03905 Interior Concrete Slab Repairs and Joint Filler Replacement DIVISION 4 - MASONRY NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 5 - METALS NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS 06100 Rough Carpentry 06400 Architectural Woodwork 06616 Simulated Stone Fabrications 00010-1 DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07210 Building Insulation 07840 Firestopping 07900 Joint Sealers DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 9 - FINISHES 09250 Gypsum Board 09511 Acoustical Panel Ceilings 09650 Resilient Flooring 09655 Resilient Base and Accessories 09900 Paints and Coatings DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES 10260 Wall and Corner Guards DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 13.1 - FIRE PROTECTION (By Fire Protection Engineer of Record) The Sections within this Division are the responsibility of the Fire Protection Engineer. 13900 Fire Suppression DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL (By M.E.P. Engineer of Record) The Sections within this Division are the responsibility of the Mechanical Engineer. 15050 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods 15100 Building Services Piping and Equipment 15410 Plumbing Fixtures 15800 Air Distribution DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL (By M.E.P. Engineer of Record) The Sections within this Division are the responsibility of the Electrical Engineer. 16050 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods 16100 Wiring Methods 16442 Branch Circuit Panelboards 16500 Lighting 16700 Communications OWNER FURNISHED REFERENCES Appendix A Products and Work by Owner or Separate Contractor END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS 00010-2 UniSpec II - Store Planning SECTION 01100 - SUMMARY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Definitions. 2. Work covered by Contract Documents. 3. Work by Walmart or Separate Contractors. 4. Contractor use of site and premises. 5. Coordination with occupants. 6. Partial occupancy. 1.2 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS 113018 A. Applicability: The publications listed in the REFERENCES paragraph of an individual section shall apply only to the extent referenced within the text of that section. Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards form a part of these specification and have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents. Publications are referenced within the text by the basic designation only. B. Publication Dates: Standards and publications referenced in the Specifications shall mean the latest edition as of the date of commencement of the Work as stated in Paragraph 3.1.4 of the Construction Contract between Walmart and Contractor unless otherwise specifically dated. C. Copies of Standards: Owner or the Architect will not provide copies of references cited within the specifications. Copies may be obtained directly from publication source. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Furnish: Purchase and deliver to project site, ready for installation. B. Install: Unpack, assemble, set in final position, fasten in place, make final connections, clean, adjust, and leave ready for use. C. Provide: Furnish and install. D. Receive: Accepting a delivery. (Entity responsible for accepting a delivery.) E. Final Connections: Complete plumbing, mechanical, and electrical connections as required and recommended by manufacturer for optimum operation of equipment. 1.4 WORK BY WALMART OR SEPARATE CONTRACTORS A. Walmart has its own forces who will perform certain Work on the project, items noted'NIC' (Not In Contract) which will commence as indicated on the Construction Schedule. B. Walmart may award separate contracts for work at the Site, which will be executed concurrent with work of this Contract. Consult and cooperate with Separate Contractors to the full extent provided for in the Construction Contract between Walmart and Contractor. Work by separate contractors is specified in Appendix A. C. During setup of equipment by the Owner or separate contractors, make crane service available to hoist equipment directly from trucks to final position. Coordinate schedule with the Walmart Construction Manager. 01100-1 1.5 CONTRACTOR USE OF SITE AND PREMISES A. Limit use of site to allow for: 1. Walmart occupancy. 2. Work by separate contractors and by Walmart. 3. Use of site and premises by the public. B. Confine operations at site to areas permitted by Law, Ordinances, Permits and to Limits of Contract as shown on Contract Documents. Verify with Walmart Construction Manager acceptable locations where operations may occur so as not to disturb Owner operations or customer traffic. C. Do not unreasonably encumber site with materials or equipment. D. Do not load structure with weight that will endanger structure. DO NOT STORE ROOFING MATERIALS ON THE EXISTING ROOF. E. Assume full responsibility for protection and safekeeping of all products stored on premises whether purchased by Contractor or Owner. Move stored products, which interfere with operations of Owner or customer traffic. F. Carefully coordinate sequence of construction activity and operations with Walmart Construction Manager. G. Maintain the following conditions at all times during the construction period until possession by Walmart. 1. Maintain building weathertight and secure. 2. Maintain building security and fire alarm systems in operation. (In the event both systems should fail, the Fire Alarm System shall have priority over the Security System.) a. Contract with local alarm company to maintain service, and repair existing systems as required due to work relating to this Contract. b. Alarm Company: 1) Visit site and be familiar with existing conditions. 2) Respond to service calls within 24 hours. C. Provide on-site guard services in the event the existing system is disabled for 8 hours or more. d. Coordinate security alarm with Section 01500 - Temporary Facilities and Controls. e. Contact Walmart Alarm Central Control at (479) 273-4600 for additional information and coordination relating to work associated with existing alarm systems. 3. Maintain access and egress from the building. 1.6 COORDINATION WITH OCCUPANTS A. Owner will occupy premises during entire period of construction for the conduct of Owner's normal, daily operations. Cooperate with Walmart Construction Manager in construction operations to minimize delays, inconvenience, or conflict to Owner's daily business operations and customer traffic. The Contractor shall obtain permission from the Owner for interruptions of utility services to the building. Accidental interruptions shall be restored immediately. 1. Any Contractor work operations that may disrupt or interfere with Wal-Mart or building operation or function shall be reviewed and approved by Walmart Construction Manager. 2. Submit written request for approval to Walmart Construction Manager 14 calendar days in advance of date Contractor work operations are required to begin. 1.7 PARTIAL OCCUPANCY A. Walmart will occupy any completed or partially completed portions of the Work. B. Cooperate with Walmart to minimize conflict, and schedule the Work to facilitate Walmart operations. C. Prior to Walmart occupancy in areas of new work, the following provisions shall be in place: 1. Illuminated exit signs are operational. 2. Exit doors, including required panic hardware, are operational. 01100-2 3. Lighted, enclosed walkways and other temporary safety measures are in place if required by authorities having jurisdiction. 4. Fire sprinkler system is operational. 5. Doors required for Walmart security purposes are operational. D. After Walmart occupancy: 1. Keep exit routes and exit doors free from obstructions. 2. Maintain exit signs and fire sprinkler system in operational condition. 3. Provide security for Walmart products, equipment, and operations. 4. Do not permit smoking in the building. PART 2 -PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION 01100-3 BLANK PAGE 01100-4 UniSpec II - Store Planning 062615 SECTION 01131 -ALTERATIONS PROJECT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Summary: The procedures and administrative requirements of this Section apply to all of the following Sections of the Specification, which are involved in alterations to the existing building. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01351 -Regulatory Compliance. B. Section 01500 - Temporary Facilities and Controls C. Section 01731 -Cutting and Patching D. Section 02023 - Selective Site Demolition E. Section 02251 - Shoring 1.3 SCHEDULING, ACCESS AND SECURITY A. Work Sequence: 1. The existing premises will be occupied during the construction process. Coordinate sequence of work with Wal-Mart Construction Manager and Store Manager on site in order that Wal -Mart's operations may continue. 2. The Wal-Mart Construction Manager will require a job start meeting prior to any Work activity. 3. The Construction Schedule is limited to a time frame established by Wal-Mart. Contact Wal-Mart Construction Manager immediately if, at any time, construction schedule is not being met or if delays are foreseen. 4. The Contractor shall develop a schedule of Work, which will be reviewed and approved by the Wal-Mart Construction Manager, describing the starting and completion dates of the different phases of this Project. Wal-Mart reserves the right to revise this schedule to best meet the needs for the Store's operations. Revisions to the Construction Schedule shall be made by the Contractor at no additional cost to Wal-Mart. As the construction progresses, the Contractor shall give an update of the construction schedule to the Store Manager and Wal-Mart Construction Manager on a weekly basis. B. Security is specified in Section 01500. C. Maintenance of Access and Operations: 1. During period of construction, Wal-Mart will continue to perform normal activities in existing building. Maintain proper and safe Customer and Associates access to operational areas at all times. 2. Schedule demolition and remodeling operations with Wal-Mart Construction Manager and/or Store Manager in such a manner as to allow Wal-Mart operations to continue with approved interruptions. 3. During period of construction, do not obstruct in any manner existing exitways unless additional exitways are provided. Prior to removal of existing exitways (stairs, corridors, doors) as part of new Work, provide and maintain new exitways so as to maintain same number of exitways. Maintain existing fire doors in a operable condition. Obtain approval from Authorities Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) for all temporary modifications to the existing system. D. Maintenance of Existing Services 1. Maintain environmental control in existing building, especially temperature, humidity and dust control. 2. Provide temporary power, services and connections as required to maintain existing mechanical and electrical services in building. 01131-1 Notify Wal-Mart Store Manager and Construction Manager a minimum of three (3) days prior to each required interruption of mechanical or electrical services in building. Such interruptions shall be only at such times and for lengths of time as approved by the Wal-Mart Construction Manager and/or Store Manager. In no event shall interruption occur without prior approval of the Wal-Mart Construction Manager and/or Store Manager. E. Building Access/Construction Personnel Control. 1. Access to construction areas within building shall be as directed by Wal-Mart Construction Manager. 2. Restrict construction traffic to areas specifically designated by Wal-Mart Construction Manager. 3. Refer to Section 01351 for Contractor Badge System and access control requirements. PART 2 -PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION 01131-2 UniSpec II - Store Planning 062615 SECTION 01230 - ALTERNATES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Alternate submission requirements of work included in Alternates. B. Related Sections: 1. Construction Contract Between Wal-Mart and Contractor: Acceptance of Alternates in award of a Contract. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Alternate: An amount proposed by bidders and stated and defined on the Bid Form for certain work that may be added to or deducted from the base bid amount if Wal-Mart decides to accept a corresponding change either in the amount of construction to be completed or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described in the Contract Documents. 1. Alternates will be a part of the Work only if enumerated in the Agreement. 2. The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract Sum to incorporate alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the Contract Sum. 1.3 PROCEDURES A. Notification: Immediately following award of the Contract, notify each party involved, in writing, of the status of each alternate. Indicate if alternates have been accepted, rejected, or deferred for later consideration. Include a complete description of negotiated modifications to alternates. B. Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other work of the Contract. 1.4 SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS A. Alternates quoted on Bid Forms will be reviewed and accepted or rejected at the Owner's option. Accepted alternates will be identified in the Construction Contract between Wal-Mart and Contractor. 1.5 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES AND DESCRIPTION OF WORK INCLUDED IN ALTERNATES. A. Schedule of Alternates, when applicable, and descriptions thereof are shown on the Bid Form. PART 2 -PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used. END OF SECTION 01230-1 BLANK PAGE 01230-2 UniSpec II - Store Planning 113018 SECTION 01255 - REQUEST FOR INFORMATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Requests for Information (RFI) procedures. 1.2 DEFINITION A. Requests for Information: A formal online process used during the construction phase to facilitate communication between the Contractor, the Wal-Mart Construction Manager, and the Professional of Record with regard to requests for additional information and clarification of the intent of the Contract Documents (Drawings and Specifications). B. Professional of Record: The Architect of Record (AOR). C. Architect of Record (AOR): The prime consultant in charge of overall design and coordination of the project. The AOR will be the administrator for all construction RFIs classified as "BLDG". 1.3 REQUEST FOR INFORMATION SUBMITTAL A. Submit requests for information for conditions requiring clarification of the Contract Documents on Wal-Mart Construction RFI website as designated by Wal-Mart. (www.bldgportal.com, enter username and password, select Construction RFI). Professional of Record will not respond to requests for information unless this format is utilized and all appropriate information is provided. Faxed or e-mailed RFIs will not be reviewed. B. Do not use Request for Information process during bidding phase. For questions during bidding phase, refer to Invitation to Bid issued by Wal-Mart Contract Administrator. C. Submit in accordance with procedure as follows: (See Process Flow Chart at the end of this Section) 1. Subcontractors, manufacturers, and suppliers shall submit request for additional information and clarification to Contractor. 2. Contractor shall contact Wal-Mart Construction Manager with requests for additional information or clarification. Wal-Mart Construction Manager will not accept requests for information or clarification submitted directly from subcontractors, manufacturers, or suppliers. 3. Wal-Mart Construction Manager will provide response to Contractor or will direct Contractor to submit a formal Request for Information. a. Submit a formal RFI only if authorized by the Wal-Mart Construction Manager. Submittal to Construction RFI website signifies authorization has been given. b. Generate Requests for Information by one source per project. C. Submit one request for information per website entry. 4. Professional of Record will review formal requests from Contractor and provide response within 2 working days. 5. Professional of Record's response shall not be considered as a Change Order or Change Directive, nor does it authorize changes in the Contract Sum or Contract Time. D. Scheduling, Costing, and Owner Provided Equipment Coordination: Direct to the Owner's Construction Manager. 1.4 PENALTY FOR FAILURE TO FOLLOW PROCEDURE A. A $250 administrative cost will be assessed to the Contractor for each Request for Information submitted which does not follow the procedure specified above. 01255-1 1.5 REIMBURSEMENT FOR ARCHITECTURAL AND ENGINEERING FEES A. The Contractor shall be charged administrative costs and professional fees incurred by Wal-Mart for additional Architectural and Engineering services associated with the correction of completed Work which is not in accordance with the Contract Documents. Refer to Paragraph 8.7 of the Construction Contract between Wal-Mart and Contractor for provisions relating to correction of Work. PART 2 -PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used. END OF SECTION 01255-2 REQUEST FOR INFORMATION PROCESS FLOW CHART V. U1 STORES, SUPERCENTER, SAM'S CLUB, NEIGHBORHOOD MARKET Wal-Mart Construction Manager provides response to Contractor Subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier, or other party submits request for information to Contractor contacts Wal-Mart Construction Manager (CM) with request for information. CM will provide response or authorize Formal RFI. no Wal-Mart Construction Manager authorizes Contractor to submit formal Request for Information to Wal-Mart Construction RFI website Contractor submits Request for Information to Professional of Record on Wal-Mart Professional of Record notifies appropriate consultant for response on Construction RFI Website Consultant answers RFI on Construction RFI Website Contractor issues response Professional of Record to subcontractor, issues response to manufacturer, supplier, or Contractor on Construction other party. RFI Website 01255-3 01255-4 UniSpec II- Store Planning SECTION 01310 - CONSTRUCTION MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Project Management and Coordination: a. Definitions b. Construction Manager C. Project Coordination 113018 B. Related Requirements: 1. Construction Contract between Walmart and Contractor: Owner's Construction Manager's rights and scope of authority. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Separate Contractor: A contractor (subcontractor, specialty contractor or vendor) hired separately by Walmart and outside of General Contractor's Construction Contract. B. Walmart Construction Manager: The Walmart (Owner's) representative in all matters relating to the Work of the Project. The person responsible for all approvals with the General Contractor. This person also coordinates with the Separate Contractors 1.3 WALMART CONSTRUCTION MANAGER A. Walmart will assign this project to a Walmart Construction Manager. B. Cooperate with the Walmart Construction Manager in all matters relating to the Work on this project. C. During construction, coordinate use of site and facilities through the Walmart Construction Manager. D. Comply with Walmart Construction Manager's procedures for project communications, reports and records, and coordination with drawings, and comply with recommendations and resolution of ambiguities and conflicts. E. Comply with instructions of the Walmart Construction Manager for use of temporary utilities and construction facilities. F. Coordinate use of site during Walmart fixture setup work under instructions of the Walmart Construction Manager. 1.4 RESPONSIBILITIES OF GENERAL CONTRACTOR AND SEPARATE CONTRACTORS A. The General Contractor shall provide necessary forces and subcontractors to complete the Work of the Project as described in the Contract Document (Drawings, Specifications, Addenda, and other modifications to the Contract). He is responsible for the supervision, quality control and costs for his employees and subcontractors. B. The General Contractor and Separate Contractors will provide a Construction Schedule to the Walmart Construction Manager for review and approval. The Contractors shall immediately contact the Walmart Construction Manager if the Work does not progress as scheduled. It is imperative that the Contractors keep close communication with the Walmart Construction Manager regarding the progress of the Project. 01310-1 C. At the commencement of construction, the Walmart Construction Manager, Walmart Store Manager, General Contractor, Separate Contractors and the Store Planning Field Project Manager will review the Construction Schedule. The Construction Schedule is set up on a weekly basis and must be followed unless deviations are authorized by the Walmart Construction Manager. (Refer to Section 01500 for posting of schedule.) D. The General Contractor and Separate Contractors shall communicate at all times with the Store Manager, other Subcontractors and the Store Planning Field Project Manager to facilitate the construction and ensure it is completed within the approved time schedule. E. Upon completion of a portion of the Work (Item, Trade, etc.), that portion of the Work must be 100% complete prior to proceeding to the next phase or portion of Work. F. The General Contractor shall be responsible for the coordination of the Remodel work of all Separate Contractors with the Walmart Construction Manager and the Walmart Store Manager. G. The Construction Manager will determine what work shall be done during normal operating hours (store hours) and during "closing" hours. H. The General Contractor will coordinate with the Store Planning Field Project Manager the delivery of Walmart- furnished items. I. The General Contractor shall also be responsible for coordinating the location of storage trailers/containers for Contractor -supplied materials and equipment. (Refer to Section 01500). The General Contractor shall be responsible for permits required for temporary storage facilities (trailers/containers). J. Walmart will not be responsible for the loss of any tools or equipment. Walmart will also not be responsible for the cost of any rental tools. This is each Contractor's responsibility and should be included in his price proposal. K. Contractors shall not open any type of charge account within the Store and store markdowns will not be allowed. All items purchased in the Store shall be paid for at the time of purchase. Contractors should not receive any discounts for any items purchased within the Store. The use of Walmart 's name will not be allowed on any accounts. L. Contractors shall comply with Walmart policy regarding gratuities. No Contractor may receive any gratuities from any company providing services or materials for any Walmart Projects. Contractors are not entitled to receive any employee benefits from Walmart. M. The General Contractor shall be responsible for timely removal of the construction trailer as directed by the Walmart Construction Manager. N. Walmart may provide Store Associates as required to assist the General Contractor and Separate Contractors in the remodeling. The Walmart Store Planning Field Project Manager will determine the number of Store Associates that will be provided on a job basis. Walmart Store Associates shall not be allowed to operate power equipment, be used as carpenters, or perform work from scaffolds, ladders or hoists. O. The General Contractor and Separate Contractors are responsible for obtaining a final inspection from the appropriate Building Official or Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). If a Certificate of Occupancy is required, obtain it from the proper authorities. A copy of all final inspection documentation or Certificates of Occupancy shall be included in the final Closeout Documents (Maintenance Book/Closeout Book). 1.5 PROJECT COORDINATION A. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and work of the various Sections of specifications to ensure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements, with provisions for accommodating items installed at a later date and under separate contracts. 01310-2 B. Obtain necessary drawings, manufacturer's product data, and other necessary data to provide a complete and proper installation. 1. Check field dimensions prior to installing equipment and furnishings. Verify necessary clearances and means of access from equipment storage to final position. 2. Make shop drawings and manufacturer's rough -in requirements available to trades involved. C. Verify that utility requirements of operating equipment are compatible with building utilities. Coordinate work of various specification Sections for installation and final connection of equipment. 1. Verify that mechanical, plumbing, and electrical rough -ins have been properly located. D. Coordinate space requirements and installation of mechanical and electrical Work which are indicated diagrammatically on Drawings. Follow routing shown for pipes, ducts, and conduits as closely as practicable. Make runs parallel with lines of building. Utilize spaces efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations, for maintenance, and for repairs. E. In finished areas, conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in the construction. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements. F. Coordinate completion and clean up of work of separate Sections in preparation for Substantial Completion and for portions of Work designated for Owners partial occupancy after possession. G. After Owner occupancy of premises, coordinate access to site for correction of defective work and work not in accordance with Contract Documents, to minimize disruption of Owner's activities. PART 2 -PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used. END OF SECTION 01310-3 BLANK PAGE 01310-4 UniSpec II- Store Planning SECTION 01312 - PROGRESS MEETINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 PRE -CONSTRUCTION MEETING 022417 A. A pre -construction meeting will be held at the project site prior to beginning work at a time designated by the Owner. B. The Wal-Mart Construction Manager, Contractor's Project Manager, Contractor's Superintendent, and major subcontractors shall be present. C. The following shall serve as a minimum agenda: 1. Construction schedule. 2. Critical work sequencing. 3. Designation of responsible personnel. 4. Processing of field decisions and changes to the Work. 5. Walk-through inspection and field determination of scope of work and verification of Construction Documents. 1.2 PROGRESS MEETINGS A. Scheduled progress meetings at the job site are required. B. The Wal-Mart Construction Manager, Contractor's Superintendent and major subcontractors (as appropriate to the agenda) shall be present. C. The purpose of these progress meetings is to review the schedule of the Project for the next 2 weeks. The following shall serve as a minimum agenda: 1. Field observations, problems and conflicts. 2. Problems that may impede construction schedule. 3. Review of delivery schedules. 4. Coordination of schedules of different trades and delivery of Owner -furnished products and materials. Coordination with Wal-Mart separate contractors and their scope of work. 5. Walk-through inspection and determination of additional scope of work and repairs to the Project. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used. END OF SECTION 01312-1 BLANK PAGE 01312-2 UniSpec II- Store Planning 022417 SECTION 01320 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Progress Schedules and Reports B. Related Requirements: 1. Construction Contract Between Walmart and Contractor. Requirements for construction schedules and reports. Ref Articles 1.1.15 and 3.8. 1.2 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. Using the Milestone Completion Dates identified in Exhibit 1.1.16 of the Construction Contract; the Contractor shall develop the detailed CPM Construction Schedule with activity time duration in calendar days further describing his method for performing the Work. The Contractor shall review the Contractor's schedule with the Owner's Construction Manager within 3 weeks from award of Contract, or at the Pre -Construction Meeting, whichever is first. Failure of the Contractor to have a construction schedule approved by the Owner's Construction Manager will be considered cause to withhold progress payments. 1. The Milestone Completion Dates identified in Exhibit 1.1.16 of the Construction Contract shall not be construed as an indication by the Owner as to means, methods, or techniques of construction to be employed by the Contractor. 2. Critical path activities shall be indicated on the Contractor's detailed construction schedule. 1.3 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS CHART A. Progress of the Project will be monitored using charts produced from the CPM Schedule. Requirements herein provide for planning and execution of the Work and are to assist the Wal-Mart Construction Manager in evaluating progress of the Work economically and chronologically. B. The Contractor shall be familiar, in detail, with the Milestone Completion Dates identified in Exhibit 1.1.16 of the Construction Contract. By submitting his bid, the Contractor acknowledges that the Construction milestones are feasible, reasonable, and are a workable schedule for the Work. C. Delivery conditions and lead times for Wal-Mart Furnished Items are specified in the Delivery Schedules in Section 01600. Coordinate delivery of these items with progress of the Work. D. Prior to construction, the Contractor may request reasonable changes to the Construction Progress Schedule Chart, provided delivery dates specified in Section 01600 and the contract completion date are not changed. The Wal-Mart Construction Manager will review requested changes. Upon approval by Wal-Mart, Progress Schedule Chart shall become the "Approved Construction Progress Chart" by which the Contractor shall plan, organize, direct, coordinate, and execute the Work, and the basis of evaluating progress of the Work. E. If, in the opinion of the Wal-Mart Construction Manager, any of the dates specified in Section 01600 are not completed by the Contractor on or before the stated time period and after 48 hours written notice to the Contractor, Wal-Mart may proceed to carry out the work in accordance with Article 2.4 of the Construction Contract. F. The Contractor shall perform work directed by the Wal-Mart Construction Manager to meet the Wal-Mart contract completion date and shall maintain the original management and supervision team to continue their office and job site duties on a full-time basis through final completion and/or any other time the Contractor has any work being performed on the project regardless of the date or condition of project completion. 01320-1 1.4 SCHEDULE UPDATES A. The Contractor shall provide to the Wal-Mart Construction Manager regular updated reports on the Construction Schedule as determined by the Wal-Mart Construction Manager. The Contractor shall maintain a current weekly updated detailed construction schedule in the site construction field office. 1. Construction Schedule Updating: Progress information to be included in schedule updates includes actual start and finish dates, percentage complete, remaining duration or projected finish dates for all activities in progress during reporting period. Schedule updates may also include approved added activity descriptions. 1.5 RECOVERY PLAN A. Should the updated approved Construction Schedule show the Contractor to be behind schedule, the Contractor shall immediately devise a plan for recovery of lost time within one week and submit it to the Wal-Mart Construction Manager for approval. Once approved by the Wal-Mart Construction Manager, the Contractor shall immediately put the recovery plan into action. B. During the period covered by the recovery plan, the Contractor's progress will continue to be monitored against the Approved Construction Progress Chart. If the Contractor does not recover from delay as detailed in the recovery plan, Wal-Mart may exercise the option to carry out the work as specified above. C. The Contractor shall bear all costs and expenses related to recovery from the Contractor's delays, including costs, expenses, and lost sales incurred by Wal-Mart. PART 2 -PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used. END OF SECTION 01320-2 UniSpec II- Store Planning 092818 SECTION 01330 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Submittal procedures prior to and during construction. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 01600 - Product Requirements: Requirements for product selection and product options. 2. Section 01770 -Contract Closeout: Closeout submittals. 1.2 PROCESS AND RESPONSIBILITIES A. Contractor Responsibilities: 1. Submit required submittals to Architect unless otherwise specified. 2. Submit required submittals in hard copy or electronically by email. Electronic documents shall be in PDF format. Hard copy documents submitted to the Contractor by suppliers and subcontractors shall be scanned by the Contractor to PDF prior to electronic submittal. 3. Comply with submittal requirements defined within individual Sections. Submittals procedures described herein shall apply unless otherwise stated in individual Sections. 4. Package each submittal appropriately for transmittal and handling. 5. Identify Project, Contractor, subcontractor or supplier, pertinent Drawing sheet and detail numbers, and Specification Section number, as applicable. 6. Assemble, coordinate, and review submittals of subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers. 7. Review submittal for verification of products required, field dimensions, adjacent construction, and coordination of information. 8. Apply Contractor's Submittal Review stamp, signed or initialed and dated, certifying compliance with Contract Documents. 9. Identify email transmittal of submittals in the subject line as follows: a. Walmart Store #, City, State, Project type RM, OGP, etc.), submittal name (e.g. concrete mix design, sieve analysis, etc., including Section number). 10. Forward executed copy of Submittal Review Form to supplier within 5 days after receipt of submittal with copies to Architect and Wal -Mart's Construction Manager. 11. Schedule submittals to expedite the Work. Coordinate submission of related items into single submittal, unless otherwise specified. 12. Submit submittals items required within an individual Specification Section into a single submittal. 13. Identify variations from Contract Documents and limitations of product and system which may be detrimental to successful performance of the completed Work. 14. Provide space on submittal for Contractor, Architect, and Architect's Consultant review stamps. 15. Allow 10 working days for review. 16. Revise and resubmit submittals when required. Identify changes made since previous submittal. 17. Notify Vendor or Subcontractor of approval by Authority Having Jurisdiction of Deferred Submittal package. 18. Distribute copies of reviewed submittals to concerned parties and to Record Documents file. Instruct parties to promptly report inability to comply with provisions. B. Supplier Responsibilities - Wal-Mart (Owner) Furnished Products: 1. Subcontractors, vendors, and suppliers (including suppliers of Wal-Mart (Owner) furnished products) shall forward copies of submittals to the Contractor. 2. Prepare submittals in accordance with requirements in individual Specification Sections and Contractor responsibilities specified herein. 01330-1 C. Architect Responsibilities: Review submittals and take appropriate action as follows. 1. Shop Drawings and Product Data: Architect will mark submittals to indicate appropriate action. 2. Return Architect reviewed Submittals to Contractor by email or mail carrier service providing delivery tracking. 3. Submittals for Information: Architect will not return submittals sent for information only. 4. Forward submittals to proper sub -consultant for review as necessary. D. Unrequested Submittals: Submittals transmitted to Architect or Architect's Consultants that are not indicated or requested will not be reviewed. Architect will dispose of unrequested submittal items. 1.3 TRANSMITTAL A. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Submit to Architect. Transmit submittals to be reviewed by Architect to: Architect of Record pb2 architecture + engineering 2809 Ajax Avenue, Suite 100 Rogers, Arkansas 72758 submittalskpb2ae. com B. In addition to recipients stated above, transmit submittals to those parties as may be required in the individual specification section. 1.4 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Shop Drawings 1. Submit Drawings with graphic information at accurate scale. Show dimensions and note which dimensions are based on field measurement. Identify materials and products in Work shown. Indicate compliance with specified standards and special coordination requirements. Do not use reproductions of Contract Drawings as Shop Drawings. 2. Include on each Shop Drawing the drawing title, number, original issue date, and revision numbers and dates, in addition to other required identifying information. 3. Identify details by reference to sheet, detail, schedule, or room names shown on the Contract Drawings. 4. Identify numerical values in English units. 5. Size: Not less than 8-1/2 by 11 inches nor more than 30 by 42 inches. a. For Shop Drawings submitted on sheets larger than 8-1/2 x 11 inches, submit reproducible transparency and blueline or blackline reproduction. b. For Shop Drawings submitted on sheets 8-1/2 x 11 inches, conform to requirements for Product Data and submit as a bound volume for submittal required. 6. Number of Copies Required: Submit one reproducible transparency and one blueline or blackline reproduction. Submit additional copies to AHJ for approval if required. Comply with requirements of AHJ with regard to signing and sealing of submittals by Registered Professional licensed in the State in which project is located. a. One copy will be returned to the Contractor. B. Product Data 1. Manufacturer's standard schematic drawings and diagrams: a. Clearly mark to identify pertinent products. b. Show performance characteristics and capacities. C. Show dimensions and clearances required. d. Show wiring or piping diagrams and controls. e. Modify drawings and diagrams to delete information not applicable to this work. f. Supplement standard drawings and diagrams to provide complete information applicable to this work. 01330-2 2. Mark each copy to identify applicable products, models, options, and other data. Supplement Product Data with material prepared for the Work to satisfy submittal requirements for which Product Data does not exist. Note that the material is developed specifically for this Contract. 3. Submit Product Data for each Section in one complete submittal. Include table of contents listing page and catalog item numbers for Product Data. 4. Indicate, by prominent contrasting color notation on each product being submitted, the Specifications Section and paragraph numbers to which it pertains. 5. Where printed Product Data includes information on several products, some of which are not required, mark copies to indicate information applicable to Work and clearly cross out other information not applicable to Work. Include the following information: a. Manufacturer's printed recommendations or instructions. b. Compliance with referenced standards. C. Application of testing agency labels and seals. d. Notation of dimensions verified by field measurement. e. Notation of coordination requirements. 6. Product Data For Information: Written information not requiring action by Wal-Mart Construction Manager or Architect; for verification of compliance with requirement. Submittal not complying with requirements will be rejected. 7. Number of Copies Required: Four. C. Engineering Calculations 1. Submit calculations signed and sealed by a Registered Professional Engineer licensed in the State where project is located. Comply with requirements of Authority Having Jurisdiction with regard to signing and sealing of submittals. D. Certifications 1. Certify manufacturer or installer's qualifications, compliance with tests or specified criteria, or other factors as required in individual Specification Sections. 2. Submit supporting reference data, affidavits, and certifications as required. PART 2 -PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION 01330-3 BLANK PAGE 01330-4 UniSpec — Store Planning 112219 SECTION 01351 —REGULATORY COMPLIANCE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Contractor's regulatory compliance requirements and responsibilities. 2. Owner's compliance performance standards and expectations. B. Related Requirements and Sections: 1. Construction Contract Between Owner and Contractor (Contract) - Exhibit 3.6. 2. Owner's Compliance Performance Standards (CPS) for Major projects as specified in the contract addendum. 3. Owner's Environmental, Health and Safety Manual (EHS) for minor projects as specified in the contract addendum. 4. Section 01500 - Temporary Facilities and Controls. 5. Section 01550 - Tension Pole Dust Barrier Systems. 6. Section 01740 - Cleaning and Trash Disposal. 7. Section 02023 - Selective Site Demolition. 1.2 PROCESSES, PROCEDURES AND RESPONSIBILITIES A. Comply with all compliance obligations, federal, state, and local laws described in the Contract Documents including: Contract, Specifications, Drawings, applicable Owner's Compliance Performance Standards (CPS) or Environmental, Health and Safety (EHS) manuals. B. Do not use Owner's CPS or EHS in place of or as a substitute for developing and implementing the Contractor's own compliance programs. C. Create and maintain a hard -copy site-specific "Compliance Binder," including all associated documents in accordance with the requirements in the Owner's CPS manual. D. Do not create conditions that would cause harm to Owner's associates or members or prevent Owner's compliance with applicable laws. E. Follow and uphold the applicable Owner's compliance standards including responsibilities, processes and procedures, compliance acknowledgements, training, documentation, forms, tracking and reporting. F. Comply with all requirements set within the Contract Documents, including but not limited to: references and definitions, document management, safety requirements and safety plans, hazard safeguards, dust walls and barricades, hazardous materials and safety data sheets, respirable crystalline silica, hot work, fire watch, electrical work and supervision, lockout tagout, fuel storage, crane operations, confined spaces, edge protection netting, emergency exits, toxic and hazardous substances, asbestos, mold, site security and protection, labor work verification programs, badging and access control, waste management and disposal, hazardous waste management, waste container access restrictions, spills, construction stormwater permitting, sanitary waste water and sewage management. END OF SECTION 01351 - t BLANK PAGE 01351 -2 UniSpec II -Store Planning 022820 SECTION 01452 - CONTRACTOR'S QUALITY CONTROL PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Administrative and procedural requirements for Contractor quality assurance and quality control. B. Related Requirements: 1. Construction Contract between Wal-Mart and Contractor: Inspections, testing, and approvals required by public authorities. 2. Section 01770 - Contract Closeout: Project Record Documents. 3. Appendix B - Testing, Inspection, and Observation by Owner. a. Quality Requirements of Owner's Construction Testing laboratory (CTL) and services. (Formerly included in Section 01458.) C. Contractor testing and inspection are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 1. Contractor testing and inspection includes testing or inspection to be performed by and under the responsibility of the General Contractor as well as that required by the manufacturer, manufacturer's representative, product supplier, or other party under the responsibility of the Contractor. 2. Requirements in this section are independent of testing and inspection specified for the Owner's Construction Testing Laboratory (CTL) specified in Appendix B. Testing and inspection by the CTL will be paid for by the Owner at no cost to the Contractor. 3. Specific quality -assurance and -control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections may also cover production of standard products. 4. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality -assurance and -control services required by Architect, Owner's CTL, Wal-Mart Construction Manager, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Testing: Evaluation of systems, primarily requiring physical manipulation and analysis of materials, in accordance with approved standards. B. Inspection: Evaluation of systems primarily requiring observation and engineering judgement. C. Quality Assurance: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will substantially comply with construction documents. D. Quality Control: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and completed construction substantially comply with construction documents. E. Quality assurance and quality control may be performed by either the Contractor or the Construction Testing Laboratory employed by the Owner. F. Mockups: Full-size, physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mockups are used to verify or demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where indicated, qualities of materials and execution, and to review construction, coordination, testing, or operation; they are not Samples. Approved mockups establish the standard by which the Work will be judged. G. Architect of Record (AOR): The prime consultant in charge of overall design and coordination of the building. 01452-1 H. Engineer of Record (EOR): The Registered Engineer in responsible charge of engineering design for the project. I. Structural Engineer of Record (SER): The Registered Engineer in responsible charge of the structural design for the project. Architect - Engineer (A/E): A collective term to include the AOR, SER, and the Mechanical, Electrical, and Fire Protection EOR. K. Construction Testing Laboratory (CTL): The independent testing and inspection agency employed by the Owner L. Test and Balance Agent (TBA): The HVAC testing and balancing agency employed by the Owner. M. Special Inspector (SI): The Special Inspector under the direct supervision of a registered civil/structural engineer (unless otherwise specified) regularly engaged in inspection, and experienced with the type of work requiring related testing and inspection. The categories of special inspector are specified in Appendix B: N. Building Official: The Officer or his duly authorized representative charged with the administration and enforcement of the local building code. O. Deviation: A deviation is any item or component of work that does not substantially conform to the requirements of the construction documents and which has not been corrected by the end of business on the day it is identified. 1.3 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS A. General: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer uncertainties and requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Architect/Engineer for a decision before proceeding. B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. Refer uncertainties to Architect/Engineer for a decision before proceeding. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit Test and Inspection Reports within three working days of T&I occurrence. B. Submit required reports and other items to the following: 1. AOR: (Construction Administration Leader). a. One copy (Site work T&I). b. Three copies (Bldg T&I). AOR will transmit one copy of Bldg T&I to SER. C. Report of non -conforming work. 2. Contractor: Three copies. 3. Building Official: Quantities as required. 1.5 REPORTS A. Submit reports as required herein and conduct and interpret tests and inspections. B. Testing and Inspection Report: Submit test and inspection reports including the following information: 1. Date issued. 2. Project title and number. 3. Store number. 4. Firm name and address. 5. Name and signature of tester or inspector. 6. Name and seal of registered engineer in responsible charge (as applicable). 7. Date and time of sampling. 8. Date of test or inspection. 01452-2 9. Identification of product and specification section. 10. Location in project, including elevations, grid location and detail. 11. Type of test or inspections. 12. Results of tests or inspections and interpretation of same. 13. Observations regarding compliance with Contract Documents or deviations therefrom. C. Submit a separate final signed report stating whether the work requiring inspection is, to the best of the inspector's knowledge, in conformance with the approved plans, specifications, and the applicable workmanship provisions of the building code. D. Reports shall be made on 8-1/2 by 11 white paper, suitable for photocopying and binding in booklet form. Sheets shall have the CTL letterhead (including phone number and address). Larger sheets shall be folded and bound into the booklet. E. Tests and inspections reports indicating non-conformance (deviations) to the Contract Documents shall be brought to the attention of the A/E within 24 hours upon discovery. F. Contractor shall send an RFI to the A/E on the same day of non-conformance (deviation) notification. PART 2 -PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 QUALITY CONTROL A. Quality control shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. B. The Owner will perform testing and inspection (T & I) but only as a means of verification to the Owner of Contractor quality control performance. Owner T & I shall not be considered Quality Control or Quality Assurance as defined herein. Owner T & I and Contractor obligations with respect to Quality Control shall be pursuant to related provisions of Articles 2.3.3, 2.3.4, 2.4.1, 2.5.2, 2.6.2, and 3.2.2 of the Construction Contract between Walmart and Contractor. 1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspecting they are engaged to perform. 2. Costs for retesting and re -inspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor, and the Contract Sum will be adjusted by Change Order. C. T & I by the Owner will be conducted by the Owner's Construction Testing Laboratory at no cost to the Contractor in accordance with Appendix B, except that costs for failing tests will be deducted from the sum due to the Contractor. D. Owner T & I results and reports will be available as information to Contractor. E. Owner's T & I shall not be relied on by the Contractor as an indication of conformance or nonconformance of work nor shall the Contractor be dependent on the Owner's CTL test results for verification of satisfactory work in place. F. Work found by the Owner's CTL to be defective or in non-compliance with Contract Documents shall be corrected based on the CTL T&I results except when proven otherwise by subsequent CTL or Contractor conducted tests. G. In-place work will be subject to testing and inspection by the Owner's CTL at any time during the progress of the work. H. Test reports conducted by and at the discretion of the Contractor shall be provided to the Owner upon request when reason exists to suspect non-compliance or when used for comparison to CTL conducted tests. 01452-3 I. Any testing agency, if employed by the Contractor for purposes of Contractor Quality Control, shall not be the same entity engaged by the Owner. J. Contractor shall pay for: 1. Tests and inspections at the source or prior to incorporation into the Work of materials, products, or equipment to certify compliance with Contract Documents. 2. Tests, samples, inspection, or engineering services the Contractor determines appropriate for performance of Work or for Contractor's convenience. 3. Tests and inspections when initial tests or inspections indicate Work does not comply with Contract Documents. 4. Tests and inspections required or conducted by public authorities as part of permits or inspection fees. 5. Other tests and inspections indicated to be "by Contractor." K. Provide incidental labor and facilities to provide access to Work to be tested, to obtain and handle samples at the site or at source of products to be tested, to facilitate tests and inspections, and to provide storage and curing of test samples. Provide lift equipment as required for inspection personnel of the Owner or the Owners's representatives. L. Provide 14 days written notice to A/E prior to expected time for operations requiring observation, inspecting, and testing. If work to be observed is covered prior to notification, uncover work as required. M. Notify in writing the Wal-Mart Construction Manager three working days prior to expected time for operations requiring inspecting and testing services. N. Repair and protect the work regardless of assignment of responsibility for inspection, testing, or similar services. 1. Protect work exposed by or for quality assurance and quality control service activities. 2. Upon completion of inspection, testing, sample -taking, and similar services, restore constructed areas to conform to Contract Documents. O. Costs, including without limitation additional professional fees and expenses, of any required redesign or re- engineering required by non -conforming tests and inspections will be deducted from the sum due the Contractor. P. Provide a Letter of Conformance at the completion of the Project to the Wal-Mart Construction Manager, with copy to the AOR, stipulating that the Project has been built per the Contract Documents. An example is attached at the end of this Section. Q. Maintain a copy of Contract Drawings and Specifications with all Addenda and Change Orders. Use the Contract Documents supplemented by the approved shop drawings and applicable material and workmanship provisions of the Code for testing and inspection of the work. R. Provide qualified personnel at site to comply with schedule and submit reports for each test and inspection as defined in Part 3 of this Section. S. Perform specified inspection, sampling, and testing of products in accordance with specified standards. T. Ascertain compliance of materials and mixes with requirements of Contract Documents. U. Perform testing and inspection in a timely manner to avoid delay of work. V. Notify Wal-Mart Construction Manager and CEC or AOR, as applicable of observed non-conformance of Work or Products. If observed deviations from the Contract Drawings, Specifications, or building code will be probable cause of subsequent rejection of work or material, notify the Wal-Mart Construction Manager and, CEC or AOR sufficiently in advance for determination to continue operations or take corrective measures before continuing. W. Deviations from the Contract Documents will be entered into the on-line Wal-Mart Observation Log by other parties performing Quality Control construction observation. The Contractor shall track deviations, as defined above, and resolutions and remedial repairs to deviations and subsequent conformance to the Contract Documents on the Observation Log. (www.bldgportal.com, enter username and password, select Observation Log. Follow instructions on the Observation Log website. } 01452-4 X. The Wal-Mart Construction Manager in conjunction with the CTL and/or SI will determine when to involve the AOR or EOR for remedial action. Y. If additional A/E site or FPT visits are required beyond those described in Section 01454 as determined by Wal- Mart to determine correction to non -conforming work, the Contractor shall reimburse the Owner the sum of $4000 for each additional visit to cover A/E expenses. Additional A/E site observations or FPTs will be performed as required until all deviations have been corrected by the Contractor and closed by the A/E consultant. Z. Cooperate with CTL/SI personnel, and provide access to the Work and to Contractor's facilities. AA. Submit test and inspection reports to the A/E consultant and other designated persons as specified in individual sections. Submit test and inspection reports to the Building Official as required. BB. Testing and inspection by the Building Official does not preclude the normal field involvement and site observations by the A/E consultant, nor shall it relieve the Contractor of any responsibility to complete the work in accordance with the approved drawings and specifications. CC. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory -authorized service representative to inspect field - assembled components and equipment installation, including service connections. Report results in writing as specified in Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures." 3.2 PRODUCTION TESTING A. General Requirements: 1. Testing shall be conducted as specified in the individual specification sections. 2. If inspection of fabricators work is required, the Owner's representative may require testing and inspection of the work at the plant, before shipment. Owner, Architect, and Structural Engineer of Record (SER) reserve the right to reject material not complying with the Contract Documents. 3. Testing and inspection shall be performed in accordance with the industry standard used as the reference for the specific material or procedure unless other criteria are specified. In the absence of a referenced standard, tests shall be accomplished in accordance with generally accepted industry standards. 4. Work shall be checked as it progresses, but failure to detect any defective work or materials shall in no way prevent later rejection if defective work or materials are discovered, nor shall it obligate Owner to accept such work. END OF SECTION 01452-5 [Example Conformance Letter from Contractor. Text in parentheses are to be edited for each individual project] [Date] [Mr. Construction Manager] Wal-Mart Construction 2608 SE J ST Bentonville, Arkansas 72716 [Re: Supercenter (Store #xxx) — City, State] [Dear Construction Manager:] The purpose of this letter is to state to Wal-Mart Stores, Inc. that, to the best of our knowledge, the construction on the above referenced project has been completed in substantial conformance with the approved Contract Documents. We performed construction testing, observation, and testing as required by the Contract Document. To our knowledge, no outstanding items exist except as may be otherwise entered and shown on the Wal-Mart Observation Log. Sincerely, [GENERAL CONTRACTOR ] [Include signature and date of signature] cc: File [ARCHITECT OF RECORD] [ENGINEER OF RECORD] 01452-6 UniSpec II- Store Planning 113018 SECTION 01500 -TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Temporary Utilities: Electricity, lighting, ventilation, telephone service, water, and sanitary facilities. 2. Temporary Controls: Barriers, enclosures and fencing, signage protection of the Work, and water control. 3. Construction Facilities: Parking, progress cleaning, temporary buildings, and staging areas. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01351 —Regulatory Compliance: a. Non -hazardous waste storage fencing. b. Work practice control methods for airborne respirable dust. 2. Section 01550 — Tension Pole Dust Barrier Systems: Temporary retractable -pole and sheeting dust barrier systems for enclosing interior dust -emitting work. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) 1. OSHA 1926.1153 Respirable Crystalline Silica. 1.3 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Provide protective fencing, and safety signage. B. Provide enclosures for dust emitting interior work as specified herein and in Section 01550. C. Protect properties and water resources from contaminant damage until construction activities are complete. D. Do not use methods that would cause flooding, ponding, or other damage to Owner's property or property of others. 1.4 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY A. Connect to existing power service. Owner will pay cost of electricity used. Power consumption shall not disrupt Owner's need for continuous service. Exercise measures to conserve energy. B. Coordinate location and method of connection to existing electrical service with Walmart Construction Manager. Do not connect to electrical panels serving rack houses. C. Provide adequate distribution equipment, wiring, and outlets to provide single-phase branch circuits for power and lighting. Provide temporary feeders to limit voltage loss to 5% overall from local utility power lines to provide electric requirements for project during construction. 1.5 TEMPORARY LIGHTING A. Provide and maintain lighting for construction operations. Provide minimum of 20 footcandles illumination for work areas. B. Permanent building lighting may be utilized during construction. 01500-1 1.6 TEMPORARY VENTILATION A. Ventilate enclosed areas to assist cure of materials, to dissipate humidity, and to prevent accumulation of dust, fumes, vapors, or gases. 1.7 TELEPHONE SERVICE A. Provide, maintain and pay for telephone service to field office. 1.8 TEMPORARY WATER SERVICE A. Connect to existing water source. Owner will pay cost of water used. Exercise measures to conserve water. 1.9 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES A. Provide and maintain required chemical toilet facilities. B. Locate as directed by Walmart Construction Manager. Maintain facilities clean and serviced as necessary and in compliance with local health code requirements. C. Existing facilities shall not be used by construction personnel. 1.10 TEMPORARY STORAGE CONTAINERS A. General Requirements: 1. If required by Authority Having Jurisdiction, obtain all permits necessary for usage and placement of temporary storage container. 2. Coordinate with Store Manager to locate temporary storage container as approved by Authority Having Jurisdiction, when applicable. 1.11 BARRIERS AND CONSTRUCTION TRAFFIC SAFETY A. Protect non -owned vehicular traffic, stored materials, site and structures from damage. B. Provide barriers to prevent unauthorized entry to construction areas to allow for Owner's use of site, and to protect existing facilities and adjacent properties from damage from construction operations. C. Provide barricades and covered walkways required by governing authorities for public rights-of-way, to allow for Owner's use of site, and for public access to existing building. 1. Erect barricades using 1/2" plywood on 2x4 framing. Supports shall be as required to uphold barricade. Verify requirements with Walmart Construction Manager. 2. Construct 8'-0" high unless otherwise directed by owner. 3. Shopping carts shall not be used as barricades. D. When operating any motorized construction equipment in areas where customers or Walmart Associates are present, provide a spotter (or signal person) whose sole job responsibility shall be to ensure safe operation, including directing traffic and keeping area of traffic clear of people. 1.12 TEMPORARY FENCING FOR CONSTRUCTION/DEMOLITION WASTE CONTAINERS A. General: 1. Provide commercial grade temporary chain link fencing around general non -hazardous waste storage and sorting areas as specified in Section 01351 Supplement Par. 3.6.2 - ENVIRONMENTAL COMPLIANCE. 2. Fencing shall be 8 feet high. 3. Maintain access to fire hydrants and hose connections, emergency vehicles, and other site specific conditions as required by Authority Having Jurisdiction. 4. Obtain permits required by AHJ for usage and placement of temporary chain link fencing. 01500-2 B. Materials: 1. Posts: Galvanized steel pipe. Posts shall be suitable for setting in concrete footings or driving into ground as required by local conditions. 2. Fabric: Commercial -grade 2" -mesh chain-link fencing with full fence screening. Screening must be woven plastic cloth or plastic screening slats. No substitutions are allowed for fencing or screening material.. 3. Gates: Provide personnel and vehicle gates of the quantity and size required for functional access to waste container storage area. a. Fabricate gates and screening of same material as used for fencing. b. Equip with locks. C. Installation: Comply with manufacturer's recommendations. 1. Post and Fabric: Set posts in concrete footings, drive posts in ground, or set in holes and backfill to accommodate local conditions. Stretch fabric taut and attach to posts. 2. Gates: Install gates with required hardware. 1.13 WATER CONTROL A. Grade site to drain. Maintain excavations free of water. Provide, operate, and maintain pumping equipment. B. Protect site from puddling or running water. Provide water barriers as required to protect site from soil erosion. C. The Contractor shall at all times protect all activities of his construction, excavations, fill areas, embankments, trenches structures or building from damage from rainwater, spring water, ground water, backing up of drains, sewers and all other water encountered during his operations. He shall provide all pumps, equipment and enclosures necessary to provide adequate protection. 1.14 EXTERIOR ENCLOSURES A. Provide temporary weather -tight closure of exterior openings to provide acceptable working conditions and protection for Products, to allow for temporary heating and maintenance of required ambient temperatures identified in individual specification Sections, and to prevent entry of unauthorized persons. B. Provide access doors with locks. 1.15 INTERIOR ENCLOSURES A. As shown on Drawings, provide sealed temporary partitions as specified herein and in Section 01550 to separate construction work areas from Owner occupied areas, to prevent penetration of dust and moisture into Owner occupied areas, and to prevent damage to existing materials and equipment. B. Temporary Stud Framed Barrier / Dust Partitions: Installation and removal of temporary dust partitions shall be scheduled with a minimum of 3 days prior notification to Walmart Construction Manager and/or Store Manager. Maintain temporary dust partitions to seal openings to Walmart -occupied areas with closed joints and sealed edges at intersections with existing surfaces. These shall be scheduled, installed, and removed as required and directed by Walmart Construction Manager and may not be indicated on the Drawings. Install partitions prior to demolition of existing walls and maintain in dust tight condition until the completion of the new construction. It is the Contractor's responsibility to prohibit dust and debris from entering the Sales area or any Walmart-occupied areas and to obtain approval from AHJ for materials/construction configuration and phasing of temporary enclosures. 1. Dust Wall Partitions: a. Framing: (same as Type A below). b. Covering: 6 mil. clear poly sheeting (if allowed by the Authority Having Jurisdiction); otherwise use Griffolyn type 55 ASFR, anti -static, fire retardant sheeting. Overlap sheeting at joints a minimum 2'-0" and continuously tape joints. Attach sheeting from ceiling to finish floor for dustproof condition. If attachment to ceiling is impossible, light framing shall be installed with sheeting attached all around to prohibit dust penetration. 01500-3 C. Plywood (where required): Install 1/2" C -D plywood over 6 mil poly. Install 4'x8' sheets horizontally from finish floor to bottom of roof deck. Insure that blocking is provided behind each joint. Provide sealant at bottom of plywood at finish floor and continuous sealant against plate on other side. 2. Type A Partition / Dust Drape (no ceiling present): a. Framing: Light gauge metal framing (refer Section 05400) or framing material approved by Authorities Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). Provide continuous 2x4 top and bottom plates and continuous bridging and bracing. Continue top plate to bottom side of roof deck. 1) Walls up to 14'-0" may use 3-5/8" - 22 gauge metal studs at 24" o.c. or 2x4's at 16" o.c. 2) Walls higher than 14'-0" may use 6" - 20 gauge metal studs at 24" o.c. or 2x6's at 16" o.c. b. Covering: Install continuous 6 mil clear poly sheets (if allowed by the Authority Having Jurisdiction); otherwise use Griffolyn type 55 ASFR, anti -static, fire retardant sheeting. Install from finish floor to roof deck. Tape all joints. Install 1/2" C -D plywood over 6 mil poly. Install 4'x8' sheets horizontally from finish floor to bottom of roof deck. Insure that blocking is provided behind each joint. Provide sealant at bottom of plywood at finish floor and continuous sealant against plate on other side. 3. Type B Partition / Dust Drape (ceiling grid to remain in place): a. Framing: (same as Type A above). b. Covering: Install continuous 6 mil clear poly sheets (if allowed by the Authority Having Jurisdiction); otherwise use Griffolyn type 55 ASFR, anti -static, fire retardant sheeting. Install from finish floor to roof deck. Tape all joints. Install 1/2" C -D plywood over 6 mil poly. Install 4'x8' sheets horizontally to bottom of finish ceiling. Extend 6 mil poly to bottom of roof deck. Insure that blocking is provided behind each joint. Provide sealant at bottom of plywood at finish floor and continuous sealant against plate on other side. 4. Type D Security Partitions (exterior): a. Framing: (same as Type A above). b. Covering: At interior face of partition, install continuous 6 mil clear poly sheets (if allowed by the Authority Having Jurisdiction); otherwise use Griffolyn type 55 ASFR, anti -static, fire retardant sheeting. Install from finish floor to roof deck. Tape all joints. Install 1/2" C -D plywood over 6 mil poly. Install 4'x8' sheets horizontally to bottom of roof deck. Insure that blocking is provided behind each joint. At exterior face of partition, install 30 gauge, 24" wide corrugated metal panels as shown on the Drawings. Fill wall cavities with R-13 batt insulation. Provide sealant at bottom of plywood at finish floor and continuous sealant against plate on other side. 5. Doors: a. Single acting doors, opening out, with sturdy closer, closing against gasketed stops on frame to reduce passage of dust. 6. Sealing: a. Seal perimeter of partitions and doors to prevent passage of dust. At Type A and B partitions, tape fastener depressions, joints between panels and joints between panels and floors, ceiling and columns with 2 in. wide pressure sensitive tape. 7. Mats: a. Provide mats at doors to reduce tracking of dust. Replace or clean daily. C. Contractor's Option: Tension Pole Dust Barrier System: Temporary retractable -pole and polyethylene sheeting dust barrier system as specified in Section 01550. 1. General use: In lieu of Stud framed Dust Wall Partitions that are not adjacent to Food Areas, where a barrier to security or safety is not required. 2. Emergency use (48 hours or less): Continuously attended construction area, where approved by Walmart Construction Manager. 3. Access doors, walk -off mats, and system accessories as specified in Section 01550. 1.16 FIELD OFFICES AND SHEDS A. Contractor's Office: (Not required for projects with a duration of less than 4 weeks, or as stated otherwise in Bid documents.) 1. Size as required for Contractor's use and to provide space for project meetings. 2. Adequate electrical power, lighting, heating, and cooling to maintain human comfort. 01500-4 3. Office space with desk and chair, layout table, plan rack, and facilities for storage of Project Record Documents. 4. Furnishings in meeting area: a. Conference table and chairs for at least eight persons. b. Racks and files for Project Record Documents in, or adjacent to, the meeting area. C. Other furnishings: Contractor's option. 5. Contractor's office and sheds not to be used as living accommodations. B. Storage Sheds: Structurally sound, weathertight, on proper foundations, with floors raised above ground. C. Locate office and sheds minimum 30 feet from structures. 1.17 CONSTRUCTION AIDS A. Provide construction aids required to facilitate execution of Work, including stairs, ladders, ramps, staging, platforms, railings, cranes, scaffolds, hoists, chutes, runways, and other required facilities and equipment. B. Such apparatus, equipment and construction shall meet requirements of applicable OSHA (Federal), State and Local Safety and Labor Laws. C. Store employees shall not be allowed access to scaffolds, ladders, and hoists. D. Coordinate crane service required for erection of structural steel, installation of HVAC Rooftop Units, and other crane services as required to accommodate Walmart's needs. 1.18 PROTECTION OF EXISTING WORK A. The existing building shall be protected from moisture, dust and debris. Install dust partitions or drapes as shown or as required to keep dust and moisture from the building premises. B. Provide suitable temporary watertight coverings over openings as required to protect interior work from inclement weather and related/adjacent construction areas. C. Maintain benchmarks, monuments and other reference point. If disturbed or destroyed, replace as directed. D. Protect existing adjacent streets, sidewalks, curbs, buildings and property, including trees, lawns and plants. 1.19 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK A. Protect installed Work; provide special protection where specified in individual specification Sections. B. Provide temporary and removable protection for installed Products. Control activity in immediate work area to minimize damage. C. Provide protective coverings at walls, projections, jambs, sills, and soffits of openings. D. Protect finished floors, stairs, and other surfaces from traffic, dirt, wear, damage, or movement of heavy objects, by protecting with durable sheet materials. E. Minimize traffic and storage on roofed surfaces. If traffic or storage is necessary, obtain recommendations for protection from roofing material manufacturer. F. Do not operate cranes or other heavy equipment on concrete floor slabs if damage could result from such operations. G. Prohibit traffic from landscaped areas. 01500-5 1.20 SECURITY A. Maintain the integrity of the existing building security and security systems at all times. Provide security and facilities to protect Work and Owner's operations from unauthorized entry, vandalism, and theft. B. Obtain permission and coordinate with Owner's security program through Walmart Construction Manager at least 12 hours prior to the modification of any existing security system. C. Provide continuous security at openings cut into existing exterior walls and roofs. 1.21 PARKING A. Provide and maintain access to fire hydrants, free of obstructions. B. Provide temporary parking areas to accommodate construction personnel. 1.22 NOISE CONTROL A. Demolition and other Work that disturbs surrounding Walmart Store areas shall only be allowed in the following categories and time restrictions: 1. Low Level Noise: Assembling trades such as electricians, ceiling installers, painters, tapers, etc.. Excludes all hammering and impact drilling. Low-level noise operations are allowed during Walmart Store operational hours. 2. Moderate Level Noise: Trades include gypsum board installers, stud partition installers, duct installers, etc. Includes occasional and intermittent hammering, screw drilling, etc.. Excludes impact drilling and concrete sawing. Moderate level noise operations may be allowed during Walmart Store operational hours upon approval of Walmart Construction Manager or Store Manager. 3. High Level Noise: Constant loud and high pitched noise produced by impact drilling, concrete saw cutting, hammering of ductwork, and all demolition work. High-level noise operations shall be restricted to Walmart Store non -operational hours. 1.23 PROGRESS CLEANING A. Refer to requirements specified in Section 01740. 1.24 SIGNAGE A. Temporary Construction Signage: Provide temporary signage for identification as required due to obscurity caused by construction. Provide signage for traffic control and safety information. Provide temporary pavement striping for traffic control and pedestrian safety. Provide temporary handicap parking spaces if existing spaces are at a non -accessible location to the building entrance. 1.25 INFORMATION/SAFETY BOARD A. Provide 4'x8'x3/4" C/D exterior glue plywood to be attached on the existing exterior wall at a location designated by the Walmart Construction Manager. B. Information/Safety Board shall be used to communicate safety, state & federal, hiring, OSHA and EPA requirements, bulletins and other information required for the construction of this Project. C. The board shall contain but not be limited to the following: 1. OSHA Safety Requirements 2. Federal and State Hiring Regulations 3. Pertinent State, Local, and Federal Employment Regulations 4. Building Permits 5. Emergency telephone numbers 6. Job Site Safety Meeting notifications 7. EPA Permits or Notification regarding Asbestos or other Toxic or Hazardous Materials 8. Other information required to comply with applicable OSHA, EPA and Federal safety laws 01500-6 D. Protect posted information with either plastic sleeves stapled to the board or 6 mil clear plastic sheathing over entire board providing access for posting of additional information. 1.26 STORAGE OF CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. The Work area may be used to store materials and equipment as approved by the Walmart Construction Manager. Provide storage trailers as required for storage of other materials. The Contractor shall not use Walmart trailers or storage warehouses for materials/equipment storage. B. Storage of flammable/volatile liquid and paint materials within building is prohibited. Remove flammable materials, volatile liquids and paint daily from store. C. The Contractor may not store materials on site except for what is in use for the current work. D. Cover and protect material in transit. E. Stored materials shall be available for inspection by Owner at all times. F. Walmart is NOT responsible for the loss of any construction materials or the Contractors' loss of equipment or tools. 1.27 TEMPORARY FIRE PROTECTION A. Contractors and sub -contractors and their agents and employees shall comply with local fire protection codes and OSHA Regulations. 1. Provide a minimum of one U.L. listed 2A:20BC dry chemical fire extinguisher, or one standard U.L. listed 2-1/2 ga. Water (E-10) and one U.L. listed lOBC carbon dioxide fire extinguisher mounted together, in each of the following areas: a. Each 3000 sq. ft. of work area or fraction thereof with minimum of two extinguishers. 2. Contractor's superintendent, or other assistant superintendents, shall be appointed as project fire warden for entire construction period. 3. Train workmen in proper use of each type fire extinguisher. 4. Post telephone number of fire department, specific information on location of on-site fire fighting equipment and procedure to be followed in event of fire. 5. Maintain free access at all times to fire extinguisher equipment, street fire hydrants, and outside connections for standpipe hose systems. B. Maintain exit facilities and access thereto free of material and other obstructions. If any exits are rendered inoperative during remodeling, provide the same number of temporary exits and maintain a sufficient number of required exits and exit width as required by the adopted building code and AHJ. 1.28 NON-SMOKING POLICY A. Smoking will not be allowed within the building or customer/associate traffic areas at any time. 1.29 REMOVAL OF UTILITIES, FACILITIES, AND CONTROLS A. Remove temporary above grade or buried utilities, equipment, facilities, materials, prior to Final Walk-Thru inspection. B. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary work. C. Restore existing facilities used during construction to original condition. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition. D. At completion of construction, remove fencing, guardrails, barricades, temporary signage and temporary coverings. END OF SECTION 01500-7 BLANK PAGE 01500-8 UniSpec II — Store Planning 042718 SECTION 01550 (11 44 16) — TENSION POLE DUST BARRIER SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Temporary retractable -pole and sheeting dust barrier systems and related containment accessories for enclosing interior dust -emitting construction work. Barriers may be relocated and reused as permitted in this section. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01351 —Regulatory Compliance: a. Disposal and removal of construction and universal waste. b. Work practice control methods for airborne suppressing respirable dust. 2. Section 01500 — Temporary Facilities and Controls: Locations for use. 1.2 REFERENCES A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced within the text by the basic designation only. B. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. ASTM D 7948 - Test Method for Measurement of Respirable Crystalline Silica in Workplace Air by Infrared Spectrometry. C. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA): 1. OSHA 29 CFR Standard 1926.1153 - Respirable Crystalline Silica: Table 1 construction control methods for suppressing airborne respirable dust and permissible exposure limit (PEL). 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use barrier system components and accessories recommended by the manufacturer to maintain dust emissions below the OSHA permissible level when tested in accordance with ASTM D 7948. 1.4 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Remove personal protective equipment, protective outerwear, shoe covers, and respiratory devices used inside dust containment areas before entering clean rooms. B. Wet clean barrier system components and accessories frequently during use and between jobs to avoid dust transmission. C. Dispose of plastic sheeting and other construction waste in accordance with the requirements of Section 01351 Regulatory Compliance Supplement. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Transport, handle, store, and protect barrier system assembly as specified in Section 01600. 01550-1 PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 SUPPLIERS A. Provide products by one of the following or equivalent products subject to the requirements specified herein by another supplier: 1. Surface Shields, Orland Park, IL, (708) 226-9817. Contact Tom Fergus, tfer%zus@surfaceshields.com. 2. ZipWall, Arlington, MA, (800) 718-2255. 3. FastCap, Ferndale, WA, (888) 443-3748. 4. ToolLabl, Winchester, OH, (800) 424-8251, sales(iDtoollab.com 5. Pro Tect Associates, Inc., Northbrook, IL, (877) 991-1352, contact@pro-tect.com. 2.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Adjustable Height Poles: Heavy duty spring loaded, adjustable height locking metal poles with locking header parts and non -slip rubber floor base foot, length as required. 1. Dust Shield Pro Extendable Containment Poles by Surface Shields. 2. Spring -Loaded Poles by ZipWall. 3. 3rd Hand Dust Barrier System by FastCap. 4. Speedy Wall Poles or Curtain -Wall Modular System by ToolLab. 5. EZ Prop Dust Poles by Pro Tect Associates. B. Polyethylene Sheet Screening Material: Clear or white translucent polyethylene sheeting, tested in accordance with the requirements of NFPA for flame retardancy, 6 mil thickness. Provide sheet from suppliers specified herein or equivalent. 1. Contractor's Option: In lieu of polyethylene sheeting, the following reusable fabric panels may be used as barrier screening material: a. Zip -Fast Reusable Barrier Panels by ZipWall. C. Sealing Access Door: Provide one of the following continuous sealing access panel components: 1. Adhesive Zipper Door: Single -use zipper strip of heavy duty polyester or HDPE fabric with pressure - sensitive adhesive backing for application to polyethylene sheet material, 7 ft long. Provide one of the following: a. Zip n Close Zippers by Surface Shields. b. ZipWall Self -Adhesive Zippers by ZipWall. C. Zip -Up or Curtain -Door by ToolLab. d. Pro Tect Zip -Up by Pro Tect. 2. Self -Closing Magnetic Door: Reusable suspended header partition with vertical magnetic strips at access opening, 79 in long. Provide the following: a. 3rd Hand Magnetic Dust Barrier Door by FastCap. 2.3 DUST CONTAINMENT ACCESSORIES A. Vent, Duct, and Surface Protection Film: Self -adhering, clean removal polyethylene protective film. Provide the following or equivalent: 1. Duct Cover Shield by Surface Shields. 2. Vent Mask by Surface Shields. 3. Multi Use Red Surface Protection Film by Pro Tect. B. Clean Room Walk -Off Mat: Disposable tacky floor mats for collecting foot traffic debris, roll or premeasured sheets, with adhesive or non-skid backing. C. Adhesive Tape: Pressure -sensitive, medium tack, UV resistant, rated for clean release after 14 days. Minimum 5 mil thickness, 2 inch wide. 01550-2 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Verify dimensions on site prior to installing barrier system. B. Inspect supporting substrates prior to barrier system installation. Do not attach or abut dust barrier components to mobile or unsecured substrates. C. Coordinate barrier system installation to ensure that simultaneous work outside dust containment areas will not disturb or compromise enclosure. D. Cover and seal vents, ducts, and surfaces inside the containment area. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install dust barrier systems prior demolition, disposal, cutting, patching, or cleaning work as described in Division 1 specifications. Install dust barrier systems prior to cutting, patching, sawing, drilling, and coring as described in Divisions 3, 4, and 5 specifications. B. Provide the number of components and accessories as required to create a continuous seal between the dust containment area and the clean room. C. Install dust barrier system components in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions. Attach extension poles from ceiling to finish floor. Where attachment to ceiling is impractical, install light framing with sheeting secured on top and all sides. Draw plastic sheeting taut without gaping, wrinkling, or puddling at floor. D. Do not allow joints in plastic sheeting between poles. E. Do not reuse plastic sheeting for subsequent work sites. F. Use adhesive tape at corners, sheeting joints, and as necessary to reinforce the seal in areas of the enclosure receiving heavy traffic or tension. Do not use tape as a substitute for extension poles or zipper access doors to seal the barrier enclosure. G. Locate walk -off mats at foot traffic transitions between dust containment area and clean rooms. END OF SECTION 01550-3 BLANK PAGE 01550-4 UniSpec II - Store Planning SECTION 01600 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Basic Product Requirements. 2. Product Options. 3. Product Substitution Requirements. 4. Direct Purchase Products. 5. Product Delivery Requirements. 6. Product Storage and Handling Requirements. 7. Contractor's Product Selection Checklist. 122019 B. Related Sections: 1. Appendix A - Products and Work by Owner or Separate Contractor. a. General procedures related to Owner furnished products. b. Manufacturers, suppliers, vendor contacts and product names and numbers related to Owner furnished products. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Products: Defined as new material, machinery, components, equipment, fixtures, and systems forming the Work. Does not include machinery and equipment used for preparation, fabrication, conveying and erection of the Work. Products may also include existing materials or components required for reuse. 1.3 BASIC PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS A. For products or workmanship specified by association, trade, or other consensus standards, comply with requirements of the standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes. B. Conform to reference standard by date of issue current on date of Contract Documents. C. Obtain copies of standards when required by Contract Documents. D. Should specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect before proceeding. E. The contractual relationship, duties, and responsibilities of the parties to the Contract shall not be altered from the Contract Documents by mention or inference otherwise in any reference document. 1.4 PRODUCT OPTIONS A. Products Specified by Naming a Single Manufacturer and/or Model Number: Provide specified product only unless otherwise specifically permitted in the specifications. B. Products Specified by Naming Two or More Manufacturers: Provide specified products of manufacturers and models named only, meeting specifications and specified requirements unless otherwise specifically permitted in the specifications. C. Products Specified by Reference Standards or by Description Only: Provide any product meeting specified reference standard or description. 01600-1 D. Complete Contractor's Product Selection Checklist specified herein and submit to Architect of Record per requirements of Section 01330 no later than 30 days after construction completion date. 1. Submit checklist in PDF format. 1.5 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION REQUIREMENTS A. No substitutions permitted. Provide specified products only unless otherwise specified. 1.6 DIRECT PURCHASE PRODUCTS A. Direct purchase products shall be purchased directly by the General Contractor from the Manufacturer or the Pre - Negotiated Supplier as specified in the individual Specifications Sections. Direct purchased products shall not be purchased by any subcontractor regardless of the discipline or subcontract involved in the installation. 1.7 PRODUCT DELIVERY REQUIREMENTS A. Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Deliver materials and equipment at such stages of work in order to expedite the Work and minimize storage requirements. B. Schedule delivery for Owner furnished and installed equipment such that upon delivery of equipment to the site, sufficient equipment provisions are in place ready for installation and hook-up. C. Promptly inspect shipments to assure that products comply with requirements, quantities are correct, and products are undamaged. D. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, and damage. Do not use damaged materials and equipment. 1.8 OWNER FURNISHED PRODUCT DELIVERY REQUIREMENTS A. Product Delivery and Receiving: 1. Unless noted otherwise herein, Owner's supplier will deliver products and equipment to jobsite for Contractor to receive on delivery date established by Contractor. 2. Terms of Contractor's delivery and receiving, as well as significant order lead times required for some products, are specified in the Delivery Schedules included herein. 3. The Schedules provide summary information only and do not preclude or supercede requirements contained in the corresponding individual sections or in Appendix A or the Drawings. B. Coordination: 1. Contractor shall contact wm-potracksupportklumatrak.com immediately after Award of Contract to initiate registration in the GC Communicator (GCC) program for Owner supplier scheduling and coordination. 2. Owner's Supplier and Contractor shall establish product delivery and installation dates, quantities of materials, and a coordination procedure through the GCC program. 3. Exceptions to Contractor scheduling are specified in the Delivery Schedules included herein. C. Refer to the applicable drawings or Appendix A for specific details regarding Owner furnished products or equipment. D. Receive and unload products at the Site unless otherwise specified in the Owner Products Delivery Exceptions Schedules included herein. E. Review supplier furnished shop drawings, product data, and samples under provisions of Specifications Section 01330. Submit to supplier with notification to Architect, Owner, and Owner's Construction Department of any discrepancies or problems anticipated in the use the products. 01600-2 F. Verify quantity of products furnished with shop drawings, Final Field Use Drawings, or Bills of Lading as applicable. G. Promptly inspect products upon receipt for shortages, damaged, or defective items; report to Owner and Owner's Construction Department. Upon notification, Owner will arrange for delivery of replacement products. H. Report suspected product manufacturing defects to Owner's Construction Manager and Product Supplier. Upon notification, Owner will arrange for repair of product manufacturing defects. 1.9 PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING REQUIREMENTS A. Provide safe storage of products. B. Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, with seals and labels intact and legible. Store sensitive products in weather -tight, climate controlled enclosures. C. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports, above ground. D. Provide off-site storage and protection when site does not permit on-site storage or protection. E. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide ventilation to prevent condensation. F. Store loose granular materials on solid flat surfaces in a well -drained area. Prevent mixing with foreign matter. G. Provide equipment and personnel to store products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage. H. Arrange storage of products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to assure products are undamaged and are maintained under specified conditions. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Provide interchangeable components of the same manufacturer, for components being replaced. B. Do not use materials and equipment removed from existing premises, except as specifically permitted by the Contract Documents. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF OWNER FURNISHED PRODUCTS A. Owner Furnished Equipment Installed by the Contractor. All Owner Furnished equipment shall be installed by the Contractor unless otherwise noted in the individual sections of the Specifications, on the Drawings, or in Appendix A to be installed by the Owner. B. Provide for installation and hook-up at time of delivery of Owner installed equipment if Owner is to install as specified in the Products Installed by Owner Schedules included herein. C. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. D. Coordinate installation of Owner installed products and equipment. E. Work in harmony with all subcontractors, suppliers and manufacturers. F. Unpack and set in place, plumb, level, and secure. 01600-3 G. Connect to mechanical, plumbing, and electrical systems as required. H. Remove packaging and clean products. I. Test and adjust as required. Replace items damaged during installation. K. Protect installed products from damage by subsequent construction operations. END OF SECTION 01600-4 Product Selection Checklist - Contractor Provided Items Place check in box next to each item applicable in project indicating which Manufacturer's product was provided in project. Submit to Architect of Record as PDF document in accordance with requirements specified in Section 01330. Section - Title Item Manufacturer ✓ 06065 Plastic Materials Plastic Bollard Sleeves Ideal Shield Post Guard Ultratech 06400 Architectural Woodwork High Pressure Laminate (HPL) Formica Nevamar Panolam Pionite Wilsonart Thermofused Melamine Panel (TFM) Funder America Panolam Roseburg Forest Prod. Panel Products (MDF and Particleboard) Arauco NA Georgia Pacific Homasote Roseburg Forest Prod. Metal Trim Macklanburg-Duncan Outwater Plastic Ind. Stylmark Adhesives Wilsonart ITW Polymers Sealants Franklin International 06424 Protective Surfacing Rigid Sheet Protective Wall Covering (PS -7 only) Impact Specialties Nevamar Omnova Rigid Sheet Protective Wall Covering (other Impact Specialties Adhesives Spray -Lock Franklin International In -Pro Corporation Corner Guards (For use with PS -7 only) American Floor Prod. Pawling Corporation 06610 Glass Fiber Reinforced Plastic FRP Panels Crane Composites Glasteel Marlite FRP Adhesive Franklin International Marlite Parkland plastics Spray -Lock Premium 06615 Non -Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Panels NRP Panels Parkland Plastics NRP Adhesive Parkland Plastics Spray -Lock Premium 01600-5 Section - Title Item Manufacturer ✓ 08110 Steel Doors and Frames Steel Doors, Panels, and Frames Glazed Light Frames Assa Abloy (including Ceco, Curries, Pioneer Industries, and/or Security Metal Products (SMP) Deansteel Door Components Inc (DCI) Hollow Metal Express (HMX) Mesker Metal Products Inc (MPI) Premier Republic Steelcraft (Allegion) 08305 Side Folding Grille Side Folding Grille and Operating Hardware Dynamic Closures Overhead Door Clopay Cornell Door Solutions 08383 Traffic Doors Full -Height Traffic Doors Cafe Style Traffic Doors Mueller Door Corp Senneca (including Chase, Eliason, and/or RubbAir) Aleco Frank 08411 Aluminum Framed Storefront Aluminum Glazed Framing Systems Kawneer EFCO Tubelite Oldcastle Bldg Envelope 08710 Door Hardware Enter selected manufacturer in space provided for each type. Type: H -Series Hinges H-2 H-7 H-8 H-9 H-11 H-15 Type: L -Series Locks L-1 L-2 L-3 L-4 L-5 L-6 L-7 L-8 L-9 L-10 L-11 L-12 L-13 L-15 L-16 L-17 L-18 L-20 01600-6 Section - Title Item Manufacturer ✓ L-21 L-22 L-23 L-24 L-25 Type: E -Series Exit Devices E-1 E-2 E-4 E-5 E-7 E-8 E-10 E-11 E-14 E-16 E-18 E-19 E-20 E-21 E-23 E-24 E-25 Type: P -Series Push and Pulls P-1 P-2 P-3 P-4 P-5 Type: C -Series Closers C-4 C-5 C-6 C-7 C-8 C-9 C-10 C-11 C-12 Type: K -Series Protection Plates K-2 K-3 K-4 K-5 K-6 K-7 Type: S -Series Stops, Holders, and Bumpers S-1 S-2 S-4 S-5 S-6 S-7 S-8 01600-7 Section - Title Item Manufacturer ✓ Type: DH -Series Door Holders DH -1 Type: T -Series Thresholds T-1 T-4 T-9 T-10 Type: W -Series Weatherstripping W-1 W-3 W-4 W-5 W-6 Type: M -Series Miscellaneous M-1 M-3 M-4 M-5 M-6 M-8 M-9 M-10 M-11 M-12 M-15 M-16 M-17 M-18 M-19 M-20 M-21 M-21 a M-24 M-25 M-26 09310 Ceramic Tile Ceramic tile not listed herein but specified in Section 09310 has one manufacturer. Provide tile as specified. CT -48A Crossville Marazzi 09330 Quarry Tile Quarry tile not listed herein but specified in Section Provide tile as specified. 09330 has one manufacturer. QT -1 American Olean Dal -Tile Metropolitan Ceramics QT -3 American Olean Dal -Tile Metropolitan Ceramics QT -31 American Olean Dal -Tile Summitville Tiles QT -34 American Olean Dal -Tile 01600-8 Section - Title Item Manufacturer ✓ 09655 Resilient Base and Accessories Products not listed here but specified in section Provide products as specified. 09655 are by a single manufacturer. Vinyl base Armstrong Flooring Flexco Corporation Johnsonite Roppe Rubber VPI Corporation Transition Strips National Guard Products Ceramic Tool Company Adhesives Franklin International Seal Bond 09656 Recycled Rubber Commercial Flooring Recycled Rubber Flooring ECORE Commercial Regupol America Rubber -Cal Adhesive ECORE Regupol America BASF Const. Chem. 09680 Carpet Carpet Tiles Interface Mannington Comm. Milliken & Co. Mohawk Shaw Floors Adhesive Mapei Roberts Shaw Transition Strips National Guard Products Ceramic Tool Company 10160 Metal Toilet Compartments Stainless Steel Toilet Compartments and Screens ASI (including Accurate Partitions and Global Partitions) Mills/Bradley Columbia Flush Metal Partitions General Partitions Hadrian Metpar 10165 Plastic Laminate Toilet Compartments Plastic Laminate Toilet Compartments and Screens ASI (including Accurate Partitions and Global Partitions) Flush Metal Partitions General Partitions Metpar 10170 Plastic Toilet Compartments Plastic Toilet Compartments and Screens ASI (including Accurate Partitions and Global Partitions) Mills/Bradley Columbia Flush Metal Partitions General Partitions Hadrian Metpar Scranton Products 01600-9 Section - Title Item Manufacturer ✓ 10810 Toilet Accessories Products not listed here but specified in section Provide products as specified. Where necessary, enter manufacturer of equivalent manufacturers included in section 10810. 10810 are by a single manufacturer. product from the list of Sanitary Napkin Disposal ASI Bradley Bobrick Paper Towel Dispenser w Waste Receptacle, Recessed ASI Bradley Toilet Paper Dispensers ASI Bradley Bobrick Electric Hand Dryers (Public) Xlerator Equivalent: Electric Hand Dryers (Non-public or Partial Remodel) Saniflow Bradley Equivalent: Diaper Changing Table Foundations Koala Care Equivalent: Child Safety Seat Foundations Koala Equivalent: Toilet Seat Cover Dispensers ASI Bradley Bobrick Small Framed Mirrors Meek. Bradley Equivalent: Large Framed Mirrors Meek ASI Bradley Grab Bars ASI Bradley Bobrick Mainline Stainless Steel Cover Plates Enter Mftr: 01600-10 Store/Supercenter DELIVERY SCHEDULE Order Date* Delivery Conditions* Product Description Location Shown or Specified Contractor to Schedule All Products Unless Otherwise Various Noted Delivery Prior to Possession Date (from shortest to longest time out) At Award of 1 Week Vision Center Equipment Architectural Drawings Project Lighting Fixtures 4 Weeks Min (Except where scheduled to be 16500 furnished by Contractor) 4 Weeks Telephone System 16700 END OF SCHEDULE 01600-11 BLANK PAGE 01600-12 UniSpec II - Store Planning 113018 SECTION 01731 - CUTTING AND PATCHING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Requirements and limitations for cutting and patching Work. 2. Products for patching and extending Work. 3. Transitions and adjustments. 4. Repair of damaged surfaces, fmishes and cleaning. B. Related Requirements: 1. Construction Contract Between Walmart and Contractor (Par 3.12): Additional requirements for cutting and patching. 2. Section 01351 —Regulatory Compliance: a. Disposal and removal of hazardous construction and universal waste. b. Work practice control methods for airborne respirable dust. 3. Section 01500 -Temporary Facilities and Controls: Temporary barriers. 4. Section 02023 - Selective Site Demolition: Procedures for removing existing materials and equipment. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA): 1. OSHA 01926.1153 Respirable Crystalline Silica 1.3 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Minimize dust emissions or provide equipment that suppresses dust. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Cutting and patching shall be performed as required for cutting into existing construction to provide for installation or performance of other work and subsequent fitting and patching required for restoration of surfaces to their original condition. B. Cut into or partially remove portions of the existing building as required for new construction. Include such work as: 1. Cutting, moving or removal of items shown to be cut, moved or removed. 2. Cutting, moving or removal of items not shown to be cut, moved, or removed, but which must be cut, moved, or removed to allow for new construction. Work or items which are to remain in the finished work shall be patched or reinstalled after cutting, moving, or removal, and joints and finishes shall match adjacent or similar work. 3. Removal of existing surface finishes as needed to install new work and finishes. 4. Removal of abandoned items and removal of items rendered no longer required resulting from alterations such as abandoned piping and electrical conduits to nearest J -boxes. 5. Repair or removal of dangerous or unsanitary conditions resulting from alterations work. C. Structural Work: 1. Do not cut and patch structural work in manner resulting in reduction of load -carrying capacity or load and deflection ratio. D. Operational Limitations: 1. Do not cut and patch in manner resulting in decreased performance, shortened useful life, or increased maintenance. 01731-1 E. Quality Limitations: Do not cut and patch work exposed to view (exterior and interior) in manner resulting in noticeable reduction of aesthetic qualities and similar qualities, as determined by the Walmart Construction Manager. F. Limitation on Acceptance: Walmart Construction Manager's acceptance to proceed with cutting and patching shall not waive right to later require removal or replacement of work found to be cut and patched in unsatisfactory manner as determined by Walmart Construction Manager. G. Obtain all required inspections and approvals from authorities having jurisdiction for Temporary Certificate of Occupancy for Offices and Stockroom at least seven calendar days prior to Walmart scheduled move into new Office and Stockroom areas. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Use materials for cutting and patching that are identical to existing materials. If identical materials are not available or cannot be used, use materials that match existing adjacent surfaces to fullest extent possible with regard to visual effect. Use materials for cutting and patching that will result in equal or better performance characteristics. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which work is to be performed before cutting. Take corrective action before proceeding with work if unsafe or otherwise unsatisfactory conditions are encountered. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of work to be cut to prevent failure. B. Protection: 1. Protect other work during cutting and patching to prevent damage. 2. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for that part of project that may be exposed during cutting and patching operations. 3. Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas. 4. Take precautions not to cut existing pipe, conduit, or duct serving building but scheduled to be relocated until provisions have been made to bypass them. 3.3 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Remove, cut and patch work in a manner to minimize damage and to provide means of restoring products, materials, and finishes to match original condition. B. Cutting and removal work shall be performed so as not to cut or remove more than is necessary and that are least likely to damage work to be retained or adjoining work. C. Conduct work in such a manner as to minimize noise and to minimize accumulation and spread of dirt and dust. D. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding. Avoid hammering and chopping. E. Where cutting cured concrete or masonry is required, use saws equipped with integrated water delivery systems that continuously feed water to the blade, or a HEPA-rated filter dust collection vacuum system recommended by the manufacturer to maintain dust emissions below the permissible level. 01731-2 F. Where core drilling or grinding concrete is required, use power tools equipped with HEPA-rated filter dust collection vacuum system recommended by the manufacturer to maintain dust emissions below the permissible level. G. To avoid marring existing finished surfaces, cut and drill from exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use. H. Cut holes and slots neatly to size required with minimum disturbance of adjacent work. Use HEPA-rated filter vacuums to clean holes and slots. I. Dispose of construction waste in accordance with the requirements of Section 01351. Patch with seams that are durable and as invisible as possible. Comply with specified tolerances for work. K. If the surrounding surface cannot be matched, repaint or recoat the entire surface to nearest corner or transition point. 3.4 TRANSITIONS A. Where new work abuts or aligns with existing work, provide a smooth and even transition. Patched work shall match existing adjacent work in texture and appearance. B. Where finished surfaces are cut in such a way that a smooth transition with new work is not possible, terminate the existing surface along a straight line at a natural line of division. C. Where two or more spaces are indicated to become one space, reconstruct ceilings to provide horizontal planes without breaks, steps or bulkheads. D. In cases of extreme change of ceiling or floor, obtain instructions from Walmart Construction Manager as to method of making an acceptable transition. 3.5 REPAIR OF DAMAGED SURFACES A. Patch or replace portions of existing surfaces which are damaged, discolored, or showing imperfections. Repair substrate prior to patching finish. B. Restore existing work that is damaged during construction to a condition equal to its condition at the time of the start of the Work. C. At locations in existing areas where partitions are removed, patch the floors, walls and ceilings with finish materials to match new finishes. D. Where plumbing is removed and capped below finish floor, core drill concrete floor as required using proper dust control methods as specified herein. Cap a minimum of 8" below floor. Patch hole with new concrete to match existing floor. 3.6 REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT OF EXISTING WORK A. Remove existing items, services, finishes or surfaces as required for installation of new construction. B. Repair, re-route, and extend services, piping and conduit of existing items and equipment as required during construction operations for installation and operation of new items and equipment. When existing equipment to remain is removed or relocated, re -install as required for proper operation. END OF SECTION 01731-3 BLANK PAGE 01731-4 UniSpec II- Store Planning 022820 SECTION 01740 — CLEANING PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Cleaning of building and site premises included in the scope of contractual construction work. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01351 — Regulatory Compliance: a. Construction demolition waste management and disposal. b. Disposal and removal of hazardous construction and demolition waste. C. Work practice control methods for airborne respirable dust. 1.2 REFERENCES A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced within the text by the basic designation only. B. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA): 1. OSHA 01926.1153 Respirable Crystalline Silica. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Professional Commercial Cleaning Qualifications: Commercial cleaning for building improvement as specified in Part 3 herein shall be performed by a firm regularly engaged in commercial cleaning for a continuous period of not less than 2 years. Firm shall be experienced in work of the nature and scale similar to this project. 1.4 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Dispose of construction and universal waste in accordance with requirements of Section 01351 and local, state, and Federal regulatory codes and regulations. 1. Store volatile waste in covered metal containers and remove from premises daily. Prevent accumulation of wastes which create hazardous conditions. 2. Do not burn or bury rubbish and waste materials on the project site. 3. Adhere to volatile fluid waste disposal and wastewater regulations. B. Minimize dust emissions or provide equipment that suppresses dust. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Transport, handle, store, and protect products in compliance with the requirements of Section 01600. B. Do not store flammable materials or liquids in any part of the existing or new building premises. PART 2- PRODUCTS 1.6 CLEANING MATERIALS A. Verify that selected cleaning products are manufactured according to local, state, and Federal regulations and that manufacturers are regularly engaged in the production of such products. B. Verify that materials are clearly labeled. 01740-1 C. Use solutions and products specifically formulated and recommended for cleaning the surfaces without damage to either the primary or adjacent surfaces. 1. Use only cleaning materials recommended by the manufacturer of the surface to be cleaned. 2. Use cleaning products only on surfaces recommended by cleaning product material manufacturer. D. Use products that are not toxic or caustic to metal or acoustic surfaces. PART 3 - EXECUTION 1.7 GENERAL A. Coordination and Scheduling: 1. Perform cleaning during periods when store is closed or during low traffic periods, typically between 10:00 pm and 6:00 am. 2. Schedule cleaning operations so that dust and other contaminants resulting from cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly -painted surfaces. 3. Coordinate cleaning schedule with store manager. Coordinate with and submit to Store Manager cleaning schedule at least 7 days prior to commencement of cleaning operations. B. Periodically inspect equipment to ensure equipment is operating optimally and safely. 1. Verify equipment is adequately diapered, hose connections are tight, and fasteners are secure. Repair leaks and provide maintenance where required. C. Each day, clear work and access areas. Maintain premises free from accumulations of waste, debris, and rubbish caused by construction operations. D. Segregate and sort waste materials by type and class as directed by local, state, and Federal regulations. E. Do not leave cleaning materials unattended while in use. F. Clean each project phase when completed. G. Interior — General: 1. Vacuum clean interior building areas on an as -needed basis and prior to areas receiving finish painting. 2. Use vacuum with HEPA-rated filter to clean concrete, masonry, gypsum board, stone and tile surfaces. H. Exterior — General: 1. Clean exterior premises daily. Keep streets and access to site free of rubbish and debris. 2. Do not allow exterior debris to enter customer areas. 3. Sprinkle dusty debris with fine water mist to control accumulation of dust. Avoid puddling. 1.8 FINAL CLEANING OF CONSTRUCTION AREAS A. Execute final cleaning prior to final inspection in areas which are included in the scope of construction and disrupted in the course of completion of the work as follows. 1. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard -surfaced finishes to a dirt -free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. 2. On exterior hard surfaces, do not use products or methods which may disturb natural weathering. 3. Clear construction waste from grounds and landscaped areas. 4. Clean construction waste from paved areas. If waste is silt or sand, use equipment fitted with a HEPA-rated filter. 5. Remove tools, construction equipment, and machinery. 6. Remove construction waste from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, and attics. 7. Clean debris from roofs, gutters, downspouts, and drainage systems. 8. Vacuum construction dust and debris with HEPA-rated filter equipment. Remove debris and excess nap from carpets; shampoo if visible soil or stains remain. 01740-2 9. Thoroughly clean any new flooring. 10. Remove glazing compounds and other vision -obscuring materials from mirrors and reflective surfaces. Replace chipped or broken glass. 11. Remove labels that are not permanent. 12. Touch up exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored. 13. Remove excess lubrication, paint, and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances from mechanical and electrical equipment. 14. Clean stains from plumbing fixtures if exposed to water during construction. 15. Repair or replace damaged light fixture lenses and fluorescent lamps and ballasts. a. Replacement fluorescent lamps and ballasts shall be furnished by Owner. All other light fixture parts shall be contractor provided. B. Leave premises ready for occupancy. 1.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Prior to Owner possession, conduct an inspection of entire premises with Construction Manager to verify conformance with the requirements herein. END OF SECTION 01740-3 BLANK PAGE 01740-4 UniSpec - Store Planning SECTION 01770 - CONTRACT CLOSEOUT PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Closeout Procedures. 2. Final Closeout Submittals. 3. Closeout Document Submission. 4. Record Letters of Conformance. 5. Letters of Certification. 6. Project Record Documents. 7. Operations and Maintenance Data. 8. Warranties and Bonds. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 01740 — Cleaning. Requirements for final cleaning. 1.2 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 032720 A. Comply with closeout submittal requirements defined within individual Sections. Submittals procedures described herein shall apply unless otherwise described in individual Sections. B. When Contractor considers Work to be Substantially Complete, submit written certification to Walmart's Construction Manager as follows. 1. Contract Documents have been reviewed. 2. Work has been inspected. 3. Work is complete in accordance with Contract Documents. 4. Work is ready for inspection. 1.3 FINAL CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Definition: Closeout submittals are submittals specified in the individual sections as "Closeout" and shall not be otherwise considered a closeout document regardless of the type of submittal. Submittals not classified as a closeout submittal shall be considered a regular submittal under the provisions of Section 01330. For example: Maintenance Data may, or may not, be classified as a closeout unless specifically identified as a closeout in the individual section Part 1 SUBMITTAL paragraph. B. Unless otherwise specified in the individual sections, submit closeout submittals to the Owner within 90 days after Substantial Completion of the Work. C. All closeout documents specified in the individual sections shall be submitted. Specific documents listed below shall be included separately in an Electronic Closeout Document Submission as specified hereinafter. D. Final closeout submittals shall be received and approved by Owner before final application for payment will be approved. 1.4 CLOSEOUT DOCUMENTS FOR OWNER FURNISHED EQUIPMENT A. Closeout documents for Owner furnished equipment as required and specified in Appendix A shall be obtained directly from the Owner's vendor, supplier, or manufacturer. When, or if, documents are unavailable directly from the vendor, Contact Realty Procurement Services for assistance in obtaining the required documents. 01770-1 1.5 ELECTRONIC CLOSEOUT DOCUMENT SUBMISSION A. Submit closeout documents electronically through Owner's online system. Documents included in Electronic Closeout Document Submission shall consist only of the items in the following numbered list. Note that all closeout documents are not necessarily included in the Electronic Closeout Document Submission. If any item is not applicable, include a "Not Applicable" sheet within the uploaded section of the Electronic Closeout Document Submission. The Electronic Contract Document Submission shall not be compiled based only on the brief description of each item in the following list. It is compulsory that the individual sections and references be examined to comprehend the full description of the specific item to be included. Include the following: 1. Contractor's Statement of Warranty. (Reference Article 3.4 of the Construction Contract) (Reference form included at end of this section.) 2. Copy of Certificate of Occupancy: Submit as Electronic Closeout Document by uploading an electronic file of the C of O to the Walmart Quickbase Certificate of Occupancy Tracking Application. 3. Subcontractor Assignment: Submit a final list of Subcontractors used (Reference Article 3.5 of the Construction Contract.). Include the following information for each Subcontractor: a. Daytime and after-hours telephone numbers. b. Address. C. Quarterly expenditure detail. 4. Signed and notarized lien waivers from Contractor and all Subcontractors on the Walmart form (Reference Article 5.3 and associated Exhibits of the Construction Contractl).The waivers shall have no modifications or changes made thereon. 5. Copies of Performance and Payment Bond. (Reference Article 7.5 of the Construction Contract) 6. Consent of Surety to Final Payment: From Bonding Company. (Reference Article 5.3 of the Construction Contract.) 7. Substantial Completion Punchlist: Building, Civil, and HVAC/refrigeration punch lists showing items completed and approved by Owner. (Reference Article 5.2 of the Construction Contract.) 8. Asset Tag Data Collection Application: HVAC/Refrigeration equipment tag QR codes and data input into application and confirmed by Walmart in accordance with Sections 15050, 15600 and 15700. 9. Verification of transmittal to Store Manager of all Project Record Documents specified hereinafter and Operations and Maintenance Manuals. This shall be in the form of a Letter of Transmittal with a statement signed by the Store Manager verifying that the O&M manuals have been placed in the Electrical Distribution Center (EDC) by the Contractor and the placement witnessed by the Store Manager. 10. Record Letters of Conformance: Include separate letter for each item listed below. a. Contractor Quality Control (Section 01452) b. Construction Testing Laboratory (Appendix B) 11. Inspection Reports: Include separate report for each required item listed below. a. Building Services Piping: (Section 15100) 1) Video Inspection Report. B. If Contractor fails to provide a fully completed Electronic Closeout Document Submission within 90 days after Substantial Completion of the Work, then Contractor agrees to pay Owner the sum of $250.00 per day, as liquidated damages and not as a penalty, until the fully completed Electronic Closeout Document Submission is received and approved by Owner Contract Administration. 1.6 RECORD LETTERS OF CONFORMANCE A. Submit Record Letters of Conformance as a Closeout Submittal. By submitting Record Letter of Conformance, the Contractor declares that the product identified by manufacturer's name and model number is the product specified and is suitable for the intended use as defined within the Contract Documents and has been provided and placed in operational condition in accordance with the manufacturer's published instructions and the Contract Documents. 1. Submit completed Record Letter of Conformance for each product selected as indicated within each Section. 2. Fill-in required information on form and sign in ink by person authorized to sign on behalf of the Contractor. 3. No modifications shall be made to the form. 4. Record Letters of Conformance, when required, are located at the end of the respective Section. 01770-2 1.7 LETTERS OF CERTIFICATIONS A. Certify manufacturer's or installer's qualifications, conformance with tests or specified criteria, or other factors as required in individual specification sections. B. Submit supporting reference data, affidavits, and certifications as required. C. Number of Copies Required: Two. 1.8 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS: A. Maintain on site, one set of the following record documents. Record actual revisions to the Work. 1. Contract Drawings. (Building and Civil) 2. Specifications. 3. Addenda. 4. Change Orders and other Modifications to the Contract. 5. Reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples. B. Maintain Record Documents separate from documents used for construction. C. As -built Record Documents and Shop Drawings: Record as-builts shall be maintained and submitted for the primary purpose of recording the locations for concealed interior and exterior underground utilities as specified in the individual specifications. Legibly record actual measured horizontal and vertical locations of interior and exterior underground utilities and appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements. D. Record required as -built information concurrent with construction progress. Do not permanently conceal work until required information has been recorded. E. At Project completion, the Contractor shall place the Record Documents (including Building and Civil Record Drawings, Specifications, Addenda, and Change Orders) enclosed in a plastic pipe tube (fixed cap at one end and a threaded -cap on the other end) for storage in the Electrical Room unless otherwise specified to be located in another location in the individual Sections. Placement shall be in the presence of and witnessed by the Store Manager. 1.9 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Operation and Maintenance data shall include a suitably bound set of descriptive literature, maintenance and operation data, and parts lists for each item of equipment provided under this Contract that will require maintenance or special operation procedures, including drawings, instructions, or manuals supplied with equipment furnished by others and installed under this Contract. Submittal of O&M data shall be in the form of placement by the Contractor of the bound set of O&M data in the Electrical Distribution Center (EDC) within the building. Do not include O&M data in the Closeout Document Book or submit to Walmart Contract Administration. Placement of documents shall be witnessed by the Store Manager and shall be at least 14 days prior to final inspection. 1.10 WARRANTIES AND BONDS A. Prior to Final Application for Payment, submit required warranties and bonds in Closeout Document Submission. 1. Assemble documents from Subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers. 2. For equipment put into use with Owner's acceptance during construction, submit within ten days after first operation, listing date of acceptance as start of warranty period. 3. For items of Work delayed materially beyond Date of Substantial Completion, provide updated submittal within ten days after acceptance, listing date of acceptance as start of warranty period. END OF SECTION 01770-3 WALMART AFFIDAVIT OF TOTAL RELEASE AND CERTIFICATION OF ALL BILLS PAID Replaced by Construction Contract Par 5.3.2 and Exhibits. 01770-4 [CONTRACTOR'S LETTERHEAD] CONTRACTOR'S STATEMENT OF WARRANTY DATE: PROJECT: LOCATION: OWNER: Walmart Stores, Inc. 702 SW 811' Street Bentonville, AR 72712 CONTRACT: Construction Agreement Between Walmart and Contractor, dated 20 General Contractor hereby: (1) warrants that the Work for Project complies with Article 3.4 of the Construction Contract; (2) acknowledges that its warranty obligations under such Article 3.4 extends one year beyond the actual date of Substantial Completion of the Project; and (3) affirms, and acknowledges the enforceability of, all other warranties made by Contractor in the Contract. Terms used but not defined herein shall have the meanings given to them in the above referenced Contract. The undersigned Contractor hereby makes the certifications set forth herein to Walmart as of the day of ,20 Witness: Contractor: Print Name: Name: Title: STATE OF COUNTY OF On this the day of 20 before me, a Notary Public, within and for the State and County aforesaid, personally appeared, to me well know (or proved to me on the basis of satisfactory evidence), who stated upon oath that (s)he had executed the foregoing instrument for the consideration set forth therein. Notary Public My commission expires: 01770-5 BLANK PAGE 01770-6 UniSpec 11- Store Planning 092917 SECTION 02023 - SELECTIVE SITE DEMOLITION PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Procedures for demolition and removal of existing building elements. 2. Protection of existing construction. 3. Salvaged material and items. 4. Schedule of building demolition. 5. Disposal of demolished materials (non -hazardous and hazardous). B. Related Sections: 1. Section 01100 - Summary: Restrictions for Work within and adjacent to existing building areas. 2. Section 01351 -Compliance: a. Removal and disposal of resilient flooring and acoustical ceiling tile to be recycled. b. Removal and disposal of hazardous construction and demolition waste. C. Removal and disposal of non -hazardous demolition waste and debris and management of salvaged items. d. Work practice control methods for airborne respirable dust. 3. Section 01500 - Temporary Facilities and Controls: Temporary protection and barriers. Removal and disposal of demolished materials. 4. Section 01731 - Cutting and Patching: Requirements and limitations for cutting and patching Work. 5. Section 02251 - Shoring: Requirements for shoring and bracing. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA): 1. OSHA 01926.1153 Respirable Crystalline Silica. 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Selective Demolition Requirements: 1. Perform demolition in construction sequence phases as required by the scope of Work and as agreed upon with the Wal-Mart Construction Manager. 2. Work necessary and required to facilitate the new construction indicated. 3. Demolish so that construction, new and existing, can be performed and completed in accordance with construction documents. 4. Visit the project site and become familiar with the existing conditions and project requirements. 5. Clarify the scope of the Work under this Section including salvage material. The Owner will be responsible for removing materials and equipment which the Owner wishes to salvage prior to the beginning of this Work. 6. Retain existing fire protection sprinkler system in place and active. 7. Contractor is responsible for damage to existing structure and replacement or repair of damage. 8. Repair, replace, or rebuild existing construction as required or as directed which has been removed, altered, or disrupted to allow for new construction. Correct existing construction to match adjacent construction, new or existing as specified in Section 01731. B. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Conform to applicable code for demolition of structures, safety of adjacent structures, runoff control, and disposal. 2. Comply with applicable local and state dust control regulations. 3. Obtain required permits from authorities having jurisdiction and submit to Wal-Mart. 02023-1 4. Notify affected utility companies before starting work and comply with their requirements. Submit Certificates for severance of utility services and submit confirmation documentation of all utility company contacts to Wal-Mart. 5. Do not close or obstruct roadways, sidewalks, or hydrants without permits from authorities having jurisdiction and Wal-Mart Construction Manager. 6. Conform to applicable regulatory procedures when discovering hazardous, contaminated, and universal waste materials. 7. Test soils around buried tanks for contamination (where buried tanks occur). 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Owner will continuously occupy areas of building immediately adjacent to areas of selective demolition. Work within and adjacent to existing building areas will be restricted to areas and hours specified in Section 01700. B. Conditions of Structure: 1. Owner assumes no responsibility for actual condition of items or structures to be demolished. 2. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purposes will be maintained by Owner insofar as practical. 3. Variations within structure may occur by Owner's removal and salvage operations prior to start of selective demolition work. C. Traffic: Conduct selective demolition and debris removal in manner to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. Provide traffic controls as specified in Section 01500. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: Engage only personnel who can demonstrate not less that five (5) years successful experience in Work of similar character. B. Performance Criteria: 1. Requirements of Structural Work: Do not cut structural work in a manner resulting in a reduction of load - carrying capacity of load/deflection ratio. 2. Operational and Safety Limitations: Do not cut operational elements and safety-related components in a manner resulting in a reduction of capacities to perform in a manner intended or resulting in a decreased operational life, increased maintenance, or decreased safety. 3. Visual Requirements: Do not cut work which is exposed on the exterior or exposed in occupied spaces of the building in a manner resulting in a reduction of visual qualities or resulting in substantial evidence of the demolition work judged by the Architect to be cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner. 4. Loading: Do not superimpose loads at any point upon existing structure beyond design capacity including loads attributable to materials, construction equipment, demolition operations, and shoring and bracing. 5. Vibration: Do not use means, methods, techniques, or procedures which would induce vibration into any element of the structure. 6. Fire: Do not use means, methods, techniques, or procedures which would produce any fire hazard. 7. Water: Do not use means, methods, techniques, or procedures which would produce water run-off, and water pollution. Refer to Section 01500 for related requirements. 8. Air Pollution: Do not use means, methods, techniques or procedures which would produce uncontrolled dust, fumes, or other damaging air pollution. 1.6 UTILITY SERVICES A. Maintain existing utilities. Keep in service and protect against damage during demolition operations. B. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving occupied or used facilities except when authorized in writing by authorities having jurisdiction and approval by Wal-Mart Construction Manager. C. Provide temporary services during interruptions to existing utilities as acceptable to governing authorities. 02023-2 D. Locate, identify, stub off, and disconnect utility services not to remain. E. Provide by-pass connections as necessary to maintain continuity of service to occupied areas of building. F. Provide advance notice to Wal-Mart if shut -down of service is necessary during change -over. 1.7 PROJECT SITE A. Indicated "Existing Construction" was obtained from existing drawings. Verify existing conditions and notify the Wal-Mart Construction Manager of discrepancies before proceeding with the Work. B. Perform removal, cutting, drilling, etc., of existing work with extreme care, and use small tools in order not to jeopardize the structural integrity of the building. C. Occupancy: Contractor will have limited use of the facility during construction as specified in Section 01700. D. Condition of Structure: The Owner assumes no responsibility for the actual condition of portions of the structure to be demolished. E. Protection: Ensure that the safe passage of persons around the area of demolition is provided. Conduct operations to prevent damage to adjacent buildings, structures, and other facilities, and injury to persons. 1.8 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Comply with Wal-Mart approved schedule for sequence of operations for selective demolition work. B. Include coordination for shut-off, capping, and continuation of utility services as required, together with details for dust and noise control. C. Provide detailed sequence of demolition and removal work to ensure uninterrupted progress of Owner's on-site operations. D. Conduct selective demolition work in manner to minimize disruption of Owner's normal operations. E. Provide Wal-Mart advance notice of demolition activities impacting Wal -Mart's normal operations as specified in Section 01700. 1.9 SHORING AND BRACING A. Provide temporary shoring, bracing and supports for building structure as required for support of structure during demolition of existing structural elements and to prevent movement, settlement of existing building and adjacent buildings and facilities to remain as specified in Section 02251. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Designated materials and equipment for re -installation: Carefully remove, store, and protect. B. Wal-Mart Salvage: Clean, store, and transfer designated materials and equipment to Owner, and obtain receipt. Wal-Mart salvage items include but are not limited to: 1. Store fixtures. 2. Storage racks. 3. Store equipment. 4. Salvage items as indicated on Drawings. 02023-3 C. Contractor's Salvage: 1. Contractor shall verify with and obtain approval from Wal-Mart Construction Manager for all Contractor salvage items prior to their removal from site. 2. Transport salvaged items from site as items are removed. 3. Storage or sale of removed items on site not permitted. D. Replace materials scheduled for reuse which are damaged to the extent that they cannot be reused. Replace with equal quality material at no additional cost to the Owner as specified in Section 01700. E. Coordinate with the Owner on disposition of salvage items not scheduled for reuse, demolished materials, and equipment. Deliver salvaged materials, not reused, as directed, by or to the Owner. F. Prior to performing any demolition, coordinate with EMS contractor for EMS controls/equipment required to be reused or salvaged. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine surfaces and adjacent areas of Work under this Section. Do not proceed with Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Starting Work constitutes acceptance of existing conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Ensure safe passage of persons around area of demolition. B. Erect temporary covered passageways as specified in Section 01500. C. Protect existing finish work to remain in place. D. Protect floors with suitable coverage. E. Construct temporary insulated solid dustproof partitions where noise or extensive dirt or dust operations are performed. Equip partitions with dustproof doors and security locks if required as specified in Section 01500. F. Provide temporary weather protection between demolition and removal of existing construction on exterior surfaces and installation of new construction to ensure no water leakage or damage occurs to structure or interior areas of existing building as specified in Section 0 15 00. G. Cease operations and notify Wal-Mart Construction Manager immediately if safety of structure appears to be endangered. H. Take precautions to support structure until determination is made for continuing operations. I. Cover and protect furniture, equipment, and fixtures to remain from soiling or damage when demolition work is performed in rooms or areas from which such items have not been removed. 3.3 DEMOLITION A. Demolition work within existing building shall be scheduled with the Wal-Mart Construction Manager for approved times of day. 1. Submit written request for approval to the Wal-Mart Construction Manager 14 calendar days in advance of the date Contractor demolition work is required to begin in the existing building. B. The Owner will remove or, under separate contract, have materials and equipment which the Owner requires removed, prior to commencement of Work under this Section. Coordinate scheduling of removal of Owner materials and equipment with Wal-Mart Construction Manager and Store Manager. 02023-4 C. Demolition: 1. Perform demolition work in systematic manner. 2. Demolish concrete and masonry in small sections. 3. Perform cutting or existing concrete and masonry construction with saws and core drills using proper dust control methods as specified herein. Do not use jack -hammers, except as specified herein. Do not use explosives. a. Cut concrete and masonry at junctures with construction to remain, using masonry saws or hand tools, and make cuts straight and square with building. 4. Do not use powder -driven impact tools. 5. Locate demolition equipment throughout structure and promptly remove debris to avoid imposing excessive loads on supporting walls, floor, or framing. 6. Patch with seams which are durable and as invisible as possible. Comply with specified tolerances for the work. 7. Where selective demolition terminates at a "surface" or construction "to remain," completely remove all traces of material selectively demolished, including mortar beds. Provide smooth, even substrate transition as specified in Section 01731. 8. Demolition shall be carried out in a safe manner and in strict accordance with OSHA regulations. 9. The Contractor shall field verify the extent of demolition. The Work includes, but is not limited to, the demolition and removal of walls, doors, fixtures, plumbing, mechanical and electrical items including conduits and ductwork as shown on Drawing or as required for the installation of the new Work for a complete job. 10. When utilities are removed, cap and seal a minimum of 8" below finish floor or a minimum of 6" above finish ceiling. 11. When removing existing structural items, provide adequate shoring, bracing and support systems to keep the existing structure intact and in a safe condition. Refer to Section 02251. D. Demolition of Interior Slabs on Grade: 1. Use removal methods that will not crack, undermine or structurally disturb adjacent slabs or partitions. 2. At interior concrete slabs on grade to receive floor coverings as final finish, minimum width of trench shall be as required to allow for compacting machine to properly compact the base. Manual compaction methods are not acceptable. 3. At interior concrete slabs on grade to receive exposed concrete finish (sealed or unsealed), demolish existing interior slab on grade as shown on the Drawings. No trenching shall be allowed in areas to receive exposed concrete finish. 4. Prior to proposed cutting, install 36" wide rosin paper outside of area to be removed in order to reduce scarring of slab which is to remain. E. Environmental Controls: 1. Use water sprinkling, temporary enclosures, and other proper control methods to maintain airborne dust and dirt below permissible levels. 2. Comply with governing regulations pertaining to environmental protection. 3. Do not use water when it may create hazardous or objectionable conditions, such as ice, flooding, or pollution. 4. For work scheduled in this section including cutting and breaking of masonry, concrete slab below or on grade, walls, foundation work, or footings, use tools equipped with integrated water delivery systems that continuously feed water to the blade or a HEPA-rated filter dust collection vacuum system recommended by the manufacturer to maintain dust emissions below the permissible level. F. Below Grade Demolition: 1. Demolish and remove below grade wood or metal construction. 2. Break up below grade concrete slabs using proper dust control methods as specified herein. G. Filling Below -Grade Voids: 1. Fill below grade areas and voids resulting from demolition work. 2. Use fill consisting of earth, gravel, or sand, free of trash and debris, stones over 6 inches diameter, roots, or other organic matter. 02023-5 H. If unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements conflicting with intended function or design are encountered, submit written report of nature and extent of conflict to Architect and Wal-Mart Construction Manager. Rearrange demolition schedule to continue job progress without delay. 3.4 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS A. Dispose of non -hazardous and universal waste demolished materials as specified in Regulatory Compliance Section 01351. B. Deposit waste materials, rubbish, and debris in waste containers. C. Do not allow waste materials, rubbish, and debris to accumulate and become an unsightly or hazardous condition. D. If hazardous materials are encountered during demolition operations, comply with applicable regulations, laws, and ordinances concerning removal, handling, and protection against exposure or environmental pollution. Notify Wal- Mart Construction Manager, in writing, of hazardous materials encountered. E. Comply with the requirements of Regulatory Compliance Section 01351 (Par 3.6.2 of the Supplement) for hazardous construction and demolition waste management and disposal. 3.5 POLLUTION CONTROLS A. Use temporary enclosures and other proper control methods to maintain airborne dust and dirt below permissible levels. B. Comply with governing authorities pertaining to environmental protection. C. Clean adjacent portion of the structure and improvement of dust, dirt and debris caused by demolition operations, as directed by the Wal-Mart Construction Manager and governing authorities. Return adjacent areas to conditions existing prior to the start of the work. D. Burning of trash, debris, or removed materials not permitted on site. 3.6 SCHEDULE OF SELECTIVE DEMOLITION A. Remove and dispose of existing building items and adjacent sitework items as required for Work and as indicated on Drawings. B. Sitework Adjacent to Building: 1. Fencing, gates and concrete post footings. 2. Asphalt concrete paving. 3. Metal handrails and railings. C. Interior or Exterior Slab on Grade: 1. Locate portion of existing concrete slab to be removed. Saw cut perimeter or existing slab minimum of 50 - percent of slab thickness to provide a breaking point to remove existing concrete. 2. Wet saw concrete slabs along straight lines to minimum depth of 2 -inches where concrete is to be removed. The method of removal shall maintain the undamaged slab edge within the sawed line. Jack hammers may be used only "after hours" and with permission from the Owner's Construction Manager.Jack hammers may not be used at any time to remove/cut concrete from the existing slab, but only to break up concrete which has already been saw cut from the concrete slab. a. Jack hammers shall be equipped with field assembled water delivery systems that supply a continuous stream or spray of water at the point of impact or HEPA-rated filter dust collection vacuum system recommended by the manufacturer to maintain dust emissions below the permissible level. 3. Break concrete slab to be removed into portions easily removed, maximum 30 -inch dimension at any side. 4. Remove concrete pieces within area of slab demolition down to the existing subgrade. 02023-6 D. Exterior Masonry: 1. Locate portion of existing masonry wall to be removed. Units which are removed: "tooth" from existing construction. 2. Verify that temporary supports, enclosures, and bracing are in place and adequate for intended purpose. 3. Remove only that portion of the exterior wall which is required for the indicated new construction. E. Below Grade Construction: 1. Remove below grade construction including foundation work, column footings, and abandon mechanical, plumbing, and electrical work as indicated. F. Interior Walls and Partitions: 1. Remove interior walls and partitions as indicated. 2. Remove all top and bottom framing tracks and overhead braces of partitions being removed. G. Interior Finishes: 1. Removal and recycling or reclamation of vinyl composition tile flooring (VCT) acoustical ceiling tile (ACT) and Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) plank flooring is specified in the Attachments to Compliance Specification Section 01351. H. Mechanical System: 1. Remove mechanical equipment and related ductwork as indicated. 2. Provide temporary weathertight protection of openings in roof and exterior walls. 3. Remove accessories to the mechanical system including, but not limited to, hanger straps. I. Plumbing: 1. Remove plumbing fixtures and accessories including exposed supply, waste, and vent piping as indicated. 2. Identify concealed piping within and below slab construction, and cap a minimum of 3 inches below finish floor unless otherwise noted. Electrical Service: 1. Remove abandoned electrical fixtures, conduit, boxes, and wiring as indicated. 2. Remove electrical circuits including conduit as indicated. K. Lighting: 1. Remove existing light fixtures as indicated or as required for new construction. END OF SECTION 02023-7 BLANK PAGE 02023-8 UniSpec — Store Planning 032720 SECTION 03366 — PVC/VCT REMOVAL AND POLISHED CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHES FOR INTERIOR SLABS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. For existing interior slabs: a. Removal of existing floor finishes (sealers, coatings, tile, etc.) and underlayments, as necessary. b. Interior concrete slab surface enhancement. 1) Progressive wet polishing of slab surface using propane powered planetary or multi -head rotary polishing equipment and approved diamond segments to achieve specified Finish Requirements. 2) Application of reactive densifier, stain protector and burnishing to specified Finish Requirements. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures: Procedures for submittals. 2. Section 01351 -Regulatory Compliance. 3. Section 01500 - Temporary Facilities and Controls: Requirements for control of substances that have the potential for polluting surface and/or groundwater. Requirements for storage of materials and equipment at the project site. 4. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Requirements for use of electrical and propane powered equipment. 5. Section 01770 - Contract Closeout 6. Section 03905 - Interior Concrete Slab Repairs and Joint Filler Replacement. 7. Section 09650 — Resilient Flooring 1.2 REFERENCES A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced within the text by the basic designation only. B. American Society for Testing and Materials: 1. ASTM D 1455 Standard Test Method for 60° Specular Gloss of Emulsion Floor Polish C. Concrete Polishing Council (CPC). D. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA): 1. OSHA 01926.1153 Respirable Crystalline Silica. 1.3 SLAB ENHANCEMENT CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS A. Provide a slab enhancement contractor with a minimum of 5 projects performed within the last two years of similar type, size, and complexity. Provide a list of the enhancement contractor's former project names, addresses, contacts, phone numbers, and scope of work. 1. Verify that the slab enhancement contractor's personnel remain the same throughout the completion of floor work. B. Slab Enhancement Subcontractor Certifications: The slab enhancement contractor shall be a certified applicator of the enhancement program system. Require a letter of certification from the manufacturers of all products and equipment used by the enhancement contractor. 1. Maintain proof of the enhancement contractor's certifications on site during floor work. 03366-1 C. Submit the slab enhancement contractor's qualifications as the Slab Enhancement Submittal Package described in Part 1 below. 1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE AND SCHEDULING RESPONSIBILITIES A. Administrative and Scheduling Requirements: 1. Coordinate project phasing and relocation of racking, shelving, or merchandise to ensure minimum interference with other aspects of the Work. 2. Coordinate start and completion dates with Owner's Construction Manager and Store Manager. Variance from established start and completion dates will not be tolerated. 3. Flooring Schedule Phasing Plan —Develop a Flooring Schedule Phasing Plan with Owner's Construction Manager and Store Planning teams. Track material usage and ensure quantities on hand are sufficient for Work. 4. Submit Installation Reports to Owner's Construction Manager periodically as determined necessary. 5. Submit any required Flooring Add-on Order forms. Expedited freight charges incurred by add-on orders will be charged to Contractor. Contact Walmart Construction Manager for required forms. 6. Select the staging location for the materials included in the scope of the work. 1.5 STORE PLANNING RESPONSIBILITIES A. Storage of Removed VCT/PVC Materials: In some cases, the removed VCT/PVC materials are scheduled to be stored at a Store Planning Fixture or Regional warehouse prior to being transported to the recycling facility. If the removed VCT/PVC is to be transported to a Store Planning Fixture or Regional warehouse, Store Planning will move the VCT/PVC materials from the staging area to the Fixture or Regional warehouse. Store Planning will coordinate with Owner's recycling firm and process the recycling firm's required paperwork. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following to Architect of Record for submission to Owner's Independent Concrete Consultant for review. B. Slab Enhancement Submittal Package described in Part 1 above, including Slab Enhancement Contractor contacts, qualifications, and certifications. C. Product Data Sheets: 1. High pH Cleaner: Brand name, chemical composition, dilution rate, installation directions and certificates of compliance with required standards, if applicable. 2. Reactive Surface Densifier, Stain Protector and Colorant Densifier System: Brand name, chemical composition, installation directions and certificates of compliance with required standards. D. Manufacturer and model numbers of all equipment to be used: 1. All polishing machines. 2. Manufacturer and model of diamond polishing segments. Product data and procedure of polishing must be submitted for verification of compatibility, prior to beginning slab enhancement work. 3. High speed burnishing equipment, including burnishing pads. Product data for pads must be submitted for verification of pad texture prior to beginning burnishing work. 4. Scrubber machines. 5. Concrete slurry waste disposal. Refer to Section 01500. 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Comply with the requirements of Section 01770. B. Product and Equipment Data: Submit the following manufacturer's data for products and equipment used in the specified enhancement process: 1. Manufacturer's technical product data and literature. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Manufacturer's safety data sheets and related safety requirements. 4. Product and equipment manufacturer's recommendations for slab maintenance. 03366-2 C. Floor Phasing Plan and Schedule as specified in Part 1 hereafter. D. Maintenance recommendations including: 1. Maintenance schedule. 2. List of approved cleaning and stain removal products and procedures. 3. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to burnished slab finish. E. Completion Quality Control Test Results as specified in Part 3 herein. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Floor Polishing Plan: Prior to commencement of work, provide a Floor Polishing Plan. Submit the Floor Polishing Plan describing intent and agenda including: 1. Location of all cracks, spalls and other surface defects requiring repairs in accordance with Section 03905. Include quality color digital photographs of sufficient quantity as to illustrate necessary repairs. Images shall be emailed to Owner's Construction Manager and Architect of Record. 2. Locations of gloss measurements taken in prior scopes. 3. Concrete slurry waste disposal location. 4. Unique work requirement locations (i.e. joint repairs, floor patching, etc.). 5. Scheduling: Include in the Floor Polishing Plan a detailed written schedule for sequence of work which ensures uninterrupted progress of Owner's concurrent operations. Include start and completion dates and size, location, and anticipated progression of work areas. 6. Coordinate approval of Floor Polishing Plan and Schedule Owner's Construction Manager and Store Manager. 7. Submit Floor Polishing Plan in PDF format as a closeout document. B. Manufacturer's Field Representatives: At the request of Owner's Construction Manager or Owner's Independent Concrete Consultant, manufacturers' technical representatives shall be on site to oversee work specified herein to verify proper use of products and equipment. C. If requested by Owner's Construction Manager or Independent Concrete Consultant, provide additional site visit to project prior to Re -Grand Opening to complete required corrections related to work specified herein. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Transport, handle, store, and protect products in compliance with the requirements in Division 1 and manufacturer's recommendations. B. Materials shall be delivered to site in original, factory sealed, unopened, new containers (drums) bearing manufacturer's name and label intact and legible, with the following information: 1. Name or title of material. 2. Manufacturer's standard container (drum) numbers. 3. Application instructions. C. Storage: Refer to Section 01500. 1. Store materials in protected and well -ventilated area at temperatures between 40 and 90 degrees F unless otherwise required by manufacturer. 2. Keep containers sealed until ready for use. 3. Do not use materials beyond manufacturer's shelf life limits. D. Handling: Protect materials during handling and application to prevent damage or contamination. 1. Dispense penetrating liquid densifier only from factory sealed and numbered containers (drums). 2. Maintain record of container (drum) numbers received and used during floor treatment. 03366-3 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with project requirements, provide products and equipment by the following: 1. Ameripolish, (800) 592-9320, www.ameripolish.com. 2. Concrete Polishing Solutions (877) 472-8200 www.go2cps.com 3. Husqvarna (800) 288-5040 www.husgvama.com 4. Onyx Environmental Solutions (800) 858-3533 www.onyxsolutions.com 5. Pioneer Eclipse (800) 367-3550 www.pioneer-eclipse.com 6. SASE Company, Inc. (800) 522-2606 www.sasecoM4U.com 7. Substrate Technology, Inc. (815) 941-4800 www.substratetechnolog. 8. Superabrasive, Inc., (800) 987-8403, http://www.superabrasive.com/ 9. Superior Surface Solutions, (888) 471-5227 www.superiorsurfacesolutions.com] B. Substitutions: Comply with the requirements of Section 01600. 2.2 EQUIPMENT A. Slurry Storage Fencing: Provide fencing around slurry bins and any associated storm water BMPs. B. Auto Scrubber Machines: Equipment used for cleaning operations shall be Clark Encore Max38 or L38 with a head pressure of 150 lbs. or similar equipment as required to achieve the specified Finish Requirements. C. Propane Polishing Equipment: 1. Propane polishing machines shall be in full operating condition during the duration of the night's work as required to achieve specified Finish Requirements. 2. Polishers shall have minimum 650 pounds down force. D. Diamond Segments: 1. Diamond grinding heads shall be by one of the following manufacturers. Use heads from same manufacturer throughout entirety of project. a. HTC. b. John Don C. SASE, Inc. d. Substrate Technology, Inc. e. Superabrasive, Inc. f. Superior Surface Solutions. 2. Diamond Segment Grit Sizes (or Manufacturer's Equivalent Designations): a. Metal bonded diamonds: 40, 60, 80, 150 b. Hybrid Style Diamonds: 80,100, 120 and 200 C. Resin Bonded, Phenolic Diamonds: Progression of all polishing steps shall include sequential grit sizes that are not greater than twice the previous grit used. E. High speed propane burnisher: Equipment shall meet the specified minimum performance requirements. 1. Head Size: 21 or 27 inch. 2. Head Weight: 22 pound (40 pound maximum). 3. Engine Size: 585 cc, generating 1,500 RPM or higher (as verified with tachometer). 4. Dust skirt assembly. F. Burnishing Pads: 1. Diamond Impregnated Pads (DIP): 1500 and 3000 grit. 2. Diamashine Diamond Impregnated Pad by Superior Surface Solutions 3. CASH Diamond Impregnated Pad by Substrate Technology, Inc. 4. Twister Diamond Impregnated Pad 03366-4 G. Sprayer for Reactive Surface Color Densifier: Carbon dioxide sprayer as follows. 1. Patriot SpraySafe System, by Patriot Sprayer Systems. Provide Red #6 spray tip - 6.4 gallons per hour. 2.3 PRODUCTS A. Joint Filler Products: Polyurea joint filler as specified in Section 03905. 1. Color: Match polished slab surface. Sample installed in mock-up shall be approved by Walmart Construction Manager. B. Slab Repair Products: Slab repair materials are specified in Section 03905. C. High pH Cleaner: 1. Ameripolish Rejuvenating Cleaner. D. Reactive Surface Densifier: Chemical densifier specifically for concrete surface treatment which reacts chemically to the concrete surface forming a clear, dense, durable, hard, abrasion -resistant surface. Product shall be a colorless, odorless, water-based solution that is less than 50 VOC. 1. 3DHS by Ameripolish. E. Stain Protector: Penetrating concrete chemical stain protector specifically for concrete surface treatment which reacts chemically to the concrete surface maintaining a clear, dense, durable, hard, abrasion- and chemical -resistant surface. Product shall be a solution that is less than 40 g/1 VOC. 1. SR2 by Ameripolish. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine concrete slab with Owner's Construction Manager. Verify that floor is in substantially the same condition as described in the Floor Polishing Plan. 1. Identify and mark additional repair locations not shown in Floor Polishing Plan. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Conduct work in manner as to minimize disruption of Owner's normal operations. B. Provide temporary electrical service as specified in Section 01500 for equipment. 1. Coordinate disconnecting and reconnecting electrical power to existing equipment and fixtures, including registers, which are scheduled to be moved for installation of flooring. C. Close areas to traffic during and after floor finish application for time period recommended by product manufacturer(s). D. Cover and protect merchandise and racking to prevent damage or contamination of stored products. Protect merchandise from concrete slurry or debris. E. Clean Substrate: Remove existing floor finishes to bare concrete slab. 1. Do not use hazardous materials or flammable, toxic, or solvent -based cleaning products. 2. Remove curing or sealing compounds, paint, and wax. 3. Remove surface contaminants such as oil, grease and general soiling with high pH cleaner/degreaser diluted as recommended by manufacturer using swing machine with red or black pads. Use appropriate pad to achieve desired results while not exposing coarse aggregate or excessive sand within paste layer. 4. Thoroughly rinse floor surface with clean water to remove soap residue and contaminants. Vacuum with auto scrubber. 5. Squeegee dry. 03366-5 F. Remove and replace existing deficient joint filler within the limits of required slab polishing and as shown on Drawings, in accordance with Section 03905. G. Repair slab defects within the limits of required slab polishing in accordance with Section 03905. Correct previous repairs not conforming to requirements of Section 03905, including any repairs not matching color of adjacent slab surface, in accordance with Section 03905. 1. Coordinate full scope of concrete slab repair work with Owner's Construction Manager. 3.3 EXISTING MATERIALS MANAGEMENT A. Provide Management of Removed Existing Flooring Materials and Waste as follows: 1. Move the removed VCT/PVC flooring materials from the sales floor to the agreed upon staging area. 2. Slurry Disposal: a. Coordinate scheduling, delivery, and pickup of slurry disposal with waste management firm. b. Pay for slurry disposal. 3. Move the removed VCT/PVC flooring materials from staging area to a Conex storage box. 4. If the removed VCT/PVC materials are scheduled to be stored in a Store Planning Fixture or Regional warehouse after leaving the staging area, see Store Planning Responsibilities herein. 5. Initiate contact with Owner's VCT/PVC recycling firm to coordinate the recycling firm's scope. Process and return the recycling firm's required paperwork. Owner's recycling firm will unload the VCT/PVC materials from the Conex box 7-10 business days from initial contact and transport the materials to its recycling facility. B. Slurry Storage Monitoring: Monitor and report incidents on any qualifying spills. 3.4 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Verify concrete floors are free of excessive moisture and dusting. B. Verify that surfaces conform to the manufacturers' requirements for substrate conditions. C. Complete joint replacement and slab repair work at least 12 hours prior to commencement of any wet polishing. D. Use sequential progression of diamond pads limited to no more than double the grit value of the previous diamonds used. E. Progressively wet diamond polish edges along and around all abutments. Use same progression of polishing segments throughout. F. Between and after final wet polishing passes, thoroughly scrub and rinse slab surface with clean water and vacuum with auto -scrubber. 3.5 SURFACE POLISHING AND DENSIFICATION A. Perform Work where shown on Drawings where existing slab is exposed to Customer view. B. Progressively wet polish slab surface utilizing approved diamond segments to achieve specified Finish Requirements. 1. Perform initial polishing step. 2. Overlap adjacent passes by 50%. 3. Final polishing pass shall be with no less than 800 -grit resin. C. Apply Reactive Surface Densifier to dry slab surface in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. I . Apply reactive surface densifier after the appropriate polishing pass (typically after 200 -grit and before 800 - grit). Allow to dry. 2. Vary dilution rates per manufacturer's recommendations to eliminate hazing and whitening on slab surface. 03366-6 D. Burnish: 1. Burnish slab with 1500 and 3000 -grit Diamond Impregnated Pad to polish slab surface in compliance with specified Finish Requirements. 2. Use microfiber pad after burnishing to remove any laitance and debris from slab surface. E. Apply Stain Protectant (SR2). 3.6 FINISH REQUIREMENTS: A. Appearance: Enhanced interior slabs areas that receive the specified slab enhancement process must consist of the following: 1. Failure to comply with specifications to produce finish requirements may result in additional cost to Contractor without an increase in Contract time or additional disruption to Store operations. 2. Slab surface must exhibit a hard polished appearance with no evidence of scratching from grinding/polishing. a. New concrete placed under 03314 and color densifled as specified herein and existing adjacent slab polished as specified herein shall have matching aesthetics. 3. Exposure of aggregate beyond CPAA Class B - Fine Aggregate shall be considered non -conforming work. 4. White residue, "orange peel", or hazy appearance in the finished surface will not be accepted. B. Gloss: Final surface gloss within Sales shall be between 30 and 55 as measured using a Horiba IG -320 Gloss Checker. C. Leave work complete and ready for final inspection by Walmart Construction Manager. 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL TESTING A. Gloss Measurements: 1. Gloss shall be considered as a quantitative value that expresses the degree of reflection when light hits the concrete floor surface. 2. Take gloss measurements independent of ambient lighting and within a sealed measurement window located beneath the testing equipment. 3. Measure and report as follows: a. Measure gloss values at five evenly but randomly distributed locations within each aisle for each night's work area. Record measurement locations on Floor Polishing Plan. b. If samples fail to meet the specified value, continue burnishing operations until the specified gloss requirements are achieved. C. Collect and certify final gloss measurements to Owner's Construction Manager and the Owner's Independent Concrete Consultant. 3.8 CLEANING A. Remove spilled, splashed, or splattered finish material from surfaces. 3.9 FINAL CLEANING AND PROTECTION BY CONTRACTOR A. Protect areas to receive polished concrete finish at all times during construction to prevent oils, dirt, metal, excessive water, paint, and other potentially damaging materials from contacting the finished concrete surface. Initiate the following protective measures immediately after completion of work as specified herein. 1. Communicate to Store Manager and all subcontractors, vendors, and trades the importance of maintaining slab protection. 2. Protect slab surface from moisture for 24 hours. 3. Inspect equipment used over completed slab surface. Verify the following: a. Equipment is without leaking hydraulic lines and is diapered to avoid staining. Remove all equipment with hydraulic fluid leaks from store site. b. Equipment is without tire embedments (rocks, nails, screws, etc.) that will scratch or pit slab surface. C. Equipment is clean and free of dust prior to start of work requiring equipment. 03366-7 4. Do not allow pipe cutting on the finished slab. 5. Do not place steel on the finished slab to avoid rust staining. 6. Prevent contact with acids and acidic detergents. 7. Use breathable drop cloths during all painting. Immediately wipe clean spilled paint. B. Damage to finished slab resulting from lack of protection shall be repaired at no additional cost to Owner. END OF SECTION 03366-8 UniSpec II- Store Planning SECTION 03905 — INTERIOR CONCRETE SLAB REPAIRS AND JOINT FILLER REPLACEMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Joint filler removal and replacement. 2. Joint edge spall repair. 3. Crack repair. 4. Surface defect repair, including pop -outs, chips, spalls, and pitting. 5. Removal and replacement of previously completed repairs not in compliance with this section. 012519 B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01330 — Submittal Procedures. Procedures for submittals. 2. Section 01351 - Regulatory Compliance: Waste management and disposal. 1) Disposal and removal of construction and universal waste. b. Work practice control methods for airborne respirable dust. 3. Section 01500 — Temporary Facilities and Controls. Requirements for control of substances that have the potential for polluting surface and/or groundwater. 1.2 REFERENCES A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced within the text by the basic designation only. B. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA): 1. OSHA 01926.1153 Respirable Crystalline Silica. 1.3 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Minimize dust emissions and provide equipment that suppresses dust. B. Dispose of construction waste in accordance with the requirements of Section 01351 Regulatory Compliance Supplement. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Within 21 days after award of prime contract, submit in accordance with procedures specified in Section 01330. Unless otherwise specified herein, send submittals to Architect of Record as specified in Section 01330. 1. Submit all submittal items required within this section in a single submittal via e-mail (maximum document size 10 Mb). a. Do not submit submittals of this section together with submittals in any other section. 2. If Contractor fails to submit a complete Concrete Slab Enhancement Submittal Package within 21 days after award of prime contract, the Contractor shall pay the Owner $250.00 per day as liquidated damages and not as a penalty, until the fully completed Concrete Slab Enhancement submittal package is received by the Architect of Record. 3. Submittals shall be complete, accurate, and in full compliance with contract requirements for proper and timely approval. 4. Maintain one copy of approved documents on site. 5. Identify submittals explicitly in accordance with Section 01330. 6. Fill out and submit attached Concrete Slab Repair and Joint Filler Replacement Submittal Form attached at the end of this Section. 03905-1 B. Submittal Rejections: 1. Submittals which do not comply with Contract Documents will be rejected. If submittal is rejected for any reason, Wal-Mart Stores, Inc., will back -charge the Contractor $200.00 via Change Order, to cover the processing costs of each subsequent review until submittal is approved. Reasons for submittal rejections include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Incomplete Concrete Slab Enhancement Submittal Package. b. Lack of required certifications. C. Unspecified equipment. d. Unspecified products. 2. Rejected submittals shall be revised and resubmitted until approved. Extension of Contract time will not be allowed for rejected submittals. a. The Contractor shall revise and resubmit rejected submittals within 7 days of receipt of rejected submittals. b. The Contractor shall verify that the Slab Enhancement subcontractor has addressed all required revisions in the re -submittal. C. Product data and Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS): 1. All products and primary equipment used for repair of existing concrete slab defects. D. Joint Filler and Slab Repair Subcontractor Requirements: 1. Joint Filler and Slab Repair Subcontractor Qualifications: Provide to General Contractor for submittal a list of minimum of 5 projects performed within the last 2 years of similar type, size and complexity as this contract. Provide project names, addresses, contact names, phone numbers, and scope of work for each project at time of Bid and within Slab Enhancement Submittal Package. 2. Joint Filler and Slab Repair Subcontractor shall be a contractor possessing current certifications at time of Bid. a. Joint filler installation and slab repair shall be performed by same subcontractor. b. Joint filler and slab repair subcontractor personnel shall remain the same throughout the completion of specified work unless approved in writing by Wal-Mart. C. Joint Filler and Slab Repair Subcontractor shall not sub -subcontract any work in this Section. 3. Joint Filler and Slab Repair Subcontractor Certifications: Provide to General Contractor for submittal a letter of certification, identifying individuals that are currently certified installers of the following specified materials and are familiar with proper procedures and installation methods as required by the specified product manufacturers. a. Polyurea Joint Filler. b. Low Viscosity Rigid Urethane. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Environmental Requirements: 1. Comply with the requirements of Section 01351 for construction and demolition waste management and disposal. 2. Comply with current Federal, state and local air quality regulations and with Federal requirements on concrete silica dust emissions. Do not dry grind or polish slab surface. 3. Limit and control all noise and damage from excessive dust caused by demolition, preparation, and installation of specified work. 4. Limit and control damage from moisture. 5. Refer to Section 01500 for control of substances that have the potential for polluting surface and/or groundwater. 6. All replaced concrete shall be cured a minimum of 28 days prior to joint filler installation. 7. Close finished slab area to traffic during application and after application for a time as recommended by manufacturer. 8. Upon completion of densifier application, dispose of excess materials. Refer to Section 01351. 03905-2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Subject to compliance with project requirements, provide products as manufactured by the following to the extent as specified hereinafter: 1. Advanced Blending (817) 477-8022 www.advancedblending.com 2. Brulin & Company (800) 776-7941 www.brulin.com 3. Hi -Tech Structural Epoxy Systems (800) 454-5530 www.hitechpolyurea.com 4. Metzger/McGuire (800) 223-6680 www.metzgermcguire.com 5. Prime Resins, (800) 321-7212 www.primeresins.com 6. Prosoco (866) 363-4567 www.prosoco.com 7. Roadware, Inc. (800) 522-7623 www.concretemender.com 8. SpecChem (866) 791-8700 www.specchemllc.com 9. Superior Surface Solutions (888) 471-5227 www.superiorsurfacesolutions.com 10. VersaFlex, Inc. (913) 321-1416 www.versaflex.com B. Polyurea Joint Filler: Rapid setting, two -component polyurea polymer liquid of 100% solids content, Shore hardness 85-90, compatible with construction materials in contact. 1. HT-PE85, High -Tech 2. EP 80, by Metzger/McGuire. 3. VersaFlex SL/85, by VersaFlex. 4. Match color of adjacent exposed concrete slab surface. C. Structural Urethane (low viscosity): 1. 10 Minute Concrete Mender, by Roadware 2. Spall TX, by High Tech 3. Rapid ReFloor, by Metzger/McGuire. 4. Quick Mender, by VersaFlex. 5. Match color of adjacent exposed concrete slab surface. D. Silica Sand 1. Dry 00 Sandblasting sand. E. Structural Mortar 1. Armor -Hard Extreme, by Metzger/McGuire. 2. Dimakrete Polish Mortar, by Superior Surface Solutions. 3. RepCon 928, by SpecChem. F. Surface Pitting Grout 1. Dimakrete Polish Grout, by Superior Surface Solutions. 2. Quick MenderX.O., by VersaFlex. 3. Rapid ReFloor Pit Grout, by Metzger/McGuire. 4. Approved equal G. High pH Cleaner: 1. Amodet Degreaser/Cleaner by Advanced Blending. 2. Brulin Deep Scrub Cleaner by Brulin & Co. 3. Cleaner/Degreaser by Prosoco. 4. Equivalent approved products. 2.2 EQUIPMENT A. Subject to compliance with project requirements, provide equipment manufactured by the following: 1. Gator Finishing Products (800) 2554748, www.gatorfinishing.com 2. HTC (877) 482-8700, www.htc-america.com 3. Joe Due Blades and Equipment, Mauston, WI, (877) 563-3833. 03905-3 4. Norton Abrasives (800) 331-3604, www.nortonabrasives.com 5. Pulman-Ermator (800) 232-2635, www.pullman-ermator.com 6. SASE Company, Inc., Kent, WA (800) 522-2606 7. U.S. Saws, Santa Ana, CA (866) 987-7297. 8. OBHC, Inc. dba Gorilla Concrete Tools, Columbia Station, OH, (440) 236-5112. B. Dust Collection Vacuum System: Connect one of the following dust collection systems directly to each tool. Verify that collection system provided is equipped with HEPA-rated filter and is recommended by the manufacturer to maintain dust emissions below the permissible level. Verify air flow speed is acceptable for the size of the blade. 1. 26D, by HTC. 2. 52400, by Pullman-Ermator. 3. Bull 50, by SASE Company, Inc. 4. Similar equipment as required to produce the specified results. C. Joint Filler Removal and Preparation 1. Humpback Cutter Complete, by Joe Due. 2. Dust Buggy, by U.S. Saws. 3. Gorilla Concrete Tools GCT -10 or GCT -9 Silverback by OBHC, Inc. 4. Similar equipment as required to produce the specified results. D. Crack Repair: 1. 5" Dust Mizer 005, by Joe Due. 2. 7" Dust Mizer 007, by Joe Due. 3. Crack Attacker, by Joe Due. 4. 7" Handheld Crack Chaser, by Joe Due. 5. SawTec 5" Tile Vac, by U.S. Saws. 6. SawTec 7" Crac-Vac, by U.S.Saws. 7. Similar equipment as required to produce the specified results. E. Surface Grinder: Handheld 5"-7" electric surface grinder with dustless shroud/housing. 1. Dust Avenger 5, by Joe Due. 2. Dust Avenger 7, by Joe Due. 3. SawTec 5" Grinder Vac, by U.S. Saws. 4. SawTec 7" Grinder Vac, by U.S. Saws. 5. Similar equipment as required to produce the specified results. F. Fiber Stripping Pads 1. Rapid Strip Disc, by Norton 2. Gator Fiber Disc, by Gator Finishing Products 3. Similar equipment as required to produce the specified results. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Concrete rehabilitation work specified shall be performed within the limits of the area of the sales floor shown on Drawings. B. Installation of specified products shall be in accordance with product manufacturer's written instructions. C. Verify that sawing and grinding tools are equipped with a dust collection system as specified herein. D. For repairs of this Section requiring clean joints of loose concrete, joint filler, laitance, dust, and debris, use a HEPA- rated filter vacuum. 03905-4 3.2 3.3 3.4 EXAMINATION A. An evaluation of the existing floor slab shall be conducted, identifying all defects. Scope of repairs shall be confirmed by the Walmart Concrete Consultant prior to commencement of work. Identify scope of work on Floor Polishing Plan specified in other section(s) of Division 3 — Concrete. B. Repairs are not acceptable unless specifically approved on a case-by-case basis by the Wal-Mart Construction Testing Laboratory. PREPARATION A. Close areas to traffic during and after floor finish application for time period recommended by product manufacturer(s). B. Cover and protect merchandise and racking to prevent damage or contamination of stored products. Provide dust drapes as required to protect merchandise from dust or debris. C. Protect surface of slab immediately adjacent to defect under repair. D. Do not proceed until Wal-Mart Construction Manager has approved repair material color match. JOINT MILLING AND CAP FILLER REPLACEMENT D p 0 a a [ 17 17 o � a a V Before Orginal material bearing on saw cut shelf 1/2" min. new filler d A. If existing joint filler is sound and resting on top of saw cut shelf, mill top 1/2" of material and refill with specified polyurea joint filler: B. Re -saw the joint to a minimum depth of 1/2" with a dry -cut, vacuum -equipped saw using a slightly oversized blade. The blade width should be sufficient to encapsulate the widest spall along a given contraction joint segment to produce a sharp corner on each side of the joint with a minimum of two passes through the joint. C. Refill with polyurea joint filler material from the bottom up, taking care not to entrap large air bubbles per manufacturer's recommendation. Slightly overfill and shave flush to the surface, prior to grinding process. D. Ensure that after grinding, the joint is cut smooth and flush with the finish floor surface, without concave or intermittent, darkened profile. 03905-5 3.5 FULL DEPTH JOINT FILLER REPLACEMENT V 0 p 0 a 17 V p F7 o 17a r7 D � D o V o o a F7 0 0 0 Before After, Saw cut shelf 0 Fill to Bottom of Original o Saw Cut Note: if shelf width at base of saw cut is less than 1/4" on either side of joint, minimum required filler depth is 2" placed over compressibel backer rod or bagged silica sand. A. If existing joint filler is loose, easily removed, or able to be forced downward with a hand tool, remove all filler material from joint and refill. B. Re -saw joint full depth with a dry -cut, vacuum -equipped saw using a slightly oversized blade. The blade width should be sufficient to encapsulate the widest spall along a given contraction joint segment to produce a sharp corner on each side of the joint with a minimum of two passes through the joint. Remove all filler material, debris, and laitance. C. If shelf width at base of saw cut is less than 1/4 inch on either side of joint, fill joint with compressible backer rod to not more than 2 inches below slab surface. D. Refill with polyurea joint filler material from the bottom up, taking care not to entrap large air bubbles per manufacturer's recommendation. Slightly overfill and shave flush to the surface prior to grinding process. E. Ensure that after grinding, the joint is cut smooth and flush with the finish floor surface, without concave or intermittent, darkened profile. 3.6 CONTROL JOINT REPAIR (LESS THAN 1") Spalled Original or tooled Joint radiud edge 0 17 3/4" min. Q Q depth 77 Sawcut and Remove V Concrete As r uired 1" maximum A. For joints that are spalled or have radius tooled edges not exceeding I" in width at slab surface. B. Re -saw the joint edge to a minimum depth of 3/4" with a dry -cut, vacuum -equipped saw allowing removal of the widest spall (or top of radius) along a given joint segment to produce a sharp corner on each side of the joint with a minimum of two passes through joint. 03905-6 C. Clean joint of loose concrete, joint filler, laitance, dirt, debris, backer rod, etc. D. Joints must be free of all visible moisture. E. Ensure filler penetrates the irregular aggregate interlock portion of the sawn contraction joint as shown below, re- establishing the aggregate interlock that may have been lost due to shrinkage, curling, and lack of reinforcement. Repair Cavity < 1" rfill and re Flush Re-establish Aggregate Interlock with Polyurea F. Gravity feed a trace amount (1/8") of silica sand into joint to prevent 3 -sided bonding of joint filler. Use proper dust control methods in handling silica sand. G. Fill joint cavity per manufacturer's instructions, taking care not to entrap large air bubbles. Overfill joint slightly and shave flush to slab surface prior to grinding process. 3.7 CONTROL JOINT REPAIR (GREATER THAN I") Saw cut patch material and refill to match original joint 17 V v 0 Q Q V Polyurea Material Repair Cavity > 1" Rebuild joint edge with cementitious patch material D 0 34, min. A. For control joints that exceed 1" in width at slab surface or where the slab displays height differential greater than 1/4" at either side of joint. 03905-7 B. Re -saw the control joint edge to a minimum depth of 3/4" with a dry -cut, vacuum -equipped saw allowing removal of the widest spall along a given joint segment to produce a sharp corner on each side of the joint with a minimum of two passes through joint. Maintain consistent width of repair to within 1/2 inch in 10 feet. 1. For construction joints experiencing 1/4" or greater height differential at abutting joint edges, repair material should slope at 1/4" per foot at floor surface. C. Acceptable Patch Materials 1. Structural Mortar installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Sand Modified Structural Urethane: a. Place 1/2" layers of dry Silica Sand in bottom of spalled cavity. b. Pour structural urethane material over sand until sand is slightly covered. C. Repeat 1/2" blended layers of sand and structural urethane material until slightly overfilled above finished concrete surface. D. Allow patch material to dry (drying time will vary based on temperature). E. Overfill repair cavity with patch material per manufacturer's instructions and grind flush to slab surface. F. Use hand grinder with Fiber Stripping Pad to hone over -fill level to adjacent slab surface. G. After patch material has cured, and prior to any traffic on patched surface, re -saw original slab joint(s) and fill with polyurea joint filler per manufacturer's instructions. H. Polish or burnish repair material to match adjacent slab surface after material has properly cured. 3.8 CRACK REPAIR A. Crack width less than 1/32" without surface spalling. Do not repair. B. Cracks from 1/32" to 3/8" in width. 1. Clean crack cavity. a. Remove loose concrete, dirt and debris from crack with a wire brush or hand grinder with twisted wire wheel attachment, 1/2" minimum depth, insuring crack sidewall is clean. b. Remove any loose segments, including islands formed by crack, with sharp tool. C. Use methods that will not widen existing crack. d. Vacuum crack to remove all dirt, debris and other laitance. 2. Mask slab surface along crack as necessary to minimize overfill. 3. Choose material color that closely matches the adjacent floor. 4. Install low viscosity rigid urethane repair material in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 5. Repeat until all voids are filled and material crowns slab surface. a. Do not flood area around crack. b. Watch for bubble formation and out gassing. C. Do not allow material to gel before adding additional material. 6. Shave or grind material flush to surface as stipulated by manufacturer. 03905-8 3.9 C. Cracks from 3/8" to 1" in width 1. Saw top or edge of crack to provide square edge, minimum 3/4" in depth. a. Use small hand grinder with maximum 5" diameter blade, minimizing eventual crack width while maintaining uniformity of shape. 2. Clean crack cavity. a. Vacuum crack to remove all dirt, debris and other laitance. b. Remove all visible moisture. 3. Mask slab surface along crack as necessary to minimize overfill. 4. Install polyurea joint filler. a. Dispense sample into small bucket to test blending of material. b. Prime crack with repair material. C. Dispense material, dragging dispenser tip along crack, until it flows over the slab. 5. Wait approximately 10 minutes, periodically checking for material cure. a. Check condition of material by shaving with razor scraper. b. Material will shave smooth when cured. C. Proper timing is crucial. 1) Too long and material will be difficult to shave 2) Too soon and material will ravel. 6. Shave material flush to slab surface per manufacturer's instructions. SURFACE SPALLING REPAIR 0LABURFACE SPALL a o o 0 0 0 0 0 o D � 0 0 0 0 0 0 o 0 0 0 0 A. Route edge of spall to provide 1/2" deep square edge. 1. Use small hand grinder with maximum 5" diameter dry diamond blade and vacuum system attachment. 2. Do not overcut slots into existing slab surface. B. Clean and prep spalled cavity. 1. Wire brush spalled surface to remove all dirt and laitance. 2. Mask slab at perimeter of spall with tape. C. Install low viscosity rigid urethane repair material using tube cartridge without flow restrictor. D. Polish over repair area with diamond disks to blend surface. 1. Feather filler material into the adjacent concrete floor surface. 2. With 2000 grit disk and firm pressure, add a few burn marks to mottle surface to blend with adjacent floor surface. E. NOTE: For spalled joints, a form material maybe needed to temporarily support vertical face of spalled joint edge. Ensure that the repair material will not adhere to the form. 03905-9 3.10 BOLT HOLE/SPALL REPAIR A. Recess steel bolt a minimum of 1/2" below finish floor by either punching or cutting. B. For spall fracture edge less than 30 degrees, square edge to a minimum 3/8" depth with either a drill bit or chisel. C. For surface spalls resulting from removal of transition strips, use hollow core drill bit to remove surrounding concrete spall to nominal depth of 1/2". Adjacent repairs shall be of a consistent diameter (max repair size 1" nominal). D. Clean cavity of all debris and laitance with drill activated, brass wire wheel. Vacuum hole to remove all dirt, debris and other laitance. E. Dispense low viscosity rigid urethane at moderate pace using steady pressure. Dispense material into void, refilling as necessary to produce slight crown. F. Grind material flush to slab surface per manufacturer's instructions. 3.11 LARGE SURFACE REPAIR A. Edge perimeter with diamond masonry wheel to produce sharp edge, at least 3/8" deep. B. Roughen base surface and vacuum clean. Wire brush to remove any small loose material and vacuum again. C. Protect adjacent slab surface with tape at perimeter of repair area, width as required to prevent scratching during troweling operations. D. Mist floor surface until damp but without standing water. E. Prepare slurry prime coat of polymerized Portland cement compound and scrub into repair surface with stiff bristle brush. Do not allow to dry before placing pigmented repair material. Use of concrete bonding agent optional. F. Mix repair material in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. G. Place repair material in floor surface defect and float level. Use float on edge as using flat will cause material to stick and pull. H. Lightly mist floated repair material with the finishing aid once and perform first troweling pass to smooth surface without over-working; do not reapply finishing aid during any other troweling operations. I. Wait until material begins to set and can be indented with finger about 1/8" and perform second troweling pass, approximately two hours after initial placement. J. Using a fine sharp edged cutting tool, cut along edge of repair material and adjacent slab to prevent raveling of edge during tape removal, or remove tape earlier before material has set up all the way to prevent raveling or spalling. K. When material has become stiff and can be slightly indented with hard finger pressure, final trowel using firm pressure until mottling and a shine has become apparent. Surface should be tight, level and smooth without surface defects. Do not allow trowels to be positioned on surface flat, as surface will tear. Use circular sweeping motions. Final set should be around 4-5 hrs from time of placement. L. Keep surface clean during troweling operations to prevent any laitance from coming in contact with the repair material and marring surface. M. Check material set after 30 minutes to 1 hour. Surface should not dent with fingernail under hard hand pressure. N. Dye and polish or burnish repair material to match adjacent slab surface color after material has properly cured. 03905-10 O. Remove tape and clean area of all particles on repair surface and adjacent floor surface. P. Re-establish original concrete slab joints by sawing completely through patch and re -filling with polyurea joint filler prior to exposure to traffic. 3.12 SURFACE PITTING REPAIR SLAB SURFACE PITTING 0 0 • ,o o o ° ° 0 0 0 o ° 0 0 o 0 0 0 0 0 o a o o A. This repair is to be used in areas where the number of minimum 1/4" size diameter slab pits exceeds eight per square foot. B. Using high pH cleaner, scrub slab surface using swing machine with stiff brush, to loosen ground in soils in all pits. C. Rinse slab surface with clean water and vacuum up with auto scrubber. D. Use specified "Surface Pitting Grout" material after first grind. E. Follow manufacturer's instructions regarding procedures. F. Repeat repairs in areas as required if repair material pulls out of defects. Allowing a longer curing time typically minimizes material pull out. 3.13 PROTECTION A. Protect surfaces of finished floor. B. Prohibit traffic until floor repairs have received final approval by Owner. 3.14 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field quality control shall be the responsibility of the Contractor in accordance with Section 01452. Except as specified as mandatory, field quality control testing and inspection shall be at the discretion of the Contractor as necessary to assure compliance with Contract requirements. END OF SECTION 03905-11 WAL-MART STORES INTERIOR CONCRETE SLAB REPAIR AND JOINT FILLER REPLACEMENT SUBMITTAL FORM Section 03905 — INTERIOR CONCRETE SLAB REPAIRS AND JOINT FILLER REPLACEMENT Date WAL-MART: ❑ SAM'S CLUB ❑ DISCOUNT STORE ❑ SUPERCENTER ❑ NEIGHBORHOOD MARKET STORE INFORMATION STORE # ADDRESS CITY, ST GENERAL CONTRACTOR JOINT FILLER AND SLAB REPAIR SUB -CONTRACTOR JOB SITE PHONE A. ATTACHMENTS: Include the following with this Submittal Package. ❑ Completed Interior Concrete Slab Repair and Joint Filler Replacement Qualification Statement of Conformance. ❑ Letter of Certification for Joint and Slab Repair Material and Installation. ❑ Product data. ❑ Manufacturer and model of all equipment used relating to scope of work. ❑ Anticipated Slab Enhancement Floor Polish Plan (Developed from Sheet Al. 1) for the following: Anticipated start and finish date of work. Size, location and anticipated progression of individual nightly work areas, forecasted two weeks out from the current date of submittal. Location of all joint filler replacement, cracks, spalls and other surface defects requiring repairs specified herein. Electrical supply locations. 03905-12 INTERIOR CONCRETE SLAB REPAIR AND JOINT FILLER REPLACEMENT QUALIFICATION STATEMENT OF CONFORMANCE SECTION 03905 Project Location: Project Number: Store Number: Date: By signing below as approved, the Contractor hereby confirms that the qualifications of the joint filler and slab repair subcontractor conforms to the qualifications as follows: The joint filler and slab repair subcontractor has experience in finishing interior floors of similar size and scope in at least 5 previous projects. Projects name and location are identified as follows 2. 4. Concrete Joint Filler and Slab Repair Subcontractor Company Name and Address: Signature of Responsible Officer: Typed Name and Title of Officer: Telephone Number: ( General Contractor Company Name and Address: Signed by: Submit one copy of this Statement to the Architect of Record. Date: 03905-13 BLANK PAGE 03905-14 UniSpec II - Store Planning SECTION 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Blocking and nailers for roofing system and related metal flashings. 2. Preservative and fire resistive treatment. 3. Concealed blocking behind wall mounted items. 4. Structural panel products. 5. Non-structural panel products including the following: a. Backing for electrical and telephone equipment. b. Panels concealed within gypsum board and metal stud partitions. C. Panels used as finish material; walls, ceilings, wainscots, and bases. 6. Panel product and framing for wood and wire mesh doors. 1.2 REFERENCES 103015 A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced within the text by the basic designation only. B. American Lumber Standards Committee (ALSO): 1. Softwood Lumber Standards. C. American Plywood Association (APA): 1. Grades and Standards. D. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. ASTM A 123/A - Zinc (Hot -Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. 2. ASTM A 153 - Zinc Coating (Hot -Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. 3. ASTM A 307 - Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 psi Tensile Strength. 4. ASTM A 653 - Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc -Iron Alloy -Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot -Dip Process. 5. ASTM E 84 - Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 6. ASTM B 117 - Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus. 7. ASTM E 1333 - Test Method for Determining Formaldehyde Concentrations in Air and Emission Rates from Wood Products Using a Large Chamber. E. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): 1. ASME B 18.6.1 -Wood Screws (Inch Series) F. American Wood Protection Association (AWPA): 1. AWPA M4 - Care of Preservative Treated Wood Products. 2. AWPA U1 — User Specification for Treated Wood. G. Department of Commerce (National Institute of Standards and Technology) - Product Standard (DOC): 1. DOC PS 1 - Construction and Industrial Plywood. 2. DOC PS 2 - Performance Standard for Wood Based Structural Use Panels. 3. DOC PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard. H. Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (SPIB): 1. Grading Rules. I. Western Wood Products Association (WWPA): 1. Western Lumber Grading Rules. 06100-1 J. Underwriters' Laboratories (UL): 1. UL FR -S Classification - Fire Retardant Treated Wood with Flame Spread Ratings of 25 or less in accordance with ASTM E84. 2. UL 723 - Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Lumber Grading Agency: Lumber to be grade stamped by an agency certified by the Board of Review of the American Lumber Standards Committee (ALSO). B. Plywood Grading Agency: Certified by APA. C. Regulatory Requirements: Conform to applicable codes for fire retardant treatment of wood surfaces for flame/smoke ratings. D. Composite Wood Products: Hardwood plywood, particleboard, and medium density fiberboard composite wood products specified herein for exterior or interior applications shall meet the requirements for formaldehyde as specified by the California Air Resources Board, Air Toxics Control Measure for Composite Wood as tested in accordance with ASTM E 1333, and Chap 5 of the CALGreen requirements. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Transport, handle, store, and protect products in compliance with the requirements of Section 01600. B. Provide proper facilities for handling and storage of materials to prevent damage to edges, ends and surfaces. C. Keep materials dry. Stack materials off ground a minimum of 12 inches or if on concrete slab -on -grade a minimum of 1-1/2 inches, fully protected from weather. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS A. Lumber: DOC PS 20; S4S. Maximum of 19 percent moisture content, surfaced dry, No. 2 any species graded under WWPA grading rules or No. 3 Grade Southern Pine graded under SPIB grading rules. B. Plywood Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exposure 1, Grade C Plugged veneer, fire retardant treated, thickness indicated but not less than 1/2 inch nominal thickness. C. Nonstructural Panel: DOC PS 1 or PS 2, fire retardant treated plywood. 1. Type 1 (Interior): Grade C -D Plugged veneer, Exposure 1, locations and thickness indicated on the Drawings. 2. Type 2 (Exterior): Grade B -B veneer, Exterior, locations and thickness as indicated on the Drawings. D. Structural Panels: DOC PS 1 or PS 2. 1. Plywood Wall Sheathing: Grade B -B veneer, Exterior for exterior, Exposure 1 for interior, span rating required to support spacing indicated on Drawings. Thickness: Indicated on Drawings. 2. Fire -Rated Wood Panel: Blazeguard, by Barrier Technology, Inc., Watkins, MN (800) 638-4570.] E. High Density Wood Fiber Panel Products: Provide one of the following panels with span rating as required to suit support spacing indicated on drawings. Thickness as indicated on drawings. 1. EnergyGuard High Fiberboard, by GAF, (800) 766-3411. 2. Huebert Fiberboard Roof Insulation, by Huebert Brothers Products, LLC; Booneville, MO, (816) 882-2704. 06100-2 2.2 FASTENERS A. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure -preservative treated, or in area of high relative humidity: Comply with the treated lumber manufacturer's recommendations for fasteners and metal components in contact with treated lumber. 1. Fasteners: ASTM A 153, class D for hot dip galvanized fasteners or type 304 or type 316 stainless steel. 2. Other components: ASTM A 653, G-185, with minimum of 1.85 ounces of zinc coating per square foot coverage or type 304 or type 316 stainless steel. B. At no time shall any galvanized metal, stainless steel, or other dissimilar metals be in contact with one another. C. Nails, Brads and Staples: 1. ASTM F 1667 Galvanized for exterior locations and high humidity areas, and for treated wood 2. ASTM A123 plain fmish for other interior locations. 3. Size and type to suit application, unless otherwise noted. D. Bolts, Nuts, Washers, and Lag Screws: ASTM A307, Medium carbon steel; size and type to suit application; galvanized for exterior locations, high humidity areas, and treated wood; plain finish for other interior locations, of size and type to suit application, unless otherwise noted. E. Wood Screws: ASME B 18.6.1 F. Toggle Bolt Fasteners: For anchorage of non-structural items to hollow masonry. G. Expansion Shield Fasteners: For anchorage of non-structural items to solid masonry and concrete. H. Powder or Pneumatically Actuated Fasteners: For anchorage of non-structural items to steel. I. Fasteners for Wood and Plywood to Light Gage Metal Framing and Metal Deck (up to 10 gage, 0.1345 inch): Self - drilling flat head wood -to -metal screws. 1. Manufacturers: a. Hilti, Tulsa, OK (800) 879-6000. b. ITW Buildex, Itasca, IL (800) 323-0720. 2. Wood and Plywood Up to 3/4 Inch Thick: a. Hilti: S -WD 8-18 x 1-15/16 PFH #3 Black Phosphated. b. ITW: Traxx 10-16 #3 point. C. Pre -drill wood if wood thickness is greater than 1/2 inch or use heavier fastener specified below. 3. Wood less than or equal to 1-1/8 inch thickness to 18 Gage (0.0478 inch) and 20 Gage (0.0359 inch) Metal: a. Hilti: S -WD 10-24 x 1-1/2 PWH #3 wafer head screw. b. ITW: Traxx 10-16 #3 point. C. Pre -drill wood if wood thickness is greater than 1/2 inch. 4. Wood less than or equal to 1-3/4 inch thickness to 16 Gage (0.598 inch) and Heavier Metal (less than or equal to 0.232 inches): a. Hilti: S -WW 12-24 x 2-1/2 PFH #4 Wings. b. ITW: Traxx 12-24 #4 Point with Wings. 5. Wood less than or equal to 2 -inch thickness to 16 Gage (0.598 inch) and heavier metal (less than or equal to 1/4 inch): a. Hilti: S -WW 1/4-20 x 2-3/4 PFH #4 Wings. For wall and roof sheathing panels, provide screws with organic -polymer or other corrosion -protective coating having a salt -spray resistance of more than 800 hours according to ASTM B 117 with wafer heads or reamer wings as specified above, length as shown or as recommended by screw manufacturer for material being fastened. 06100-3 K. Fasteners for Structural Wood Members to Solid Grouted Masonry: Adhesive anchors, size and length as indicated on Drawings. 1. Anchor adhesive: Cartridge type two -component adhesive for embedding anchors. a. HIT HY-150 by Hilti Corp. b. Epcon System, Ceramic 6 by ITW Ramset/Red Head C. Epoxy -Tie SET by Simson Strong Tie Co. Inc., Pleasanton, CA (800) 925-5099. d. Substitutions: Not permitted. L. Fasteners for Non -Structural Wood Members to Masonry: Masonry screw anchor with Phillips or Torx flat head, size and length as shown on the drawings. 1. Hilti: Kwik -Con 11 fastener. 2. ITW: Tapcon masonry anchor. M. Alternate Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with project requirements, fasteners by alternate manufacturers of equal types to those specified may be provided, except where substitutions are specifically prohibited. 2.3 WOOD TREATMENT A. Preservative Pressure Treated Lumber Treatment: 1. Products and Manufacturers: Provide any of the following: a. Wolman CCA, by Arch Wood Protection, Smyrna, GA, (770) 801-6600. b. CCA Pressure Treatment by Hoover Treated Wood Products Inc., Thomson, GA, (800) .832-9663. C. SupaTimber, by Viance, Charlotte, NC, (800) 421-8661. 2. Treat lumber in accordance with AWPA U1; Use Category UC2 for interior construction not in contact with the ground; Use Category UC3b for exterior construction not in contact with the ground; and Use Category UC4a for items in contact with the ground. 3. Preservative Chemicals shall be acceptable to Authorities Having Jurisdiction and contain no arsenic or chromium where prohibited. 4. Kiln dry lumber after treatment to 15-19 percent moisture content. Do not use warped material or materials that do not comply with requirements for untreated material. Material to be painted or stained shall have knots and pitch streaks sealed as with untreated wood. 5. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board of Review and acceptable to Authorities Having Jurisdiction. B. Field -Applied Lumber Preservative: 1. Provide the following: a. Inorganic boron. b. Copper napthenate. C. Fire Retardant Treatment: 1. Products and Manufacturers: Provide any of the following: a. Dricon FRT (exterior and interior), by Arch Wood Protection, Smyrna, GA, (770) 801-6600. b. Exterior X (exterior) and Pyro-Guard (interior) by Hoover Treated Wood Products, Inc.; Thomson, GA; (800)-832-9663. C. D -Blaze (interior) by Viance, Charlotte, NC; (800) 421-8661. 2. Identify fire retardant treated wood with appropriate classification marking of testing and inspecting agency acceptable to Authorities Having Jurisdiction. 3. For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, use chemical formulations that do not bleed through, contain colorants, or otherwise adversely affect finishes. 4. Kiln dry lumber after treatment, to an average moisture content of 19 percent or less. 5. Kiln dry plywood after treatment, to an average moisture content of 15 percent or less. 6. Chemicals used to treat material shall be free of halogens, sulfates, ammonium phosphate and formaldehyde. 7. Treatment material shall provide protection against termites and fungal decay and shall be registered for use as a wood preservative by the U. S. Environmental Protection Agency. 06100-4 D. Wood Requiring Treatment: 1. Lumber, Preservative Treated: a. Nailers, blocking, stripping, and similar items in conjunction with roofing, flashing, and other construction. b. Sills, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar items in contact with masonry or concrete. 2. Lumber, Fire Retardant Treated: a. Interior partition framing, furring, blocking, nailers, and miscellaneous exposed wood at roofing system and wood exposed within the roof/ceiling assembly. 3. Interior Plywood, Fire Retardant Treated: a. Plywood used as finish material, walls, ceilings, wainscots and bases. b. Plywood backing for electrical and telephone equipment. C. Plywood concealed within gypsum board and metal stud partitions. d. Non-structural plywood wall sheathing at concealed spaces. e. Exposed to sight plywood surfaces. 4. Exterior Plywood, Fire Retardant Treated: a. Plywood used as sheathing, substrate, or parapet cap assembly. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas to receive rough carpentry work and verify following: 1. That installation of building components to receive rough carpentry work is complete. 2. That surfaces are satisfactory to receive work. 3. That spacing, direction and details of supports are correct to accommodate installation of blocking, backing, stripping, furring and nailing strips. 3.2 SITE TREATMENT OF WOOD MATERIALS A. Wood Treatment at Site: Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative treated lumber. 1. Use inorganic boron for items continuously protected from liquid water. 2. Use copper naphthenate for items not continuously protected from liquid water. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate furring, nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction. 1. Construct members of continuous pieces of longest possible lengths. 2. Do not splice structural members between supports, unless otherwise indicated. B. Provide blocking and framing indicated and necessary to support facing materials, fixtures, specialty items, and trim. 1. Provide metal clips for fastening gypsum board or lath at corners and intersections where framing or blocking does not provide a surface for fastening edges of panels. Space clips not more than 16 inches o.c. C. Secure members in place with specified fastener. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood. Do not countersink nail heads unless otherwise indicated. D. Wood Ground, Sleeper, Blocking, and Nailer: Install where indicated and where required for screeding or attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved. 1. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Recess heads of fasteners below surface of wood members. 06100-5 E. Wood Furring: Install level and plumb with closure strips at edges and openings. Shim with wood as required for tolerance of finish work. F. Install firestopping complying with Section 07840 in concealed spaces with wood blocking, horizontally and vertically in accordance with drawings, minimum 2 inches thick where space is not blocked by framing members. G. Fasteners: Install fasteners with manufacturer's recommended power tool for each type of fastener. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Protect rough carpentry from weather throughout construction period. END OF SECTION 06100-6 UniSpec - Store Planning 072619 SECTION 06400 - ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Owner furnished Plastic Laminate Casework for installation by Contractor. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 01600 - Product Requirements: Contractor's Product Selection Checklist. 2. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Lumber and panel products used for wood and wire mesh doors. 3. Appendix A — Products and Work by Owner or Separate Contractor a. General procedures related to Owner furnished products. b. Manufacturers, suppliers, vendor contacts and product names and numbers related to Owner furnished products. 1.2 REFERENCES A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced within the text by the basic designation only. B. American National Standards (ANSI): 1. ANSI A208.1 - Particleboard 2. ANSI A208.2 - Medium Density Fiberboard For Interior Use C. Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI) / Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada (AWMAC) / Woodwork Institute (WI) - Joint Publication: 1. AWI/AWMAC/WI - Architectural Woodwork Standards. D. Engineered Wood Association (APA): APA - Grades & Specifications. E. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA) 1. NEMA LD3 - High -Pressure Decorative Laminates 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Transport, handle, store, and protect products in compliance with the requirements of Section 01600. B. Inspect materials delivered and reject those not qualifying with requirements, those damaged in transit, or those that appear otherwise unsatisfactory. C. Schedule delivery of items to installation areas that are in proper condition to receive them. Place items neatly and systematically to avoid damage, store in clean, dry, enclosed, and secure storage area. D. Receive, inspect, and accept Owner Furnished products in accordance with the requirements of Section 01600. E. Product Delivery: Owner's Supplier will deliver Owner furnished products to site to be received by Contractor. Contact Owner's Supplier to coordinate product delivery and installation. F. Product Packaging: Products will be delivered in manufacturer's original packaging with identification markings on each component or package. 06400-1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 OWNER FURNISHED PRODUCTS A. Vision Center Millwork and Equipment: Owner's Supplier will furnish Vision Center millwork/casework, equipment, and associated components as specified in Appendix A (Section 06400 and Owner Furnished Equipment Schedule for installation by Contractor). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Install items specified herein where and as shown on the Drawings. 3.2 PLASTIC LAMINATE CASEWORK A. Install woodwork plumb, level, and straight without distortion; use concealed shims. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work. Anchor woodwork items to nailers or blocking or directly to substrate using concealed fasteners. B. Casework: Provide well fitting and smooth operating doors and drawers. C. Countertops: Anchor plastic laminate countertops securely to base units. END OF SECTION 06400-2 UniSpec — Store Planning SECTION 06616 - SIMULATED STONE FABRICATIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Simulated stone countertops, surfacing, and accessory materials. 2. Substrate for simulated stone countertops. B. Related Requirements 1. Section 01351 —Regulatory Compliance: a. Disposal and removal of construction and universal waste. b. Work practice control methods for airborne respirable dust. 2. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Fire retardant treatment for plywood countertop substrate. 3. Appendix A — Products: Owner furnished and installed simulated stone countertops, substrate, and accessory materials. a. Manufacturers, suppliers, and vendor contacts and product names and numbers related to Owner furnished products. 1.2 REFERENCES A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced within the text by the basic designation only. B. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. ASTM E84 - Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. C. Department of Commerce (National Institute of Standards and Technology) — Product Standard (DOC): 1. DOC PS 1 - Construction and Industrial Plywood. D. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA): 1. OSHA 01926.1153 Respirable Crystalline Silica. E. National Sanitation Foundation / American National Standards Institute (NSF/ANSI): 1. NSF/ANSI 51 — Food Equipment Materials. 1.3 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Minimize dust emissions and provide equipment that suppresses dust. 1.4 INSTALLER QUALIFICATIONS A. Installers of simulated stone countertops shall be factory -trained. B. Installers of simulated stone countertops shall have no less than 2 years of prior experience in the installation of simulated stone materials. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect, and handle products in accordance with provisions of Section 01600. B. Require simulated stone countertop supplier to provide Shipping List of countertops and related items shipped and including store number and project location (city and state) and installed location of each countertop (room name and number). 06616-1 C. Store simulated stone materials to prevent breakage and marring of surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. D. Provide protective coverings to prevent physical damage or staining following installation for duration of project. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 OWNER FURNISHED PRODUCTS A. Owner's Vision Center millwork/casework supplier will furnish Type 2 solid surface countertop material with the Vision Center millwork as specified in Appendix A (Section 06400) for installation by the Contractor. 2.2 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Provide simulated stone countertops complying with the following requirements: 1. ASTM E 84: Class A. 2. United States Department of Agriculture (USDA): Approved for incidental food contact. 3. NSF/ANSI 51. 2.3 COUNTERTOP SUBSTRATE A. Provide the following substrate for simulated stone countertops at locations indicated on Drawings: 1. Plywood DOC PS 1 Type 1 (Interior): Grade C -D Plugged veneer plywood, Exposure I. 2. Thickness as indicated on the Drawings. 3. Provide plywood treated with fire retardant specified in Section 06100. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Supply materials for installation of products as specified in manufacturer's printed installation instructions including color matched silicone sealant and adhesives where applicable. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine surfaces and adjacent areas where products will be installed and verify that surfaces conform to product manufacturer's requirements for substrate conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Santamargherita Quartz surfacing material: 1. Download and read Santamar heg rita Quartz Fabrication Manual. 2. Download and read Santamar,gherita Safety Indications Manual. 3. Download and read Santamar hey rita Quartz Good Practice Guidelines. B. Prepare substrate surfaces to receive simulated stone materials in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Use tools, techniques and procedures recommended by simulated stone countertop manufacturers specific to their materials for field fabrication and installation. B. Install components plumb and level in accordance with manufacturer's written recommendations. C. Fabricate seams and fixture mounting in accordance with manufacturer's written recommendations. 06616-2 D. Form field joints using manufacturer's recommended adhesive, with joints inconspicuous in finished work. E. Lay out and field cut countertops using templates provided by component suppliers for field adaptation and as required for field cuts and holes for equipment shown on Drawings to be installed later. F. Use blades, saws and drill bits recommended by manufacturer. Provide blades and saws as recommended by manufacturer to maintain dust emissions below the permissible level. G. Clean dust and debris from cuts and holes using a HEPA-rated filter vacuum. H. Provide backsplashes and endsplashes as indicated on Drawings. Adhere to countertop using manufacturers standard color matched silicone sealant. 1. Provide a smooth continuous cove of sealant free of voids and neat in appearance at bottom, top and vertical corners. 3.4 CLEANING A. Remove adhesives, sealants, and other stains upon completion of installation per manufactures written instructions. B. Dispose of construction waste in accordance with the requirements of Section 01351 Regulatory Compliance Supplement. END OF SECTION 06616-3 BLANK PAGE 06616-4 UniSpec II - Store Planning SECTION 07210 - BUILDING INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Sound Attenuation Insulation (Sound Batts). B. Related Sections: 1. Section 09250 - Gypsum Board: Metal furring. 1.2 REFERENCES 022213 A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced within the text by the basic designation only. B. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. ASTM E 84 - Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 2. ASTM C 665 - Specification for Mineral -Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing. 3. ASTM E 136 - Behavior of Materials in a Vertical Tube Furnace at 750° C. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Concealed Insulation: Insulation concealed within framing system, both faces protected by finish material. B. Exposed Insulation: Insulation exposed within framing system, one or both faces unprotected. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Transport, handle, store, and protect products in compliance with the requirements of Section 01600 and manufacturer's recommendations. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Provide products from one of the following manufacturers as specified in the Materials paragraph below: 1. Atlas Energy Products, Atlanta, GA (800) 933-1476. 2. Celotex Corporation, Tampa, FL (813) 873-1700. 3. CertainTeed Corporation, Valley Forge, PA, (800) 523-7844. 4. Dow Chemical Company, Midland, MI, (800) 232-2436. 5. Firestone Building Products Company, Carmel, IN, (800) 428-4442. 6. Guardian Fiberglass Incorporated, Albion, MI, (800) 748-0035. 7. Johns Manville Insulations, Denver, CO, (800) 654-3103. 8. NRG Division/Johns Manville, Portland, ME, (800) 343-1285. 9. Owens-Corning, Toledo, OH, (800) 438-7465. 10. Pactiv Building Products, Atlanta, GA (800) 241-4402. 2.2 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: Provide insulation and related materials with the fire -test -response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84 for surface -burning characteristics and other methods specified. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 07210-1 2.3 MATERIALS A. Batt Insulation: ASTM C 665 mineral fiber blanket insulation. 1. Unfaced Glass Fiber: Type I (blankets without membrane facing); with maximum flame -spread and smoke - developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics. 2. Faced, Glass -Fiber: Type III (blankets with reflective membrane facing), Class A (membrane -faced surface with a flame -spread index of 25 or less); Category 1 (membrane is a vapor barrier), faced with vapor -retarder membrane on 1 face. 3. Sound Attenuation Insulation (Sound Batts): Unfaced glass fiber insulation as specified above. 4. Provide batt insulation by one of the following manufacturers: a. CertainTeed Corporation. b. Guardian Fiberglass, Inc. C. Johns Manville. d. Owens Corning. B. Substitutions: Comply with the requirements of Section 01600. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Tape: Polyethylene or polyester self -adhering type; two inches wide. B. Adhesive: Waterproof type, acceptable to manufacturer of insulation board. Adhesive VOC shall be within the limits of not greater than 70 g/L in accordance with the California's South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD) Rule No. 1168. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Batt Insulation: 1. Verify adjacent materials are dry and ready to receive installation. 2. Verify mechanical and electrical services within walls have been installed and tested. 3.2 INSTALLATION - BATT INSULATION A. Install batt insulation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, without gaps or voids. B. Trim insulation neatly to fit spaces. Use batts free of damage. Fit insulation tight in spaces and tight to exterior side of mechanical and electrical services within the plane of insulation. C. Install insulation with factory applied membrane facing warm side of building spaces. Lap ends and side flanges of membrane. Attach insulation in place to framing; tape seal butt ends and lapped side flanges. Tape seal tears or cuts in membrane. 3.3 SCHEDULES A. Provide insulation types as scheduled below and as indicated on Drawings. CONDITION TYPE OF INSULATION THICKNESS Sound Attenuation Unfaced Batt Insulation 3-1/2 inches or 6 inches as Shown. END OF SECTION 07210-2 UniSpec II -Store Plan SECTION 07840 - FIRESTOPPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Firestopping in rated assemblies. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 09250 - Gypsum Board. 1.2 REFERENCES 072613 A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced within the text by the basic designation only. B. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. ASTM E814 - Test Methods for Fire Tests of Through Penetration Fire Stops. C. FM Global (FM): 1. FM 4991 — Standard for the Approval of Firestop Contractors D. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 1. UL 1479 - Fire Tests of Through -Penetration Firestops. 2. UL 2079 — Tests for Fire Resistance of Building Joint Systems. 3. UL Fire Resistance Directory: 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals: Comply with the requirements of Section 01330. B. Certifications: 1. Installer Qualifications. Submit documentation of Designated Responsible Individual (DRI) or letter from firestop manufacturer naming approved installer to Architect prior to commencement of firestop work. 2. Manufacturer's Inspection. Submit written certification from firestop manufacturer that Manufacturer's Representative has visited Site as specified in Part 3 and Work is in accordance with manufacturer's requirements and published instructions. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Installation of firestopping shall be by a Designated Responsible Individual (DRI) in accordance with FM 4991 or shall be an approved installer by the Firestop Manufacturer. 1.5 DELWERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Transport, handle, store, and protect products in compliance with the requirements of Section 01600 and manufacturer's recommendations. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide firestopping products as manufactured by one of the following: 1. Nelson Firestop Products, (800) 331-7325. 2. Hilti, Inc, (800) 879-8000. 3. RectorSeal Corporation, (800) 231-3345. 4. Specified Technologies, Inc. (STI), (800) 992-1180. 07840-1 5. 3M Fire Protection Products, (800) 376-0964. 6. Tremco Firestop System, (800) 852-8173. 2.2 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Firestop materials shall have been tested with and shall be in compliance with the minimum requirements of ASTM E814, UL 1479, and UL 2079 as applicable. Products used shall be as listed below as suitable for the intended application and as required to produce the fire rating as shown on the drawings and to conform to the Firestopping Schedule of UL assemblies included at the end of this Section. 2.3 MATERIALS A. Intumescent Latex or Acrylic Sealant: Single -component, intumescent, latex or acrylic formulation. 1. LBS, by Nelson Firestop Products. 2. FS ONE or CP 606, by Hilti. 3. Metacaulk 950 or 1000, by RectorSeal. 4. SpecSeal SSS 100, by STI. 5. CP 25WB+, IC 15WB, or 3000WT by 3M. 6. TREMstop Intumescent Acrylic (IA) or Acrylic (A), by Tremco. B. Intumescent Wrap/Strip: Single -component, elastomeric sheet with aluminum foil on one face. 1. WRS, by Nelson Firestop Products. 2. CP 648 Wrap Strip, by Hilti. 3. Metacaulk Wrap Strip, by RectorSeal. 4. SpecSeal SSWRED Wrapstrip, by STI. 5. FS -195+ Wrap/Strip or Ultra GS, by 3M. 6. TREMstop WS, by Tremco. C. Intumescent Putty: Single -component, non -hardening, dielectric, intumescent putty. 1. FSP, by Nelson Firestop Products. 2. CP 618 Putty Stick or CP 617/617L Putty Pad, by Hilti. 3. CP 648 Wrap Strip, by Hilti. 4. CFS -PL Firestop Plug, by Hilti. 5. Metacaulk Fire Rated Putty, by RectorSeal. 6. SpecSeal Putty, by STI. 7. Moldable Putty+, by 3M. 8. TREMstop MP (Moldable Putty) or Putty Stick by Tremco. D. Silicone Sealant: Single -component, moisture -curing, silicone -based elastomeric, non -sag grade. 1. CLK N/S, by Nelson Firestop Products. 2. CP 601 S, by Hilti. 3. Metacaulk 835, by RectorSeal. 4. SpecSeal PEN 300, by STI. 5. 2000+ Silicone, by 3M. 6. FYRE SIL, by Tremco. E. Silicone or Polyurethane Foam: Two -Component, liquid elastomer that, when mixed, expands and cures in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam. 1. SpecSeal PEN 200, by STI. 2. CP 620 Fire Foam, by Hilti. F. Intumescent Collar: Factory -fabricated, intumescent collar. 1. PCS, by Nelson Firestop Products. 2. CP 643 or CP 644, by Hilti. 3. Metacaulk Pipe Collar, by RectorSeal. 4. SpecSeal SSC Collars, by STI. 5. Plastic Pipe Device, Ultra Plastic Pipe Device, Tuck In Wrap Strips, or RC -1 Collar by 3M. 6. TREMstop D, by Tremco. 07840-2 G. Intumescent Composite Sheet, Pillows and Mortar, or Blocks: Products used to firestop large openings. 1. CPS, by Nelson Firestop Products. 2. CFS -BL Fireblocks, by Hilti. 3. CP 637 Firestop Mortar, by Hilti. 4. CP 675T Firestop Board, by Hilti. 5. SpecSeal SSB Pillows and SpecSeal SSM Firestop Compound, by STI. 6. CS -195+ Composite Sheet, by 3M. 7. TREMstop PS, by Tremco. H. Sprayable Fire -Rated Mastic: Products used to firestop construction joints. 1. CP672 Speed Spray, by Hilti. 2. Specseal Elastomeric Spray, by STI. 3. Firedam Spray 200, by 3M 4. TREMstop Acrylic Spray (A -SP) by Tremco. I. Packing Material: Manufacturer's standard mastic, putty, ceramic fiber blanket, or mineral wool to be used as fill or backing material for firestopping. 1. Mineral Wool, by Nelson Firestop Products. 2. Mineral Wool, by Hilti. 3. Fire Safing or Backer Rod, by RectorSeal. 4. Mineral Wool, by STI. 5. Fire Barrier 5A, 615+ Duct Wrap, or PM4 Packing Material by 3M. 6. TREMstop FS Blanket, by Tremco. 7. CP 767 Speed Strips and CP 777 Speed Plugs, by Hilti. (preformed mineral wool designed for top of wall fluted metal deck packing material) Substitutions: Comply with the requirements of Section 01600. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Remove loose dirt and oil from penetration surfaces. B. Place hangers or damming materials in penetration to hold firestopping materials, if necessary. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Keep caulk and putty away from heat, open flame, sparks, or other sources of ignition during application and until product cures. Use only with adequate ventilation. B. Follow manufacturer charts for appropriate material to achieve required fire rating in various locations. C. Install firestopping at penetrations of fire rated wall materials in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions. D. Install firestopping at penetrations and construction joints of fire rated walls and floors in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions and in accordance with UL Fire Resistance Directory. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Site Inspection: Upon completion of installation, , Manufacturer's Representative shall inspect installed firestopping to verify work complies with the manufacturer's requirements. 3.4 FIRESTOPPING SCHEDULE A. Provide firestopping complying with UL assemblies specified below. 07840-3 Penetration Assembly Nelson Hilti RectorSeal STI 3M Tremco Metal Pipe CMU Wall 8" CAJ1203 CAJ 1149 or CAJ1114 or CAJ1079 or CAJ1001 or CAJ1064 or Thick or Less CAJ1155 or CAJ1115 CAJ1217 CAJ1009 CAJ1302 CAJ 1226 Gypsum Board WL1083 or WL1054 or WL1026 or WL1049 or WL1003 or WL1278 or Partition WL1030 WL1058 or WL1034 WL1079 WL1009 WL1158 WL 1297 Non -Metallic CMU Wall 8" CAJ2110 or WJ2025 CAJ2064 or CAJ2223 or Pipe Thick or Less CAJ2086 CAJ2109 or CAJ2045 CAJ2005 CAJ2184 CAJ2567 Gypsum Board WL2098 or WL2104 WL2093, WL2002 or WL2083 or Partition WL2071 WL2078 or WL2029 or WL2005 WL2129 WL2341 WL2288 Cable Tray CMU Wall 8" CAJ8049 or CAJ4035 or CAJ4020 or CAJ4003 CAJ4075 Thick or Less CAJ4033 CAJ4017 CAJ8043 CAJ4029 Gypsum Board WL4011 or WL4005 or WL3043 or Partition WL4003 WL4019 - - - - WL4008 WL4004 WL3131 Insulated CMU Wall 8" CAJ5008 or CAJ5090 or WJ5016 or CAJ5021 or CAJ5001 or CAJ5121 or Metal Pipe thick or Less CAJ5059 CAJ5091 or CAJ5070 CAJ5029 CAJ5002 CAJ5111 CAJ5048 Gypsum Board WL5028 or WL5014 or WL -5115 Partition WL5036 WL5029 or WL5057 WL5051 WL5001 WL -5081 WL5257 Construction CMU Wall to HWD0098 or HWD0235 HWD0092 Gaps - Head Metal Deck - - - - HWD0181 - - - - HWD0013 or HWD1037 of Wall to Gyp Bd Parti'n HWD0042 or Roof Deck to Metal Deck - - - - HWD0049 HWD0014 - - - - HWS0003 HWD0091 Construction CMU Wall to WWD1011 WWS1001 WWD1050, Gaps - Wall CMU Wall - - - - or - - - - - - - - WWD0043, to Wall WWD1012 TL/PV60-01 or or WWD1017 WWD-1052 Gyp Bd Parti'n to Gyp Bd ---- WWD0067 ---- ---- WWS0004 ---- Parti'n END OF SECTION 07840-4 UniSpec - Store Planning SECTION 07900 - JOINT SEALERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY 032720 A. Section Includes: 1. Joint sealants for interior vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces, except as otherwise specified. 2. Joint sealants and fillers in interior concrete floor slab -on -grade joints. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01351 —Regulatory Compliance. a. Disposal and removal of construction and universal waste. b. Work practice control methods for airborne respirable dust. 2. Section 09650 - Resilient Flooring: Joint filler for control/construction joints concealed by floor finish material. 3. Section 09900 - Paints and Coatings: Protection of wall joints from painting prior to sealing. 1.2 REFERENCES A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced within the text by the basic designation only. B. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. ASTM C920 - Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants. 2. ASTM C1330 - Cylindrical Sealant Backing for Use with Cold Liquid Applied Sealants. 3. ASTM D 1056 - Flexible Cellular Materials -Sponge or Expanded Rubber. 4. ASTM E84 - Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials C. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA): 1. OSHA 01926.1153 Respirable Crystalline Silica. 1.3 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Minimize dust emissions and provide equipment that suppresses dust. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Interior sealants in food preparation areas shall meet the compositional requirements for use in USDA regulated facilities, as required by FDA according to 21 CFR 177.2600, and local authorities having jurisdiction. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Transport, handle, store and protect products in compliance with the requirements of Section 01600. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Do not install solvent curing sealants in enclosed building spaces. B. Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by sealant manufacturer during and after installation. C. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions: 1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint -sealant manufacturer. 2. When joint substrates are wet. 3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint -sealant manufacturer for applications indicated. 4. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed from joint substrates. 07900-1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCTS 2.2 ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS - GENERAL A. Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid -applied chemically curing sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates. 2.3 ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS (APPLICATIONS OTHER THAN EXTERIOR WALL) A. Suitability for Contact with Food: Where sealants are indicated for joints that will come in repeated contact with food, provide products that comply with 21 CFR 177.2600. Sealants identified as (Non -USDA) shall not be used in food preparation areas. B. Polyurethane Sealants (USDA Certified, unless otherwise noted): 1. Polyurethane Hybrid Sealant #1 (P1) and #3 (P3): ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, single component. a. MasterSeal NP 100, by BASF Master Builders Solutions. 1) Color, General: In interior and exterior exposed areas, verify sealant is a match to the color of the adjacent paint color. 2) In joints where plumbing fixtures meet adjacent floor and wall finishes, match color of plumbing fixture. 3) Use clear, colorless sealant where applied to stainless steel surfaces. C. Silicone Sealants (USDA Certified, unless otherwise noted): 1. Silicone Sealant #1 (S1): ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25. a. Spectrem 1, Spectrem 2, or Spectrem 3, by Tremco. b. 791 Silicone Perimeter Sealant (Non -USDA), by Dow C. 864 or 890 by Pecora. d. MasterSeal NP 150 by BASF-Sonneborn. e. SilPruf SCS2000 (Non -USDA), by GE. f. Titebond 100% Silicone Sealant by Franklin International. 2. Silicone Sealant #2 (S2): ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, mildew resistant. a. Tremsi1200, by Tremco. b. 898 by Pecora. C. 786 Silicone Sealant (Non -USDA), by Dow. d. Sanitary SCSI 700 (Non -USDA), by GE. D. Sealant Color: 1. Match color of adjacent paint color finish or other adjacent finish color if proprietary color is not otherwise specified herein. 2. In joints where plumbing fixtures meet adjacent floor and wall finishes, match color of plumbing fixture. 3. Use clear, colorless sealant where applied to stainless steel surfaces. 2.4 INTERIOR SLAB ON GRADE JOINT SEALANT MATERIALS A. Preformed Expansion (Isolation) Joint Filler Strips (PMEJ): Flexible closed -cell synthetic foam expansion joint strips, non -extruding, for full depth of concrete. 1. Ceramar Flexibe Foam Expansion Joint, by W.R. Meadows. 2. Deck -O -Foam Expansion Joint Filler, by W.R. Meadows B. Elastomeric Joint Materials: 1. Sealant: a. Polyurethane Sealant: No. 2 (P2) as specified above. b. Color: Match color of adjacent exposed surface of concrete slab. C. Sealant shall be compatible with construction material placed against it. 2. Joint Back -Up Material: a. Polyethylene Foam, 100% closed cell. b. Material shall be compatible with construction material to be placed against it such as tile adhesive. 07900-2 C. Polyurea Joint Filler (PY1): Rapid setting, two -component polyurea polymer liquid of 100% solids content, Shore A Hardness 85 to 92, compatible with construction material placed against it. (USDA compliant, unless otherwise noted.) 1. MasterSeal CR 100, by BASF Master Builders Solutions. 2.5 ACCESSORIES A. Primer: Non -staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. B. Joint Cleaner: Non -corrosive and non -staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer; compatible with joint forming materials. 2.6 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Comply with the requirements of Section 01600. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces and joint openings are ready to receive work and field measurements are as indicated on Drawings. B. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing substrates. 3.2 INTERIOR SLAB ON GRADE JOINT SEALING AND FILLING A. General: 1. Seal/fill contraction, isolation and construction joints in floor slabs and pavements, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings or specified herein. 2. Unless noted otherwise, use polyurea joint filler in floor slab contraction and construction joints. 3. Use elastomeric joint sealant in isolation joints and textured concrete joints. 4. Use pavement sealant in pavement's contraction, construction, and isolation joints. 5. Do not seal joints with materials specified herein when below relatively impervious floor finish material, such as PVC flooring, sheet rubber, wood, epoxy topping; refer to floor finish specification for joint sealing requirements. 6. Do not place polyurea joint filler under resilient flooring or carpet. Reference Section 09650 or 09680 for joint subfloor filler materials and placement under floor covering. B. Cleaning: 1. Immediately prior to sealing/filling, clean joints to full depth of sealant/filler in accordance with manufacturer's recommendation. 2. Use vacuum with HEPA-rated filter to remove loose dirt, debris, saw laitance, and other foreign material from joint. 3. Clean inner joint walls mechanically using one of the following HEPA-rated filter tools as recommended by the manufacturer for maintaining dust emissions below the permissible level a. Humpback Dustless Joint Saw by Joe Due Blades & Equipment, www.joedue.com. b. Dust Buggy by U.S. Saws, Santa Ana, CA (866) 987-7297. C. Gorilla Concrete Tools GCT -10 or GCT -9 Silverback by OBHC, Inc., Columbia Station, OH, (440) 236-5112. 4. Clean joint walls to the full depth of saw cuts and 2 inch minimum depth in construction joints that may not have been saw cut to create a support shelf. 5. Remove form release agent, curing compound, or other components. C. General Installation: 1. Commence placing floor joint sealant / filler no sooner than 30 days after first placement of concrete. 2. If joint is wet or damp, allow joint to dry for 72 hours prior to filling. 3. Delay floor joint sealing / filling operations until facility's environmental systems have been placed in operation for 14 days. 4. Mix and install sealant and filler in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Use primer if recommended for specific application. 07900-3 5. Choke off shrinkage crack if necessary at bottom of contraction joint or void below construction joints by the following methods. a. Saw Cut Contraction Joints: 1) Place 1/8 inch to 1/4 inch (maximum) layer of dry -bagged silica sand in joint to be epoxy filled. Do not use compressible backer rod. Use methods in handling sand to maintain dust emissions below the permissible level. b. Construction Joints Through Slab: Fill by inserting compressible backer rod to a minimum depth of 2 inches below slab surface. 6. Do not allow sealant / filler to extend over joint edges in finished condition. D. Elastomeric Joint Sealant Installation: 1. Use joint back-up material. 2. Tool surface to provide smooth, attractive appearance and geometry recommended by sealant manufacturer. E. Joint Filler Installation 1. Cleaning: Immediately prior to filling, clean and prepare joint bottom and sidewalls as specified herein for general cleaning. 2. Do not use joint back-up material (i.e. backer rod, sand, etc.) except below bottom of saw cut in construction joints. Provide a minimum joint filler depth of 2 inches. 3. Install test sample of the polyurea joint filler to determine if filler will leave a stain, shadow, or film on slab surface. 4. If test sample reveals stain, shadow, or film, use joint filler stain preventing film at joints to receive polyurea joint filler. 5. Fill joint using single pass method. Fill joint full depth from bottom to top, leave slight crown at slab surface. 6. Add extra filler prior to filler set if needed to prevent depressed areas. If concave filler is already set, abrade with wire wheel or similar tool to minimum depth of 1/4" below surface prior to refilling. 7. Razor off crowned filler flush with floor surface after filler has sufficiently set. 8. Remove stain preventing film (if used). Film shall be removed by joint filler installer immediately after shaving joint filler. 9. One week prior to Grand Opening, refill joints if: a. Joint filler sidewall separation or splitting exceeds 1/32 in. b. Joint filler surface profile is concave, crowned, or chattered or if voids occur. 10. Follow manufacturer's requirements for joint preparation for proper adhesion. F. Isolation Joints: Form isolation joints of preformed joint -filler strips (PMEJ) where indicated. 1. Extend joint fillers full width and depth of joint. 2. Terminate joint filler or otherwise provide joint sealant cavity of not less than 1/2 inch or more than 1 inch below finished surface if joint sealant is indicated. 3. Place top of joint filler flush with finished concrete surface if joint sealant is not indicated. 4. Furnish joint fillers in one-piece lengths. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip joint -filler sections together. 5. Protect top edge of joint filler during concrete placement with metal, plastic, or other temporary preformed cap. Remove protective cap after concrete has been placed on both sides of joint. 3.3 CLEANING A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. 3.4 SEALANT LOCATION SCHEDULE A. Provide sealants in accordance with the following schedule. Joint sealing required by the drawings or required for a complete and proper installation but not listed in the following schedule shall be sealed as necessary regardless of whether shown or scheduled. Such joints not shown or scheduled shall be sealed with sealants consistent with specified materials or as recommended by the manufacturer for the specific application. 07900-4 INTERIOR JOINTS MATERIAL TO MATERIAL JOINT WIDTH SEALANT TYPE FLOOR Concrete Floor Concrete Floor Contraction and Construction Joint 1/4" See Materials Par. Expansion Joint 3/4" Same Isolation Joint See Dw s Same Floor Joints Beneath Floor Finish Materials VCT or PVC Flooring) See Section 09650 Transition Strip Korl to Concrete Slab PY1 Sanitary Cove Base (SCB) Floor See Section 09655 Structural Steel Column VCT/PVC P1 WALLS Rated Gypsum Board Wall Control Joint Rated Gypsum Board Wall Rated Gypsum Board Wall Metal Roof Deck or Rated CMU Wall See Section 07840 - Firestopping Gypsum Board CMU Walls 3/8" P1 (Use edge trim, ref. Section 09250 Stainless Steel Corner Guards Wall S1 or S2 Plastic Base Ceramic Tile or Gypsum Board Wall P1 or P3 Plastic Base Concrete P1 or P3 Sanitary Cove Base (SCB) Wall See Section 09655 WALL PENETRA- Aluminum Storefront Frame Alum Storefront Frame, CMU, or Gypsum Board 1/4" P1 TIONS Aluminum Storefront Sill Gypsum Board Wall or Cast Concrete Shapes 1/4" P1 Hollow Metal Door Frame CMU or Gypsum Board 1/4" P1 Steel Corner Angle Frame CMU Wall 1/4" P1 Steel Pipe or Conduit Through CMU Wall 1/2" P1 Steel Pipe or Conduit Through Gypsum Board 1/4" P1 PVC or Copper Pipe Through CMU or Gypsum Board 1/2" P1 Steel, PVC, or Copper Pipe Through Rated CMU or Gypsum Board Wall See Section 07840 Steel Conduit Through Rated CMU or Gypsum Board Wall See Section 07840 COUNTER Plastic Laminate Counter Tops Gypsum Board or Plastic Laminate Walls S2 END OF SECTION 07900-5 BLANK PAGE 07900-6 UniSpec II - Store Planning SECTION 09250 - GYPSUM BOARD PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY 072619 A. Section Includes: 1. Interior non load-bearing steel stud partition framing 20 (30 mil) gage and lighter (designed for 5 pounds per square foot uniform load perpendicular to partition). 2. Suspension system for interior gypsum ceilings 3. Gypsum board. 4. Gypsum sheathing. 5. Backer materials: Backer panels for wall tile and plastic wall panels. 6. Textured wallboard coating. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 01351 —Regulatory a. Disposal and removal of construction and universal waste. b. Work practice control methods for airborne respirable dust. 2. Section 05400 - Cold Formed Metal Framing: Load-bearing steel stud exterior and interior wall framing 20 gage and heavier and ceiling joists. Cold formed deep leg track for interior nonload-bearing steel stud partitions. Metal stud header wall framing and bracing supported from roof structure. 3. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Wood furring strips, plywood, blocking, and fasteners attached to partition framing. 4. Section 07210 - Building Insulation: Thermal and acoustical insulation. 5. Section 07840 - Firestopping: Installation of firestopping at penetrations of fire -rated partitions. 6. Section 09900 - Paints and Coatings: Paint finish applied to gypsum board. 1.2 REFERENCES A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced within the test by these basic designations only. B. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. ASTM A 653 - Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc -Iron Alloy -Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot - Dip Process 2. ASTM C 475 - Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing Gypsum Board. 3. ASTM C 557 - Adhesives for Fastening Gypsum Wallboard to Wood Framing. 4. ASTM C 645 - Nonstructural Steel Framing Members. 5. ASTM C 754 - Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw -Attached Gypsum Panel Products. 6. ASTM C 840 - Application And Finishing Of Gypsum Board. 7. ASTM C 954 - Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Board or Metal Plaster Bases to Steel Studs From 0.033 inches to 0.112 inches in Thickness. 8. ASTM C 1002 - Steel Self -Piercing Tapping Screws For The Application Of Gypsum Panel Products Or Metal Plaster Bases To Wood Studs Or Steel Studs. 9. ASTM C 1177 - Glass Mat Gypsum Substrate for Use as Sheathing. 10. ASTM C 1178 - Coated Glass Mat Water -Resistant Gypsum Backing Panel. 11. ASTM C 1396 - Gypsum Board 12. ASTM C 1629 - Standard Classification for Abuse -Resistant Nondecorated Interior Gypsum Panel Products and Fiber -Reinforced Cement Panels. 13. ASTM C 1658 - Glass Mat Gypsum Panels. 14. ASTM D 3273 - Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surfaces of Interior Coatings in an Environmental Chamber. 15. ASTM D 3274 - Standard Test Method for Evaluating Degree of Surface Disfigurement of Paint Films by Microbial (Fungal or Algal) Growth or Soil and Dirt Accumulation. 09250-1 C. Gypsum Association (GA): 1. GA -214 - Levels of Gypsum Board Finish. 2. GA -216 - Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board. 3. GA -234 - Control Joints For Fire -Resistance Rated Systems. 4. GA -600 - Fire Resistance and Sound Control Design Manual. D. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA): 1. OSHA 01926.1153 Respirable Crystalline Silica. E. Steel Stud Manufacturer's Association (SSMA) 1. Member listing F. Steel Framing Industry Association (SFIA) 1. Member listing 1.3 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Minimize dust emissions and provide equipment that suppresses dust. B. Dispose of construction waste in accordance with the requirements of Section 01351 Regulatory Compliance Supplement. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in the installation of light gage metal framing components and gypsum wallboard with minimum 5 years documented experience. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Section 01600 - Product Requirements: Transport, handle, store, and protect products. B. Protect metal framing from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling. C. Store and protect metal framing with weatherproof covering, and ventilate to avoid condensation. D. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing brand name and identification of manufacturer or supplier. E. Stack gypsum board flat to prevent sagging. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS OR SITE CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: 1. Establish and maintain environmental conditions for applying and finishing gypsum board in conformance with GA -216. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Fire -Resistance -Rated Assemblies: For fire -resistance -rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency. Products used in the assembly shall carry a classification label from a testing laboratory acceptable to Authority Having Jurisdiction. 09250-2 2.2 FRAMING MATERIALS A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following: 1. C1arkDietrich, West Chester, OH (513) 870-1100. 2. The Steel Network, Raleigh, NC (888) 474-4876. 3. Cemco Steel, Ft. Worth, TX (817) 568-1525. 4. Telling Industries, LLC Willoughby, OH (866) 372-6384. 5. Marino/WARE, South Plainfield, NJ (800) 627-4661. 6. Other manufacturers listed as a member of SSMA or SFIA. B. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide steel framing products with an average recycled content of steel products such that the postconsumer recycled content plus 1/2 of preconsumer recycled content is not less than 25 percent. C. Interior Nonload-Bearing Partition Framing: ASTM C 645 and C 754; galvanized sheet steel, channel shaped, 1 I/4 - inch flange width, punched for utility access, depth and gages as indicated below unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. Stud Depth Partition Height/Unsupported Length* Minimum Gage mil Max Stud Spacing Center -to -Center 3-5/8 inches Up to 8'-0" 25 gage 18 mil 24 -inches 3-5/8 inches Up to 13'-4" 20 gage 30 mil 24 -inches 3-5/8 inches 13'-4" to 16'-3" 20 gage 30 mil 16 -inches 6 -inches Up to 18'-9" 20 gage 30 mil 24 -inches 6 -inches 18'-9" to 22'-11" 20 gage 30 mil 16 -inches *Hei hts/Len the outside these limits will require additional bracing. Reference Drawings for details. D. Contractor's Option: In lieu of traditional framing members, Contractor may use modified framing members of equivalent thickness for 20 and 25 gage metal such as ProSTUD Drywall Framing System by C1arkDietrich or comparable framing members by other manufacturers listed as members of SSMA, or SFIA. E. Partition Floor Tracks and Runners: ASTM C 645; galvanized sheet steel, channel shaped, same depth and gage as studs, tight fit; solid web. F. Deflection (Capture) Track: Deep leg track at roof deck or structure to provide vertical travel as indicated. 1. Contractor's Option: Manufacturer's standard double or single deflection track as follows: a. VertiClip or VertiTrack by The Steel Network. If this option is used, track may be 20 gage (30 mil) for all stud sizes. b. FastTop Clip by C1arkDietrich. C. MaxTrak or B1azeFrame by C1arkDietrich d. SLP -TRK by Brady Innovations as distributed by CEMCO. C. Comparable modified deflection tracks by other manufacturers listed as members of SSMA, or SFIA. G. Furring and Bracing: AISI 5220; galvanized sheet steel. 1. Studs: ST25 - 2-1/2 inch deep, 25 gage (18 mil). 2. Studs: ST25 - 3-5/8 inch deep, 25 gage (18 mil). 3. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2 inch deep x 2-1/2 inch wide, 25 gage (18 mil) 4. Hat -Shaped Channels: 7/8 inch deep x 1-1/2 inch wide, 25 gage (18 mil). 5. Cold -Formed Channels: 3/4 x 1/2 inch and 1-1/2 x 17/32 inch, 16 gage (54 mil). 6. Z Furring Channel: 1-1/2 inch deep, 25 gage (18 mil). 7. Clip Angles: 2 inches x 2 inches x 16 gage (54 mil) x 1/4 inch less than stud width. 8. Contractor's Option: In lieu of cold -formed channels and clip angles for horizontal wall bridging, Contractor may provide one of the following: a. Bridge Bar by the Steel Network. b. TradeReady Spazzer 9200 Bridging and Bracing Bar by C1arkDietrich. C. Comparable products by other manufacturers listed as members of SSMA, or SFIA. 09250-3 H. Ceiling Joists, Tracks, Headers at Partition Openings, Framing Attachment Angles, and Fasteners: Specified in Section 05400. I. Partition Framing Fasteners: Corrosion -resistant self -drilling self -tapping steel screws. 1. 22 (27 mil) Gage Framing: ASTM C 1002; 3/8 inch Type S pan head. 2. 20 (30 mil) Gage and Heavier Framing: ASTM C 954; 5/8 inch Type S-12 low -profile head. Bracing to Framing Attachment Angle Fasteners: #12 diameter pan head corrosion -resistant self -drilling screws. K. Partition Floor Track Anchorage Device: Low velocity powder -actuated drive pins; minimum 0.138 inch shank diameter x 1-1/2 inch shank length with 7/8 inch diameter washer. 1. Hilti PAT System using X-C 37 P8S36 Pins, by Hilti, Tulsa, OK, (800) 879-8000. 2. Ramset/Red Head System using 150OSD Pins, by ITW Ramset/Redhead, Wood Dale, IL, (630) 350-0370. L. Wall Furring to Concrete or Masonry Wall Fasteners: Hex head sleeve anchors; minimum 1/4 inch diameter x minimum 1-1/8 inch embedment. 1. Slv Anch HLC-HX 5/16 x 2-5/8, by Hilti, Tulsa, OK, (800) 879-8000. 2. Dynabolt HN -1413, by ITW Ramset/Redhead, Wood Dale, IL, (708) 350-1558. M. Furring Channel to Masonry or Concrete Surface Fasteners: Low velocity powder -actuated drive pins of size to suit application. N. Flat Straps and Backing Plates: ASTM A 653; galvanized sheet steel, gage, shape, and configuration as indicated on Drawings. 1. Contractor's Option: In lieu of 2 -inch continuous metal strap, Contractor may provide one of the following: a. Bridge Bar by The Steel Network. b. TradeReady Spazzer 9200 Bridging and Bracing Bar by C1arkDietrich. C. Comparable products by other manufacturers listed as members of SSMA, or SFIA. O. Suspension System: 1. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, double strand of 16 ga wire. 2. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 8 ga. 3. Carrying Channels: AISI S220; galvanized sheet steel, 1-1/2 x 17/32 inch, 16 gage (54 mil). 4. Furring Channels: AISI S220; galvanized, hat -shaped, rigid furring channels, 7/8 inch deep. 5. Furring Channel Clips: AISI S220; galvanized sheet steel, 1-1/2 inch. 2.3 GYPSUM BOARD MATERIALS A. Manufacturer: United States Gypsum Company, Chicago, IL. (800) 874-4968. 1. American Gypsum Company, Dallas, TX (800) 545-6302. 2. CertainTeed Corp, Tampa, FL. (800) 233-8990. 3. Georgia-Pacific, Atlanta, GA. (800) 284-5347. 4. National Gypsum Company, Gold Bond Building Products, Charlotte, NC. (800) 628-4662. 5. USG Corporation, Chicago, IL. (800) 850-3839. 6. The Steel Network, Raleigh, NC (888) 474-4876. (Accessories only) 7. C1arkDietrich, West Chester, OH (513) 870-1100. (Accessories only). 8. Fry Reglet, (800) 237-9773. (Accessories only) 9. Other manufacturers listed as members of SSMA, or SFIA. B. Standard Gypsum Board: Sheetrock, ASTM C 1396 1. Thickness: 1/2 inch and 5/8 inch thick 2. Length, Long Edges, Cut: Maximum permissible length, edges tapered, ends square cut square. 3. Provide one of the following: a. Gypsum Wallboard by American Gypsum. b. CertainTeed Regular Gypsum Board by Certainteed. C. ToughRock Gypsum Board by Georia-Pacific. d. Gold Bond Gypsum Board by National Gypsum. e. Sheetrock Gypsum Panel by United States Gypsum. 09250-4 C. Water Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396. 1. Thickness: 1/2 inch thick 2. Length, Long Edges, Cut: Maximum permissible lengths, edges tapered, ends square cut square. 3. Core: Moisture or mold resistant core. 4. Mold Resistance: Score of 10 when tested in accordance with ASTM D 3273/3274. 5. Provide one of the following: a. M -Bloc Mold and Moisture Resistant by American Gypsum. b. M2Tech Gypsum Board by Certainteed. C. DensArmor Plus by Georgia-Pacific. d. Gold Bond Brand XP Gypsum Board by National Gypsum. C. Sheetrock Brand Mold Tough Gypsum Panel by United States Gypsum. D. Fire Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396, Type X 1. Thickness: 5/8 inch 2. Length, Long Edges, Cut: Maximum permissible lengths, edges tapered, ends square cut. 3. Provide one of the following products: a. FireBloc Type X by American Gypsum. b. CertainTeed Type X Gypsum Board by Certainteed. C. ToughRock Fireguard X by Georgia-Pacific. d. Gold Bond Fire Shield by National Gypsum. e. Sheetrock Firecode X Gypsum Panel by United States Gypsum. E. Water and Fire Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396, Type X 1. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 2. Length, Long Edges, Cut: Maximum permissible lengths, edges tapered, ends square cut. 3. Core: Non-combustible fire-resistant and mold resistant core. 4. Mold Resistance: Score of 10 in accordance with ASTM D3273/3274. 5. Provide one of the following: a. M -Bloc Mold Resistant Type C by American Gypsum. b. Gold Bond Brand XP Fire -Shield C Gypsum Board, by National Gypsum. C. Sheetrock Mold Tough Firecode Type X Gypsum Panel, by United States Gypsum. d. ToughRock Fireguard X Mold -Guard Gypsum Board by Georgia Pacific. e. M2Tech Type X Gypsum Board or Diamondback Glasroc Tile Backer Type X by CertainTeed. F. Abuse Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396, Type X. 1. Thickness: As shown on drawings. 2. Length, Long Edges, Cut: Maximum permissible length, edges tapered, ends cut square. 3. Core: Enhanced and mold resistant gypsum core. 4. Mold Resistance: Score of 10 in accordance with ASTM 3273/3274. 5. Surface Abrasion: Meets or exceeds ASTM C 1629, Classification Level 1. 6. Surface Indentation: Meets or exceeds ASTM C 1629, Classification Level 1. 7. Soft -Body Impact: Meets or exceeds ASTM C 1629, Classification Level 1. 8. Provide one of the following products: a. M -Bloc AR Type X by American Gypsum. b. SHEETROCK Brand Abuse Resistant Firecode X Gypsum Panel by USG. C. Gold Bond Brand Hi -Abuse XP Fire -Shield by National Gypsum. d. AirRenew Extreme Abuse Type X Gypsum Board by CertainTeed. e. ToughRock Fireguard X Abuse Resistant Gypsum Board by Georgia-Pacific. G. Abuse and Water Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396, Type X. 1. Thickness: As shown on drawings. 2. Length, Long Edges, Cut: Maximum permissible length, edges tapered, ends cut square. 3. Core: Enhanced and mold resistant gypsum core. 4. Mold Resistance: Score of 10 in accordance with ASTM 3273/3274. 5. Surface Abrasion: Meets or exceeds ASTM C 1629, Classification Level 1. 6. Surfact Indentation: Meets or exceeds ASTM C 1629, Classification Level 1. 7. Soft -Body Impact: Meets or exceeds ASTM C 1629, Classification Level 1. 09250-5 Provide one of the following products: a. M -Bloc AR Type X by American Gypsum. b. ToughRock Fireguard X Abuse Resistant Gypsum Board by Georgia-Pacific. C. Gold Bond Brand Hi -Abuse XP Fire -Shield by National Gypsum. d. AirRenew Extreme Abuse Type X Gypsum Board by CertainTeed. e. SHEETROCK Brand Mold Tough® AR Firecode® X Panels by USG. H. Gypsum Board Fasteners: 1. Metal Framing: ASTM C 954 and C 1002, Type S-12 bugle head, corrosion -resistant self -drilling self - tapping steel screws. a. One Layer 1/2 Inch: 1 inch. b. One Layer 5/8 Inch: 1-1/8 inch. C. Two Layers: 5/8 Inch: 1-7/8 inch. 2. Wood Furring: ASTM C 1002, 1-1/4 inch, Type W bugle head, corrosion -resistant self -drilling steel screws. I. Gypsum Board Accessories: 1. Corner Beads: Sheetrock Brand No. 104 Dur -A -Bead galvanized steel corner bead by United States Gypsum. 2. Edge Trim: Galvanized steel casing. a. No. 200-B, L shape by United States Gypsum for tight abutment at edges. b. No. 200-A, J shape by United States Gypsum at other locations. 3. Control Joint Accessory Piece: a. No. 093 roll -formed zinc by C1arkDietrich. 4. Vertical Movement Joint Trim: a. No DRMZ-625-200 aluminum Z shape trim by Fry Reglet. 5. Adhesive: a. Commercial Adhesive complying with ASTM C 557. 6. Acoustical Insulation: a. Unfaced fiberglass batts specified in Section 07210. 7. Firestopping: a. Specified in Section 07840 for penetrations of fire -resistive rated gypsum board. 2.4 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475. B. Joint Tape: 1. Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper tape. 2. Gypsum Sheathing Board: 10/10 grid glass mesh tape. 3. Backer Panels: a. Glass -Mat Backer Material: 10/10 grid glass mesh tape. C. Joint Compound 1. Interior Gypsum Wallboard: a. Sheetrock Brand Ready -Mixed Lightweight All -Purpose Joint Compound with Dust Control, by United States Gypsum. b. ProForm Lite Ready Mix Joint Compound with Dust -Tech by National Gypsum. 2. Backer Panels: a. Glass -Mat Backer Materials: Use setting -type taping compound as recommended by backer panel manufacturer and that is rated 10 when tested in accordance with ASTM D 3273 and evaluated in accordance with ASTM D 3274. 2.5 GYPSUM SHEATHING BOARD A. ASTM C 1396 and ASTM C 1177; water resistant gypsum core surfaced on face and back with inorganic glass fiber mats; thickness shown on the Drawings, maximum permissible lengths; ends square cut. Provide one of the following products: 1. G1asRoc Brand Sheathing as manufactured by CertainTeed. 2. Dens -Glass Gold gypsum sheathing as manufactured by Georgia-Pacific. 09250-6 3. eXP Sheathing by National Gypsum. 4. GreenGlass sheathing by Temple-Inland. 5. SecureRock by United States Gypsum. B. Sheathing Board Fasteners: ASTM C 954 and ASTM C 1002, 1 inch length for 1/2 inch sheathing board and 1-1/4 inch length for 5/8inch thick sheathing board, Type S-12 bugle head, corrosion -resistant self -drilling steel screws. 2.6 BACKER MATERIALS A. Provide cementitious backing materials as follows where indicated to receive cement board, cement backer board, or cementitious backer board. 1. Fiber Cement Backing Board: Hardibacker by James Hardie Building Products, Mission Viejo, CA (888) 542-7343. 2. Thickness as indicated. a. Hardibacker 250, 1/4". b. Hardibacker 500, 1/2". C. Other as noted on Drawings. B. Glass -Mat Backer Materials: Provide glass -mat moisture resistant gypsum core backer materials complying with ASTM C 1178. Glass -Mat Backer Material shall score a rating of 10 when tested according to ASTM D 3273. Thickness as shown on the Drawings. Provide Type X where required as shown on Drawings. Provide one of the following products: 1. G1asRoc Tilebacker by Certainteed. 2. DensShield Tile Backer by Georgia Pacific. 3. GreenGlass Tile Backer by Temple-Inland. 4. Gold Bond e2XP Tile Backer by National Gypsum. C. Provide fiberglass matt faced high density polyiso board as follows as option to where indicated to receive glass - mat backer material behind tile. 1. Waterproof Tile Backer Board: GoBoard by Johns Manville, Denver, CO (303) 978-2000. 2. Thickness as indicated on drawings. 2.7 TEXTURE FINISHES A. Primer: As recommended by textured finish manufacturer. B. Provide textured finish as specified in Publication SA 933 of the United States Gypsum Co. (USG), or equivalent by other wallboard manufacturers. 1. Vision Center: Medium knock -down pattern PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine existing conditions and adjacent areas where products will be installed and verify that conditions conform to product manufacturer's requirements. Verify that building framing components are ready to receive Work. Verify that rough -in utilities are in-place and located where required. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Examine panels to assure they are dry and free of moisture and mold damage as evidenced by discoloration, sagging, irregular shape, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination, and discoloration. C. Beginning of erection and installation indicates acceptance of existing conditions. 3.2 INTERFACE WITH OTHER WORK A. Coordinate erection of studs with hollow metal door and window frames, sliding window, and overhead coiling door frames. 09250-7 B. Coordinate installation of anchors, supports, and blocking for mechanical, electrical, and building accessory items installed within framing. 3.3 INSTALLATION - STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL A. Installation Standards: Comply with ASTM C 754, and ASTM C 840 requirements that apply to framing installation and with further details and instruction by gypsum board manufacturer's written construction guidelines. B. Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing at terminations in gypsum board assemblies to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction. Comply, if none available, with United States Gypsum's "Gypsum Construction Handbook." 3.4 INSTALLATION - PARTITION FRAMING A. Install studs and fasteners in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions, ASTM C 754, GA -216, and GA -600. B. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies. C. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non -load-bearing steel framing members. Frame both sides of joints independently. D. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction. E. Metal Stud Spacing: Unless otherwise noted on Drawings, provide interior framing at maximum spacing specified herein at 2.2C. Provide spacing of 16 inches on center maximum for walls to receive ceramic tile. F. Align stud web openings horizontally. G. Splice studs with minimum 8 inch nested lap, fasten each stud flange with minimum two screws. H. Construct corners using minimum three studs. I. Place studs as indicated on Drawings, minimum 2 inches from abutting walls. J. Install headers and jambs at partition openings using load-bearing C-shaped studs as noted on Drawings and as specified in Section 05400. K. Install framing between studs for attachment of mechanical and electrical items. L. Install intermediate studs above and below openings to match wall stud spacing. M. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Refer to Drawings for indication of partitions extending to finished ceiling only and for partitions extending through ceiling to building structure above. N. Maintain clearance under structural members to avoid deflection transfer to studs. 1. Where indicated, construct partition to accommodate vertical deflection. 2. Install optional products specified in Part 2 above in accordance with manufacturer's printed instruction. a. Install clip with step bushing in center of slotted hole. b. Use a minimum of two fasteners per clip leg to connect clip to structure and partition framing. C. Attach clip to each stud by screwing through the center of each step bushing. O. Fasten studs adjacent to door and window frames, partition intersections, and corners to top and bottom runner flanges in double -stud fashion with metal lock fastener tools. 1. Securely fasten studs to jamb and head anchor clips of door and borrowed -light frames. 2. Place horizontally a cut -to -length section of runner with web -flange bend at each end, fasten with minimum one screw per flange. 3. Position a cut -to -length stud (extending to top runner) at vertical panel joints over door frame header. 09250-8 P. Fire -Resistance -Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire -resistance -rated assembly indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure. Q. Lateral Bracing for Metal Studs: 1. In metal stud partitions and bulkheads where length of metal studs is over 8 feet, install lateral bracing using one of the following methods: a. Install 1-1/2 inch cold -formed channel through stud web holes and screw attach in place with clip angles. Lap channels by nesting one inside the other to a depth of at least 8 inches and wire tie together. b. Install optional products specified in Part 2 above in accordance with the manufacturers printed instructions. C. Install field -cut runner for solid bridging at each end of wall, adjacent to wall openings, and 10 feet on center maximum. Install 1-1/2 inch wide, 20 (30 mil) gage strap bracing on both sides of stud. Fasten strap bracing to each solid bridging runner section with four screws. 2. Gypsum Board Partitions: Space lateral bracing at the following intervals: a. Partitions sheathed with gypsum board full height, each side: Provide bracing at mid -height. b. Partitions sheathed with gypsum board partial height (one or both sides): Provide bracing at 48 -inches on center for unsheathed height of partition. 3. Wire Mesh Partitions: Space lateral bracing at the following intervals: a. Stud Length Greater Than 8 Feet: Provide bracing at 60 -inches on center. R. Install braced framing of steel stud framing as indicated on Drawings. Use only screw attachments. S. Blocking: Screw attach wood blocking between studs. Install blocking for support of plumbing fixtures, toilet partitions, wall cabinets, toilet accessories and hardware. T. Framing Fastening: Fasten framing in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions and schedule below, unless indicated otherwise on Drawings. Connection Fastener Floor Track to Concrete 1 - Pin at 32 inches on center Partition Stud to Floor Track 1 - Screw each side at each flange Stud Brace Web to Stud Web 2 - Screws Plates and Straps to Studs 2 - Screws Stud Web to Stud Web 2 - Screws Stud Brace Web to Attachment Angle 2 - Screws Lateral Bracing to Partition Stud Using Clip Angles 2 - Screws to stud and 2 - Screws to cold rolled channel Runner to Header 1 - Screw at 16 inches on center, maximum 6 inches from each end 3.5 INSTALLATION - SUSPENDED CEILING A. Unless otherwise shown, install suspended ceilings in accordance with the following requirements. B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building structure as follows: 1. Install carrying channels 4 feet on center with hanger wire spaced a max of 4 feet on center along carrying channels. Attach furring channels spaced 16 inches on center perpendicular to carrying channels with double strand of saddle tied tie wire or furring channel clips. Apply 1/2 inch gypsum board with its long dimension at right angles to the furring channels. Attach gypsum board with 1 inch self drilling drywall screws 12 inches on center in the field of the board 8 or 12 inches on center at butt joints, located not more than 1/2 inches from edges. 2. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or ceiling suspension system. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. 3. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacing that interferes with the location of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards. 09250-9 4. Secure wire hangers by looping and wire -tying, either directly to structures or to inserts, eyescrews, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or otherwise fail. 5. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs. 6. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members. 7. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit. C. Installation Tolerances: Install steel framing components for suspended ceilings so members for panel attachment are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet measured lengthwise on each member and transversely between parallel members. D. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement. 3.6 INSTALLATION - FURRING A. Furring Channels: 1. Attach vertically spaced at maximum 16 inches on center, to masonry and concrete surfaces with hammer set or powder driven fasteners staggered 24 inches on center on opposite flanges. 2. Nest channels 8 inches at splices and anchor with 2 fasteners in each wing. B. Wall Furring: 1. Secure top and bottom runners to structure. 2. Space metal studs at maximum 16 inches on center. 3. Furring for Fire Rating: Install metal furring as required for fire resistance ratings indicated on Drawings, and to GA -600 requirements. 3.7 INSTALLATION - ACOUSTICAL INSULATION A. Place acoustical insulation in partitions tight within spaces, around cut openings, behind and around electrical and mechanical items within or behind partitions, and tight to items passing through partitions as specified in Section 07210 where shown on Drawings. 3.8 INSTALLATION - GYPSUM BOARD A. Install gypsum board in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions, ASTM C 840, GA -216, and GA - 600. 1. Use water resistant gypsum board at wet areas including walls and ceiling in toilet rooms, janitor closets, and food prep areas as applicable and where shown. 2. Use fire resistant gypsum board at locations of fire -resistive rated assemblies indicated on Drawings. 3. Use water and fire resistant gypsum board at locations of fire -resistive rated assemblies where water resistant gypsum board is specified. 4. Use standard gypsum board at locations not indicated to be fire resistant or water resistant type. B. Use proper dust control tools and methods when scoring, breaking, and otherwise handling gypsum board. C. Where applicable, install ceiling panels before the installation of wall panels. D. Erect single layer gypsum board in most economical direction in accordance with ASTM C 840, with attachment to firm bearing surfaces over framing members. Do not align panel joints with edges of openings. E. Double Layer Applications: Secure second layer to first with screws; apply second layer with screws, staggering joints with those of first layer. Use adhesive only to hold second layer until screwed in place. Use fire rated gypsum backing board for fire rated partitions. F. Treat cut edges, holes, fastener heads, and joints, including those at angle intersections, in water resistant gypsum board and exterior gypsum soffit board with specified joint compound. Treat prior to installation. 09250-10 G. Place gypsum panels over supporting framing members with panel ends aligning and parallel with framing members. Leave bottom edge spacing above floor in accordance with GA -216. H. Install fasteners spaced and located in accordance with GA -216 or ASTM C840. 3.9 INSTALLATION - GYPSUM SHEATHING A. Install gypsum board sheathing in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions, GA -216 and GA -600. B. Erect single layer gypsum board horizontally with attachment to firm bearing. C. Place edge trim where gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials. Use longest practical length. D. Using screws, attach panels in place at maximum 12 inches on center, perimeter and field, to supporting framing. E. Protect exposed gypsum core at perimeter edges and penetrations by covering core with metal trim. 3.10 INSTALLATION - BACKER MATERIALS A. Install glass -mat backer materials where indicated to receive glass -mat backer material. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.11 INSTALLATION - JOINT TREATMENT A. Install joint treatment in accordance with GA -216. B. Install corner bead, trim, and casing in accordance with GA -216. C. Install control joints full height of partition with 1/2 inch gap between board edges and between studs. Control joints shall be installed in accordance with the gypsum manufacturer's recommended guidelines for control joints or the Gypsum Association GA -234 for control joint in fire rated systems. Apply sealant at base of joint and control joint accessory piece at face. Install control joints at the following locations: 1. Where a wall or partition runs in an uninterrupted straight plane exceeding 30 linear feet. 2. At pairs of doors, install vertical control joint at each jamb. At single doors, install control joint at latch side of jamb. 3.12 FINISH A. Apply gypsum board finish in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions and GA -214 Finish Levels. B. Provide gypsum board finish levels at locations as follows: 1. Level 0 (GA -214): No taping, finishing, or accessories necessary. a. Exposed surfaces above 12 ft high in Cart Storage Area. 2. Level 1 (GA -214): Joints and interior angles have tape embedment set in joint compound. Surface free of excess joint compound. Tool Marks and ridges are acceptable. a. Areas above ceilings where required by drawings. b. Concealed areas. C. Interior exposed gypsum surfaces not indicated to be painted. 3. Level 3 (GA -214): Joints and interior angles have tape embedded in joint compound and one additional coat of joint compound applied over all joints and interior angles and two separate coats of joint compound are applied over joints, angles, fastener heads, and accessories. Surface smooth and free of tool marks and ridges. a. Interior gypsum surfaces indicated to be painted. C. Textured Coating. 1. Apply textured coating to gypsum board surfaces as scheduled on the drawings. a. Surface Preparation and Primer: Prepare and apply primer to gypsum panels and other surfaces receiving texture finishes. Apply primer to surfaces that are clean, dry, and smooth. 09250-11 b. Texture Finish Application: Mix and apply finish using powered spray equipment, to produce a uniform texture free of starved spots or other evidence of thin application or of application patterns. C. Prevent texture finishes from coming into contact with surfaces not indicated to receive texture finish by covering them with masking agents, polyethylene film, or other means. If, despite these precautions, texture finishes contact these surfaces, immediately remove droppings and overspray to prevent damage according to texture -finish manufacturer's written recommendations. 3.13 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect metal framing erection, placement, spacing, fasteners, and connections to building. B. Inspect gypsum board installation, fastener type, spacing, and finish level. C. Inspect installation of firestopping penetrations of fire -restive rated partitions and at voids between top of partition and building structure. D. Correct deficiencies in Work which inspection indicates are not in compliance with Contract Documents. 3.14 PROTECTION A. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and promptly remove from floors and other non -drywall surfaces. B. Protect installed interior non load-bearing steel stud partition framing, gypsum board, backer materials, and gypsum sheathing from damage until Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 09250-12 UniSpec II - Store Planning 062918 SECTION 09511 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Suspended metal grid ceiling system. 2. Acoustical panels. 3. Perimeter trim. 4. Column trim. 5. Fire rated assembly. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01351 - Regulatory Compliance: Removal and recycling of acoustical ceiling tile. 2. Section 13900 - Fire Suppression: Sprinkler heads in ceiling system. 3. Section 15800 - Air Distribution: Air diffusion devices in ceiling system. 4. Section 16500 - Lighting: Light fixtures attached to ceiling system. 1.2 REFERENCES A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are reference within the text by these basic designations only. B. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. ASTM C 635 - Specification for Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay -in Panel Ceilings. 2. ASTM C 636 - Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay -in Panels. 3. ASTM E 84 - Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 4. ASTM E 1264 - Acoustical Ceiling Products. 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Design Requirements: 1. Rigidly secure acoustical ceiling system including integral mechanical and electrical components with maximum deflection of 1/360. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Section 01600 - Product Requirements: Transport, handle, store, and protect products. B. Deliver acoustical units in manufacturer's original unopened containers with brand name and type clearly marked. C. Store under cover in dry, watertight conditions. D. Prior to installation, store acoustical units for 24 hours minimum at same temperature and relative humidity as space where Work will be installed. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: Maintain uniform temperature range of 60-85 degrees F, and humidity of no more than 70 percent relative humidity prior to, during, and after installation. 09511-1 PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Provide products by the following manufacturers as specified: 1. Armstrong World Industries Incorporated, Lancaster, PA (800) 448-1405. 2. CertainTeed Ceilings, Valley Forge, PA (800) 233-8990. 3. Chicago Metallic Corporation, Chicago, IL (800) 323-7164. 4. Gold Bond Building Products, National Gypsum Company, Charlotte, NC (704) 365-7300. 5. USG Interiors, Chicago, IL (800) 950-3839. 2.2 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Surface Burning Characteristics in Accordance with ASTM E 84 for Class A finish: 1. Flame Spread: Less than 25. 2. Smoke Density: Less than 50. B. Food Serving and Preparation Areas where Scheduled: 1. United States Department of Agriculture (USDA): Approved for incidental food contact. 2.3 SUSPENSION SYSTEM A. Provide suspension system specified herein for the corresponding ACT system as applicable as shown on the drawings. Provide suspension system compatible with acoustical panels selected. B. Grid: ASTM C635, intermediate duty, steel exposed T; nominal 1 inch width; stab -in connections. C. Accessories: Stabilizer bars, clips, and splices. D. Grid Finish: White, unless noted otherwise. E. Support System: Hot or cold rolled steel channels; galvanized hanger wire, minimum 12 gage. F. Edge Moldings: Metal channel with exposed flange to match suspension system. G. Hold -Down Clips: Heavy Duty Clip (Vision Center Vestibule): Armstrong Model EHDC58 hold-down clip. H. ACT -3; Non Fire -Rated Suspension System: Provide one of the following: 1. Prelude 15/16 inch, XL #7300 Exposed Tee System, by Armstrong. 2. Classic Stab System, 15/16 inch, #C 12-12-15, by CertainTeed. 3. 1200 System, by Chicago Metallic. 4. Donn DX System, by USG. I. Substitutions: Not Permitted. 2.4 ACOUSTICAL LAY -IN PANELS: A. Provide acoustical panels specified herein for the corresponding ACT system as applicable as shown on the drawings. B. ACT -3: Non fire -rated panels, min. 1.00 pounds per square foot, angled tegular lay -in edge, factory -applied vinyl latex paint, perforated, and scored, size as shown. Provide one of the following 1. Provide one of the following 24 in. x 48 in. panels for standard installations: a. Cortega Second Look II, #2767 White, by Armstrong. b. Baroque Customline Safetone Class A, BQCL-224, by CertainTeed. C. Radar Illusion, Two/24, #2742 White, by USG. 2. Where required for existing conditions, provide 24 in. x 24 in. panels by the same manufacturer and series. 09511-2 C. Substitutions: Comply with the requirements of Section Ol 600. 2.5 ACCESSORIES A. Flexible curved angle trim for Sales Area Columns. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION/DEMOLITION A. Examine surfaces and adjacent areas where products will be installed and verify that surfaces conform to product manufacturer's requirements for substrate conditions. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Coordinate extension of existing grid ceiling system if existing system is to remain. C. Clean or paint existing grid as shown on Drawings prior to removal of "old" panels. Refer to Section 09900. D. Remove existing ceiling panels as shown on Drawings. Store removed panels for recycling as specified in Section 01351. 1. If ceiling batt insulation is present, remove, retain and re -install batts above new ceiling panels. E. In new ceiling grid installation, verify that layout of hangers will not interfere with other Work. F. Beginning of installation indicates acceptance of existing conditions. 3.2 INSTALLATION — GENERAL A. Interface with Other Work: 1. Do not install acoustical ceilings until building is enclosed, heating is provided, dust generating activities have terminated, and overhead work is completed, tested, and approved. 2. Schedule installation of acoustic units after interior wet work is completed. 3. Install after major above ceiling work is complete. 4. Coordinate location of hangers with other Work. B. Site Tolerances: 1. Variation from Flat and Level Surface: 1/8 inch in 12 feet. 3.3 INSTALLATION - SUSPENSION SYSTEM A. Install system in accordance with ASTM C636 and manufacturer's published instructions. B. Rigidly secure acoustical ceiling system including integral mechanical and electrical components with maximum deflection of 1/360. C. If metal deck is not supplied with hanger tabs, coordinate installation of hanger clips during steel deck erection. Provide additional hangers and inserts as required. D. Hang system independent of walls, columns, ducts, pipes and conduit. Where carrying members are spliced, avoid visible displacement of face plane of adjacent members. Where ducts or other equipment prevent regular spacing of hangers, reinforce nearest affected hangers and related carrying channels to span extra distance. E. Locate system on room axis to a balanced grid design with edge units no less than 50 percent of acoustical panel size where Reflected Ceiling Plan not shown on Drawings. Match direction of existing ceiling grid unless directed otherwise by the Drawings. 09511-3 F. Do not support components on main runners or cross runners if weight causes total dead load to exceed deflection capability. Do not eccentrically load system, or produce rotation of runners. G. Install edge molding at intersection of ceiling and vertical surfaces using longest practical lengths. Miter corners. Provide edge moldings at junctions with other interruptions. Secure at 16 inches on center. H. Rivet cross tee's at 4 feet on center to edge mold. 3.4 INSTALLATION - ACOUSTICAL PANELS A. Fit acoustic units in place free from damaged edges or other defects. Install acoustic units level, in uniform plane, and free from twist, warp, and dents. B. Install heavy duty hold-down clips to retain panels tight to grid system at each ceiling acoustical panel at Vision Center Vestibule. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect acoustical panel placement, ceiling grid suspension system installation and connection to structure. B. Correct deficiencies in Work which inspection indicates are not in compliance with contract requirements. 3.6 CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical ceilings including trim, edge moldings, and suspension system members END OF SECTION 09511-4 UniSpec II - Store Planning 032720 SECTION 09650 - RESILIENT FLOORING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Contractor provided resilient tile and adhesive. 2. Contractor provided resilient flooring accessories. 3. Preparation of Contraction/Construction Joints under floor finishes. 4. Contractor installation of resilient flooring and accessories. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01351 - Regulatory Compliance: a. Removal and recycling of existing resilient flooring. b. Removal and recycling are responsibility of General Contractor. References to Owner's Preferred Flooring Contractor are not applicable. C. Disposal and removal of construction and universal waste. d. Work practice control methods for airborne respirable dust. 2. Section 02023 — Selective Site Demolition: Requirements for dust control during preparation of existing slabs to receive resilient flooring. 3. Section 09655 - Resilient Base and Accessories: Resilient flooring base. 1.2 REFERENCES A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced within the text by these basic designations only. B. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. ASTM F 710 — Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring. 2. ASTM F 1869 — Standard Test Method for Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission Rate of Concrete Subfloor Using Anhydrous Calcium Chloride. 3. ASTM F 2170 — Standard Test Method for Determining Relative Humidity in Concrete Floor Slabs Using in situ Probes. C. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA): 1. OSHA 01926.1153 Respirable Crystalline Silica. 1.3 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Minimize dust emissions and provide equipment that suppresses dust. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Resilient Flooring Installer Qualifications: 1. Resilient Flooring Installation Contractor shall have at least five years' experience in installation of resilient flooring similar to that required for this Project. 2. Each installer shall be trained or certified by manufacturer of adhesive, if specified, for installation techniques required. 09650-1 B. Requirements for PVC/LVT Flooring ASTM F 1700 — Minimum tested criteria for solid vinyl floor tiles that are monolithic, surface decorated, or printed, and protected by a clear wear layer. Class III Construction — Printed Film minimum .50 mm thickness. Type B Surface Texture — Embossed. • Squareness (ASTM F 2055) — When measured by dial gauge, does not exceed .254 mm. • Residual Indentation (ASTM F 1914) — Measured after one hour, <8%. • Flexibility (ASTM F 13 7) — When tested on a 1" mandrel, no cracks or breaks. • Dimensional Stability (ASTM F 2199) — When tested after 6 hours at 180 degrees F, does not exceed .5 mm change in dimension or shape. • Chemical Resistance (ASTM F 925) — When chemical compositions are applied, no more than a slight change in surface dulling, attack, or stain. • Light Resistance (ASTM F 1515) — After 400 hours of exposure, no more color change than AE < 8. • Heat Resistance (ASTM F 1514) — After 7 days at 158 degrees F, no more color change than AE < 8. • Static Load Capacity ASTM F 970 — Minimum 250 psi. SAFETY STANDARDS - Standards regulating a healthful and safe place for employees and customers. • Fire Test Data/Smoke Density (ASTM E 662) — all generate <450. • Fire Test Data/Flame Spread (ASTM E 648) — Class 1. • Slip Resistance/Coefficient of Friction ASTM D 2047 — all meet industry standard of <0.5. PERFORMANCE AND AESTHETICS — Characteristics selected by Owner affecting wear and appearance. • Overall Thickness (ASTM F 386) — Minimum 2.5 mm. • Wear Layer Thickness (ASTM F 410) — Minimum 20 mil. • Edge Profile — Micro -bevel. • Factory Finish - PUR. • Plank Size — 6-7 in. width, 48 in. length. • Warranty — Minimum 15 years. • Adhesive Emissions -<10 VOC. • Embossment Depth - Minimal. ENVIRONMENTAL STANDARDS - Standards addressing global welfare, environment, building comfort. • Recyclability —Qualified and suitable for recycling. • LEED v4 and other LEED Credits —Certified as Low Emitting Materials, Building and Environmental Product Declaration (EPD), Impact Reduction, and Producer Responsibility for Sourcing of Raw Materials as well as varying other LEED contributions. C. Environmental Requirements. 1. Limit and control all noise, dust and moisture created by concrete surface preparation work to meet all local, state, and Federal ordinances, codes and laws. 2. Limit and control damage from dust caused by slab surface preparation. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Walmart Floor Finish Plan: Issued to Contractor by Walmart prior to possession date. B. Product Packaging: Resilient flooring and accessories will be packaged in manufacturer's standard cartons. C. Storage: 1. Store materials in a secure area to prevent loss due to theft or damage. 2. Store flooring on original pallets with no multiple stacking of pallets. 3. Store resilient flooring and adhesives indoors and protect from excessive cold, heat, temperature fluctuations, humidity, and moisture penetration. 4. Do not allow adhesive to freeze. 5. Storage Conditions: a. Store flooring materials in environment between 65 and 85 degrees for three days prior to installation to achieve temperature stability. 1) Coordinate location of storage with Walmart Construction Manager. b. Maintain adhesives at a minimum temperature of 65 degrees F for 48 hours prior to installation. 09650-2 D. Transport, handle, store, and protect products in compliance with the requirements of Section 01600 and manufacturer's recommendations. 1.6 SCHEDULING A. Schedule resilient flooring installation to prevent damage to resilient flooring and to prevent movement of construction materials over area of resilient flooring. B. Work shall begin no earlier than 15 minutes before approved "start time" and shall finish within one hour after approved completion time. Approved time is determined by the Walmart Construction Manager. C. All work shall be done in association with approved interruption of the Store's normal operations. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 FLOORING SUPPLIERS A. PVC/LVT Resilient Flooring: The Matworks Company, LLC, Beltsville, MD; Contact: Derrick Pursoo, (301) 837- 1202, dpursoo@thematworks.com. B. PVC/LVT to Concrete Transition Strip and Fasteners: Haines, Jones & Cadbury, Inc., Contact: Customer Service, (800) 459-7099, fax (479) 756-8998, Email: WMT@hjcinc.com. C. Vinyl Composition Tile (VCT) Flooring: 1. Armstrong Flooring, Inc., Kyle Stokley, Strategic Account Manager, (512) 590-9335, kjstokley@armstrongflooring.com. Armstrong Flooring as supplied by Hamix Corp. (d/b/a/ Linron Company), Houston, TX (713) 802-9137, shannon@linron.com or amand@linron.com for Remodels; chelsea@linron.com for Special Projects. D. PVC/LVT/VCT Resilient Flooring Adhesive: Hamix Corp. (d/b/a/ Linron Company), Houston, TX, (713) 802- 9137, shannonnlinron.com or amandana linron.com.] 2.2 FLOORING PRODUCTS A. Vinyl Composition Tile (VCT): ASTM F 1066, Class 1, solid -color tile or Class 2, through -pattern tile, non - asbestos formulated, 0.125 inch thick, 12 by 12 inches square, Standard EXCELON Imperial Texture or Safety Zone slip resistant by Armstrong unless otherwise specified. Pattern and color numbers listed below will be furnished as applicable on the drawings. 1. VCT -9 (White): One of the following: a. Armstrong 51899. b. Armstrong 51530. C. Armstrong 51989. 2. VCT -20 (Gray): Armstrong Z1904, Sterling 3. VCT Adhesive: a. Schonox VMI 91 Acrylic Adhesive for Resilient Flooring, by Schonox. B. PVC Plank Flooring: 1. PVC -1 (Woodgrain): Woodgrain Plank Flooring by Matworks. Virgin PVC composition, 7" x 48" x 1/8" strips. 2. PVC Adhesive: Schonox VMI 91 Acrylic Adhesive for Resilient Flooring, by Schonox. 3. PVC -to -Concrete Transition Strip: 2" x 1/8" extruded aluminum transition strip, beveled one edge at 10 degrees, predrilled for fasteners at not more than 12"on center. Transition strip will be one of the following: a. No. 8132, by National Guard Products, Inc. b. 2" CTC Reducer, by Ceramic Tool Co. 4. Transition Strip Fasteners: Hilti KWIK CON II+, 1/4" x 1-3/4" TFH (1/4" x 1-3/4" Torq Flathead). 09650-3 C. LVT Plank Flooring: 1. LVT-1 (Woodgrain): D44, by Matworks. 2. LVT Adhesive: Schonox VMI 91 Acrylic Adhesive for Resilient Flooring, by Schonox. 3. LVT-to-Concrete Transition Strip: 2" x 1/8" extruded aluminum transition strip, beveled one edge at 10 degrees, predrilled for fasteners at not more than 12"on center. Owner's Supplier will furnish one of the following: d. No. 8132, by National Guard Products, Inc. e. 2" CTC Reducer, by Ceramic Tool Co. 4. Transition Strip Fasteners: Hilti KWIK CON II+, 1/4" x 1-3/4" TFH (1/4" x 1-3/4" Torq Flathead). 2.3 CONTRACTOR PROVIDED ACCESSORIES A. PVC/VCT Flooring to Concrete Transition Strip at Vision Center 2.0: Extruded aluminum transition strip, stepped underside profile. Provide the following or equivalent as approved: 1. RT264 Profile by Gradus, Silver Anodized finish. B. Subfloor Filler (Cementitious Based Underlayment): 1. Schonox SL, by HPS North America, Inc. (256) 246-0345. C. Contraction/Construction Joint Filler: 1. Epolith P or G, two-part, 100% solids, flexible epoxy joint filler, by BASF Building Systems, (800) 433- 9517. D. Primers: Types as suitable for specific material and substrates encountered. Primer VOC shall be not greater than 50 g/L. 2.4 EQUIPMENT A. Dust extraction system and pre -separator for cleaning slab after surface preparation. 1. Heavy-duty industrial HEPA filtration vacuum system, suitable for extracting and containing large quantities of fine concrete dust (minimum 350CFM air flow) in conjunction with manufacturer recommended pre - separator. 2. Provide one of the following: a. 86D, by HTC (877) 482-8700 www.htc-america.com. b. T8600, by Ermator LLC (855) 736-2869 www.ermatorusa.com. C. Bull 1250, by SASE Company, Inc. (800) 522-2606 www.sasecompany.com. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine surfaces and adjacent areas where products will be installed and verify that surfaces conform to the following requirements for substrate conditions. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. Verify concrete floors are free of excessive moisture, hydrostatic pressure, alkalinity, scale, and dusting. 2. Verify concrete floors are plane to tolerances specified in Division 3 specifications. 3. Verify concrete floors are free from oil, grease, dust, construction debris, loose or scaly paints or coatings, incompatible curing or sealing compounds, and other substances that may impair adhesion of adhesive and finish materials. 4. Verify that storage conditions specified in Part 1 have been met. B. On remodel installations evaluate existing materials for suitability as a substrate. C. Beginning of installation indicates acceptance of substrate conditions. 09650-4 3.2 PREPARATION — GENERAL A. The Contractor must have the Final Floor Finish Plan and the schedule of moving the gondolas and verify with Walmart Construction Manager, Store Manager, and Store Planning Field Project Manager. Contact Store Manager 48 hours prior to any work affecting their area. B. Cover and protect merchandise and racking to prevent damage or contamination of stored products. Provide dust drapes as required to protect merchandise from dust or debris. C. Comply with the requirements of Section 02023. D. Remove existing floor tiles as required. All demolished tile shall be disposed of or recycled as specified in Section 01351. 3.3 PREPARATION — CONCRETE SUBSTRATE A. Unless otherwise specified herein, prepare substrate according to ASTM F 710. B. Remove paint, oils, waxes, sealers and curing compounds not compatible with adhesive to be used. Do not use organic solvents or liquid adhesive removers. C. Prepare concrete substrate according to flooring manufacturer's written recommendations and as outlined below to ensure adhesion of resilient products. 1. Remove ridges, bumps, protrusions, and other irregularities. 2. Where scraping, sanding, or grinding of concrete surface is required to remove existing oil, grease, coatings, or compounds, and where sanding or grinding of concrete surface is required to remove protrusions, use proper dust control tools and methods to maintain dust emissions below the permissible level. 3. Properly prepare expansion joints and fill contraction/construction joints with joint filler or subfloor filler specified in Part 2 of this section as required. Do not seal joints in areas to receive resilient flooring using polyurea or epoxy joint filler specified for concrete slabs in other Sections. 4. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions with cementitious based underlayment and finish smooth as necessary to achieve a level, flat, hard surface. 5. Prohibit traffic until filler is cured. Thereafter, unnecessary traffic in work areas shall be kept to a minimum. 6. Vacuum slab. a. Use HEPA-rated filtration vacuum system during slab preparation. 3.4 PREINSTALLATION TESTING BY CONTRACTOR A. Bond Test: Conduct bond test of specified floor covering and specified adhesive in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions. 3.5 INSTALLATION A. Begin resilient flooring installation only when slab moisture and pH conditions are satisfactory for placement as determined from results of pre -installation testing. B. Install resilient flooring in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions at locations indicated on Walmart Floor Finish Plan. C. Open number of floor material cartons to provide quantity required to cover each area; mix pieces within single shade lot to ensure shade variations do not occur within any one area. When working with more than one lot, plan lot placement and location to minimize possible shade differences. D. Apply adhesive in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Follow adhesives open time by spreading only enough adhesive to permit installation of floor materials before initial set. Do not spread adhesive for overnight dry. 09650-5 E. PVC/LVT Plank Flooring Installation: 1. Install PVC/LVT flooring in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions. Lay flooring from side- to-side, not front -to -back, of store. 2. Install PVC/LVT plank strips with random end joint offset over entire area. Cut planks in random sizes for starter pieces and alternate the size of the starter piece to avoid a repeating joint pattern. The shortest starter piece shall be not less than 12" and the shortest end run piece shall be not less than 6". 3. Overall PVC/LVT flooring layout shall produce a complete random appearance of joint spacing with end joints staggered a minimum of 6" apart. 4. Install PVC/LVT border as shown on the drawings. VCT Flooring Installation: 1. Lay flooring from center marks established parallel to building walls. 2. Allow minimum 1/2 full size tile width at room or area perimeter. 3. Adjust tile layout as required to avoid use of units less than 1/2 tile. 4. Install tile to square grid pattern with all joints aligned. a. Install smooth surface tile in alternating grain, basket weave pattern unless indicated otherwise on Drawings. b. Install textured surface tile with all tiles in same grain direction. Grain direction shall be oriented side-to-side, parallel with front wall of building 5. Install threshold transitions at locations indicated on Final Floor Finish Plan. G. Wipe down bleed through of adhesive, if specified, during installation. H. Rolling (Adhered Flooring): Set flooring into place, thoroughly cross roll with a 100-150 pound three -sectional roller before adhesive set time expires to attain full adhesion. I. Terminate flooring at centerline of door openings where adjacent floor finish is dissimilar. Where flooring continues through door opening, continue established pattern with no interruption. J. Install transition strips at unprotected or exposed edges where flooring terminates. 1. Set metal transition strips butted to adjacent flooring. Anchor into concrete slab with specified fasteners. Drill concrete with Matched Tolerance Drill Bit for Dense Concrete by Hilti. K. Scribe flooring to walls, columns, cabinets, floor outlets, and other appurtenances to produce tight joints. L. Continue flooring under movable type partitions without interrupting floor pattern. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect resilient flooring installation, pattern, layout, and attachment to substrate. B. Correct deficiencies in Work which inspection indicates are not in compliance with Contract Documents. 3.7 CLEANING A. Remove excess adhesive from floor, base, and wall surfaces without damage. Ensure all adhesive residues are removed from tile upon completion of each night's work. B. Broom clean resilient flooring after application. C. Dispose of construction waste in accordance with the requirements of Section 01351. END OF SECTION 09650-6 UniSpec - Store Planning SECTION 09655 - RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Rubber or Vinyl Resilient Base (RB). 2. 1/4 in. Plastic Base (B). 3. 3/8 in. Plastic Base (DB). B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01600 - Product Requirements: Contractor's Product Selection Checklist. 2. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers: Sealant between bases and floor or wall surfaces. 1.2 REFERENCES A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced within the text by the basic designation only. B. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. ASTM E 84 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 2. ASTM F 710 - Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring. 3. ASTM F 1861 - Resilient Wall Base. 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Transport, handle, store, and protect products in compliance with the requirements of Section 01600. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Resilient Base: 1. Armstrong Flooring, Lancaster, PA, (888) 276-7876. 2. Flexco, Corp., Tuscumbia, AL, (800) 633-3151, 3. Johnsonite, Solon, OH, (800) 899-8916. 4. Roppe Rubber, Fostoria, OH (800) 537-9527. 5. VPI Corp., Sheboygan, WI, (800) 874-4240 B. Plastic Base: 1. Parkland Plastics, Inc., Middlebury, IN, (800) 835-4110. C. Transition Strips: 1. National Guard Products, Memphis, TN, (800) 647-7874. 2. Ceramic Tool Company, Pewaukee, WI, (800) 236-5230. 3. (Fasteners only) Hilti, (800) 879-8000. D. Adhesives: 1. Seal Bond, Spring Lake, MI, (800) 252-4144. 2. Franklin International, Columbus, OH, (800) 877-4583. 09655-1 2.2 SUPPLIERS A. Specified products may be procured from the following suppliers. 1. Haines, Jones & Cadbury. Contact: Customer Service (800) 459-7099, WMT@hjcinc.com 2. B.R. Funsten & Co, Fairfield, CA, (800) 479-5671. 3. J.J. Haines and Co., Glen Burnie, MD, (800) 922-9248. 4. T & A Supply Co., Kent, WA (800) 562-2857. 5. T & L Distributing, Houston, TX (800) 888-0601. 6. Contact specified manufacturers for additional distributors. 2.3 RESILIENT BASE A. Resilient Base: In accordance with ASTM F 1861, color integrated Type TV (vinyl), TS (rubber, vulcanized thermoset), or TP (rubber, thermoplastic); 1/8 inch thickness unless noted otherwise, approximately 4 inches high; with matching end stops and preformed corner units. Verify color prior to ordering. 1. RB5 - Metallic Gray: Johnsonite (Tarkett): No. 179 Steel, with toe. 2. Adhesive: GREENchoice Professional Cove Base Adhesive, by Franklin International. a. Water resistant type, VOC less than 50 g/1. 2.4 PLASTIC BASE A. Style B, Plas-tex Duro-Base by Parkland Plastics, Inc. 1. Model: Provide models specified below corresponding to mark number of base as shown on Drawings: a. 136: 1/4 in. x 6 in. x 96 in., Model No. PTX2131P. b. 139: 1/4 in. x 4 in. x 96 in., Model No. PTX2137P. C. DBS: 3/8 in. x 5 in. x 144 in., Model No. PTX3135. d. DB 10: 3/8 in. x 10 in. x 144 in., Model No. PTX 3133. 2. Color: Black. 3. Fasteners: Black flathead countersunk screws, length sufficient to penetrate substrate and metal stud wall framing. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Resilient Base: 1. Install base in accordance with manufacturer's requirements using manufacturer's approved adhesive. 2. Fit joints tight and vertical. Maintain minimum measurement of 18 inches between joints. Use premolded corner units. 3. Install base on solid backing. Bond tight to wall surfaces. 4. Scribe to fit door frames and other interruptions. 5. Remove excess adhesive from floor, wall surfaces and base. B. Plastic Base: 1. Fit joints tight and vertical. Maintain minimum measurement of 18 inches between joints 2. Install base on solid backing. Bond tight to wall and floor surfaces. 3. Scribe to fit door frames and other interruptions. 4. Miter and adhesively bond plastic base joints together. 5. Pre -drill plastic base and trim for attachment screws. Unless otherwise shown, attach plastic base at 24 inches on center into metal stud wall framing. 3.2 CLEANING A. Remove excess adhesive from floor, base, and wall surfaces without damage. END OF SECTION 09655-2 UniSpec - Store Planning 041020 SECTION 09900 - PAINTS AND COATINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Field applied paints and finishes for interior surfaces. 2. Repair and surface preparation of existing surfaces. 3. Application of new coatings. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01351 — Regulatory Compliance: a. Disposal and removal of hazardous construction and demolition waste. b. Work practice control methods for airborne respirable dust. 2. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers: Filler and sealant for crack repair. 1.2 REFERENCES A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced within the text by the basic designation only. B. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. ASTM C 90 - Loadbearing Concrete Masonry Units. 2. ASTM C 1324 — Standard Test Method for Examination and Analysis of Hardened Masonry Mortar. 3. ASTM D 1653 — Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Organic Coating Films (Wet Cup Method). 4. ASTM D 2244 — Calculation of Color Tolerances and Color Differences from Instrumentally Measured Color Coordinates. 5. ASTM D 2370 — Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Organic Coatings. 6. ASTM D 3273 — Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface of Interior Coatings. 7. ASTM D 3359 — Measuring Adhesion by Tape Test. 8. ASTM D 4214 — Evaluating the Degree of Chalking of Exterior Paint Films per Method A Cloth Tape Method 9. ASTM D 4262 — Test Method for pH of Chemically Cleaned or Etched Concrete Surfaces. 10. ASTM D 4263 - Test Method for Indicating Moisture in Concrete by the Plastic Sheet Method. 11. ASTM D 6677 — Test Method for Evaluating Adhesion by Knife. 12. ASTM D 6904 — Resistance to Wind -Driven Rain. 13. ASTM E 514 — Water Leakage of Masonry. C. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA): 1. OSHA 01926.1153 Respirable Crystalline Silica. D. The Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC): 1. SSPC-SP1 — Solvent Cleaning. 2. SSPC-SP3 — Power Tool Cleaning. 3. SSPC-SP15 - Commercial Grade Power Tool Cleaning. 1.3 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Minimize dust emissions and provide equipment that suppresses dust. B. Apply paint to masonry surfaces only when moisture content is within manufacturer's acceptable range as described in Part 3 herein for type of specified coating. 09900-1 C. Maintain minimum surface temperatures or ambient air temperature as follows for the specified coatings unless otherwise recommended by the manufacturer or specified in the Paint Schedule herein: 1. Alkyd, epoxy, polyurethane, and interior and exterior acrylic and latex finishes: 50 degrees F. 2. Varnish and transparent finishes: 65 degrees F. 3. All coatings: Surface temperature at least 5 degrees F above the dew point. D. Maintain maximum surface temperatures or ambient air temperatures and relative humidity as recommended by the manufacturer. E. If ambient temperatures are unacceptable, provide continuous ventilation and heating facilities to maintain temperatures above the minimum surface and air temperature specified above for 24 hours prior to, during, and 48 hours after application of finishes. F. If work area is enclosed, use fire retardant enclosure materials and indirect -fired heating equipment ventilated outside of the enclosure. G. Do not apply paint in areas where dust is being generated. Do not apply coatings in conditions that could result in overspray on vehicles or other property. H. Perform painting under lighting conditions of not less than 80 foot candles measured mid -height of the painter at substrate surface. Where artificial lighting is required, provide explosion -proof artificial lighting. I. Waste Management: 1. Store, transport, and dispose of waste in accordance with local, state and federal regulations and the requirements of Section 01351 Supplement. 2. Do not dispose of paint, containment materials, or project waste in Owner's dumpsters. 3. Do not allow dry materials to enter storm drain inlets. 4. Clear debris and waste from the site daily. 5. Use HEPA-rated filter vacuum to clean surfaces of dirt, dust and debris. 6. Obtain paint in containers of the largest size practical for each color, sheen, and type. 7. Furnish disposal containers. 8. Return reusable containers and totes to manufacturer. 9. Clean and recycle containers that cannot be returned to manufacturer. Wastewater Management 1. Collect wash wastewater and store, transport, manifest and dispose of according to local, state and federal regulations. Consult local wastewater treatment operator for direction. 2. Do not allow wash wastewater to flow from the surface cleaning processes to a storm water drain or catch basin, street, roadway, sidewalk, gutter, landscape area, or any type of storm water structure. 1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Scheduling and Coordination: 1. Schedule a conference call with the Store Manager a minimum of two weeks in advance of commencement of work. Communicate daily the sequence of work with Store Management. B. Schedule operations to avoid interference with store operations and during times agreeable to store management. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Closeout Documents: 1. Submit closeout documents in accordance with Section 01770. 2. Photographic documentation: Upon Completion, submit a completion report including at least 10 wide-angle photos taken at work stages including but not limited to the following: a. Before start of project. b. During removal and replacement of sealants as specified in Part 3 herein. C. Masonry repairs such as random cracks, mortar joints, holes, and divots. 09900-2 d. During surface preparation of concrete and metal as specified in Part 3 herein. e. During application of each coat, including spray and back roll application, as specified in Part 3 herein. f. After completion of project. g. Provide photos taken of each elevation from the same location in each work stage. Submit Manufacturer's Extended Material Performance Warranty and Contractor's Labor and Workmanship Warranty. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. VOC Content: Provide paint and coating materials that conform to Federal, State, and Local restrictions for Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC) content. 2. Toxicity/EQ: Comply with federal, state, and local toxicity and environmental quality regulations and with federal requirements on content of lead, mercury, and other heavy metals. Do not use solvents in paint products that contribute to air pollution. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Transport, handle, store, and protect products in compliance with the requirements of Section 01600. B. Verify manufacturers' national accounts purchase order procedure in order to ensure timeliness of delivery and accuracy of products. C. Paint orders shall identify the store number, location, batch number and address of project. D. Delivery of paint materials shall be in sealed original labeled containers, bearing manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot number, brand code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, and instructions for mixing and/or reducing. Notify Supplier when delivered products are nonconforming. E. Store coating materials in a location conforming to the manufacturers specified ambient conditions for storage and away from direct sunlight. Unless otherwise required by the manufacturer, maintain storage at temperature between 45 and 95 F. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Coatings shall be the products of the following manufacturers: 1. Interior Coatings: a. Sherwin Williams Company. Contact: Kevin Behm, (216) 566-1558, kevin.c.behmna,sherwin.com. b. Benjamin Moore, Contact: Andrew Theokas, (201) 747-1586, andrew.theokasgbenjaminmoore.com. C. PPG Paints, Contact: Rick Garlin, (317) 318-5800, garlin9ppg.com. B. Method of Coatings Purchase: Manufacturers may require products to be purchased and distributed from national distribution centers as a warranty condition. Verify conditions of purchase with the manufacturer selected for project. Comply with manufacturer's national accounts purchase order procedure in order to ensure integrity of product and observance of warranty. C. Products Schedule: Owner's preselected coating products are listed in the Product Schedules in Part 3 herein. 2.2 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Accessory materials not specified herein but recommended by the manufacturer or required to meet the requirements herein. 1. Paint Thinners: Type recommended by paint or coating manufacturer for paint or coating system, VOC compliant, first line commercial quality. 2. Patching Materials: As specified under Part 3 - Execution. 3. Masking. 09900-3 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine surfaces and adjacent areas where products will be applied and verify that surfaces conform to product manufacturer's requirements for substrate conditions. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Beginning of application indicates acceptance of substrate conditions. 3.2 GENERAL PREPARATION A. Contain fugitive dust and debris from contaminating surrounding property. Protect customers and associates from airborne dust and abrasive media. Establish dust containment and safety zones with caution tape or barricades prior to beginning to isolate work in areas of store operations. B. Verify that all coats in the proposed system are produced by the same manufacturer. C. Coordinate moving of merchandise and fixtures with Store Manager prior to painting in Sales areas. D. Protect other surfaces from paint and damage with protective coverings, shields, masking, etc. Maintain protective coverings throughout cleaning and painting operations. 1. Adjacent work to be protected includes but is not limited to merchandise displays, merchandise inventory, shopping carts, customer vehicles, and vegetation. 2. Remove or mask hardware, hardware accessories, machined surfaces, plates, lighting fixtures, and similar items in place and not to be painted. Reinstall removed items after completion of paint work. E. Protect the following items from water damage during pressure washing and overspray during application: 1. Automatic door sensors 2. Exterior light sensors 3. Store mounted electronic devises, switches, receptacles and security components. 4. Fire Protection sprinklers F. For any work specified herein requiring chemical strippers, use plastic, tape, or other means to protect areas that are not to be stripped. This includes prefinished metal such as gutters and downspouts, aluminum trim and storefront and glass. G. Do not schedule paint work when rain, snow, fog, or mist are present or forecasted to be present during the drying time of the coatings. H. If plants, moss, mildew, or other biological growth is present, thoroughly saturate the area with a mixture consisting of 1 quart bleach/3 quarts water, and 1 cup powdered detergent. Allow the mixture to remain on the surface until the biological growth is removed. Scrub the surface and repeat as necessary to assure complete removal. Thoroughly rinse with fresh water. I. If the manufacturer's written recommendations conflict with or do not address the unique project conditions, comply with the requirements of this specification unless otherwise directed. J. Verify product are within shelf life. Schedule application of multi-component materials prior to expiration of the pot life. K. Perform preparation and cleaning procedures as specified in this section and in accordance with paint manufacturer's and Owner's authorized representative's direction as necessary for unique project conditions. Work directed and performed in addition to that specified herein but deemed necessary by the Manufacturer's or Owner's Representatives to achieve a satisfactory substrate shall be by change order to the Contract. 09900-4 3.3 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Where scraping, chiseling, sanding, or grinding of concrete or masonry surfaces is required, use proper dust control tools and methods to maintain dust emissions below the permissible level. B. Remove visible grease and oil by solvent cleaning in accordance with SSPC-SP1. C. Where masonry restoration and repair is shown on drawings, perform repairs as specified in Section 04910. D. Protect joints to be sealed by inserting caulking backer rods at face of wall. E. Steel - Interior: 1. Remove dirt, dust, grease, oil, and other surface interference material by washing and scrubbing. 2. Remove rust and loose paint with power tools in accordance with SSPC-SP3. 3. Degloss surface with a scouring pad such as Heavy Duty Scour Pad, Non -Scratch Scour Pad, or equivalent by Scotch-Brite. 4. Feather the existing coating at transitions between the existing coating and the bare steel. F. Galvanized Steel - Interior: 1. Remove dirt, dust, grease, oil, and other surface interference material by washing and scrubbing. 2. Remove deteriorated galvanized steel, rust, and loose paint with power tools in accordance with SSPC-SP3. 3. Degloss surface with a scouring pad such as HeavDuty Scour Pad, Non -Scratch Scour Pad, or equivalent by Scotch-Brite. 4. On bare galvanizing, apply a solution of phosphoric acid and detergents designed to remove grease and oil residue to provide a clean, lightly etched surface suitable for adhesion of subsequently applied coats in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. 5. Feather the existing coating at transitions between the existing coating and the bare galvanizing. G. Wood: 1. Remove surface contamination by washing with a cleaning solution, scraping, sanding, and scrubbing to remove dirt, pollutants, mildew, deteriorated wood, and surface interference material. 2. Allow to dry and apply patching material recommended by the coating manufacturer to fill cracks, nail holes, and other imperfections. Sand the patched areas smooth after drying. 3. Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots and apply a thin coat of knot sealer recommended by the coating manufacturer before applying prime coat. 4. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dry. 5. Prime, stain, or seal wood required to be field painted immediately upon delivery to site. Prime edges, ends faces, undersides, and backsides of such wood, including cabinets and counters. 6. Seal tops, bottoms, and cut-outs with a heavy coat of sealer recommended by the coating manufacturer immediately upon delivery to the site. 7. Allow the surface to dry before applying new coatings. Prior to painting, verify dryness by testing in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and the meter and plastic sheet methods as specified in Part 3 herein H. Gypsum Board: 1. New Gypsum Board: a. Fill minor defects with filler compound. Spot prime defects after repair. 2. Previously Painted Gypsum Board: a. Remove loose paint and feather the edges to create a smooth transition. b. Remove surface dust and debris. 3.4 APPLICATION - GENERAL A. Apply paint to surfaces free of dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, and conditions otherwise detrimental to formation of a durable paint film. B. Do not substitute or interchange products or coatings systems presented at the Pre -Installation Conference unless otherwise authorized by Owner's authorized representative. 09900-5 C. Do not paint silicone sealants designated by an S 1 or S2 assignment as described in Section 07900. D. After cleaning and prior to painting, determine surface and subsurface moisture of non-metal substrates in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions and the following methods: 1. Radio frequency and conductivity moisture meter testing with results in the green range for conductivity and the yellow range or below for radio frequency. 2. Plastic sheet testing in accordance with ASTM D 4263 to determine the presence of capillary moisture. Levels are acceptable when dry on the plastic and the block. E. Mixing and Thinning: 1. Mix coatings in clean containers in accordance with the manufacturer's published instructions. 2. Remove skins on acrylic coatings prior to mixing. If mixed into the coating, remove skin residue by straining prior to use. 3. Stir paint materials as necessary during use to maintain the consistency. F. Touch up shop -applied prime coats where damaged or bare. Use the same primer applied in the shop. G. If application procedures are not specified herein, use application procedures designated by the manufacturer's published instructions for the particular application and substrate. H. Dry Film Thickness (DFT) shown in the Product Schedules in Part 3 herein represent the minimum Dry Film Thickness in mils per coat. Apply each coat to uniform coverage. Avoid excessive thickness that results in runs, sags, and solvent voids in the film. I. Allow drying time between coats as recommended by the manufacturer. J. When coating irregular surfaces including edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners, apply a minimum dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces. K. Prime Coats, General: Before application of finish coats, apply a prime coat of material as scheduled. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears, to assure a finish coat with no burn through or other defects due to insufficient sealing. L. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover to provide an opaque, smooth surface of uniform finish, color, appearance and coverage. Apply additional coats if shadow through of underlying coats or substrate is visible. Cloudiness, spotting, laps, brush marks, runs, sags or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable. 3.5 MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT A. Replace identification markings on mechanical or electrical equipment when painted over or spattered. B. Where exposed piping, conduit, and electrical equipment are to be painted, paint color and texture shall match adjacent surfaces. C. Paint both sides and edges of plywood backboards for electrical equipment prior to installation. 3.6 INTERIOR FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Interior Coatings and Exterior Coatings on Surfaces Other than Exterior Wall: Inspect painting and coating application for scheduled material, color, sheen, specified thickness (WFT where indicated and DFT), and coverage. 3.7 MAINTENANCE OF WORK AREA A. As work proceeds and upon completion, remove paint where spilled, splashed, or spattered. B. During progress of work keep premises free from unnecessary accumulation of tools, equipment, surplus materials and debris. At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint material from the site. 09900-6 C. Collect waste, cloths, and material which may constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers, and remove daily from site. D. Upon completion of work, leave premises neat and clean. Remove protective coverings and paint from doorknobs, floors, counter tops and other areas not requiring paint. 3.8 PROTECTION A. Repair damage as a result of inadequate or unsuitable protection during preparation or installation. B. Do not leave plastic or other landscape protection covers in place so long that damage to plants results. 3.9 PAINT COLOR SCHEDULES A. Interior Building Colors: The following are interior colors shown on drawings. Provide matches by any approved manufacturer. Mark Color Number/Name by Sherwin Williams unless otherwise shown. P2 SW# 7664 Steely Gra P3 SW# 6510 Loyal Blue P5 OSHA Standard Safety Yellow P6 SW# 6811 Honorable Blue P7 Pittsburgh Paints #2537 Blossom White P8 SW# 7005 Pure White P9 SW# 7042 Shoji White. Apply over textured coating specified in Section 09250 P10 SW# 6061 Tan Bark P11 SW# 6115 Totally Tan P12 SW# 6112 Biscuit P13 SW# 6454 Shamrock P14 SW# 6677 Goldenrod P15 SW# 7669 Summit Gra P16 SW# 7074 Software P18 SW# 7507 Stone Lion P19 SW# 6094 Sensational Sand P20 SW# 7036 Accessible Beige P21 SW# 4081 Safety Red P22 Pantone Color System 286 C. P23 SW# 7005 Pure White P24 SW# 2819 Downing Slate P25 SW# 0045 Antiquarian Brown P26 SW# 6080 Utterly Beige P27 SW# 6103 Tea Chest P28 SW# 6124 Cardboard P29 SW# 6420 Queen Anne's Lace P30 SW# 2018 Pink Beige P31 SW# 2016 Canberra P32 SW# 6387 Compatible Cream P33 SW# 6385 Dover White P34 SW# 6519 Hinting Blue P35 SW# 7071 Gray Screen P36 SW# 6989 Domino P37 SW# 0046 White Hyacinth 09900-7 Mark Color Number/Name by Sherwin Williams unless otherwise shown. P38 SW# 6102 Portabello P39 SW# 6122 Camelback P40 SW# 6665 Gardenia P41 SW# 6100 Practical Beige P42 SW# 6372 Inviting Ivory P43 SW# 6667 Afterglow P44 SW# 6666 Enjoyable Yellow P45 SW# 0044 Hubbard Squash P46 SW# 7006 Extra White P47 SW# 0051 Classic Ivory P48 SW# 7722 Travertine P49 SW# 7019 Gauntlet Grey P50 SW# 6382 Ceremonial Gold P51 SW# 6662 Summer Da P52 SW# 6334 Flower Pot P53 SW# 6810 Lupine P54 SW# 6432 Garden Spot P55 SW# 6285 Grape Harvest P56 SW# 6500 Open Seas P57 SW# 2848 Ro croft Pewter P58 SW# 6006 Black Bean P59 SW# 0077 Classic French Gra P60 SW# 6053 Reddened Earth P61 SW# 6079 Diverse Beige P62 SW# 6172 Hardware. P63 SW# 2340 Buff P64 SW# 6332 Coral Island P65 SW# 6378 Crisp Linen P66 SW# 6085 Sim lify Beige P67 SW# 6114 Bagel P68 SW# 6113 Interactive Cream P69 SW# 6340 Baked Clay. P70 SW# 2838 Polished Mahogany P71 SW# 7051 Analytical Gray. P72 SW# 6658 Welcome White. P73 SW# 6214 Underseas P74 SW# 6659 Captivating Cream P75 SW# 2804 Renwick Rose Beige Mark Color Number/Name by Sherwin Williams unless otherwise shown. P76 Custom Match # 076 Walmart Medium Blue P76A Pantone Color System 285C P77 SW# 6087 Trusty Tan P78 SW# 2445 Creamy White P79 SW# 6359 Sociable P80 SW# 6060 Moroccan Brown P81 SW# 6258 Tricorn Black P82 SW# 7679 Golden Gate P83 SW# 6082 Cobble Brown P84 SW# 7641 Collonade Gra P85 SW# 2823 Rookwood Clay P86 SW# 6356 Copper Mountain P87 SW# 2807 Rookwood Medium Brown P88 SW# 7517 China Doll P89 SW# 6062 Rugged Brown P90 SW# 7502 Dry Dock P91 SW# 7513 Sanderlin P92 SW# 7536 Bittersweet Stem P93 SW# 7538 Tamarind P94 SW# 7694 Dromedary Camel P95 SW# 7702 Spiced Cider P96 SW# 7705 Wheat Penn P97 SW# 7710 Brandy Wine P98 SW# 7718 Oak Creek P100 SW# 6521 Notable Hue P101 SW# 6904 Gusto Gold P102 SW# 7518 Beach House P103 SW# 6095 Toasty P104 SW# 6867 Fireworks P105 SW# 6526 Icelandic P106 SW# 6675 Afternoon P107 SW# 7698 Straw Harvest P108 SW# 6991 Black Magic P109 SW# 7506 Loggia Pilo SW# 7043 Worldly Gra Pill SW# 7531 Canvas Tan P112 SW# 6676 Butterfield P113 SW# 6674 Jonquil P114 SW# 7720 Deer Valle P115 SW# 6076 Turkish Coffee PI 16 Custom Match # 116 Walmart Neighborhood Market Green P116A Pantone Color System 368 C P117 SW# 6429 Baize Green P118 SW# 6720 Paradise 3.10 PAINT SHEEN SCHEDULE Mark Color Number/Name by Sherwin Williams unless otherwise shown. P119 SW# 6895 Laughing Orange P120 SW# 6887 Navel P121 SW# 6905 Goldfinch P122 SW# 6413 Restoration Ivory P123 SW# 6380 Humble Gold P124 SW# 7522 Meadowlark P125 SW# 6923 Festival Green P126 SW# 6885 Knockout Orange P127 SW# 7719 Fresco Cream P128 SW# 7510 Chateau Brown P129 SW# 6683 Bee P130 SW# 6922 Outrageous Green P131 SW# 7102 White Flour P133 Pantone Color System 287 C P134 SW #7015 Repose Gra P135 SW #7017 Dorian Gra P139 SW #6710 Melange Green P140 SW #7004 Snowbound P150 SW #7072 Online P159 SW# 7571 Casa Blanca P161 SW #7609 "Georgian Revival Blue" P162 SW# 7674 Peppercorn P163 SW# 6939 Tur uish P164 SW# 6002 Essential Gra P165 SW# 6105 Divine White P166 SW# 6766 "Mariner" P167 SW #6868 Real Red P200 SW Custom Walmart Color "Duranodic Bronze" Order #7248- 0044642 P201 SW #7668 March Wind P202 SW #7670 Gray Shingle P203 SW #7048 Urbane Bronze P204 SW #0019 Festoon Aqua P205 Pantone Color System 282 P206 SW #7000 Ibis White P207 SW #1465 Contemporary Grey (Replace with SW #6238 Icicle if Vision Center includes Health Clinic roto P207 SW #6238 Icicle (Use in place of SW 1465 Contemporary Grey if Vision Center includes Health Clinic roto P208 SW #6953 Candid Blue A. Semi -gloss: 1. Interior hollow metal doors and frames. 2. Wood trim or simulated wood trim scheduled to be painted. 3. Interior columns surfaces to receive epoxy finish. 09900-8 B. Eggshell: 1. All surfaces to be painted where sheen is not otherwise specified. C. Do not paint the following Items: 1. Aluminum, brass, bronze, stainless steel, and chrome plated steel. 2. Pre -finished items, such as toilet compartments, acoustical ceiling materials, mechanical, and electrical equipment or factory fmished metal panels and trim, unless otherwise shown or specified. 3. UL, FM, and other code -required labels. 4. Equipment identification, performance rating, and name plates. 5. Finish hardware. 6. Fire Suppression sprinklers. 7. Low voltage cabling (i.e. fire alarm, voice, data, EMS, audio, security) not in conduit. 3.11 PRODUCT AND SYSTEM SCHEDULES - INTERIOR A. Select products and systems by one of the following manufacturers. Refer to the following Product Schedules to verify manufacturer's recommended DFT. B. System Schedules for each manufacturer follow the Product Schedule. Interior Products by Sherwin Williams Product Name DFT (mils) I VOC (/1) Interior Metal ProCryl Universal Primer B66-310 2.0 100 Pro Mar 200 Interior Latex Gloss Enamel, B21 W200 1.5 143 ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Semi -Gloss Enamel, B31- 2600 Series 1.6 0 ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Eggshell Enamel, B20-2600 Series 1.7 0 Waterborne Acrylic Dryfall, B42 Series 2.0 39 E olon II Rust Inhibitive Epoxy Primer B67W400, B67A400, B67A400 4.0 300 Macro ox 646- 100, B58W620, B58V620 5.0-10.0 100 WB Acrolon 100 Water Based Urethane B65-720, 1365V720 2.0-4.0 <100 DTM Acrylic Coating B66-100 Series 2.5-4.0 <250 Interior CMU Pro Mar 200 Interior Latex Gloss Enamel, B21 W200 1.5 143 ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Eggshell, B202-2600 Series 1.7 0 Loxon Concrete and Masonry Primer, A24WO8300 3.0 45 ProMar 200 Zero VOC Latex Primer, B28WO2600 1.5 0 Interior Gypsum Board ProMar 200 Zero VOC Latex Primer, B28WO2600 1.5 0 Pro Mar 200 Interior Latex Gloss Enamel, B21 W200 1.5 143 ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Semi -Gloss Enamel, B31-2600 Series 1.6 0 ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Eggshell, B202-2600 Series 1.7 0 Interior Wood ProMar 200 Zero VOC Latex Primer, B28WO2600 1.5 0 Pre Rite ProBlock Interior/Exterior Latex Primer Sealer B51 Series 1.4 97 ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Semi -Gloss Enamel, B31-2600 Series 1.6 0 Wood Classics Varnish Sanding Sealer, 1326V43 1.2 522 Interior Concrete Floors Macro ox 646-100, B58W620, 1358V620 5.0-10.0 <100 Armorseal Tread-Plex, B90 Series 1.5-2.0 <100 09900-9 Interior Systems by Sherwin Williams Prime CoatiFinish Coat(s) 1111111111k - Interior Ferrous Metal INT General Use — Gloss ProCryl Universal Primer B66- 2 coats: 1 310 Pro Mar 200 Interior Latex Gloss unless s ecified otherwise Enamel, B21W200* INT General Use — Semi -Gloss ProCryl Universal Primer B66- 2 coats: 2 (unless specified otherwise) 310 ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Semi -Gloss Enamel, B31- 2600 Series INT General Use — Eggshell ProCryl Universal Primer B66- 2 coats: ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior 3 (unless specified otherwise) 310 Latex Eggshell Enamel, B20-2600 Series Exception: Interior columns shall receive only one finish coat. INT Dryfall system over shop To touch up prime welds, bare 1 coat: 4 primed steel —overhead structure spots, blemishes, and scratches: SW-eWaterbome Acrylic Dryfall, B42 - Flat ProCryl Universal Primer B66- Series 310 INT Dryfall system over unprimed ProCryl Universal Primer B66- 1 coat: 5 steel - overhead structure — 310 Waterborne Acrylic Dryfall, B42 Series Flat INT Columns and Hollow Metal Epolon II Rust Inhibitive Epoxy 1 coat: 6 Door Frames as shown on Primer B67W400, B67A400, WB Acrolon 100 Water Based Urethane Drawings to receive epoxy — B67A400 B65-720, B65V720 Semi -Gloss INT Columns and Hollow Metal Macropoxy 646- 100, 1 coat: 6 Door Frames as shown on B58W620, B58V620 WB Acrolon 100 Water Based Urethane (CA) Drawings to receive epoxy - B65-720, B65V720 Semi -Gloss Interior Galvanized Metal INT Latex for exposed ductwork, ProCryl Universal Primer B66- 2 coats: 7 hangers, and supports — 310** ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Semi -Gloss Semi -Gloss Enamel, B31- 2600 Series INT Dryfall System for exposed ProCryl Universal Primer B66- 1 coat: 8 ductwork, hangers and supports 310** Waterborne Acrylic Dryfall, B42 Series - Flat INT Cooler/Freezer Panels (Existing) DTM Acrylic Coating B66-100 1 coat: 9 - shown to be re -painted - Gloss Series DTM Acrylic Coating B66-100 Series Interior CMU — New Construction INT Latex System - Gloss Loxon Concrete and Masonry 2 coats: 10 Primer, A24W08300 Pro Mar 200 Interior Latex Gloss Enamel, B21W200* INT Latex System - Eggshell Loxon Concrete and Masonry 2 coats: 11 Primer, A24W08300 ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Eggshell Enamel, B20-2600 Series Interior CMU — Previously Painted INT Latex System - Gloss ProMar 200 Zero VOC Latex 2 coats: 12 Primer, B28W02600 Pro Mar 200 Interior Latex Gloss Enamel, B21W200* INT Latex System - Eggshell ProMar 200 Zero VOC Latex 2 coats: 13 Primer, B28W02600 ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Eggshell Enamel, B20-2600 Series 09900-10 Interior Gypsum Board INT Latex System - Gloss ProMar 200 Zero VOC Latex 2 coats: 14 Interior Metal Primer, B28W02600 Pro Mar 200 Interior Latex Gloss PPG Pitt -Tech Plus 4020 PF Acrylic DTM Primer 2.2 91 Enamel, B21 W200* INT Latex System — Semi- Gloss ProMar 200 Zero VOC Latex 2 coats: 15 PPG Speed Hide 0 VOC Eggshell Acrylic Enamel 6-4310XI Series Primer, B28W02600 ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex PPG Super Tech Acrylic Flat Dryfall 6-725XI Series 2.2 30 Semi -Gloss Enamel, B31- 2600 Series INT Latex System - Eggshell ProMar 200 Zero VOC Latex 2 coats: 16 PPG A ua on WB -E Ultra Low VOCE ox 98-E1 Series Primer, B28W02600 ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex PPG Pitt -Tech Gloss DTM Acrylic Enamel 90-0374 Series 2.0-3.0 192 Eggshell Enamel, B20-2600 Series Interior Wood INT General Use — Latex — ProMar 200 Zero VOC Latex 2 coats: 17 Semi -Gloss Primer, B28W02600 ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex 8.0 50 PPG Speed Hide 0 VOC Primer 6-4900XL Semi -Gloss Enamel, B31- 2600 Series INT Exposed laminated wood roof PrepRite ProBlock 2 coats: 18 structure — Latex — Interior/Exterior Latex Primer ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex 1.4 Semi -Gloss Sealer B51 Series Semi -Gloss Enamel, B31- 2600 Series INT Transparent sealer Wood Classics Varnish Sanding --- 19 1 1 Sealer, B26V43 Interior Concrete Floors INT Floor, and floor striping, Macropoxy 646- 100, 2 coats: 20 graphics and markings - B58W620, B58V620 Macropoxy 646- 100, Semi -Gloss B58W620, B58V620 INT Existing Painted Floor Slabs — Armorseal Tread-Plex, B90 2 coats: 21 Semi -Gloss Series Armorseal Tread-Plex, B90 Series * Use for all states except CA. For CA projects, consult Manufacturer's Representative for compliant coating. ** Apply primer after light etching is accomplished in accordance with Galvanized Steel — Interior Surface Prep requirements in Part 3 above. Interior Products by PPG Paints Product Name DFT (mils) VOC (g/1) Interior Metal PPG Pitt -Tech Plus 4020 PF Acrylic DTM Primer 2.2 91 PPG Advantage 919-10 Gloss Acrylic Enamel 1.5 50 PPG Speed Hide 0 VOC Semi -Gloss Acrylic Enamel 6-4510XI Series 1.3 0 PPG Speed Hide 0 VOC Eggshell Acrylic Enamel 6-4310XI Series 1.5 0 PPG Super Tech Acrylic Flat Dryfall 6-725XI Series 2.2 30 PPG Rapid Coat DTR Epoxy Mastic 95-245 Series 4.0-7.0 263 PPG Amerlock 400 VOC Semi -Gloss Epoxy 4.8-8.0 99 PPG A ua on WB -E Ultra Low VOCE ox 98-E1 Series 2.0-3.0 26 PPG Pitt -Tech Gloss DTM Acrylic Enamel 90-0374 Series 2.0-3.0 192 Interior CMU PPG Pitt -Tech Plus 4020 PF Acrylic DTM Primer 1.5 0 PPG Speed Hide 0 VOC Eggshell Acrylic Enamel 6-4310XI Series 1.7 0 PPG Speed Hide Block Filler 6-15XI Series 8.0 50 PPG Speed Hide 0 VOC Primer 6-4900XL 1.4 0 PPG Seal Grip Acrylic Primer 17-921XI Series 1.6 50 Interior Gypsum Board PPG Speed Hide 0 VOC Primer 6-4900XL 1.4 0 PPG Advantage 919-10 Gloss Acrylic Enamel 1.5 50 PPG Speed Hide 0 VOC Semi -Gloss Acrylic Enamel 6-4510XI Series 1.3 0 PPG Speed Hide 0 VOC Eggshell Acrylic Enamel 6-4310XI Series 1.5 0 09900-11 Interior Wood Prime Coat Finish Coat(s) Interior Ferrous Metal PPG Speed Hide 0 VOC Primer 6-4900XL 1.4 0 PPG Seal Grip Acrylic Primer 17-921XI Series 1.6 50 PPG Speed Hide 0 VOC Semi -Gloss Acrylic Enamel 6-4510XI Series 1.6 0 PPG Deft Sanding Sealer DFT015 Clear 1.0 590 Interior Concrete Floors General Use — Semi -Gloss Pitt -Tech Plus 4020PF Acrylic PPG Amerlock 400 VOC Semi -Gloss Epoxy 4.8-8.0 99 PPG Brcakthrough V70 Scrics Gloss Acrylic 1.5-2.0 211 Interior Systems by PPG Paints Prime Coat Finish Coat(s) Interior Ferrous Metal INT General Use — Gloss Pitt -Tech Plus 4020PF Acrylic 2 coats: 1 (unless specified otherwise) DTM Primer Advantage 919-10 Series Gloss Acrylic Enamel INT General Use — Semi -Gloss Pitt -Tech Plus 4020PF Acrylic 2 coats: 2 (unless specified otherwise) DTM Primer Speed Hide 0 VOC Semi -Gloss Enamel 6-4510XI Series INT General Use — Eggshell Pitt -Tech Plus 4020PF Acrylic 2 coats: 3 (unless specified otherwise) - DTM Primer Speed Hide 0 VOC Eggshell Enamel 6-4310XI Series Exception: Interior columns shall receive only one finish coat. INT Dryfall system over shop To touch up prime welds, bare 1 coat: 4 primed steel —overhead structure spots, blemishes, and scratches: Speed Hide Super Tech Flat Acrylic Dry - Flat fall 6-725XI INT Dryfall system over unprimed Pitt -Tech Plus 4020PF Acrylic 1 coat: 5 steel - overhead structure — DTM Primer Speed Hide Super Tech Flat Acrylic Dry Flat fall 6-725XI INT Columns and Hollow Metal PPG Amerlock 400 1 coat: 6 Door Frames as shown on VOC Semi -Gloss Epoxy PPG Aquapon WB -E Ultra Low VOC Drawings to receive epoxy — Epoxy 98-E 1 Series Semi -Gloss INT Columns and Hollow Metal PPG Amerlock 400 1 coat: 6 Door Frames as shown on VOC Semi -Gloss Epoxy PPG Aquapon WB -E Ultra Low VOC (CA) Drawings to receive epoxy - Epoxy 98-E1 Series Semi -Gloss Interior Galvanized Metal INT Latex for exposed ductwork, Pitt -Tech Plus 4020PF Acrylic 2 coats: 7 hangers, and supports — DTM Primer Speed Hide 0 VOC Semi -Gloss Enamel Semi -Gloss 6-4510XI Series INT Dryfall System for exposed Pitt -Tech Plus 4020PF Acrylic 1 coat: 8 ductwork, hangers and supports DTM Primer Speed Hide Super Tech Flat Acrylic - Flat Dryfall 6-725XI INT Cooler/Freezer Panels (Existing) Pitt -Tech DTM Gloss Acrylic 1 coat: 9 - shown to be re -painted - Gloss 90-374 Series Pitt -Tech DTM Gloss Acrylic 90-374 Series Interior CMU — New Construction INT Latex System - Gloss Speed Hide Acrylic Block Filler 2 coats: 10 6-15XI Advantage 919-10 Series Gloss Acrylic Enamel INT Latex System - Eggshell Speed Hide Acrylic Block Filler 2 coats: 11 6-15XI Speed Hide 0 VOC Eggshell Enamel 6-4310XI Series 09900-12 Interior CMU — Previously Painted INT Latex System - Gloss Seal Grip Acrylic Primer 17- 2 coats: 12 Interior Metal 921XI Series (spot prime) Advantage 919-10 Series Gloss Acrylic Ultra Spec" HP Acrylic Metal Primer HPO4 2.0 48 Enamel INT Latex System - Eggshell Seal Grip Acrylic Primer 17- 2 coats: 13 Super Hide® Zero VOC Interior Latex Eggshell 357 921XI Series (Spot Prime) Speed Hide 0 VOC Eggshell Enamel Latex Dry Fall Flat 395 1.9 46 6-431OXI Series Interior Gypsum Board INT Latex System - Gloss Speed Hide 0 VOC Primer 2 coats: 14 1.5-1.9 Sealer Advantage 919-10 Series Gloss Acrylic 1.0-1.3 190 6-490OXI Enamel INT Latex System — Semi- Gloss Speed Hide 0 VOC Primer 2 coats: 15 2.3 Sealer Speed Hide 0 VOC Semi -Gloss Enamel 1.3 0 6-490OXI 6-4510XI Series INT Latex System - Eggshell Speed Hide 0 VOC Primer 2 coats: 16 Sealer Speed Hide 0 VOC Eggshell Enamel 1.3 0 6-490OXI 6-431OXI Series Interior Wood INT General Use — Latex — Speed Hide 0 VOC Primer 2 coats: 17 Semi -Gloss Sealer Speed Hide 0 VOC Semi -Gloss Enamel 6-490OXI 6-451OXI Series INT Exposed laminated wood roof Seal Grip Acrylic Primer 17- 2 coats: 18 structure — Latex — 921 XI Series Speed Hide 0 VOC Semi -Gloss Enamel Semi -Gloss 6-451OXI Series INT Transparent sealer PPG —Deft Sanding Sealer --- 19 DFT015 Interior Concrete Floors INT Floor, and floor striping, PPG Amerlock 400 2 coats: 20 graphics and markings - VOC Semi -Gloss Epoxy PPG Amerlock 400 Semi -Gloss VOC Semi -Gloss Epoxy INT Existing Painted Floor Slabs — PPG Breakthrough V70 Series 2 coats: 21 Semi -Gloss PPG Breakthrough V70 Series Interior Products by Benjamin Moore Product DFT (mils) VOC (/1) Interior Metal Ultra Spec" HP Acrylic Metal Primer HPO4 2.0 48 Ultra Spec' HP D.T.M. Acrylic Gloss Enamel HP28 2.3 142 Super Hide® Zero VOC Interior Latex Semi -Gloss 358 1.2 0 Super Hide® Zero VOC Interior Latex Eggshell 357 1.3 0 Latex Dry Fall Flat 395 1.9 46 Corotech Pol amide Epoxy Primer V150 4.0 332 Corotech Epoxy Mastic Coating V 160 4.6-7.2 184 Corotech Waterborne Amine Epoxy V440 1.5-1.9 206 Corotech Acrylic Epoxy V450 Semi -gloss 1.0-1.3 190 Ultra Spec' HP D.T.M. Acrylic Gloss Enamel HP28 2.3 142 Interior CMU Ultra Spec" HP D.T.M. Acrylic Gloss Enamel HP28 2.3 142 Super Hide® Zero VOC Interior Latex Eggshell 357 1.3 0 Coronado Super Kote 5000® Latex Block Filler 958 7.9-10.5 37 Super Hide® Zero VOC Interior Latex Primer 354 1.4 0 Interior Gypsum Board Super Hide® Zero VOC Interior Latex Primer 354 1.3 0 Ultra Spec' HP D.T.M. Acrylic Gloss Enamel HP28 2.3 142 Super Hide® Zero VOC Interior Latex Semi -Gloss 358 1.2 0 Super Hide® Zero VOC Interior Latex Eggshell 357 1.3 0 09900-13 Interior Wood Prime Coat Finish Coat(s) Interior Ferrous Metal Ultra Spec" 500 Interior Latex Primer N534 1.4 0 Insl-x® Prime Al1TM Multi -Surface Latex Primer Sealer AP -1000 1.3 29 Super Hide® Zero VOC Interior Latex Semi -Gloss 358 1.2 0 Lenmar® Rapid Seal Dual Purpose Sealer 1Y.519 1.1 548 Interior Concrete Floors General Use — Semi -Gloss Ultra Spec® HP Acrylic Metal Corotech Epoxy Mastic Coating V 160 4.6-7.2 184 Tough Shield® Acrylic Floor and Patio Coating Satin Finish TS-3xxx 1.3-1.7 169 Interior Systems by Benjamin Moore Prime Coat Finish Coat(s) Interior Ferrous Metal INT General Use — Gloss Ultra Spec® HP Acrylic Metal 2 coats: 1 (unless specified otherwise) Primer HPO4 Ultra Spec® HP D.T.M. Acrylic Gloss Enamel HP28 INT General Use — Semi -Gloss Ultra Spec® HP Acrylic Metal 2 coats: 2 (unless specified otherwise) Primer HPO4 Super Hide® Zero VOC Interior Latex Semi -Gloss 358 INT General Use — Eggshell Ultra Spec® HP Acrylic Metal 2 coats: 3 (unless specified otherwise) Primer HPO4 Super Hide® Zero VOC Interior Latex Eggshell 357 INT Dryfall system over shop 1 coat: 4 primed steel —overhead structure Latex Dry Fall Flat 395 Flat INT Dryfall system over unprimed Ultra Spec® HP Acrylic Metal 1 coat: 5 steel - overhead structure — Primer HPO4 Latex Dry Fall Flat 395 Flat INT Columns and Hollow Metal Corotech Polyamide Epoxy 1 coat: 6 Door Frames as shown on Primer V 150 Corotech Waterborne Amine Epoxy Drawings to receive epoxy — V440 Semi -Gloss INT Columns and Hollow Metal Corotech Polyamide Epoxy 1 coat: 6 Door Frames as shown on Primer V 150 Corotech Acrylic Epoxy V450 Semi - (CA) Drawings to receive epoxy - gloss Semi -Gloss Interior Galvanized Metal INT Latex for exposed ductwork, Ultra Spec® HP Acrylic Metal 2 coats: 7 hangers, and supports — Primer HPO4 Super Hide® Zero VOC Interior Latex Semi -Gloss Semi -Gloss 358 INT Dryfall System for exposed Ultra Spec® HP Acrylic Metal 1 coat: 8 ductwork, hangers and supports Primer HPO4 Latex Dry Fall Flat 395 - Flat INT Cooler/Freezer Panels 1 coat: 9 (Existing) - shown to be re- Ultra Spec® HP D.T.M. Acrylic Gloss ainted - Gloss Enamel HP28 Interior CMU — New Construction INT Latex System - Gloss Coronado Super Kote 5000® 2 coats: 10 Latex Block Filler 958 Ultra Spec® HP D.T.M. Acrylic Gloss Enamel HP28 INT Latex System - Eggshell Coronado Super Kote 5000® 2 coats: 11 Latex Block Filler 958 Super Hide® Zero VOC Interior Latex Eggshell 357 09900-14 Interior CMU — Previously Painted INT Latex System - Gloss Insl-x® Prime Al1TM Multi- 2 coats: 12 Surface Latex Primer Sealer Ultra Spec® HP D.T.M. Acrylic Gloss AP -1000 Enamel HP28 INT Latex System - Eggshell 2 coats: 13 Super Hide® Zero VOC Interior Latex Eggshell 357 Interior Gypsum Board INT Latex System - Gloss Super Hide® Zero VOC Interior 2 coats: 14 Latex Primer 354 Ultra Spec® HP D.T.M. Acrylic Gloss Enamel HP28 INT Latex System — Semi- Gloss Super Hide® Zero VOC Interior 2 coats: 15 Latex Primer 354 Super Hide® Zero VOC Interior Latex Semi -Gloss 358 INT Latex System - Eggshell Super Hide® Zero VOC Interior 2 coats: 16 Latex Primer 354 Super Hide® Zero VOC Interior Latex Eggshell 357 Interior Wood INT General Use — Latex — Ultra Spec® 500 Interior Latex 2 coats: 17 Semi -Gloss Primer N534 Super Hide® Zero VOC Interior Latex Semi -Gloss 358 INT Exposed laminated wood roof Insl-x® Prime Al1TM Multi- 2 coats: 18 structure — Latex — Surface Latex Primer Sealer Super Hide® Zero VOC Interior Latex Semi -Gloss AP -1000 Semi -Gloss 358 INT Transparent sealer Lenmar® Rapid Seal Dual --- 19 Purpose Sealer 1Y.519 Interior Concrete Floors INT Floor, and floor striping, 2 coats: 10 graphics and markings - Corotech Epoxy Mastic Coating V 160 Semi -Gloss INT Existing Painted Floor Slabs — 2 coats: 21 Semi -Gloss Tough Shield® Acrylic Floor and Patio Coating Satin Finish TS-3xxx END OF COATING SYSTEMS SCHEDULES - INTERIOR END OF SECTION 09900-15 BLANK PAGE 09900-16 UniSpec II- Store Planning SECTION 10260 - WALL AND CORNER GUARDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Surface applied corner guards. 1.2 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Section 01600 - Product Requirements: Transport, handle, store, and protect Products. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Unless specified otherwise, provide guards by one of the following manufacturers as specified: 1. American Floor Products Co., Inc., (800) 342-0424. 2. Pawling Corporation (800) 431-3456, Contact: Jennifer Killmer. 2.2 CORNER GUARDS 022820 A. Aluminum: 1. Polaris (CG -2139) 90° Corner Guard, 16 gage, 2 x 2 inches x 48 inches, unless otherwise shown, by American Floor. 2. Aluminum Corner Guard, 0.08 inch thick, 2 x 2 inches x 48 inches, unless otherwise shown, by Pawling. a. CG -401, for 90° corners. b. CG -404, for 135° corners. 3. Factory pre -drilled for installation with countersunk screws. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and wall areas, with installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of Work. 1. Examine walls to which wall guards will be attached for blocking, grounds, and other solid backing installed in the locations required for secure attachment of support fasteners. 2. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Before installation, clean substrate to remove dust, debris, and loose particles. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, square and plumb, secured rigidly in position. B. Position corner guard spaced above finished floor to allow for installation of wall base type specified or shown on Drawings. Coordinate installation of wall finishes with comer guard installation. C. Attach aluminum corner guards using stainless steel screws. 10260-1 3.4 SCHEDULE A. Corner Guards: 1. Locate aluminum corner guards at outside corners of protective surfacing wainscot and plastic laminate casework, and in sales areas accessible by public at other locations shown on the drawings, unless otherwise indicated or specified to receive other type of corner guards. END OF SECTION 10260-2 UniSpec II Store Planning SECTION 13900 - FIRE SUPPRESSION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY 052518 A. Section Includes: 1. Automatic sprinkler systems. 2. Fire protection sprinkler piping work with feed and cross main piping, branch line piping, test valves, test connections, and sprinklers. 3. Flow indicators, valves, gauges, alarms, drain piping, and supervisory switches. 4. System design, installation and certification. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. ASTM A 47 - Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings 2. ASTM A 53 - Pipe, Steel, Black And Hot -Dipped, Zinc -Coated, Welded And Seamless 3. ASTM A 135 - Electric -Resistance -Welded Steel Pipe 4. ASTM A 234 - Piping Fittings Of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel For Moderate And High Temperature Service 5. ASTM A 536 - Ductile Iron Castings 6. ASTM A 795 - Black And Hot -Dipped Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) Welded And Seamless Steel Pipe For Fire Protection Use 7. ASTM A 865 - Threaded Couplings, Steel, Black Or Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) Welded Or Seamless, For Use In Steel Pipe joints B. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): 1. ASME B 16.1 - Cast Iron Pipe Flanges And Flanged Fittings 2. ASME B 16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings 3. ASME B 16.4 - Gray Iron Threaded Fittings 4. ASME B 16.5 - Pipe Flanges And Flanged Fittings NPS 1/2 Through NPS 24 Metric/Inch Standard 5. ASME B 16.9 - Factory -Made Wrought Buttwelding Fittings 6. ASME B 16.11 - Forged Fittings, Socket -Welding And Threaded C. Factory Mutual System (FM): 1. Approval Guide, Latest edition. D. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. NFPA 13, Installation of Sprinkler Systems. 2. NFPA 24, Standard for the Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and their Appurtenances. 3. NFPA 70, National Electrical Code. E. Underwriters Laboratory (UL): 1. UL Fire Protection Directory - Latest Edition. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Authorities Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) 1. Provide Deferred Submittals to AHJ per requirements of 01330. Drawings and calculations have not been submitted to the AHJ for code compliance by Owner's Fire Protection Consultant. a. Submit the following: 1) Product data. 2) Shop drawings. 3) Additional data as may be required by NFPA 13 and Owner's Fire Protection Consultant. 13900-1 B. Submittal Procedure: 1. Reference Section 01330 for general submittal procedures. Conform to provisions of Section 01330 unless otherwise specified herein. 2. Within 21 days after award of prime contract, send submittals to Owner's Fire Protection Consultant as specified Section 01330. Allow 15 day turn -around on submittals sent to Owner's Fire Protection Consultant. a. Fire Protection Consultant's electronic drawing files (i.e., DWG, DWF, PDF, etc.) will not be provided to the Contractor for the purpose of submittals nor will the Fire Protection Consultant assist with production of submittal information including shop drawings and material data. b. If the Contractor fails to submit a complete Fire Suppression submittal package within 21 days after award of contract, the Contractor shall pay the Owner $250.00 per day as liquidated damages and not as a penalty, until the fully completed Fire Suppression submittal package is received by Owner's Fire Protection Consultant. C. Send a copy of the Letter of Transmittal sent with the submittals to the Architect indicating date of and content of transmittal. 3. Fire Protection Consultant will review electronic file submittal as an alternate to requirements of Section 01330. Obtain the electronic submittal procedure from Owner's Fire Protection Consultant during the Pre - Construction Conference Call. 4. Within 21 days after Award of Contract by Owner to Contractor, submit two copies of complete submittals to Authorities Having Jurisdiction if required by Owner's Fire Protection Consultant. Coordinate submittal with Owner's Fire Protection Consultant. Submit additional copies if required 5. Submittals shall be complete, accurate, and in full compliance with contract requirements for proper and timely approval. 6. Contractor shall respond to shop drawing review comments within 7 days of receipt. 7. Maintain two copies of approved documents on site. C. Submittal Rejection: 1. Owner's Fire Protection Consultant will reject submittals which do not comply with Contract Documents. If submittal is rejected by Owner's Fire Protection Consultant for any reason, Owner will back -charge the Contractor $200.00 via Change Order, to cover the processing costs of each subsequent review until submittal is approved. Submittal rejections include, but are not limited to, the following reasons: a. Design Issues: Incorrect densities, design areas, equipment sprinkler spacing, hose station missing, incomplete system design, etc. No changes in design area, number of sprinklers operating, pipe sizes, number of branch lines, number of mains or deviation of water supply from that shown on the Contract Documents shall be approved by Owner's Fire Protection Consultant. This is not intended to limit the Contractor from making minor modifications to system design for coordination purposes. b. Incorrect Water Test: Failure to use Owner's water test found on project fire protection Construction Documents. No other water test data is permitted for system design submittals to Owner's Fire Protection Consultant. C. Incorrect Material: Do not propose pipe, sprinklers or backflow preventers not indicated in Contract Documents. Products not specified in contract documents are cause for rejection. d. Incorrect Valves: Do not propose OS&Y valves when wall PIV's are indicated in the Contract Documents. Rejected submittals shall be revised and resubmitted until approved. Extension of time will not be allowed for rejected submittals. a. The Fire Suppression subcontractor shall revise and resubmit rejected submittals within 7 days of receipt of rejected submittals. b. The Contractor shall verify that the Fire Suppression subcontractor has addressed all required revisions in the resubmittal. 1.4 Contract Closeout Submittals: A. Submit the following under provisions of Section 01770. 1. Maintenance Data: Include components of system, servicing requirements, inspection data, and operation manuals. 2. Training Requirements: Provide operational training to Owner. Include system control operation, Fire Pump (if provided) manual and abort functions, trouble procedures, auxiliary functions and emergency procedures. 13900-2 3. Contractors Material Test Certificates: Provide Copies of completed Underground, Overhead, and Fire Pump (if applicable) Contractor's Material Test Certificates. 4. As -Built shop drawings indicating installed location of components, including all piping, sprinklers, hangers, valving, inspector's test stations, auxiliary drains, and hose stations (if required). B. At Project completion, present to the Store Manager the As built Drawings enclosed in a plastic pipe tube (fixed cap at one end and a threaded -cap on the other end) for storage in the Riser Room. C. In addition to the copies of Documents delivered to the Store Manager, distribute additional copies of documents as indicated below: 1. Contractor shall deliver copies of the As -Built shop drawings for Fire Suppression and Contractor's Material Test Certificates (Underground, Overhead, and Fire Pump) in PDF format to Owner's Fire Protection Consultant. 1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. System shall provide coverage for all existing and new building and expansion areas including, but not limited to, areas scheduled in this Section. Contract Documents have been prepared in accordance with NFPA 13 (working plans) except for fabrication information. The Contract Documents are prepared to a level consistent with that level required by the Authorities Having Jurisdiction to gain plan check approval. No changes in design area, number of sprinklers operating, pipe sizes, number of branch lines, number of mains or deviation of water supply from that shown on the contract documents shall be approved by Fire Protection Consultant. This is not intended to limit the Contractor from making minor modifications to system design for coordination purposes. The Contractor shall review the Contract Documents for completeness and to ensure that the Construction Documents meet all Authorities Having Jurisdiction requirements. Discrepancies with NFPA or Authorities Having Jurisdiction requirements shall be brought to the attention of the Fire Protection Consultant prior to bid. The Contractor shall complete the fire protection Contract Documents to provide all final required detail such as fabrication details, final pipe cuts, hanger cuts, and other miscellaneous details not required by the Authority Having Jurisdiction for approval. Contractor is responsible to coordinate design with all trades and disciplines. 1. Fire Protection Consultant has submitted Contract Documents to Authorities Having Jurisdiction for review and approval. Contractor shall provide all other documents, qualifications, submittals and coordination necessary to obtain approval by Authorities Having Jurisdiction. All changes made to the Contract Documents by the Contractor shall be submitted to the Fire Protection Consultant for approval prior to fabrication or installation. Refer to Section 01330 for submittal requirements. B. Provide system complying with NFPA 13, Authorities Having Jurisdiction, and Contract Documents. Densities and areas of application shown or specified have been developed based on NFPA requirements, engineering judgment and insurance carrier requirements. C. Base system design on water flow test data shown on the contract documents. D. Authorities Having Jurisdiction may require hydraulically calculated densities, areas of application, and hose allowance differing from those shown or specified. Verify and provide hydraulic calculations per Authorities Having Jurisdiction and these Contract Documents. E. Verify actual backflow preventer to ensure correct friction loss is calculated. F. Provide fire department connections where required by Authorities Having Jurisdiction. G. Sprinklers in light hazard areas shall be quick response type. H. Limit each system to 52,000 square feet. I. Provide 5 psi safety factor between supply curve and demand point, including hose stream allowance. Provide hangers, supports and earthquake bracing per Contract Documents, NFPA 13, and Authorities Having Jurisdiction. 13900-3 K. Interface sprinkler system with fire protection supervisory system. L. If required by Authority Having Jurisdiction, provide Fire Department lock -box; quantity, size, type and location as directed 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Guarantee system for a period of one year after completion of work and acceptance by Owner. B. Qualifications (Installer): Company specializing in performing work of this Section with minimum three years experience and a minimum of a NICET Certified Engineering Technician (Level III) Water -Based Systems Layout Designer on staff responsible for project. 1. Provide technician name, NICET ID Number, state of employment, and certification level on submittal plans. C. Company shall have a sprinkler contractor license issued by the Authorities Having Jurisdiction. D. Regulatory Requirements: Provide certificate of compliance from Authorities Having Jurisdiction indicating approval of field acceptance tests. 1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Provide extra sprinklers under the provisions of NFPA 13. Provide suitable wrenches for each sprinkler type. Provide sprinklers as needed to meet the requirements listed below. Provide a minimum of 2 spare sprinklers for new sprinklers being added that do not match existing: 1. 12 Sales Floor Type 2. 4 Dry Pendent 3. 2 each of other type present for a total of 24. B. If needed, provide sprinkler and sprinkler wrench cabinet per NFPA 13, adjacent to sprinkler risers. C. Provide hydraulic calculation placard attached to each riser on systems that are modified or added. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and protect products to site under provisions of Section 01600. B. Store products in shipping containers and maintain in place until installation. Provide temporary inlet and outlet caps. Maintain caps in place until installation. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Provide UL Listed (for Fire Protection) or FM Approved (for Fire Protection) materials complying with NFPA 13, unless noted otherwise in Contract Documents. 2.2 FIRE PROTECTION PIPING - ABOVE GROUND A. Pipe: Steel pipe, conforming to the applicable requirements of NFPA 13, and ASTM A 53, ASTM A 135, or ASTM A 795, as applicable. 1. Wet Pipe Systems, Utilizing Threaded Pipe: a. Schedule 40 black steel pipe. b. Threadable lightwall sprinkler pipe with corrosion resistance ratio of 1.0 or greater after threading. C. Use galvanized pipe, zinc coated internally and externally, outdoors, inside coolers and freezers, or in non -conditioned spaces. 13900-4 Wet Pipe Systems, Utilizing Roll Grooved Pipe. a. Schedule 10 black steel pipe. b. Lightwall sprinkler pipe with corrosion resistance ratio of 1.0 or greater. C. Use galvanized pipe, zinc coated internally and externally, outdoors, inside coolers and freezers, or in non -conditioned spaces. Dry Pipe Systems: Same as wet pipe systems except pipe shall be galvanized, zinc coated internally and externally. B. Fittings: Provide one of the following: 1. Cast -Iron Threaded Flanges: ASME B 16.1. 2. Cast -Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B 16.4. 3. Malleable -Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B 16.3. 4. Steel, Threaded Couplings: ASTM A 865. 5. Steel Welding Fittings: ASTM A 234, ASME B16.9, or ASME B16.11. 6. Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5. 7. Steel, Grooved -End Fittings: UL -listed and FM -approved, ASTM A 47, malleable iron or ASTM A 536, ductile iron; with dimensions matching steel pipe and ends factory grooved according to AWWA C606. Roll groove only, cut groove unacceptable. 8. Steel Fittings and Cast Iron fittings shall not be used for dry pipe systems. 9. Fitting type shall match pipe. Galvanized fittings shall be used for dry pipe systems 10. Crimp -type couplings shall not be used. 11. Plain end fittings (socket, FIT, roustabouts, etc) shall not be used. C. Flexible Piping Systems: At Contractor's option, UL Listed orFM Approved flexible piping connections to sprinklers may be used for both acoustical panel and gypsum board ceilings when suitable for their intended use. 1. Description: Connections shall include a fully welded (non-mechanical fittings), leak -tested sprinkler drop with a minimum internal corrugated hose diameter of 1 inch. 2. Flexible piping lengths shall not exceed 6 feet. 3. Installation shall not exceed the minimum bend radius and maximum allowable bends as specified by the manufacturer. 4. Change in direction shall be gradual enough to allow flexible piping to bend without crimping, distorting or reducing internal diameter. 2.3 SPRINKLERS A. Replace any existing sprinkler that has signs of leakage, paint applied (other than by the sprinkler manufacturer), corrosion, damage, or loading; or is installed in the improper orientation. Provide new sprinkler with identical K - Factor, temperature rating, and response type as the existing. B. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide UL Listed or FM Approved automatic sprinklers. Provide sprinklers with nominal K -factor as indicated on Contract Documents. Sidewall sprinklers are not acceptable, unless noted otherwise. Provide the following sprinkler types: 1. Areas With Exposed Structure Above: Upright or pendent sprinkler, bronze. 2. Areas With Gypsum Board Ceilings: Pendent sprinkler, white, with two-piece white escutcheon plate. 3. Areas With Lay -in Ceilings: Pendent sprinkler, white, with two-piece semi -recessed white escutcheon plate. C. Standard Sprinklers: Tyco Fire Products sprinklers and sprinkler accessories must be provided unless noted otherwise in the contract documents. 1. Glass bulb sprinklers are acceptable. 2. Sprinklers with O -rings not permitted. 3. Substitutions: Not Permitted. D. For projects that require seismic bracing, install ceiling sprinklers per one of the following: 1. Install sprinklers with flexible piping 2. Provide one inch clearance around sprinkler. Cover the larger opening by installing either a Recessed Canopy Coverage Extension or Kydex Ring by Fire Protection. 13900-5 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Control Valve Supervisory Switches: 1. Provide new post indicator valves with tamper switches, Model No. PCVS-2, as manufactured by Potter Electric Signal of St. Louis, Missouri. Owner will connect to alarm system. 2. Provide new outside screw and yoke valves with tamper switches, Model No. OSYSU-2 as manufactured by Potter Electric Signal of St. Louis, Missouri. Owner will connect to alarm system. 3. Provide new ball type control valves leading to alarm initiating devices, Model No. RBVS, as manufactured by Potter Electric Signal of St. Louis, Missouri. Owner will connect to alarm system. 4. All other new valves capable of controlling water to the Fire Protection Sprinkler systems shall have appropriate tamper switches. Owner will connect to alarm system. B. Wire Cage Sprinkler Guards: 1. Provide guards on pendent sprinklers located within T-6" of finished floor, except for recessed and concealed sprinklers. 2. Provide guards on sprinklers located beneath overhead doors. C. Automatic Air Vent: Provide one automatic venting air vent on each wet pipe sprinkler system, as manufactured by Engineered Corrosion Solutions Model Ejector Automatic Air Vent or SouthTek Model Dual Vent Oz Release System. D. Substitutions: Not permitted. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Install system and equipment in accordance with NFPA 13 and manufacturer's instructions. B. Replace with an identical K -Factor, temperature rating, and response -type any sprinkler that has signs of leakage, paint applied other than by the sprinkler manufacturer, corrosion, damage, or loading; or is installed in the improper orientation. 3.2 INSTALLATION - ABOVE GROUND PIPING A. Provide piping in accordance with NFPA 13. B. Locate top beam clamp or thru bolt connection near joist panel points per pipe support detail. C. Provide piping to conserve building space. Do not interfere with use of building space and other work. D. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations. E. Prepare pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories for finish painting. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding. Protect sprinkler to ensure sprinklers do not receive field paint. Remove protective covering after painting. Replace sprinklers having paint other than factory finish with new sprinklers. Cleaning and reuse of painted sprinklers is prohibited. F. Examine other work indicated on the Drawings and conditions at job site. Coordinate routing of work with other construction trades to avoid interference with other installations. Do not cut building structural members, beams, joists, etc. for routing of sprinkler piping. G. Seal pipe penetrations through fire rated walls or floors to achieve fire resistance equivalent to fire separation required. H. Provide wall plates at all pipe penetrations. Provide zinc coated (galvanized) wall plates at exterior penetrations. I. Provide zinc coated (galvanized) all -thread rod for hanging dry system piping. 13900-6 Provide valves with stems upright or horizontal. K. Route piping and locate sprinklers as required to avoid building structure, equipment, plumbing piping, heating and air conditioning piping, ductwork, lighting fixtures, electrical conduits and bus ducts, and similar work. Locate center of sprinkler a minimum of 6 inches off ceiling grid. 1. Final location of lighting and exposed ductwork shall have priority over pipe routing and final sprinkler locations. 2. Sprinkler piping in sales area without a ceiling and stockroom shall be located above bottom of joists. Minimum height of sprinkler piping in areas with ceilings shall be 1'-0" above ceiling. L. Provide pressure relief valves on gridded wet pipe systems. M. Provide protection from freezing for sprinkler piping exposed to freezing conditions per Contract Documents and NFPA 13. N. Provide valves, backflow prevention devices, check valves, automatic air vents, and drains per Contract Documents and Authorities Having Jurisdiction. 1. Install automatic air vents at accessible locations shown on Contract Documents. Install vent at the highest point possible on each system. Accessible locations are above areas without ceilings and areas with access panels. Areas above lay -in ceilings are not considered accessible. O. Use full lengths of pipe except where needed to accommodate changes in direction or for space limitations. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. General: Contractor shall schedule, coordinate and conduct all tests required by Authorities Having Jurisdiction and Owner's Fire Protection Consultant. Contractor shall modify, replace or retest as required by Authorities Having Jurisdiction and / or Owner's Fire Protection Consultant. B. Flush, test, and inspect sprinkler system according to NFPA 13 "Systems Acceptance" Chapter. Test the systems, including the underground water mains, and the aboveground piping and components to assure that equipment and components function as intended. Pressure test the systems in accordance with NFPA 13 and NFPA 24. The Contractor shall have available copies of as -built drawings. C. Fire Sprinkler System Construction Follow Up: Owner's Fire Protection Consultant (as specified in Section 01330) will conduct a Pre Construction Conference Call. The purpose of the Pre Construction Conference call is to review status of project, notify contractor of status of approvals, and review project expectations. 1. Pre Construction Conference Call: The Contractor shall contact Owner's Fire Protection Consultant within 2 days after Contract Award to schedule the Pre Construction Conference Call with the Contractor, Fire Sprinkler Contractor, and Fire Pump Vendor (if applicable). The conference call will be held within 7 days after Award. 2. After installation of all components, provide a Letter of Completion to Owner's Fire Protection Consultant. The Letter must state the date that the installation is in substantial conformance with Contract Documents and be signed by representatives from the Fire Sprinkler Contractor and Contractor. Additional documentation must be provided to the Fire Protection Consultant upon request, including photographs or Certificate of Occupancy. D. Prior to interior store finishing, test existing and new above ground pressure piping for leakage in presence of Authority Having Jurisdiction and Owner's representative. Maintain test pressure at the high end for two hours. Test pressure: 200 psi or 50 psi over normal operating pressure, whichever is greater. Conduct test in accordance with NFPA 13, Hydrostatic Tests. Submit documentation per Contract Closeout Submittals of this section and 01770. E. Provide a copy of the fire sprinkler permit indicating completion of the scope of work shown on contract documents and acceptance by the Authority Having Jurisdiction. 13900-7 13900-8 UniSpec II Store Planning 112219 SECTION 15050 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Hangers and Supports: Pipe supports. 2. Mechanical equipment labels B. Related Section: 1. Section 13900 - Fire Suppression: Fire Protection Sprinkler system piping. 2. Section 15100 - Building Services Piping: Domestic water, reverse osmosis, sanitary drain and vent, interior storm water, and condensate piping. Piping Insulation. Pipe freeze protection. 1.2 REFERENCES A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced within the text by the basic designation only. B. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): 1. ASME B31.9 — Building Services Piping. C. Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute (CISPI): 1. Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook. D. Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Value and Fittings Industry Inc. (MSS): 1. MSS SP — 69 — Pipe Hangers and Supports — Selection and Application. 2. MSS SP — 89 — Pipe Hangers and Supports — Fabrication and Installation Practices. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with rules and regulations of public utilities and municipal department affected by connection of services. B. Laws, codes, and ordinances shall take precedence except where work called for by Drawings and Specifications exceeds code requirements in quality or quantity. 1.4 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and Specifications show pipe and duct sizes, general routing and location, and describe various systems. These documents describe equipment, including size, general location, usage, support, and auxiliary requirements. Contract Documents do not, however, detail certain job requirements. Drawings are intended to cover layout and design of the Work and are not to be scaled for exact measurements. Where specific detail and dimension for mechanical Work are not shown on Drawings, take measurements and make layouts as required for proper installation of mechanical Work in coordination with other Work on project. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Follow manufacturer's published directions in the delivery, storage, protection, installation, piping, and wiring, and start-up of equipment and materials. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Pipe Hanger Schedule: Pipe hangers, except for fire suppression piping, shall be as specified in Schedule I at the end of this Section. Trapeze hangers for multiple parallel pipes shall be installed as shown on the drawings. 15050-1 B. Hangers and supports for fire suppression piping shall be as shown on the drawings. C. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 Inches: Steel riser clamp. D. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 Inches and Over: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp, adjustable steel yoke and cast iron roll for hot pipe sizes 6 inches and over. E. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp. F. Provide copper plated hangers and supports for uninsulated copper piping. Provide plastic inserts for uninsulated copper piping penetrating metals studs. 2.2 EQUIPMENT LABELS A. Provide label for each type of mechanical equipment installed on the project. B. Provide equipment labels as specified below unless otherwise required in the individual sections for the specific piece of equipment specified. C. Labels: 1. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving 1/16 thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware. 2. Letter Color: White. 3. Background Color: Black. 4. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch. 5. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering. 6. Attachment: Either of the following a. Fasteners: Stainless-steel self -tapping screws. b. Adhesive: Contact -type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate. D. Asset Tags: Equipment OEMs will provide equipment with Walmart asset tags installed. 1. Data Collection Application: Utilize the QR code below for the link to download the Asset Data Collection App. 2. Asset information: Using the Asset Data Collection App, scan the asset tag of new equipment. Input the store number and data as prompted in the Asset Data Collection App. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Support pipes throughout building, both horizontally and vertically in accordance with requirements herein and as shown on the drawings. Attach to building structure overhead as shown on drawings. Do not attach to ceilings, equipment, ductwork, conduit, floor, roof decking, or any other non-structural elements. Do not use fasteners which penetrate the roof deck. 1. Provide sway bracing if required to comply with code seismic requirements. 15050-2 B. In areas without ceilings, secure insulation shields to insulation with pressure sensitive tape at each end of shield. C. Hangers for PEX or polypropylene (PP) pipe shall be suitable for the type of pipe used and designed to prevent gouging of the pipe. Verify with manufacturer of the hangers and/or clamps that hanger or clamp products are compatible with PEX or PP piping. Fasteners shall be approved by the pipe manufacturer. D. Hanger and clamps sizing: 1. Cold Piping: Provide pipe hangers sized for the pipe outside diameter plus insulation thickness. 2. Hot Piping: Provide pipe hangers sized for the pipe outside diameter. 3. Vertical Piping: Provide clamps sized for the pipe outside diameter and extend clamp through insulation. 4. Refer to Section 15100 for definition of hot and cold piping and required insulation thickness. E. Piping Support Spacing: Support horizontal piping above slab, except fire suppression piping, as shown in Schedules I -III at the end of this Section. 1. Support fire suppression piping at spacing as shown on the Fire Protection (FP) drawings. F. Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch clear space between finished covering and adjacent work. G. Support piping within 12 inches of each elbow or tee. H. Support vertical pipe runs at roof, at floor, and at maximum 10 -foot intervals. I. Space supports not more than five feet apart at valves, strainers or piping accessories larger than 2 inches. J. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units. Provide expansion devices as required for the specific piping material used. K. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other accessories. Provide two nuts on threaded supports to securely fasten the support. L. Comply with the requirements of Section 09900 for field painting and touch-up. 3.2 ADJUSTING A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe. B. Load Distribution: Adjust hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment. C. Pipe Slopes: Adjust hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and to not exceed maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping. D. Trim excess length of continuous -thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inch. 3.3 OPERATION PRIOR TO ACCEPTANCE A. Contractor may operate any equipment provided that the operation is supervised and the Contractor retains full responsibility for properly maintaining equipment and the full manufacturers warranty remains unaffected from the time of Owner's possession. 3.4 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION A. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment. B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible. 15050-3 C. Where equipment, such as VAV boxes, is concealed by accessible drop or lay -in ceilings or other accessible barrier, attach label to ceiling grid or a visible location to identify location of hidden equipment. 3.5 SCHEDULES: Schedules below apply to all piping, except fire suppression piping, hung inside the building. SCHEDULE I - PIPE HANGER SCHEDULE Pipe Service Pipe Size Hanger Type B -Line No. Globe No. Grinnell No. PHD CPVC (PP) Uninsulated 2" & smaller Split Ring B-3173 with B-3224 721 108 with 114 500 with 114 Steel or PVC Piping Only 6' max up to 5' max, except may be 10' max where 10' or CPVC 2-1/2" & larger Clevis B-3100 404/407 260 450 1" 1-1/2" I.D. to 1" I.D. Uninsulated 2" & smaller Ring B -3170 -CT 301 CT 99 152 Copper 2-1/2" & larger Clevis B -3104 -CT 407 CT 65 442 other joint. other other Cast Iron Soil Pipe All Clevis B-3102 404 260 420 Insulated Steel, PVC, PEX, or PP 2" & smaller, 2 1/2" & larger Clevis B-3100 with shield 404 with shield 260 with shield 450 with shield Insulated ABS (Glycol Refrigeration Piping Only) 2" & smaller, 2 1/2" & larger Clevis B-3100 with shield 404 with shield 260 with shield 450 with shield 2" & smaller Clevis B-3104 with shield 411 with shield CT 65 with shield 442 with shield Insulated Copper 2 1/2" & larger Clevis B-3100 with shield 408 with shield 260 with shield 442 with shield SCHEDULE II - PIPING SUPPORT SCHEDULE Maximum Spacing In Feet Copper Steel Cast Iron PVC PEX Polypropylene ABS (Glycol CPVC (PP) Refrigeration Piping Only 6' max up to 5' max, except may be 10' max where 10' 32" max 32" max up to 3' max up to 3' max up 1-1/4" I.D. 12' lengths are installed. 1" 1-1/2" I.D. to 1" I.D. 4' max 10' max all max Min one hanger at each 4' max all 4' max all 4' max all other joint. other other other END OF SECTION 15050-4 UniSpec -Store Planning 032720 SECTION 15100 - BUILDING SERVICES PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Under -building slab and aboveground domestic water pipes, tubes, fittings, and specialties inside the building. 2. Sanitary waste and vent piping. 3. Water piping and drain piping specialties. 4. Pipe freeze protection. 5. Connection of miscellaneous equipment furnished under other Sections. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Preservative pressure treatment for wood blocking pipe supports. 2. Section 15050 - Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods: Piping hangers and supports. 1.2 REFERENCES A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only. B. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): 1. ASME A13.1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems. C. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): I . ANSI B16.18 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings. 2. ANSI B16.22 - Wrought Copper & Copper Alloy Solder -Joint Pressure. D. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE): 1. ASHRAE 90.1 - Energy Efficient Design of New Buildings Except New Low -Rise Residential Buildings. E. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. ASTM A53 - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot -Dipped, Zinc -Coated, Welded and Seamless. 2. ASTM A74 - Hub and Spigot Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings. 3. ASTM A536 - Ductile Iron Castings. 4. ASTM A861 - High -Silicon Iron Pipe and Fittings. 5. ASTM A888 - Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings. 6. ASTM B75 - Seamless Copper Tube. 7. ASTM B88 - Seamless Copper Water Tube. 8. ASTM B135 - Seamless Brass Tube. 9. ASTM B306 - Copper Drainage Tube (DWV). 10. ASTM B584 - Copper Alloy Sand Castings for General Applications. 11. ASTM C564 - Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings. 12. ASTM C921 - Determining the Properties of Jacketing Materials for Thermal Insulation. 13. ASTM C1277 - Shielded Couplings Joining Hubless Castiron Soil Pipe and Fittings. 14. ASTM C1540 - Heavy Duty Shielded Couplings Joining Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings. 15. ASTM D1785 - Poly vinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120. 16. ASTM D2000 - Standard Classification System for Rubber Products in Automotive Applications. 17. ASTM D2467- Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80. 18. ASTM D2564 - Solvent Cements for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings. 19. ASTM D2609 - Plastic Insert Fittings for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe. 20. ASTM D2665 - Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe and Fittings 21. ASTM D2855 - Making Solvent -Cemented Joints with Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe and Fittings. 22. ASTM D3311 - Drain, Waste, and Vent (DWV) Plastic Fittings Patterns 15100-1 23. ASTM E84 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 24. ASTM E96 - Water Vapor Transmission Materials. 25. ASTM F439 - Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80. 26. ASTM F441 - Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40 And 80. 27. ASTM F493 - Solvent Cements for CPVC Pipe and Fittings. 28. ASTM F656 - Primers For Use in Solvents Cement Joints of Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings. 29. ASTM F876 - Crosslinked Polyethylene (PEX) Tubing. 30. ASTM F877 - Crosslinked Polyethylene (PEX) Plastic Hot and Cold Water Distribution Systems. 31. ASTM F 1807 - Metal Insert Fittings Utilizing a Copper Crimp Ring for SDR9 Cross-linked Polyethylene (PEX) tubing. 32. ASTM F1960 - Cold Expansion Fittings with PEX Reinforcing Rings for Use with Cross-linked Polyethylene (PEX) Tubing. 33. ASTM F2014 - Non -Reinforced Extruded Tee Connections for Piping Applications. 34. ASTM F2023 - Standard Test Method for Evaluating the Oxidative Resistance of Plastic Piping to Hot Chlorinated Water. 35. ASTM F2098 - Stainless Steel Clamps for Securing SDR9 Cross-linked Polyethylene (PEX) Tubing to Metal Insert Fittings. 36. ASTM -172389 - Pressure -rated Polypropylene (PP) Piping Systems. F. American Water Works Association (AWWA): 1. AWWA C104 - Cement -Mortar Lining for Ductile -Iron Pipe and Fittings for Water. 2. AWWA C115 - Flanged Ductile -Iron Pipe with Ductile -Iron or Gray -Iron Threaded Flanges. 3. AWWA C151 - Ductile -Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast. 4. AWWA C651 - Disinfecting Water Mains. G. CSA Group (Canadian Standards Association) 1. CSA B137.11 - Polypropylene (PP -R) Pipe and Fittings for Pressure Applications. H. Hydraulic Institute (HI): 1. HI M103 (ANSI/HI 1.4) - Centrifugal Operations. I. International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials (IAPMO) 1. IAPMO/ANSI Z1001- Prefabricated Gravity Grease Interceptors. NSF International (NSF): 1. NSF 14- Plastic Piping System Components and Related Materials. 2. NSF 51 - Food Equipment Materials 3. NSF 61 - Drinking Water System Components -Health Effects. 4. NSF 61 Annex G - Weighted Average Lead Content Evaluation Procedure to a 0.24 Percent Lead Requirement. K. Plumbing and Drainage Institute (PDI): 1. PDI WH 201- Water Hammer Arrestors. L. Underwriters Laboratories (UL): 1. UL 778 - Motor -Operated Water Pumps. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with the requirements of Section 01330. B. Product Data: Submit product data and installation details for grease interceptor to Authority Having Jurisdiction for approval. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and accessories. C. Water Samples: Submit to Authorities Having Jurisdiction in accordance with the requirements of Cleaning and Disinfection paragraph in Part 3. 15100-2 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following as described in the testing and inspection requirements in Part 3 below as a part of closeout submittals in accordance with Section 01770. 1. Video Inspection Report: Furnish one copy of Video Inspection Report to Owner's Construction Manager within one week after completion of inspection. 2. Certification: Provide statement of certification of the following: a. Statement of completion that Work is in accordance with specified requirements. b. Name and signature of General Contractor. C. Names and signatures of Video Inspection Contractor. 3. Polypropylene Pipe Warranty. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Domestic Water Supply Copper Piping Assembly Installer Qualifications: If Contractor provides any of the optional domestic water supply copper piping assembly systems specified in Part 2, Installer shall be a certified installer of system provided. B. Installers of polypropylene pipe shall be factory certified and trained by pipe manufacturer. Installers shall have certificates of training available for review. C. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Lead -Free Compliance: Domestic water piping and fittings, pumps, water piping specialties and specialty plumbing fixtures shall comply with the requirements of NSF 61 Annex G. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Transport and handle products in compliance with the requirements of Section 01600. B. Store and protect products in compliance with the requirements of Section 01600. C. Polypropylene piping shall remain in its UV resistant packaging until ready to be installed. If the piping is to be exposed to the sun for more than 30 days, take appropriate measures to protect the pipe from UV radiation. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Provide manufacturer's warranty for polypropylene pipe and fittings for 10 years to be free of defects in materials or manufacturing. B. Warranty shall cover labor and material costs of repairing or replacing defective materials and repairing any incidental damage caused by failure of the piping system due to defects in materials or manufacturing. C. Contractor shall submit to the manufacturer, the pressure/leak test documentation indicating that the system was tested and passed the manufacturer's pressure/leak test in order to receive the warranty from the manufacturer. Submit pressure test to manufacturer as required_ PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING A. Water Piping Above Grade: 1. Type "L" hard drawn, seamless copper water tube, ASTM B88. 2. Jointing: Join with wrought copper pressure fittings, ANSI B 16.22. Make joints using "lead free" solder and a non -corrosive, paste -type flux. Core solder is not permitted. Solder shall be solid string or wire type, ASTM B32 Alloy Sb -5, 95-5 Tin Antimony. Where soldered copper piping is connected to threaded brass piping, use cast brass adaptor. 15100-3 4. 5. 6. At Contractor's option, in lieu of a soldered copper piping system as specified above, any of the following copper pipe assembly systems may be used. a. CTS Copper Grooved Piping System by Victaulic Company of America: Copper tubing systems from 2 inch through 8 inch shall be installed using mechanical pipe couplings of a bolted type, with pressure -responsive gaskets and grooved end copper or bronze fittings. The CTS System shall include the following components: 1) Copper Tube: Type "L" hard drawn, seamless copper water tube, ASTM B88. 2) Mechanical Couplings: Style 606 rigid couplings 2 inch — 8 inch for copper consisting of a ductile iron cast housing, a synthetic rubber gasket of a pressure -responsive design, with plated nuts and bolts to secure unit together. 3) Coupling Housings: Ductile iron conforming to ASTM A536, Grade 65-45-12, with a copper color alkyd enamel paint coating. 4) Gaskets: Molded of Grade "E" EPDM synthetic rubber, conforming to ASTM D2000, designation 2CA615A25B24F17Z, and recommended for potable water service within the specified temperature range of —30 to +230 degrees F. Gaskets shall conform to the copper tube size (CTS) outside diameter and coupling housing inside diameter. 5) Flange Adapters: Style 641 adapters 2 inch - 6 inch, ductile iron ASTM A536, Grade 65-45- 12, engaging directly into roll grooved copper tube and fittings and bolting directly to ANSI Class 125 cast iron and Class 150 steel flanged components; installer shall provide standard flange bolts. 6) Fittings: Full flow copper fittings with grooves designed to accept Victaulic grooved end couplings. Fittings shall be copper per ASTM B75 alloy C12200; or bronze sand castings per ASTM B584 copper alloy CDA 844 (81-3-7-9) per ANSI B16.18. Use Style 47 dielectric waterways when connecting dissimilar metals in liquid systems. 7) Valves: Series 608 Butterfly valves, 2-1/2 inch — 6 inch, 300 psi, with grooved ends, cast bronze body to CDA -836 (85-5-5-5), rubber encapsulated ductile iron disc, ASTM A536, Grade 65-45-12. Bubble tight, dead-end or bi-directional service as required. b. Press -connect copper pipe fitting system by one of the following: 1) ProPress by ViM. 2) Xpress by Elkhart Products Corporation. 3) Pressystem by NIBCO. Mechanically formed tee fitting system by T -Drill Industries in accordance with ASTM F 2014. Crosslinked PE (PEX) Tubing: a. PEX Tube: Tube shall be tested and certified for potable water systems, and shall comply with ANSI/NSF Standard 14, ANSI/NSF Standard 61, and ASTM F876 and/or ASTM F877. Tube shall be labeled with the above certifications. b. Provide PEX tubing system by one of the following: 1) NIBCO, Inc 2) REHAU 3) Uponor (Formerly/Wirsbo) 4) Watts Water Technologies 5) Zurn Engineered Water Solutons C. Tube shall be white in color. d. Fittings: Lead free brass or copper fittings, copper crimp connectors, stainless steel clamp connectors and cold expansion sleeves shall be tested and certified for potable water systems and shall comply with one of the following Standards: ASTM F1807, ASTM F1960, ASTM F2098. e. PEX tube, brass or copper fittings and connectors shall be same manufacturer and assembled with the manufacturer's approved tools. The same connection method shall be used throughout the installation. Polypropylene (PP -RCT) Piping: a. Polypropylene (PP-RRCT) piping containing faser (a fiber layer to contain thermal expansion). b. Pipe shall be tested and certified for potable water systems, and shall comply with ANSI/NSF Standard 14, ANSI/NSF Standard 61, ASTM F2023, ASTM F2389 and ASTM D635. Pipe shall be labeled with the above certifications. C. PP pipe, fittings and adapters shall be by one manufacturer. Use only manufacturer approved heat fusion tools. d. Fittings: Connections and transition to other pipe material or types shall be made by manufacturer approved products and tools. e. General duty metallic valves (i.e., gate, globe, check, and ball, valves) are scheduled on the drawing. 15100-4 B. Water Piping Below Grade (Under Slab): 1. 1-1/2 Inches and Smaller: a. Crosslinked PE (PEX) tubing, ASTM F876 without joints beneath the slab. b. Type "K" soft copper without joints beneath slab. 2. 2 Inches and Larger: Type K hard drawn with brazed fittings. C. Insulation: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide insulation as manufactured by one of the following: a. CertainTeed. b. Imcoa (Nomaco K -Flex). C. Knauf. d. Owens-Corning. e. Johns Manville. f. Armacell. 2. Provide one of the following types of insulation throughout the project: a. Rigid Glass Fiber: Type ASJ/SSL, maximum k factor at 75 degrees F of 0.23 Btu-in/hr.f.sq ft, 3 lb/cu.ft density. Vapor barrier jacket shall be white kraft paper with glass fiber yarn, bonded to aluminized film conforming to ASTM C921, with a maximum moisture vapor transmission rate of 0.02 perm -inch in accordance with ASTM E96. Insulate fittings with PVC covers with glass fiber inserts. b. Polymer Foam Insulation: Arctictherm by Imcoa or equal. Maximum k factor at 75 degrees F of 0.25 Btu-in/hr.£sq ft, 1.5 lbs/cu. ft. density, maximum flame spread and smoke development of 25 and 50, respectively per ASTM E84. Insulate fittings with pre -formed foam covers. C. Elastomeric Flexible Closed Cell Insulation: AP Armaflex W (white) by Armacell or equal. Maximum k factor at 75 degrees F of 0.28 Btu-in/hr.£sq ft, maximum flame spread and smoke development of 25 and 50, respectively. Insulate fittings per manufacturer's recommendations. 3. Insulation Color: White. 4. Insulation Thickness: Provide minimum insulation thickness for water piping in compliance with IECC and ASHRAE 90.1 and the following: a. Hot Water: 1) Pipes 1-1/4 inch in diameter and less: 1 inch insulation. 2) Pipes 1-1/2 inch in diameter and greater: 1-1/2 inch insulation. b. Cold Water: 1/2 inch insulation. 2.2 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING A. Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: Provide any of the following as applicable: 1. PVC Pipe: May be used for sanitary drainage pipes (drain, waste, and vent) where permitted by Authority Having Jurisdiction. a. Solid -Wall PVC Pipe: ASTM D2665, drain, waste, and vent. Cellular (foam) core PVC not permitted. b. PVC Socket Fittings, ASTM D2665, made to ASTM D3311, drain, waste, and vent patterns. 2. Cast Iron: Cast iron soil pipe and fittings, coated inside and outside, ASTM A74 or ASTM A888. Provide weight of pipe as required by code for location and duty. 3. Ductile -Iron Pipe: AWWA C151 or AWWA C115 ductile -iron pipe, with AWWA C104 cement -mortar lining. 4. Copper Drainage Tubing (Above grade only): Copper drainage tubing conforming to ASTM B306. 5. ABS Pipe: Not Permitted. B. Joints: 1. Cast Iron Pipe: Push -on compression gasketed type joint for hub and spigot, ASTM C564. No -hub mechanical joints with center stops, ASTM C1277 or ASTM C1540. 2. PVC Pipe: Solvent -welded joints. 3. Copper Drainage Tubing: Join with wrought copper pressure fittings, ANSI B16.22. Make joints using "lead free" solder and a non -corrosive paste type flux. Core solder shall not be used. Solder shall be solid string or wire type. 15100-5 C. Traps: Provide deep seal P -traps for floor drains, including drains furnished as integral parts of floor -type mop basins, and similar fixtures. 2.3 SUMP AND OTHER PUMPS A. Subject to compliance with Project requirements, provide pumps of manufacturers, types, and model numbers as indicated on the PUMP SCHEDULES on the Drawings. B. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 778 for motor -operated water pumps. 2.4 WATER PIPING SPECIALITIES A. Subject to compliance with Project requirements, provide piping specialties of manufacturers, types, and model numbers as indicated on the Plumbing Schedules on the Drawings. Water piping specialties shall include such items as hose bibbs, hydrants, valves, vacuum breakers, mixing valves, pressure reducing (regulating) valves, expansion tanks and accessories. 2.5 SPECIALTY PLUMBING FIXTURE. A. Subject to compliance with Project requirements, provide plumbing fixture specialties of manufacturers, types, and model numbers as indicated on the SPECIALTY PLUMBING FIXTURE SCHEDULE on the Drawings. Plumbing fixture specialties shall include such items as backflow preventers, water hammer arresters, trap primers, and ball valves 2.6 DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALITIES A. Subject to compliance with Project requirements, provide piping specialties of manufacturers, types, and model numbers as indicated on the Plumbing Schedules on the Drawings. Drainage piping specialties shall include floor and roof drains, deck drains, cleanouts and accessories. 2.7 PIPE FREEZE PROTECTION A. Pipe freeze protection system shall include the following: 1. Parallel circuit heating cable. 2. Transformers. 3. Outdoor ambient thermostat. 4. Junction boxes. 5. Branch circuit wiring and conduit as specified in Section 16100. 6. Other items as necessary to complete system. B. Components: 1. Heating Cable: Parallel circuit, jacketed cable, self-limiting, 120 volt. Provide XL -Trace as manufactured by Raychem/Tyco or CO Series by Delta -Therm. a. Provide minimum 5 watts per lineal foot (or more) as required for specified piping and insulation per manufacturer's published instructions. b. Provide termination fittings for direct connection to junction boxes. 2. Junction Boxes: NEMA 5 watertight. 3. Outdoor Ambient Thermostat: Provide thermostat with adjustable contacts. Set contacts to close at 40 degrees F on decreasing temperature. 2.8 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Reference Section 01600. 2.9 THERMOMETERS, GENERAL A. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of range span or plus or minus one scale division to maximum of 1.5 percent of range span. 15100-6 B. Scale range: Temperature ranges for services listed as follows: 1. Domestic Hot Water: 30 to 240 deg with 2 -degree scale divisions (0 to 115 deg C with 1 -degree scale divisions). 2. Domestic Cold Water: 0 to 100 deg F with 2 -degree scale divisions (minus 18 to 38 deg C with 1 -degree scale divisions). 3. Hot Water: 30 to 300 deg with 2 -degree scale divisions (0 to 150 deg C with 1 -degree scale divisions). 4. Condenser Water: 0 to 160 deg F with 2 -degree scale divisions (minus 18 to 70 deg C with 1 -degree scale divisions). 5. Chilled Water: 0 to 100 deg F with 2 -degree scale divisions (minus 18 to 38 deg C with 1 -degree scale divisions). 2.10 GLASS TUBE INDUSTRIAL THERMOMETERS A. Case: Die cast, aluminum finished, in baked epoxy enamel, glass front, spring secured, 9 inches long. B. Adjustable Joint: Finished to match case, 180 -degree adjustment in vertical plane, 360 -degree adjustment in horizontal plane, with locking device. C. Tube: Non -red color reading, non-toxic organic spirit -filled glass tube, magnifying lens. D. Scale: Satin -faced, non -reflective aluminum, with permanently etched markings. E. Stem: Copper -plated steel, aluminum or brass, for separable socket, length to suit installation. 2.11 THERMOMETER WELLS A. Thermometer Wells: Brass or stainless steel, pressure rated to match piping system design pressure; with 2 -inch extension for insulated piping and threaded cap nut with chain permanently fastened to well and cap. B. Thermometer Wells: Install in piping tee where thermometers are indicated, in vertical position. Fill well with oil or graphite and secure cap. 2.12 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Glass Tube Industrial Thermometers: a. H. O. Trerice Co., http://www.trerice.com/temperature.asp b. Marsh Bellofram Group, http://www.marshbellofram.com/marsh/products/industrial-thermometer/ C. http://www.miljoco.com/thermometers/industrial-thermometers/ d. Weiss Instruments, Inc. http://www.weissinstruments.com/industrial-glass-thermometers.html e. Weksler Instruments Corp. http://www.weksler.com/ f. Winters Instruments http://www.winters.com/ PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PIPING INSTALLATION A. Install piping and accessories at locations and of sizes shown on the drawings. B. Install proprietary piping systems, accessories, and products in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions. C. Connect piping and fittings in accordance with manufacturer's instructions using specialty tools as required and recommended by the manufacturer. D. Install piping neatly and parallel with, or perpendicular to, lines of the structure. Install pipe hangers as specified in Section 15050 to maintain accurately aligned piping systems, adequately supported both laterally and vertically. 15100-7 E. Backfill and compact trenches for piping below the slab per Section 02320. F. Provide Schedule 40 steel pipe sleeve, minimum of one size larger than the protected pipe, for underground piping routed beneath structural footings. Extend sleeve 24 inches in both directions beyond the footing. G. Where practical, connect two or more vents together and extend as one vent through roof. Make vent connections to stacks by appropriate use of 45 degree wyes, long sweep quarter bends, sixth, eighth, or sixteenth bends, except that sanitary tees may be used on the vertical stacks. H. Extend vent piping 12 inches above roof line or more if required by Authority Having Jurisdiction. Coordinate installation with roofing. I. Conceal piping in chases, interior walls, furred spaces, and above ceiling. Identify nonpotable water systems by color markings or metal tags in accordance with ASME A13.1. K. Make piping connections to fixtures and equipment with chrome -plated seamless brass tube with cleanout plug and escutcheon. L. For items to be installed on split face CMU, grind surface of CMU to a smooth finish for tight installation. Seal with silicone sealant in accordance with Section 07900. M. PEX Domestic Water Tubing: 1. Install piping similar to copper piping as shown on drawings. Do not use manifold system. 2. Protect tubing from UV radiation during pre -installation storage and after installation. 3. Provide adequate tubing length for contraction and expansion of tubing. 4. Tubing may be bundled. Do not bundle cold water lines with hot water or hot water return lines. 5. Protect tubing routed through metal studs with grommets or sleeves at each stud. 6. Do not install PEX tubing in masonry walls. 7. Install type "L" copper pipe at the inlet and outlet of the water heater, minimum 18 inches long. 8. Utilize water hammer arrestors as specified for the copper tube system. 9. Tubing sizes shall be as shown on the Equivalent Pipe Size Schedule on the drawings. 10. Coordinate PEX to plumbing fixture fittings with the furnished fixture accessories. a. Use copper stub -outs and stub -out brackets secured to wall for fixtures furnished with compression stops. b. Do not use PEX for flush valves. 11. Provide recommended methods for controlling thermal expansion in hot water piping for straight runs every 50 feet. N. Polypropylene (PP -RCT) 1. Install piping similar to copper piping as shown on drawings. a. Install polypropylene (PP -RCT) piping containing faser (a fiber layer to contain thermal expansion) SDR 7.4 for hot water and hot water return piping. Do not install copper tube in polypropylene hot water and hot water return systems. b. Install polypropylene (PP -RCT) piping SDR 11 for cold water piping. 2. Store piping and fittings in factory -issued protective bag until immediately prior to installation to protect the pipe from dust, scratches and UV radiation damage. 3. Utilize water hammer arrestors as specified for the copper pipe system. 4. Pipe sizes shall be as shown on the Equivalent Pipe Size Schedule on the drawings. 5. Coordinate piping to plumbing fixture fittings with the furnished fixture accessories. a. Use copper stub -outs and stub -out brackets secured to wall for fixtures furnished with compression stops. b. Use manufacturer's threaded fittings for connections to flush valves. 6. Fusion Welding of Joints a. Install fittings and joints using socket -fusion, electrofusion, or butt -fusion as applicable for the fitting type. b. Fusion -weld tooling, welding machines, and electrofusion devices shall be as specified by the pipe and fittings manufacturer. 15100-8 C. Prior to joining, the pipe and fittings shall be prepared in accordance with F 2389 and the manufacturer's specifications. d. Joint preparation, setting and alignment, fusion process, cooling times and working pressure shall be in accordance with the pipe and fitting manufacturer's specifications 7. Provide recommended methods for controlling thermal expansion in hot water piping for straight runs every 120 feet. 3.2 PIPING INSULATION - INSTALLATION A. Domestic Hot and Cold Water Lines: Insulate lines above slab. 3.3 PUMP INSTALLATION A. Install pumps where shown on the drawings and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Pump Installation Standard: Comply with HI M103 for installation of sump and domestic water pumps. 3.4 WATER PIPING SPECIALITIES INSTALLATION A. Install backflow preventers in each water supply to mechanical equipment and systems and to other equipment where shown and water systems that may be sources of contamination. Comply with Authorities Having Jurisdiction. 1. Locate backflow preventers in same room as connected equipment or system. 2. Install drain for backflow preventers with atmospheric -vent drain connection with air -gap fitting, fixed air - gap fitting, or equivalent positive pipe separation of at least two pipe diameters in drain piping and pipe to floor drain. Locate air -gap device attached to or under backflow preventer. Simple air breaks are not acceptable for this application. 3. Do not install bypass piping around backflow preventers. B. Install water regulators with inlet and outlet shutoff valves. Install pressure gages on inlet and outlet. C. Install balancing valves in locations where they can easily be adjusted. D. Install temperature -actuated water mixing valves with check stops or shutoff valves on inlets and with shutoff valve on outlet. 1. Install thermometers and water regulators if specified. 2. Install cabinet -type units recessed in or surface mounted on wall as specified. E. Install Y -pattern strainers for water on supply side of each control valves and pressure -reducing valves. F. Install water hammer arresters in water piping according to PDI -WH 201. G. Install supply -type, trap -seal primer valves with outlet piping pitched down toward drain trap a minimum of 1 percent, and connect to floor -drain body, trap, or inlet fitting. Adjust valve for proper flow. H. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping and specialties. 3.5 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING A. Equipment Nameplates (for new equipment): Manufacturer's standard 3/32 inch thick black plastic laminate nameplates with 5/32 inch holes for fasteners. Provide nameplates and signs no smaller than 1-1/2 inches square. 1. Provide engraved white lettering indicating piping system abbreviation in characters 1/4 inch high and sequenced valve numbers in characters 1/2 inch high. B. Signs: In addition to identifying unit, provide signs which distinguish among multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operation. 15100-9 C. Install equipment nameplate or sign on or near each of the following new items: 1. Intermediate atmospheric -vent backflow preventers. 2. Reduced -pressure -principle backflow preventers. 3. Double-check backflow -prevention assemblies. 4. Water pressure -reducing valves. 5. Primary, thermostatic, water mixing valves. 6. Supply -type, trap -seal primer valves. 3.6 DRAIN PIPING SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION A. Install backwater valves in building drain piping. For interior installation, provide cleanout deck plate flush with floor and centered over backwater valve cover, and of adequate size to remove valve cover for servicing. B. For floor cleanouts for piping below floors, install cleanout deck plates with top flush with finished floor. C. For cleanouts located in concealed piping, install cleanout wall access covers, of types indicated, with frame and cover flush with finished wall. D. Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of drains flush with finished floor, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Position floor drains for easy access and maintenance. 2. Install floor -drain flashing collar or flange so no leakage occurs between drain and adjoining flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated. 3. Install individual traps for floor drains connected to sanitary building drain, unless otherwise indicated. E. Install deep -seal traps on floor drains and other waste outlets, if indicated. F. Install floor -drain, trap -seal primer fittings on inlet to floor drains that require trap -seal primer connection. 1. Exception: Fitting may be omitted if trap has trap -seal primer connection. 2. Size: Same as floor drain inlet. G. Install air -gap fittings on draining -type backflow preventers and on indirect -waste piping discharge into sanitary drainage system. H. Install traps on plumbing specialty drain outlets. Omit traps on indirect wastes unless trap is indicated. I. Install escutcheons at wall, floor, and ceiling penetrations in exposed finished locations and within cabinets and millwork. Use deep -pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding pipe fittings. 3.7 PIPE FREEZE PROTECTION A. Install heating cable at locations shown on drawings for pipe freeze protection. B. Cut heating cable to length required for pipe lengths and watt per foot requirements. Secure to pipe and install in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions. 3.8 CLEANING AND DISINFECTION A. Clean and disinfect potable domestic water piping as follows: 1. Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired before using. 2. Use purging and disinfecting procedures prescribed by Authorities Having Jurisdiction. If methods are not prescribed, use procedures described in AWWA C651 or follow procedures described as follows: a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at outlets. b. Fill and isolate system according to either of the following: 1) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 50 ppm of chlorine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand for 24 hours. 2) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 200 ppm of chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for three hours. 15100-10 C. After the standing time, flush system with clean, potable water until the chlorine is purged from the system. B. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to Authorities Having Jurisdiction. Repeat procedures if biological examination shows contamination. C. Reports: Prepare disinfection reports signed by the Authority Having Jurisdiction and submit to Architect with Closeout Submittals. 3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Pipe Tests: 1. Test plumbing drainage systems under 10 foot static head for a period of not less than 24 hours. 2. Test water systems under 150 psig hydrostatic pressure. 3. Test underground piping prior to backfilling and before installing equipment and before insulation is applied, using specified methods and conditions. Subject piping to test for not less than 24 hours. Make necessary replacements or repairs and repeat tests until entire system, including equipment, is accepted as satisfactory. 4. Pressure test PEX piping systems in accordance with manufacturer's requirements. Do not exceed 150 psig. 5. Pressure test Polypropylene piping in accordance with manufacturer's Installation Manual. Submit pressure test to polypropylene manufacturer. 6. Install equipment, operate systems, clean out scale, dirt, oil, waste, and foreign matter, and correct additional leaks. 7. Test each reduced -pressure -principle backflow preventer and double-check backflow -prevention assembly according to Authorities Having Jurisdiction and the device's reference standard. 8. Pipe tests specified in this Section shall be to five feet outside building lines or to point of connection to exterior lines. Drains to oil/grease interceptor (separator) shall be tested to the point of the oil/grease interceptor outlet. B. Underground Piping Video Inspection (At the discretion of the Walmart Construction Manager) 1. General: Perform video inspection of underground sewer piping from the point of connection to the manhole outside the building through the mains and through the single takeoff to each fixture. 2. When there are problems with existing sewer piping, perform video inspection of existing sewer piping and coordinate repair of deficiencies with Owner's Construction Manager. An equitable adjustment will be made in the contract price for additional work directed and performed. 3. Video Inspection Contractor Qualifications: Specified in Part 1. 4. Video Inspection Certification: Provide video inspection certification as specified in Part 1. 5. Video Taping Requirements: a. Video camera designed for express purpose of sewer line inspection. b. Camera and apparatus capable of extending to all points of piping required within 2 inch to 8 inch diameter pipe. 6. Procedure: a. Inspect sewer pipes with video camera no earlier than 30 days after floor slab has been poured. Sections of sewer determined to be deficient shall be uncovered and repaired or replaced to satisfaction of Owner. Retest repaired section. b. Adequately flush and clean sewer piping prior to video inspection C. Provide additional video inspection at contractor's expense if there are clogging problems within the first year warranty and if requested by owner. 7. Video Inspection Report: a. Submit in accordance with requirements in Part 1. b. Submit bound report in MS Word format. C. Provide summary report of pipes inspected and defects noted d. Log shall show the exact measure location of faults such as, but not limited to: 1) Open joints. 2) Broken, cracked or collapsed pipe. 3) Accumulation of debris or obstructions. 4) Evidence of infiltration. 5) Water depth variation and sags. 6) Protrusions. 15100-11 e. The reference location shall include the distance away from the reference point of entry such as manhole or cleanout and the position of the fault as to the bottom, top or side of the pipe. f. Provide plan of piping network covered with notations. 3.10 ADJUSTING A. Set field -adjustable pressure set points of water pressure -reducing valves. B. Set field -adjustable flow of balancing valves. C. Set field -adjustable temperature set points of temperature -actuated water mixing valves. 3.11 PROTECTION A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt or debris and to prevent damage from traffic or construction work. B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops. END OF SECTION 15100-12 UniSpec II -Store Planning SECTION 15410 (22 4000) - PLUMBING FIXTURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Plumbing fixtures and plumbing fixture trim. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01770 —Contract Closeout: Operation and maintenance data requirements. 2. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers: Sealant for fixtures at wall and floors. 1.2 REFERENCES 072619 A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced within the text by the basic designation only. B. NSF International (NSF): 1. NSF 61 Annex G - Weighted Average Lead Content Evaluation Procedure to a 0.24 Percent Lead Requirement. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriter's Laboratories, Incorporated, and acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 2. Disabled Access: Conform to applicable local, State or Federal disabled access requirements for the installation, mounting heights, and operation of plumbing fixture. 3. Lead -Free Compliance: Fixtures and fixture trim shall comply with the requirements of NSF 61 Annex G for lavatories, sinks and water coolers. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Accept fixtures on site in factory packaging. Inspect for damage. B. Protect installed fixtures from damage by securing areas and by factory packaging in place to protect fixtures and prevent use. C. Transport, handle, store, and protect products in compliance with the requirements of Section 01600. D. Inspect materials delivered and reject those not qualifying with requirements, those damaged in transit, or those that appear otherwise unsatisfactory. E. Schedule delivery of items to installation areas that are in proper condition to receive them. Place items neatly and systematically to avoid damage, store in clean, dry, enclosed, and secure storage area. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with Project requirements, provide plumbing fixtures of manufacturers indicated on Drawings and by one of the following listed for that category. 15410-1 1. Stop Valves: a. Brass Craft Subsidiary; Masco Co. b. Engineered Brass Company C. McGuire Manufacturing Co., Inc. d. Watts Brass and Tubular e. Zurn Industries 2. P -traps, Strainers, Drains & Miscellaneous Fittings: a. Brass Craft Subsidiary; Masco Co. b. Dearborn Brass C. Engineered Brass Company d. McGuire Manufacturing Co., Inc. e. Watts Brass and Tubular f. Zurn Industries 3. Insulation Kits a. Brocar b. McGuire C. Plumberex d. Trap -Wrap e. Truebro, Inc. 2.2 FIXTURES A. Fixture types and model numbers shall be as scheduled on the drawings. 1. Substitutions: Not permitted. 2. Known Supplier: Haines, Jones & Cadbury. Contact: Customer Service (800) 459-7099, WMT(&hicinc.com. B. Lavatory Deck Assembly Fixture and Trim: Provide lavatory deck assembly and trim as supplied by the following: 1. Haines, Jones & Cadbury. Contact: Customer Service (800) 459-7099, WMT@hjcinc.com. 2.4 FIXTURE TRIM A. Provide each fixture complete with required trim. B. Exposed piping and trim shall be polished chrome -plated brass. C. Provide each fixture with chrome -plated brass, quarter -turn angle stop valves. D. P -Traps and Sink Continuous Wastes: Polished chrome -plated, tubular brass, 17 gauge, with brass nuts on slip inlets, and of configurations indicated. P -traps shall have cleanout plugs. E. Escutcheons: Interior; Polished chrome -plated with set screw. Exterior; 304 stainless steel, wall flange. F. Stainless Steel (SS) Braided Water Supply: Flexible braided stainless steel outer sheathing with reinforced PVC inner tubing. G. Provide flow-limiting device which limits flow to not more than 2.2 gpm for each sink except service and 3 - compartment sinks. Provide devices integral with fixture trim, wherever possible, and products of same manufacturer as fixture trim. H. Lavatory faucets for public use or within public restrooms shall be of the electronic self-closing type and shall have a maximum flow rate of 0.5 GPM in accordance with ASME/ANSI A 112.18.1. Provide devices integral with fixture trim, wherever possible, and products of same manufacturer as fixture trim. I. Flush Valves: Subject to compliance and compatible with plumbing fixtures as scheduled on the drawings. Provide flush valves that do not exceed code requirements for maximum gallons per flush. 15410-2 J. Provide trim as required to permit scheduled lavatory to be installed for handicap use. K. Provide bolt caps with retainer clips on water closets. L. When specified on plans, general contractor to provide faucets and sprayers for grocery hand sinks, three - compartment sinks, prep sinks and wash down stations. Contact the appropriate following manufacturer for parts numbers and local suppliers. 1. Universal Stainless, Cathy Kautzman (Universal), cathy.kautzman@spgusa.com, (303) 375-1511, ext. 3128. 2. Win -Holt, Louise Kennemer (Win -Holt), ikennemer@winholt.com, (800) 632-7222, ext. 1141. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine surfaces and adjacent areas where products will be installed. Verify that conditions conform to product manufacturer's requirements and installation conditions. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. Verify that walls and floor finishes are prepared and ready for installation of fixtures. 2. Verify that plumbing piping for fixture is in the correct location and of the correct type. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Rough -in fixture piping connections in accordance with minimum sizes indicated on Drawings for particular fixtures. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install fixtures and trim in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions. Make final connections. B. Support each fixture in rigid manner which permits no perceptible movement of fixture by manually applied forces. Seal space between fixtures and floor or walls with silicone sealant. C. Install trap on fixture outlet except for fixtures having integral trap. Install each fixture with trap which is easily removable for servicing and cleaning. D. Install components level and plumb. Install toilet seats on water closets. E. Install and secure fixtures in place with carriers and bolts. F. Solidly attach water closets to floor or wall as required. G. Seal fixtures to wall and floor surfaces with sealant as specified in Section 07900, color to match fixture. H. Install escutcheons at each wall, floor, and ceiling penetration in exposed finished locations and within cabinets and millwork. Use deep pattern escutcheons where required to conceal protruding pipe fittings. 1. Install insulation kits on ADA compliant sink and lavatory waste, continuous wastes, hot and cold water supplies where indicated on the drawings and as required by the ADA 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect plumbing fixture and trim installation, attachment to building, operation, and connections. Ensure that fixtures are installed and operate in conformance with disabled access requirements. 1. Prior to final acceptance, inspect faucets, flush valves, stop valves, and similar devices, to determine that they operate properly and discharge proper quantities of water. Correct any deficiencies as directed by Owner's representative. 15410-3 3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Operate and adjust stops or valves for intended water flow rate to fixtures without splashing, noise or overflow. 1. Replace malfunctioning units. 2. Replace washers and seals of leaking and dripping faucets and stops. B. Clean fixtures, trim, and accessories of foreign materials, including labels, before final acceptance. END OF SECTION 15410-4 UniSpec II -Store Planning 092719 SECTION 15800 - AIR DISTRIBUTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Ductwork, dampers, inlets and outlets for HVAC systems. 1.2 DEFINITION OF TERMS A. Work shall mean complete installation of equipment and devices in accordance with applicable Specifications and as described in the Drawings, Application Sheets, Manufacturer's Cut Sheets and Instructions. B. HVAC Contractor shall mean the General Contractor's, Subcontractor that is responsible for performing the HVAC work as specified on the construction documents. HVAC Contractor shall be responsible for compliance with applicable codes, ordinances, and work permits. 1.3 REFERENCES A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced within the text by the basic designation only. B. Air Movement and Control Association (AMCA): 1. AMCA 500-D — Laboratory Methods for Testing Dampers for Rating. 2. AMCA 500-L — Laboratory Methods for Testing Louvers for Rating. C. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. ASTM A653 - Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized), or Zinc -Iron Alloy -Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot Dip Process. 2. ASTM C553 - Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Commercial and Industrial Applications. 3. ASTM C1071 - Thermal and Acoustical Insulation (Mineral Fiber, Dust Lining Material). 4. ASTM C1136 - Flexible, Low Permeance Vapor Retarders for Thermal Insulation. 5. ASTM C 1290 - Flexible Fibrous Glass Blanket Insulation Used to Externally Insulate HVAC Ducts. 6. ASTM E84 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 7. ASTM E 96 - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials 8. ASTM E119 - Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. D. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. 2. NFPA 90B - Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air -Conditioning Systems 3. NFPA 96 - Ventilation Control And Fire Protection Of Commercial Cooking Operations. E. Sheet Metal Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA): 1. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal & Flexible. F. British Standards Institution (BSI): 1. BS 302 - Stranded Steel Wire Ropes. G. North American Insulation Manufacturer's Association (NAIMA): 1. AH 124 - Fibrous Glass Duct Liner Standard. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with NFPA 90A unless otherwise indicated. 15800-1 1.5 WARRANTY A. Warrant new and modified ductwork for period of one year from date of final acceptance of job, against noise and vibration under full range of operating conditions. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 SHEET METAL DUCTWORK A. Sheet Metal Ductwork: Continuous hot -dip mill galvanized, minimum coating of G90, lock -forming quality steel sheets, in accordance with ASTM A653. B. Gages: Sheet metal gage as specified in SMACNA 1035 but not less than the following: 1. Rectangular Duct: 26 gage for all sizes. 2. Round Duct: Prime grade steel sheets, by United Sheet Metal Co. Inc. or equivalent. a. 14 inch diameter and smaller: 26 gage. b. 15 inch diameter and larger: 24 gage. C. 27 inch diameter through 36 inch diameter: 22 gage. C. Round ductwork shall be spiral seam where exposed and not insulated on sales floor area and spiral or longitudinal seam in all other areas. D. Ductwork connections for round duct may be made using SpiralMate self-sealing duct connection system by Ductmate Industries (800) 245-3188. 2.2 DUCTWORK INSULATION A. Manufacturers: 1. CertainTeed. 2. Knauf. 3. Schuller (Manville). 4. Owens/Corning. B. Substitutions: Not permitted. C. Duct Liner: Fibrous -Glass complying with ASTM C 1071, NFPA 90A, or NFPA 9013; and NAIMA AH 124. 1. Mininum Thermal Conductivity: R -Value at 75 deg F mean temperature.. a. Type I, Flexible: R-3.7 per inch. b. Type II, Rigid: R=4.2 per inch. D. Duct Wrap: Mineral -fiber blanket insulation with factory applied FSK or vinyl jacket. Insulation shall be mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin, complying with ASTM C 553, Type II (for use on surfaces at temperatures up to 1700 deg. F) and ASTM C 1290. Factory -applied jackets shall conform to the following: 1. FSK Jacket: Aluminum -foil, fiberglass -reinforced scrim with kraft -paper backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II. 2. Vinyl Jacket: White vinyl with a permeance of 1.3 perms when tested according to ASTM E 96, Procedure A, and complying with NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B. 2.3 SELF-SEALING SPIRAL DUCTWORK SYSTEM (CONTRACTOR OPTION) A. General: 1. At the option of the Contractor, self-sealing ductwork system may be used in lieu of round built-up system. 2. Meet or exceed SMACNA's Leakage Class 3 requirements with no additional sealants. B. Manufacturer: 1. Lindab Inc., Stamford, CT (800) 797-7476. 15800-2 C. Round Spiral Sheet Metal Ductwork System: 1. SPIROsafe as manufactured by Lindab, Inc. 2. Duct: Galvanized, minimum coating designation of G90, lock -forming quality steel sheets, in accordance with ASTM A653. 3. Substitutions: Not permitted. D. Fittings: 1. SPIROsafe as manufactured by Lindab, Inc. 2. End gaskets EPDM rubber, factory installed, U -profile, double lipped. E. Control Dampers: SPIROsafe DSU as manufactured by Lindab, Inc. F. Supply Grilles: SPIROcomfort RGS-3 as manufactured by Lindab, Inc. 2.4 VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS A. Manual Dampers: Provide manual volume -control dampers where indicated and of the type and model number as scheduled on the drawings. Frame and blades shall be galvanized steel. Provide ceiling doors where required in accordance with Section 08311. 1. Manufacturers: Provide dampers by one of the following: a. A.E.S. Inc, East Tallassee, AL, Contact: Chad Burt (800) 786-0402. b. Sisneros Brothers Mfg, Contact: Joshua Gallegos (800) 499-0106. C. Ruskin Company, Kansas City, MO, (816) 761-7476. 2. Round Dampers: Dampers shall have end bearings and center locking control handle with position indicator. Control handle shall be Durodyne KL -7R, Durodyne SRST-2R or Ventlok 639 with 2 -inch extension to protect insulation. 3. Rectangular Dampers: Dampers shall have single blade or multiple inter -locked opposed blades with shaft bearings, 3/8 inch square control shaft and center locking control handle. Control handle shall be Durodyne KL7, Durodyne SRST-2R or Ventlok 639 with 2 -inch extension to protect insulation. B. Field fabricated dampers shall not be used. C. Substitutions: Not permitted unless otherwise specified. 2.5 FIRE DAMPERS A. Dampers: UL labeled, constructed and installed in accordance with NFPA 90A and UL instructions. Size dampers to provide free area equal to duct dimensions. B. Provide hanger design, and methods of hanging and supporting compatible with the structure. 2.6 AIR INLETS AND OUTLETS A. Grilles, registers, ceiling outlets, and ceiling inlets shall be as indicated on Drawings. Wall mounted and hard ceiling mounted air inlets and outlets shall be provided with heavy-duty sponge or soft felt gaskets. 2.7 HIGH TEMPERATURE SEALANT (FLUE SEALANT) A. Manufacturer: Provide high temp sealant as follows or equivalent: 1. RTV 4500 1 -Part Silicone Sealant by Silco, Inc. 2.8 DUCT SEALERS A. Manufacturer: Provide duct sealers of one of the following: 1. Kingco 11376 or 10526 by ITW Polymers Sealants North America (formerly ITW TACO). 2. Ductmate PROseal. 3. United McGill Duct -Sealer. 15800-3 4. Trans -Continental Equipment Co. (TCE) - MP Multipurpose Duct Sealant. 5. Hardcast #601 Iron -Grip. 6. Hardcast Aluma-Grip Tape. B. Substitutions: Not permitted. 2.9 WIRE ROPE HANGER SYSTEMS (CONTRACTOR OPTION). A. General: At the option of the Contractor, wire rope hanger system for ductwork may be used in lieu of conventional hangers. Hanger systems shall be approved in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards (HVAC -DCS) with a minimum load safety factor of 5:1. B. Manufacturer: One of the following: 1. Ductmate Industries, Charleroi, PA, (800) 245-3188. 2. Erico, Inc., Solon, OH (800) 462-4797. 3. Gripple, Inc., Batavia, IL., (630) 208- 0111. C. Wire Rope Hanger System: One of the following: 1. Clutcher Mechanical Hanger System by Ductmate. 2. Hang Fast Wire Rope Hanging System by Gripple. 3. Caddy Speed Link Universal Support System by Erico. D. Wire Rope: 1. Gripple: Zinc galvanized steel wire rope. Standard lengths of 5, 10, 15, and 30 feet with a preformed loop at one end. 2. Ductmate: Zinc coated steel aircraft quality rope, field cut to length. 3. Erico: Galvanized steel aircraft quality wire rope. Available in 3.3, 6.6, 9.9, 16.4, and 32.8 feet lengths with factory hook at one end. E. Locking Device: 1. Gripple Fastener: Zinc housing with stainless steel springs. 2. Ductmate: Clutcher cast zinc housing with stainless steel springs. 3. Erico: Stainless steel housing with all steel locking device. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 FABRICATION A. Fabrication requirements apply to new and modified ductwork. B. Fabricate, erect, and install ductwork for heating, ventilating, and air conditioning systems per SMACNA 1035 and the requirements of the Authority Having Jurisdiction. C. Make joints air tight on supply, return, and exhaust ducts. Seal transverse and longitudinal joints with duct sealer unless otherwise noted. Seal exhaust ducts with exterior seal as required to assure positive seal. Comply with SMACNA Duct Class A. 3.2 DUCT INSULATION A. Insulate ducts in accordance with SMACNA 1035. Do not insulate exhaust ductwork unless otherwise shown or specified. B. Rectangular Duct: 1. Supply duct and air plenums: 1-1/2 inch liner. 2. Return duct and air boots: 1-1/2 inch liner. 15800-4 C. Round Duct: 1. Insulate the following round duct with duct wrap: a. Supply and return duct in receiving areas. b. Supply and return duct above finished ceilings. 2. Duct Wrap Thickness: a. 2 -inch (R=6.0 minimum installed value). 3. Overlap facing and staple securely. 3.3 AIR INLETS AND OUTLETS A. Locations of outlets indicated on Drawings are approximate. Coordinate with other trades to make symmetrical patterns. Determine locations by established pattern of lighting fixtures, or architectural reflected ceiling plan. B. Install fire radiation dampers and other devices at air inlets and outlets where required by codes and regulations of governing authorities. Dampers shall be UL labeled, constructed and installed in accordance with NFPA 90A and UL instructions. 3.4 DUCT SUPPORTS A. Duct support requirements apply to new and modified ductwork. B. Support horizontal and vertical sheet metal duct work in accordance with Schedule I or II at the end of this section. C. Wire Rope Hanger System (Contractor Option): 1. Comply with manufacturers' load ratings and recommended installation procedures. 2. Comply with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards (DCS) with the following exceptions. a. Use is not restricted to the SMACNA DCS diametrical limits for single wires. b. Wire rope system shall not be used for hanging risers nor for two-tier trapeze hanging method. 3. Provide stress distribution saddles as required when a single wire rope is passed continuously under round and rectangular duct as required to retain duct shape 4. Support wire rope from the top chord of roof joists within 3" of panel points, or from 2 x 2 x 1/4 or 15/8 x 1 5/8 unistrut spanning the bottom chords and overhanging a minimum of 6" on each end. D. Do not use fasteners which penetrate roof deck. E. Provide sway bracing to comply with seismic requirements per local codes and Authority Having Jurisdiction. 3.5 FIRE DAMPERS A. Install approved fire dampers in air ducts or air inlets and outlets where required by codes and regulations of governing authorities. Install access doors in ducts at all fire dampers. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect work, equipment and material to prevent obstruction, damage or breakage. Close pipe openings with caps or plugs during installation. Cover and protect equipment against dirt, water, chemical or mechanical injury. At the completion of work, thoroughly clean all equipment and deliver the entire system in an unblemished condition. 15800-5 3.7 SCHEDULES SCHEDULE I — DUCT SUPPORT SCHEDULE MINIMUM HANGER SIZE RECTANGULAR DUCTWORK Maximum Half of Duct Perimeter* Pair- at 10 ft Spacing Pair at 8 ft spacing Pair at 5 ft spacing Pair at 4 ft spacing Strap Rod Stra Rod Strap Rod Strap Rod P/2=30" 1"x22ga 10 ga 1"x22ga 12ga 1"x22ga 12ga P/2 = 72" 1" x 18 ga 3/8" EF'x22g10ga 20 gall/4" 1" x 22 ga 1/4" 1" x 22 * Perimeter = Sum of Sides ROUND DUCTWORK Diameter Maximum Spacing Strap 24" and less 12' 1" x 22 ga 26"-36" 12' 1" x 20 ga 15800-6 SCHEDULE II - WIRE ROPE HANGER SYSTEM SCHEDULE - OPTION MINIMUM HANGER SIZE SQUARE/RECTANGULAR DUCTWORK Maximum Half of Single Loop at 10 ft Spacing Single Loop at 8 ft Spacing Single Loop at 5 ft Spacing Single Loop at 4 ft Spacing Duct Perimeter* Wt I Gripple I Ductmate I Erico Gripple Ductmate I Erico Gripple Ductmate I Erico I Gripple I Ductmate I Erico Y/G = 1L-- ).GU 1NO. L I 1N 0. 10 JLLGL 1NO. G I 1NO. lu = 3/64" .JLL/GL 1NO. G I 1N 0. 10 JLLGL 1NO. 1 I 1N 0. 10 JLL/GL P/2 = 16" 7.09 No. 2 No. 10 SLD2L No. 2 No. 10 SLD2L No. 2 No. 10 SLD2L No. 2 No. 10 SLD2L P/2 = 24" 10.62 No. 3 No. 10 SLD3L No. 2 No. 10 SLD2L No. 2 No. 10 SLD2L No. 2 No. 10 SLD2L P/2 = 32" 14.16 No. 3 No. 20 SLD3L No. 3 No. 10 SLD3L No. 2 No. 10 SLD2L No. 2 No. 10 SLD2L P/2 = 36" 15.94 No. 3 No. 20 SLD3L No. 3 No. 20 SLD3L No. 2 No. 10 SLD2L No. 2 No. 10 SLD2L P/2 = 48" 21.25 No. 4 No. 20 No. 3 No. 20 SLD3L No. 3 No. 10 SLD3L No. 2 No. 10 SLD2L P/2 = 56" 24.78 No. 4 No. 20 No. 4 No. 20 SLD3L No. 3 No. 10 SLD3L No. 2 No. 10 SLD2L P/2 = 60" 26.56 No. 4 No. 30 No. 4 No. 20 No. 3 No. 20 SLD3L No. 3 No. 10 SLD3L P/2 = 108" 47.81 No. 4 No. 30 No. 4 No. 30 No. 4 No. 20 No. 3 No. 20 SLD3L Maximum Half of Duct Perimeter* Pair at 10 ft Spacing Pair at 8 ft Spacing Pair at 5 ft Spacing Pair at 4 ft Spacing Wt (lbs/ft) Gripple Ductmate Erico Gripple Ductmate Erico Gripple Ductmate Erico Gripple Ductmate Erico P/2 = 12" 5.20 No. 2 No. 10 SLD2L No. 1 No. 10 SLD2L No. 1 No. 10 SLD2L No. 1 No. 10 SLD2L P/2 = 16" 7.09 No. 2 No. 10 SLD2L No. 2 No. 10 SLD2L No. 1 No. 10 SLD2L No. 1 No. 10 SLD2L P/2 = 20" 8.84 No. 2 No. 10 SLD2L No. 2 No. 10 SLD2L No. 2 No. 10 SLD2L No. 1 No. 10 SLD2L P/2 = 28" 12.40 No. 2 No. 10 SLD2L No. 2 No. 10 SLD2L No. 2 No. 10 SLD2L No. 2 No. 10 SLD2L P/2 = 48" 21.25 No. 3 No. 10 SLD3L No. 2 No. 10 SLD2L No. 2 No. 10 SLD2L No. 2 No. 10 SLD2L P/2 = 60" 26.56 No. 3 No. 20 SLD3L I No. 3 No. 10 SLD3L No. 2 No. 10 SLD2L No. 2 No. 10 SLD2L P/2 = 108" 47.81 No. 4 No. 20 No. 3 No. 20 SLD3L No. 3 No. 10 SLD3L No. 2 No. 10 SLD2L ROUND DUCTWORK Maximum Diameter Single Loop at 10 ft Spacing Single Loop at 8 ft Spacing Single Loop at 5 ft Spacing Wt lbs/ft Gripple Ductmate Erico Gripple Ductmate Erico Gripple Ductmate Erico 8" 6.7 No.2 No. 10 SLD2L No.2 No. 10 SLD2L No.2 No. 10 SLD2L 14" 11.7 No.3 No. 10 SLD3L No.2 No. 10 SLD2L No.2 No. 10 SLD2L 16" 13.4 No.3 No. 20 SLD3L No.3 No. 10 SLD3L No.2 No. 10 SLD2L 20" 16.7 No.3 No. 20 SLD3L No.3 No. 20 SLD3L No.2 No. 10 SLD2L 26" 21.7 No.4 No. 20 No.3 No. 20 SLD3L No.3 No. 10 SLD3L 32" 26.7 No.4 No. 20 No.4 No. 20 No.3 No. 20 SLD3L Maximum Diameter Pair at 10 ft Spacing Pair at 8 ft Spacing Pair at 5 ft Spacing Wt lbs/ft Gripple Ductmate Erico Gripple Ductmate Erico Gripple Ductmate Erico 20" 16.7 No.2 No. 10 SLD2L No.2 No. 10 SLD2L No.2 No. 10 SLD2L 26" 21.7 No.3 No. 10 SLD3L No.2 No. 10 SLD2L No.2 No. 10 SLD2L 32" 26.7 No.3 No. 20 SLD3L No.3 No. 10 SLD3L No.2 No. 10 SLD2L NOTES: 1. Schedule is based on 16 gauge maximum ductwork. 2. Hanger sizes are based on vertical hanging only. Refer to manufacturer's data for load limits of hangers at angles other than vertical. 3. Wire diameters are based on the following sizes: Gripple Ductmate Erico Size No. 1 = 3/64" No. 10 = 5/64" SLD2L = 0.079" = 5/64" Size No. 2 = 5/64" No. 20 = 1/8" SLD3L = 0.118" --1/8" Size No. 3 = 1/8" No. 30 = 3/16" Size No. 4 = 3/16" END OF SECTION 15800-7 BLANK PAGE 15800-8 UniSpec -Store Planning 032720 SECTION 16050 - BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Electrical Identification 2. Hangers and Supports 3. Conduit Sleeves 4. Grounding and Bonding B. Related Sections 1. Section 09900 - Paints and Coatings: Field painting of hangers and supports. 2. Section 16100 — Wiring Methods 3. Section 16500 — Lighting 4. Section 16700 — Communication 1.2 REFERENCES A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced within the text by the basic designation only. B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): NFPA 70E — Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION A. Nameplates: Provide laminated plastic nameplates with 3/4 inch minimum contrasting -color engraved letters. 2.2 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Manufacturers: 1. Unistrut Metal Framing, Unistrut Corporation, Wayne, MI, (800) 521-7730. 2. Erico/Caddy/Eriflex (divisions of Pentair Electrical and Fastening Solutions) (800) 753-9221. 3. Minerallac Fastening Systems, Hampshire, IL, (800) 927-3293. B. Conduit and Equipment Supports: Hangers shall be Series P3000 or P3300 channels by Unistrut depending on load and span involved. Use Pipe Hangers by Minerallac , or Caddy Clips by Erico only where impractical to install Unistrut Hangers. C. Attach hangers and supports to structure overhead by methods approved at job site. Do not use fasteners which penetrate the roof deck. 2.3 CONDUIT SLEEVES A. Sleeves: 1. Below Grade: Galvanized, black steel or schedule 40 PVC pipe. 2. Above Grade: Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT). 2.4 GROUNDING AND BONDING A. Insulated Grounding Bushing: Steel with feed-thru lugs. B. Insulated Equipment Ground Wire: Copper. 16050-1 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install specified materials in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and as indicated on Drawings. B. Cutting and Patching: Where cutting is required through walls, floors, or ceilings, make openings no larger than required and repair affected surfaces to match adjacent surfaces. C. Nameplates: Bolt or pop -rivet nameplates to equipment. Clearly identify equipment or equipment served, such as "BALER", "COMPACTOR," etc. Install nameplates for each safety switch, contactor, time switch, pushbutton and other similar equipment. D. Electrical Equipment Supports: Support electrical equipment with hangers and supports specified above or in another approved manner where details are not indicated. E. Sleeves: 1. Below Grade: Install where conduits pass through concrete floors as shown on drawings. 2. Above Grade: Install where conduits pass through outside walls as shown on drawings. Caulk sleeves with sealant as specified in Section 07900. F. Fastening and Anchoring: Fasten conduit straps, disconnect switches, panelboards, and other equipment secured to walls and slabs with cadmium plated screws or bolts and lead cinch anchors or expansion bolts and install in holes drilled with proper size masonry drill. Properly size anchors in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for load to be supported. G. Torque all conductor connection terminations to manufacturer's recommended values. Inspect panelboards for physical damage, proper alignment, anchorage, and grounding. Check proper installation and tightness of connections for circuit breakers, fusible switches, and fuses. 3.2 GROUNDING A. General: Ground all metallic conduits, supports, cabinets, equipment, system neutrals, metal building structures, and other items required to be grounded in accordance with the NEC and other applicable codes and as indicated on drawings. B. Equipment Grounding: 1. Make conduits electrically continuous using proper fittings, connections, grounding bushings, etc. 2. Install insulating grounding bushings on all conduit connections 1 1/4 inch and larger and where indicated on Drawings. 3. Install insulated equipment ground wires in all raceways. C. Concrete Encased Electrodes: Where indicated on the Drawings, furnish and install electrodes, jumpers, and approved fittings in accordance with Grounding Electrode Detail . D. Ground Rods: If ground rods are required, install two 5/8 inch minimum diameter Copperweld rods driven vertically not less than 12 feet apart and each with 8 feet of length in contact with the soil. 3.3 TESTING A. Upon completion of installation, perform continuity tests on power and equipment branch circuit conductors. Inspect wire and cable for physical damage. Verify proper phasing connections. B. Test receptacles with circuit tester to ensure proper polarity, grounding, and continuity of circuits. C. Load test GFCI receptacles. END OF SECTION 16050-2 UniSpec - Store Planning SECTION 16100 - WIRING METHODS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Wire and Cable. 2. Conduit 3. Outlet boxes and Conduit Fittings. 4. Wiring Devices. 5. Wire Connectors. B. Related Requirements: 6. Section 16050 - Basic Electrical Materials and Methods: Hangers and Supports 7. Section 16500 — Lighting 8. Section 16700 — Communication 1.2 REFERENCES A. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC). 032720 B. American Society for Testing Material (ASTM) 1. ASTM D698 - Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/ft 2. ASTM D1557 - Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-bf/ft3) C. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): NEMA VE 1 — Metal Cable Tray Systems D. Underwriters Laboratories (UL): UL 1569 - Metal Clad Cables 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Final Power Plan Review Meeting: 1. A Final Power Plan Review Meeting shall be held on-site to review the Final Power Plan and scheduling requirements. The mandatory attendees shall be the Construction Manager, General Contractor, Electrical Contractor, Security Services Representative, CCTV Representative, and Store Planning Field Manager. The meeting shall be scheduled by the General Contractor approximately 14 days after receipt of Final Power Plan Drawings. At least ten days advance notification shall be given to all attendees. 2. The purpose of the meeting will be to review the Final Power Plan requirements and to schedule completion dates for various critical components of the Final Power Plan. 3. The Construction Manager will review the PCOB and EWA process at this meeting, as it applies to the Final Power Plan requirements. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Allow minimum of four weeks for delivery. B. Products will be supplied to the job site complete and ready for installation. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 WIRE AND CABLE A. Electrical Components and Devices: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a nationally recognized testing agency and marked for use. 16100-1 B. Wire and cable shall bear UL label and shall conform to standards established for such materials by nationally recognized agencies. C. Provide code gauge, soft annealed copper wire, not less than 98 percent conductivity and of 600 volt class. D. Conductors: 1. Insulation type shall be one of the following: a. THHN b. THWN c. XHHW d. XHHW-2 2. Type: a. #10 and smaller— stranded or solid. b. #8 and larger - stranded E. Interlocked Armor Metal Clad (MC) Cable: Contractor's option as allowed by authorities having jurisdiction. MC cable shall have the following characteristics: 1. Aluminum MC -Lite or Standard MC. 2. Minimum size conductor, #12 AWG copper, including green insulated equipment ground, sized in accordance with the NEC. 3. Overall moisture resistant tape. 4. Galvanized steel or aluminum interlocked cladding. 5. Manufactured in accordance with UL 1569. F. Wire smaller than #12 AWG not permitted unless otherwise noted. #14 AWG, type MTW or TFF permitted for signal and pilot control circuits unless otherwise noted. G. Color code: SYSTEM VOLTAGE NEUTRAL COLOR PHASE GROUND ISOLATED GROUND 3. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT): Hot -dip galvanized. 4. Schedule 40 heavy -wall PVC for all underground conduit runs. 5. 208/120V white A -black B -red C -blue green green W/ yellow tracer 240/120V white A -black B -red green green W/ yellow tracer 480/277V It. gray or white with colored stripe other than yellow A -brown B -orange C -yellow green green W/ yellow tracer H. Color code #6 AWG and smaller phase and neutral conductors by continuous outer covering. Conductors #4 AWG and larger may be color coded by tape. Tape shall have minimum of two complete wraps around conductor at 6 inches from terminations, splices, and junction points. I. Identify circuit numbers with synthetic cloth or plastic labels at splice and junction points. 2.2 CONDUIT A. Conduit types shall be as follows and shall bear UL or ETL label: 1. Galvanized Rigid Metal Conduit (GRC): Hot -dip galvanized. 2. Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC): Hot -dip galvanized. 3. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT): Hot -dip galvanized. 4. Schedule 40 heavy -wall PVC for all underground conduit runs. 5. Flexible Metal Conduit: Zinc -coated steel or Aluminum. 6. Liquid Tight Flexible Steel Conduit with PVC jacket. 7. MC Cable: Steel or Aluminum Cladding. 16100-2 B. Conduit Sizes: Size conduit in accordance with NEC unless noted otherwise on Drawings, but not less than the following: 1. Alarm and Data Systems: 3/4 inch. 2. Flexible Metal Conduit: For connection of recessed light fixtures in suspended ceilings, 3/8 inch. For connection of other equipment subject to vibration: 1/2 inch. 3. Underground Conduit in Parking Lot: 1 inch. 4. Other Uses: 1/2 inch. C. Contact Information: 1. Prime Conduit MWE Inc. 816-842-9283 or 800-678-3075 2. Vikimatic 800-345-8454 3. Innerduct 800-332-8114 2.3 OUTLET BOXES AND CONDUIT FITTINGS A. Outlet boxes and conduit fittings shall bear the label of a nationally recognized testing laboratory and be rated for environmental conditions where installed. B. Boxes: Comply with NEC in regard to maximum allowable number of conductors. 1. Interior Boxes: Hot -dip galvanized, 4 inches minimum octagon or square, unless otherwise noted. Provide single or multiple gang outlet boxes as required for flush installation in drywall construction. Provide masonry boxes for outlets installed flush in concrete unit masonry. Provide single surface -mounted outlet boxes for utility type boxes. 2. Exterior Boxes: Provide masonry boxes for outlets installed flush in concrete unit masonry. 3. Outlet Boxes: Suitable for supporting lighting fixtures if intended for that purpose. 4. Ceiling Fan Boxes: Rated and listed for mounting ceiling fans. C. Conduit Fittings: 1. EMT Fittings for Dry Locations: Diecast or steel set screw type. 2. EMT Fittings For Wet or Damp Locations: Steel Compression type. 3. GRC, IMC, or EMT Box Connectors For Wet or Damp Locations: Weather -tight hubs. 4. Threadless GRC or IMC Fittings: Not permitted. 5. GRC or IMC connectors for dry locations. 6. PVC Fittings: Solvent weld type for PVC conduit. 2.4 WIRING DEVICES A. See subsection L for device and cover plate finishes. B. Branch Circuit Switches: Specification grade rated 20A 120/277V AC as follows: Type Hubbell Pass & Cooper Leviton Kason Seymour Single Pole HBL1221 PS20AC1 2221 1221-2 3 -Way HBL1223 PS20AC3 2223 1223-2 4 -Way HBL1224 PS20AC4 2224 1224-2 Dimmers Acuity Sensor Switch: SPODMRD EZ WH Dimmer Lutron Sensor with 0-10V Dimming: MRF2S-8SDV010 Occupancy Sensor. Lutron Companion Switch: PJ2-3BRL-GWH-LO1 Single Pole AD1277-1 Sensor Switch: Not Available OSSMT-MD-G Occupancy Sensor WSX PDT Dual Technology) Double Pole AD 1277-2 Sensor Switch: Not Available Not Available Occupancy Sensor WSX-PDT-2P (Dual Technology) 16100-3 Type Hubbell Pass & Seymour Cooper Leviton Kason Weatherproof, Low Not Available Not Not Available Not Available 11901A00005 Temperature (Walk- 5362 Available Duplex Receptacle 20A 125V Isolated IG5362 IG5362 In Coolers & 5362 -IG Ground 5-20R Freezers GFCI Duplex Receptacle 20A 125V (5- GF20LA 2095 VGF20 7899 Weatherproof, Not Available Sensor Switch Not Available Not Available GFCI Weather Resistant Duplex Double Pole, Low 2095TRWR WSX-2P- LT W7899 Receptacle 20A 125V 5-20R Temperature Duplex Receptacle Tamper Resistant Not Available Not Available (Refrigerated Prep TBR20 20A 125V 5-20R Areas Single Receptacle 15A 250V 2 pole 3 HBL56611 5671-1 5661V 5661-I Receptacles - Straiaht Blade Nvlon Grounding - Tvpe Outlet Devices: Specification grade as follows: Type Hubbell Pass & Seymour Cooper Leviton Single Receptacle 20A 125V (5-20R) HBL5361 5361 5361 5361 Duplex Receptacle 20A 125V (5-20R) HBL5362 5362 5362 5362 Duplex Receptacle 20A 125V Isolated IG5362 IG5362 IG5362RN 5362 -IG Ground 5-20R GFCI Duplex Receptacle 20A 125V (5- GF20LA 2095 VGF20 7899 20R GFCI Weather Resistant Duplex GFTR20 2095TRWR WRVGF20 W7899 Receptacle 20A 125V 5-20R Duplex Receptacle Tamper Resistant Not Available Not Available Not Available TBR20 20A 125V 5-20R Single Receptacle 15A 250V 2 pole 3 HBL56611 5671-1 5661V 5661-I Wire Grounded 6-15R Single Receptacle 20A 250V 2 pole 3 HBL54611 58711 5461 5461 Wire Grounded 6-20R Single Receptacle 30A 250V 2 pole 3 HBL9330 3801 5700N 5372 Wire Grounded 6-30R Single Receptacle 20A 125/250V 3 pole HBL8410 3820 5759 Not Available 4 Wire Grounded 14-20R Single Receptacle 30A 125/250V 3 pole HBL9430A 3864 5744N 278 4 Wire Grounded 14-30R Single Receptacle 20A 3 Phase 250V 3 HBL8420 Not Available Not Available Not Available ole 4 Wire Grounded 15-20R Single Receptacle 30A 3 Phase 250V 3 HBL8430A 5740 8430N 8430 ole 4 Wire Grounded 15-30R Single Receptacle 50A 3 Phase 250V 3 HBL8450A 5750 8450N 8450 pole 4 Wire Grounded (15-50R) D. Receptacles - Locking Nylon Grounding - Type Outlet Devices: Specification grade as follows: Type Hubbell Pass & Seymour Cooper Leviton Single Locking Receptacle 15A 125V HBL4710 4710 CWL515R 4710 L5 -15R Single Locking Receptacle 15A 125V IG4710 IG4710 IGL515R 4710 -IG Isolated Ground L5 -15R Duplex Locking Receptacle 15A 125V HBL4700I 4700 4700 4700 L5 -15R Duplex Locking Receptacle 15A 125V IG4700A IG4700 IG4700 4700 -IG Isolated Ground L5 -15R 16100-4 Type Hubbell Pass & Seymour Cooper Leviton Single Locking Receptacle 20A 125V HBL2310 L520 -R CWL520R 2310 L5 -20R 2313 Locking Connector 20A 3 Phase 250V 3 Pole 4 Wire Grounded L15 -20R HBL2423 L1520 -C CWL1520C Single Locking Receptacle 20A 125V IG2310 IGL520-R IGL52OR 2310 -IG Isolated Ground L5 -20R Single Locking Receptacle 30A 125V HBL2610 L530 -R CWL530R 2610 L5 -30R HBL24CM23 Not Available CRL1520C Not Available Single Locking Receptacle 30A 125V IG2610 IGL530-R IGL53OR 2610 -IG Isolated Ground L5 -30R Single Locking Receptacle 20A 250V 2 HBL2320 L620 -R CWL620R 2320 Pole 3 Wire Grounded L6 -20R Available Single Locking Receptacle 30A 250V 2 HBL2620 L630 -R CWL630R 2620 Pole 3 Wire Grounded L6 -30R Single Locking Receptacle 30A 250V 2 IG2620 IGL630-R IGL63OR 2620 -IG Pole 3 Wire Isolated Ground L6 -30R Single Locking Receptacle 20A HBL2410 L1420 -R CWL1420R 2410 125/250V 3 pole 4 Wire Grounded (L14 - 20R Single Locking Receptacle 30A HBL2710 L1430 -R CWL1430R 2710 125/250V 3 pole 4 Wire Grounded (L14 - 30R Single Locking Receptacle 50A 600V 2 HBL3771 3771 3771 3771 ole 3 Wire Grounded on-Nema Single Locking Receptacle 50A CS6369 CS6369 CS6369 CS63-69 125/250V 3 pole 4 Wire Grounded on-Nema E. Connectors - Cord mounted Locking Nylon Grounding - Type to match Plugs as follows: Type Hubbell Pass & Seymour Cooper Leviton Locking Connector 15A 125V L5 -15R HBL4729C PSL515-C 4731N 4729-C Locking Connector 20A 125V L5 -20R HBL2313 L520 -C CWL520C 2313 Locking Connector 20A 3 Phase 250V 3 Pole 4 Wire Grounded L15 -20R HBL2423 L1520 -C CWL1520C 2423 F. Connectors - Cord mounted Corrosion Resistant Locking Nylon Grounding - Type to match Plugs as follows: Type Hubbell Pass & Seymour Cooper Leviton Corrosion Resistant Locking Connector HBL23CM13 CRL520-C CRL520C 23CM-13 20A 125V L5 -20R Corrosion Resistant Locking Connector HBL24CM13 CRL1420-C CRL1420C Not Available 20A 125/250V 3 Pole 4 Wire Grounded (L14 -20R) Corrosion Resistant Locking Connector HBL24CM23 Not Available CRL1520C Not Available 20A 3 Phase 250V 3 Pole 4 Wire Grounded L15 -20R Corrosion Resistant Locking Connector HBL28CM13 Not Available Not Not Available 30A 3 Phase 120/208V 4 Pole 5 Wire Available Grounded L21 -30R 16100-5 G. Plugs - Cord mounted Nylon Grounding - Type to match Outlet Devices as follows: Type Hubbell Pass & Seymour Cooper Leviton Plug 20A 125V 2 Pole 3 Wire Grounded HBL5366CA PS5366SSAN 5366AN 5366 -CA 5-20P Plug 20A 250V 2 Pole 3 Wire Grounded HBL5466CA PS5466SSAN 5466AN 5466 -CA 6-20P Plug 20A 3 Phase 250V 3 Pole 4 Wire HBL8421C Not Available Not Not Available Grounded 15-20P HBL24CM21 Not Available Available Not Available Plug 30A 3 Phase 250V 3 Pole 4 Wire HBL8432C 5741 -AN 8432AN 8432-P Grounded 15-30P Plug 50A 3 Phase 250V 3 Pole 4 Wire HBL8452C 5751 -AN 8452AN 8452-P Grounded 15-50P Available H. Plugs - Cord mounted Locking Nylon Grounding - Type to match Outlet Devices as follows: Type Hubbell Pass & Seymour Cooper Leviton Locking Plug 15A 125V 2 Pole 3 Wire HBL4720C PSL515-P 4721N 4720-C Grounded L5 -15P Locking Plug 20A 250V 2 Pole 3 Wire HBL2321 L620 -P CWL620P 2321 Grounded L6 -20P Locking Plug 30A 250V 2 Pole 3 Wire HBL2621 L630 -P CWL630P 2621 Grounded L6 -30P HBL24CM21 Not Available CRL1520P Not Available Locking Plug 20A 3 Phase 250V 3 Pole HBL2421 L1520 -P CWL1520P 2421 4 Wire Grounded L15 -20P Plugs - Cord mounted Corrosion Resistant Locking Nylon Grounding - Type to match Outlet Devices as follows: Type Hubbell Pass & Seymour Cooper Leviton Corrosion Resistant Locking Plug 20A HBL23CM11 CRL520-P CRL520P 23CM-11 125V 2 Pole 3 Wire Grounded L5 -20P Corrosion Resistant Locking Plug 20A HBL24CM11 CRL1420-P CRL1420P Not Available 125/250V 3 Pole 4 Wire Grounded (L14 - 20P Corrosion Resistant Locking Plug 20A 3 HBL24CM21 Not Available CRL1520P Not Available Phase 250V 3 Pole 4 Wire Grounded L15 -20P Corrosion Resistant Locking Plug 30A 3 HBL28CMl 1 Not Available Not Not Available Phase 120/208V 4 Pole 5 Wire Available Grounded (L21 -30P) Pin & Sleeve - Insulated Water Tight - Type Outlet Devices: Specification grade as follows: Type Hubbell Pass & Seymour Cooper Leviton Water Tight Receptacle 30A 250V 2 HBL330R6W PS330R6W CD330R6W 330R6W Pole 3 Wire Grounded on-Nema Water Tight Receptacle 60A 250V 2 HBL360R6W PS360R6W CD360R6W 360R6W Pole 3 Wire Grounded on-Nema 16100-6 K. Boots: Weatherproof Boots for Locking Plug and Connector Bodies - Type to match Devices as follows: Type Hubbell Pass & Seymour Cooper Leviton Corrosion Resistant Boots for Locking HBL60CM31 CRL2030-RBP BM1 & 6031-Y & 6032-Y Plug and Connector 20/30A 125V (L5- & & CRL2030- BM2 Sas our& 20) HBL60CM32 RBC WP1010M WIUCAST Corrosion Resistant Boots for Locking HBL60CM35 CRL2030-RBP BL1 & BL2 6033-Y & 6034-Y Plug and Connector 20/30A 125/250V 3 & & CRL2030- WP1010M WIUCAST Pole 4 Wire Grounded L14-20 HBL60CM36 RBC XD 1 Corrosion Resistant Boots for Locking HBL60CM35 CRL2030-RBP BL1 & BL2 6033-Y & 6034-Y Plug and Connector 20/30A 3 Phase & & CRL2030- VXD Available 250V 3 Pole 4 Wire Grounded L15-20 HBL60CM36 RBC Corrosion Resistant Boots for Locking HBL60CM35 CRL2030-RBP BL1 & BL2 6033-Y & 6034-Y Plug and Connector 30A 3 Phase & & CRL2030- XD Available 120/208V 4 Pole 5 Wire Grounded (L21- HBL60CM36 RBC 30 L. Cover Plates: 1. Nylon cover plates for flush mounted devices. 2. Galvanized steel plates where devices are installed on exposed fittings or boxes. 3. 302 stainless steel cover plates for recessed outlet boxes in masonry walls. 4. Blank cover plate on all boxes without device. 5. Unless otherwise noted, wiring devices and cover plates shall be white nylon. 6. Blank Cover Plates: On boxes without devices or fixtures, provide same type and color as those installed on devices in the same room or area. 7. Isolated ground receptacles: Orange nylon cover plates with circuit number printed in 3/16 inch black lettering on clear adhesive label (Brady label or equal) adhered to plate. 2.5 WIRE CONNECTORS A. Splices: 1. #8 AWG and Smaller: Ideal Wingnut, 3M Scotchlok, or equal connectors of proper size. 3M No. 567 in- line self -stripping connectors will be permitted only at ballast lead connections in fluorescent light rows. 2. #6 AWG and Larger: Solderless lugs and connectors. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Install specified materials in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Where switches are ganged, provide permanently installed steel barriers between switches. Where or provide separate boxes and separate coverplates for each circuit. C. Access to Equipment: Coordinate access doors to allow for easy access of equipment for repair and maintenance. 16100-7 Thomas & Type Hubbell Intermatic Betts Sas our& Single gang GFCI duplex receptacle, weatherproof, Red Dot WP26M WP1010M WIUCAST while -in -use, lockable vertical metallic cover plate CKMUV XD 1 Single gang GFCI duplex receptacle, weatherproof, Red Dot WP26MH WP1010M WIUCAST while -in -use, lockable horizontal metallic cover plate CKMU XD 1 Single gang deep box twistlock receptacle, Red Dot WP7D WP1250M Not weatherproof, while -in -use, lockable vertical metallic CKLSVLU VXD Available cover plate Double gang two GFCI duplex receptacles, Red Dot Not WP1030M Not weatherproof, while -in -use, lockable vertical metallic 2CKU Available XD Available cover plate 5. Unless otherwise noted, wiring devices and cover plates shall be white nylon. 6. Blank Cover Plates: On boxes without devices or fixtures, provide same type and color as those installed on devices in the same room or area. 7. Isolated ground receptacles: Orange nylon cover plates with circuit number printed in 3/16 inch black lettering on clear adhesive label (Brady label or equal) adhered to plate. 2.5 WIRE CONNECTORS A. Splices: 1. #8 AWG and Smaller: Ideal Wingnut, 3M Scotchlok, or equal connectors of proper size. 3M No. 567 in- line self -stripping connectors will be permitted only at ballast lead connections in fluorescent light rows. 2. #6 AWG and Larger: Solderless lugs and connectors. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Install specified materials in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Where switches are ganged, provide permanently installed steel barriers between switches. Where or provide separate boxes and separate coverplates for each circuit. C. Access to Equipment: Coordinate access doors to allow for easy access of equipment for repair and maintenance. 16100-7 3.2 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Hangers and Supports are specified in Section 16050. A. Tie wrap groups of conductors in switchboards and panel boards. 3.4 CONDUIT A. Installation: 1. Install conduit concealed, except in unfinished areas and where indicated on Drawings. 2. Support conduit by means of specified hangers. 3. Clean PVC conduit per manufacturer's recommendations before application of solvent cement. 4. Coordinate flashings where conduit penetrates roof membrane. 5. Paint metallic conduit under concrete slab or where installed in contact with earth. Apply two 6 mil coats of PVC or Asphalt paint continuously along entire length of conduit prior to installation below grade. Do not run conduit in concrete slab. 6. Install flexible metal conduit or liquid tight flexible metal conduit for final connections to dry -type transformers, baler, air compressors, HVAC equipment, motors and other vibrating equipment. 7. Coordinate installation of conduit in masonry work. 8. Do not install conduit under slab unless indicated on Drawings. Conduit installed below slab shall be galvanized rigid metal (GRC), intermediate metal conduit (IMC), or Schedule 40 PVC. Provide exterior coated GRC bends and elbows for all underground conduit. 9. Route above grade conduit parallel or perpendicular to building lines. 10. Maintain minimum of 6 inches clearance at flues and heat sources. 11. Install GRC conduit when penetrating from below grade outdoors or penetrating concrete slabs, Including elbow. 12. Install GRC elbow on all conduit runs below grade that have 450 bends or greater. 13. Install double locknut and bushings when terminating GRC or IMC conduit, except where conduit terminates in threaded hub. 14. Install insulated throat bushings on all PVC conduit runs. B. Location: 1. Galvanized Rigid Metal Conduit (GRC): Permitted for general exposed or concealed work above or below grade. 2. Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC): Permitted for general exposed or concealed work above or below grade. 3. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT): Permitted for general exposed or concealed work above grade. 4. Polyvinyl Chloride rigid Nonmetallic Conduit (PVC) unless noted otherwise on drawings: Permitted for below -grade use when permitted by local governing codes.. 5. Flexible Metal Conduit: Permitted in attic spaces and exposed in lengths of 6 feet or less for connections to equipment in dry areas. Not permitted for general exposed or concealed work. For connection of recessed light fixtures in suspended ceilings and connection of other equipment subject to vibration. 6. Liquid tight Flexible Metal Conduit: Permitted exposed in lengths of 6 feet or less for connections to food service equipment, refrigeration equipment and other vibrating equipment in damp locations where rigid connections are not suitable. 7. MC Cable: Permitted only where concealed inside partitions and above finished ceilings. Cable exposed on walls or in open bar joist areas will not be permitted. Cut cable with manufacturer's recommended armor stripping tool. Provide manufacturers approved connectors. 3.5 WIRING DEVICES A. Replace outlets or devices improperly located or installed. Set outlets and devices plumb or horizontal and extend to, but not project above, finished surface. B. Unless otherwise noted, receptacles, switches, and other wiring devices shall not be mounted back-to-back. 16100-8 C. Install receptacles so that the ground prong is in the down position. 3.6 WIRE CONNECTIONS A. Make final connection of motors, starters, disconnects, and other items furnished under other Sections. 3.7 PROTECTIONS A. Protect installed products from damage until completion of construction operations. END OF SECTION 16100-9 BLANK PAGE 16100-10 UniSpec -Store Planning 032720 SECTION 16442 - BRANCH CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Lighting and Appliance Panelboards. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 16050 - Basic Electrical Materials and Methods. Grounding 1.2 REFERENCES A. National Electrical Code (NFPA-70), and interim amendments in effect. B. NFPA 101 — Life Safety Code 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with latest edition of the National Electrical Code (NFPA-70), and interim amendments in effect. B. Comply with local and state, utility regulations and laws. C. Furnish productions listed and classified by Under Writers Laboratories, Inc or other testing firm acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction as suitable for purpose specified and shown. D. Comply with NFPA 101 — Life Safety Code. Where referenced in the Contract Documents, NFPA 101 shall indicate the latest edition including all interim amendments in affect. 1.4 DELWERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Storage and Protection: Provide proper facilities for handling and storage of materials to prevent damage. Keep materials dry, fully protected from weather. 1.5 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. The responsibility of Work under this Section includes, but is not limited to, the following: 1. Coordinate and schedule delivery of equipment to site. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Panelboards manufactured by one of the following, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. 1. Cutler Hammer. 2. Challenger. 3. General Electric. 4. Siemens. 5. Square D. B. Equipment will bear name and trademark of manufacturer as listed above. Substitutions not permitted. 16442-1 2.2 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE PANELBOARDS A. Lighting and Appliance Panelboards for 240, 240/120 or 208Y/120 volt service shall be Square D, Type NQOD or equivalent by manufacturers listed in this specification section. B. Lighting and Appliance Panelboards for 480 or 480Y/277 volt service shall be Square D, Type NF or equivalent by manufacturers listed in this specification section. C. Enclosures and trim fronts shall be NEMA Type 1 and shall be constructed in accordance with UL 50 requirements. D. Cabinets shall be constructed of one-piece code gauge galvanized steel with mounting studs, and shall have wiring gutters of ample size and knockouts for conduit connections as required. E. Interior trim shall be dead -front construction to shield user from energized parts. F. Trim front shall be one-piece with hinged door. Trim front shall be painted gray enamel. Trim front with door shall have cylindrical tumbler type lock. All lock assemblies shall be keyed alike. Provide two (2) keys for each lock. G. Panelboard doors shall be provided with a clear plastic cover typewritten directory located on the inside of the door. Typewritten circuit directory shall properly identify load on each circuit mounted under clear plastic cover. H. Main circuit breakers shall be molded case thermal magnetic type. I. Branch circuit breakers shall be molded case, thermal magnetic, quick -make, quick break type. Breakers shall be calibrated for operation in an ambient temperature of 40°C. Breakers shall be bolt on type of single unit construction. Two and three pole breakers, where called for, shall be single unit common trip. Tandem or half-size circuit breakers are not permitted. Branch circuit breakers shall have the following minimum short circuit ratings: l OK AIC for 240V or 208V systems and 14K AIC for 480V systems. Reference Drawings for project specific AIC ratings which may exceed these minimum ratings. K. Breakers used as switches for fluorescent lighting circuits shall be approved for the purpose and marked "SWD". L. Unless noted otherwise on the Drawings, all ground fault interrupting (GFI) branch circuit breakers shall incorporate overload, short circuit and UL Class A (5 milliamp sensitivity) for personnel protection. Ground fault circuit breakers with 30 milliamp sensitivity shall be used for equipment protection applications only. M. Breakers serving heating/air conditioning/refrigeration equipment shall be UL Listed "HACR" Type. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine surfaces and adjacent areas in which Work under this Section is to be performed. Report in writing to Wal- Mart Construction Manager prevailing conditions that may adversely affect satisfactory execution of Work. Do not proceed with Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Starting Work constitutes acceptance of the existing conditions and the Contractor shall then, at his expense, be responsible for correcting all unsatisfactory and defective Work encountered. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and as indicated on Drawings. B. Branch circuits shall be connected exactly as indicated on Drawings. 16442-2 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect completed installation for physical damage, proper alignment, anchorage, and grounding. B. Measure steady state load currents at each panelboard feeder; rearrange circuits in the panelboard to balance the phase loads within 20% of each other. Maintain proper phasing for multi -wire branch circuits. C. Check tightness of bolted connections, and circuit breaker connections using calibrated torque wrench or torque screwdriver per manufacturer's written specification. D. Test ground fault systems by operating push -to -test button. E. Adjust all operating mechanisms for free mechanical movement per manufacturer specifications. END OF SECTION 16442-3 BLANK PAGE 16442-4 UniSpec -Store Planning 032720 SECTION 16500 - LIGHTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Contractor furnished and installed Lighting fixtures. 2. Owner furnished lighting for installation by Contractor. B. Related Requirements: 1. Appendix A — Products and Work by Owner or Separate Contractor a. General procedures related to Owner furnished products and transport, handle, store and protect products. b. Manufacturers, suppliers, and vendor contacts and product names and numbers related to Owner furnished products. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fixtures and their electrical components will bear the label of a nationally recognized testing laboratory. 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Storage and Protection: Provide facilities for handling and storage of materials to prevent damage to edges, ends, and surfaces. Keep materials dry and protected from weather. Fixtures stored outside without a permanent overhead roof and shelter shall be replaced at Contractor expense. Examples of approved storage include drop trailers, storage inside warehouse, or other Owner Construction Manager approved storage area meeting these criteria. Fixtures showing signs of rust or weathering shall be replaced at Contractor's expense. B. Contact selected distributor 4 weeks prior to desired delivery date to arrange for delivery of lighting fixtures. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 CONTRACTOR FURNISHED AND INSTALLED LIGHTING FIXTURES A. Contractor shall provide light fixtures as indicated on drawings. B. Contractor Furnished Lighting Approved Vendors: 1. Hunzicker Brothers, (800) 324-1026 2. Haines, Jones & Cadbury, Inc., (800) 459-7099 3. Loeb Electric, (614) 421-3327 (GE Fixtures ONLY) 2.2 OWNER FURNISHED LIGHTING FIXTURES FOR INSTALLATION BY CONTRATOR A. Appendix A — Products and Work by Owner or Separate Contractor Section 16500 and Lighting Fixture Schedule. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install lighting fixtures, lamps, lighting panels, and connections in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and as indicated on Drawings. 1. LED Fixtures will arrive with protective film. Film shall not be removed until all painting and deep cleaning is completed. Removal of film prior to the cleaning procedure may result in damage and replacement at Contractor's expense. 16500-1 B. Coordinate exact mounting location of light fixtures with building structure and other trades prior to installation. Continuous rows shall be installed straight and true. C. Attach fixtures to ceiling grid. Install four to six feet of flexible conduit from recessed fixtures installed in lay -in ceiling grid systems to outlet boxes supported from building structural system. D. Maintain all light fixtures and lamps during construction, and coordinate replacement of any defective lamps with Owner's lighting vendor prior to Certification of Substantial Completion. Notify Owner's lighting vendor immediately of any damaged fixtures or lamps delivered to the jobsite and make arrangements to have them replaced. E. Verify ceiling and wall details. Install fixtures complete with proper mounting arrangements for ceiling or wall construction encountered. F. Lighting fixtures and lamps shall be clean and free of building paint over -spray one week prior to possession. G. Provide all additional hardware required to complete installation such as nuts, bolts, threaded rods and Unistrut channels. 3.2 MAINTENANCE AND REPLACEMENT DURING CONSTRUCTION A. Provide material and labor to deep clean new lighting fixtures with anti -static cleaning fluid. Replace lamps with building paint overspray one week prior to possession at Contractor's expense. B. Maintain lighting fixtures, ballasts, LED drivers, and lamps during construction, possession, and until store Grand Opening. Coordinate replacement of defective, lost, or damaged equipment with vendor. C. Owner Responsibility (Including Vendor): 1. Costs for replacement for normal failure covered by warranty of any fixture, lamp, or ballast prior to Grand Opening. Evaluation of abnormally high failure percentage and replacement covered under warranty will be provided by vendor on site. 2. Costs for replacement of parts damaged during shipment. Charges will be made to shipping carrier or responsible party. D. Contractor Responsibility: 1. Coordinate vendor on-site evaluation of abnormal component failures of ballast and lamps at least two weeks prior to Grand Opening. Provide labor for routine and normal maintenance of equipment including troubleshooting and determination of lighting failure. 2. Material and labor costs for replacement of loss, breakage, or other damage due to fault of Contractor including lamps. 3. Contact vendor to order replacement parts in time to have all fixtures fully operational prior to Grand Opening. E. Replacement Procedure - General: 1. Immediately notify vendor and request replacement of damaged fixtures, ballasts or lamps delivered to the jobsite. 2. If shipping damage is concealed, notify carrier and vendor within 15 days of acceptance of the freight. Provide vendor a copy of the written notification sent to the carrier. F. Additional Ballast Replacement Procedure: 1. Order replacement ballast(s) or LED driver(s) from vendor. Request Return Authorization number from vendor to return defective ballast no later than Grand Opening. 2. Return all defective ballast(s) or LED driver(s) to vendor. Vendor will arrange pickup and return, including shipping costs, of defective ballast(s) or LED driver(s). Cost for ballast(s) or LED driver(s) not returned within the specified time frame or returned but not defective will be automatically charged to Contractor. END OF SECTION 16500-2 UniSpec II -Store Planning 013120 SECTION 16700 - COMMUNICATIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Owner Furnished and Installed Voice/Data System. B. Related Requirements: 1. 16100 - Wiring Methods: Outlet boxes and conduit fittings. 2. Appendix A — Products and Work by Owner or Separate Contractor. a. General procedures related to Owner furnished products and transport, handle, store and protect products. b. Manufacturers, suppliers, and vendor contacts and product names and numbers related to Owner furnished products. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 OWNER FURNISHED PRODUCTS A. The following products will be Owner furnished and installed as specified in Appendix A (Section 16700). 1. Voice/Data cable equipment. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install Voice/Data conduit system, Voice/Data grounding conductor, and signal systems as indicated on Drawings. B. Voice/Data Conduit System: Install conduit system as indicated on Drawings, including: 1. Voice/Data service conduit. 2. Other conduits as indicated on Drawings. Install #14 AWG soft iron pull wire or heavy nylon cord in each conduit for pulling the Voice/Data cable to each termination point. 3. Install outlet boxes conforming to requirements of Section 16100. Include cover plates. END OF SECTION 16700-1 BLANK PAGE 16700-2 UniSpec - Store Planning 032720 APPENDIX A - PRODUCTS AND WORK BY OWNER OR SEPARATE CONTRACTOR PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY C. Appendix Includes: 1. Work provided by Owner including Owner furnished products and installation as associated with and as specified in the individual specification sections and the Drawings. 2. Appendix replaces deleted Specifications Section 01640: General procedures related to Owner furnished products. 3. Owner furnished equipment schedules and tables formerly included in individual specifications sections. 4. Information contained herein under the separate headings corresponds to the individual section numbers included in Division 2 thru 16 or Drawing numbers. Information under each heading identifies product information associated with the referenced specification or drawing. D. Index of Sections (Quick Links): All sections listed may not be applicable to all projects. 1. Section 06400 - Architectural Woodwork 2. Section 16500 - Lighting 3. Section 16700 - Communications 4. Drawing Equipment Schedules 5. Owner Furnished Equipment Shown On Drawings 6. References E. Related Requirements: 1. Contract Drawings: Owner furnished product information not included in this Appendix A. 1.2 GENERAL C. Owner's supplier and associated products will be as specified hereinafter as applicable. Application of information herein shall be only to the extent as stated and referenced in corresponding specifications sections or as shown on the drawings. D. Unless otherwise specified, provisions specified herein are included as requirements for Owner's Suppliers, vendor, or separate contractors and shall be considered information only to Contractor. 1.3 DEFINITIONS C. Owner: Defined in Construction Agreement. Owner may also be referred to as "Wal-Mart". 1.4 RESPONSIBILITIES FOR OWNER FURNISHED PRODUCTS C. Product Installation: Equipment and products will be furnished by the Owner for installation by the Contractor unless otherwise specified herein. D. Product Delivery: Unless otherwise specified hereinafter, Owner's supplier will deliver products to jobsite for Contractor to receive on delivery date established by Contractor. If significant order lead times are required for a specific product, lead time shall be as specified by the product supplier. E. Coordination: 1. Walmart Realty Execution Team Products and Equipment: Contractor shall contact wmpotracksoporta,lumatrak.com immediately after Award of Contract to initiate registration in the GC Communicator (GCC) online program for Owner supplier scheduling and coordination. 2. Coordination of order and delivery for Owner furnished products and equipment not facilitated by Walmart realty execution team are specified in Section 01600. Appendix A-1 F. Owner Responsibilities: 1. Arrange for delivery of supplier furnished shop drawings, product data, samples, and installation instructions to Contractor. 2. Arrange for delivery of replacement products upon notification from Owner's Construction Department of shortages, damage, or defects in products. 3. Arrange for repair of product manufacturing defects upon notification from Owner's Construction Department. 4. Arrange and pay for product delivery to site, in accordance with agreed upon construction management plan in Specifications Section 01320. 5. Deliver supplier's shipment list of materials to Contractor. 6. Submit claims for transportation damage. 7. Arrange for replacement of damaged, defective, or missing items. 8. Arrange for manufacturers' warranties, bonds, services, and inspections, as required. G. Contractor Responsibilities as specified in Specifications Section 01600: 1. Submit notice of any discrepancies or problems anticipated in the use the products to supplier and to Architect, Owner, and Owner's Construction Department. 2. Receive and unload products at the Site when specified. 3. Inspect products upon receipt for shortages, damaged, or defective items and report to Owner and Owner's Construction Department. 4. Handle products at site, including uncrating, storage, and protection unless otherwise specified. 5. Install products when specified. 6. Provide for installation and hook-up at time of delivery of Owner installed equipment. 7. Protect installed products from damage. 8. Replace items damaged by Contractor. 9. Remove trash, debris, and rubbish. 10. Report suspected product manufacturing defects to Owner's Construction Manager and Product Supplier. 1.5 CONTACTS C. Contact information for vendors of Owner Furnished Equipment is identified in the applicable specifications sections or on the drawings or will be made available to the Contractor at the Pre -Construction Conference or upon request by the Contractor to the Construction Manager. PART 2 - PRODUCTS AND EXECUTION SECTION 06400 - ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 2.1 VISION CENTER MILLWORK A. Owner's Vision Center Millwork/Casework Supplier: Vision Center systems and solid surface countertop shall be by QualSery Solutions, Fort Smith, AR; Attn: Dion Chambers (479) 646-8386 (x310), dchambers&qualservsolutions.com; or Logan Rose (056). B. Owner's Vision Center Millwork Countertop: Owner's Vision Center millwork supplier will furnish solid surfacing material meeting ASTM E 84, Class A; USDA approved for incidental food contact and manufactured in accordance with NSF/ANSI 51. Solid surfacing countertop material shall be by Verona Marble Company, Dallas, TX. (214) 435-8553 as follows: 1. Type 2: Santamargherita Series quartz materials by Verona Marble. Solid sheets consisting of quartz aggregates bound together with a matrix of filled plastic resin. a. Finish: Polished. b. Thickness: 3 cm unless noted otherwise on Drawings. C. Countertop Profile: Solid slabs with straight cut edges, top edge eased at exposed front and sides. d. Backsplash Profile: Separate solid units installed on top of counter, size and location per Drawings. e. Colors: As applicable as shown on Drawings: 1) SST6: Istria. 2) SST7: Lyskamm. Appendix A-2 SECTION 16500 - LIGHTING 2.1 PRODUCTS A. Furnish lighting fixtures and lamps as shown on the Lighting Fixture Schedule at the end of this Appendix and as indicated on Drawings, for installation by Contractor. 2.2 SUPPLIERS A. REXEL, Springdale, AR (479) 751-7123, William Marr, William.Marr(d),rexelusa.com. B. Regency Lighting; Los Angeles, CA (717) 304-0898; Andrew Jackson, or (818) 901-0255 ext.3342; walmartprojects(c_reeenc, li�ehting com C. QualSery Solutions LLC 7400 South 28th, Fort Smith, AR 72908; (479) 646-8386 Attn: Dion Chambers (x310) or Logan Rose (056). 2.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fixtures and their electrical components will bear the label of a nationally recognized testing laboratory. 2.4 MAINTENANCE AND REPLACEMENT DURING CONSTRUCTION A. Owner Responsibility: 1. Evaluation of abnormally high failure percentage and replacement covered under warranty will be provided by vendor on site. 2. Costs for replacement of parts damaged during shipment. SECTION 16700 - COMMUNICATIONS (OWNER FURNISHED AND INSTALLED ONLY AS NOTED BELOW) 2.5 VOICE/DATA SYSTEM A. Furnish and install voice/data cable equipment. DRAWING EQUIPMENT SCHEDULES DRAWING SHEET VCE1 LIGHT FIXTURE SCHEDULE TYPE VENDOR CATALOG NUMBER 19 REXEL EVHC6IDP-WM w/ T BAR HANGER 85 REGENCY P4406-29 87 REGENCY XAR13/X[v120/25C/30K/1500/WH/WH 89 QUALSERV RT5HO-LED22-30FR-2-000 91 REGENCY OLS-D-LED-2-S-4'0"-750L-DIM10-MVOLT-30K-85-WH 92 REGENCY OLS-D-LED-2-S-8'0"-750L-DIMIO-MVOLT-30K-85-WH 94 QUALSERV RT5HO-LED58-30FR-2-000 Appendix A-3 OWNER FURNISHED EQUIPMENT SHOWN ON DRAWINGS Specification Section Description Furnished By Received By Installed By Vision Center: Casework/Millwork package, including: -Countertops ,Sinks and Faucets (hardware preinstalled in millwork) -Shelves Architectural -Mirror Owner Contractor Contractor Drawings *Slat Wall Feature on backer board -Feature Wall -Ceiling Feature Chairs Refrigerator TV Monitor Bracket Light Fixtures Vision Center: TV Monitor and Associated Equipment Architectural Vision Center Equipment/Systems Drawings Alarm Modification Owner Owner Owner Security Camera Modification Signage END OF SCHEDULE 19 Dl y X1:7 3014x.� A. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC): 1. AISC 303 - Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges. 2. AISC 360 - Structural Steel Buildings. 3. Specification for the Design of Cold -Formed Steel Structural Members. B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): 1. ANSI A 14.3 - Ladders, Fixed, Safety Requirements. 2. ANSI A 108, A 118, A 136 - American National Standards for the Installation of Ceramic Tile (Includes ANSI A108.01, A108.02, A108.1A-C, 108.4 -.13, Al 18.1-.12, and ANSI A136.1) 3. ANSI A 108.02 - Materials, Environmental, and Workmanship, General Requirements. 4. ANSI A 108.5 - Installation of Ceramic Tile with Dry -Set Portland Cement Mortar or Latex Portland Cement Mortar. 5. ANSI At 17.1 - Guidelines For Accessible And Usable Buildings And Facilities. 6. ANSI A 118.4 - Latex -Portland Cement Mortar. 7. ANSI A 137.1 - Specifications for Ceramic Tile. 8. ANSI A 156.2 - Bored and Preassembled Locks and Latches. 9. ANSI A 156.6 - Architectural Door Trim. 10. ANSI/BHMA A 156.9 - Cabinet Hardware. 11. ANSI (BHMA) A156.10 - Power Operated Pedestrian Doors. 12. ANSI/BHMA A 156.11 - Cabinet Locks. 13. ANSI A 156.13 - Mortise Locks and Latches. 14. ANSI A 156.15 - Release Devices - Closer Holder, Electromagnetic and Electromechanical. 15. ANSI/BHMA A 156.18 - Materials & Finishes. 16. ANSI A208.1 - Particleboard. 17. ANSI A208.2 - Medium Density Fiberboard For Interior Use. 18. ANSI A250.6 - Recommended Practice for Hardware Reinforcing on Standard Steel Doors and Frames. 19. ANSI A250.8 (Formerly SDI -100) - Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames. 20. ANSI A250.10 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames. 21. ANSI A250.11 (Formerly SDI -105) - Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames. 22. ANSI B 16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings. Appendix A-4 23. ANSI B16.18 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings. 24. ANSI B16.22 - Wrought Copper & Copper Alloy Solder -Joint Pressure. a. ANSI/ASME B 1.20.1 - Pipe Threads, General Purpose (Inch). 25. ANSI B93.4 - Hydraulic Line Welded Tubing. 26. ANSI C 12.1 - Electric Meters Code for Electricity Metering. a. ANSI/ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping 27. ANSI C 12.20 - Standard for Electricity Meter - 0.2 and 0.5 Accuracy Classes. 28. ANSI Z97.1 - For Safety Glazing Materials Used In Buildings - Safety Performance Specifications and Methods Of Test. 29. ANSI Z97.1 - Safety Glazing Material Used in Buildings. 30. ANSI MH 16.1 - Specifications for the Design, Testing and Utilization of Industrial Steel Storage Racks. C. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. ASTM A 36 - Carbon Structural Steel. 2. ASTM A 47 - Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings. 3. ASTM A 53 - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot -Dipped, Zinc -Coated Welded and Seamless. 4. ASTM A74 - Hub and Spigot Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings. 5. ASTM A 108 - Steel Bar, Carbon and Alloy, Cold -Finished. 6. ASTM A 123 - Zinc (Hot -Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. 7. ASTM A 153 - Zinc Coating (Hot -Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. 8. ASTM A 234 - Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and High Temperature Service. 9. ASTM A 240 - Chromium and Chromium -Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications 10. ASTM A 249/A - Welded Austenitic Steel Boiler, Superheater, Heat -Exchanger, and Condenser Tubes. 11. ASTM A 269 - Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General Service. 12. ASTM A 307 - Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 psi Tensile Strength. 13. ASTM A 325 - Structural Bolts, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength. 14. ASTM A 463 - Steel Sheet, Aluminum Coated by the Hot -Dip Process. 15. ASTM A 490 - Structural Bolts, Alloy Steel, Heat Treated, 150 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength. 16. ASTM A 500 - Cold -formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes. 17. ASTM A 501 - Hot -Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing 18. ASTM A 536 - Ductile Iron Castings. 19. ASTM A 653 - Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc -Iron Alloy -Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot -Dip Process. 20. ASTM A 666 - Annealed or Cold -Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar. 21. ASTM A 591 - Steel Sheet, Electrolytic Zinc -Coated, for Light Coating Mass Applications. 22. ASTM A 792 - Steel Sheet, 55% Aluminum -Zinc Alloy -Coated by the Hot -Dip Process. 23. ASTM A 795 - Black And Hot -Dipped Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) Welded And Seamless Steel Pipe For Fire Protection Use. 24. ASTM A861 - High -Silicon Iron Pipe and Fittings. 25. ASTM A 865 - Threaded Couplings, Steel, Black Or Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) Welded Or Seamless, For Use In Steel Pipe joints. 26. ASTM A888 - Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings. 27. ASTM A 992 - Structural Steel Shapes. 28. ASTM A 1008 - Steel, Sheet, Cold -Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High -Strength Low -Alloy, High -Strength Low -Alloy with Improved Formability, Solution Hardened, Baked Hardenable. 29. ASTM A 1011 - Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot -Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High -Strength Low -Alloy and High -Strength Low -Alloy with Improved Formability. 30. ASTM B75 - Seamless Copper Tube. 31. ASTM B88 - Seamless Copper Water Tube. 32. ASTM B135 - Seamless Brass Tube. 33. ASTM B 221 - Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes. 34. ASTM B 280 - Seamless Copper Tube for Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Field Service. 35. ASTM B306 - Copper Drainage Tube (DWV). 36. ASTM B584 - Copper Alloy Sand Castings for General Applications. 37. ASTM B306 - Copper Drainage Tube (DWV). Appendix A-5 38. 39. 40. 41. 42. 43. 44. 45. 46. 47. 48. 49. 50. 51. 52. 53. 54. 55. 56. 57. 58. 59. 60. 61. 62. 63. 64. 65. 66. 67. 68. 69. 70. 71. 72. 73. 74. 75. 76. 77. 78. 79 80. 81. 82. 83. 84. 85. 86. 87. ASTM B584 - Copper Alloy Sand Castings for General Applications. ASTM B 221 - Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes. ASTM B 813 - Liquid and Paste Fluxes for Soldering of Copper and Copper Alloy Tube. ASTM C 553 - Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Commercial and Industrial Applications ASTM C564 - Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings. ASTM C 578 - Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation. ASTM C 921 - Determining the Properties of Jacketing Materials for Thermal Insulation. ASTM C 1107 - Packaged Dry, Hydraulic -Cement Grout (Nonshrink). ASTM C 1048 - Heat -Treated Flat Glass - Kind HS, Kind FT Coated and Uncoated Glass. ASTM C 1071 - Thermal and Acoustical Insulation (Mineral Fiber, Dust Lining Material. ASTM C 1136 - Flexible, Low Permeance Vapor Retarders for Thermal Insulation ASTM C1277 - Shielded Couplings Joining Hubless Castiron Soil Pipe and Fittings. ASTM C1540 - Heavy Duty Shielded Couplings Joining Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings. ASTM C 1290 - Flexible Fibrous Glass Blanket Insulation Used to Externally Insulate HVAC Ducts ASTM C 1710 - Installation of Flexible Closed Cell Preformed Insulation in Tube and Sheet Form. ASTM D570 - Standard Test Method For Water Absorption Of Plastics ASTM D648 - Standard Test Method For Deflection Temperature Of Plastics Under Flexural Load In The Edgewise Position ASTM D695 - Standard Test Method For Compressive Properties Of Rigid Plastics ASTM D732 - Standard Test Method For Shear Strength Of Plastics By Punch Tool ASTM D 1187 - Asphalt -Base Emulsions for Use as Protective Coatings for Metal. ASTM D 1785 - Poly vinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120. ASTM D2000 - Standard Classification System for Rubber Products in Automotive Applications. ASTM D2240 - Standard Test Method For Rubber Property - Durometer Hardness ASTM D 2466 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40. ASTM D2467- Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80. ASTM D 2564 - Solvent Cements for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings. ASTM D 2665 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe and Fittings. ASTM D2609 - Plastic Insert Fittings for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe. ASTM D 2855 - Making Solvent -Cemented Joints with Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe and Fittings. ASTM D3311 - Drain, Waste, and Vent (DWV) Plastic Fittings Patterns ASTM D 4985 - Low Silicate Ethylene Glycol Base Engine Coolant for Heavy Duty Engines Requiring a Pre -Charge of Supplemental Coolant Additive (SCA). ASTM D5420 - Standard Test Method for Impact Resistance of Flat, Rigid Plastic Specimen by Means of a Striker Impacted by a Falling Weight (Gardner Impact) ASTM E 84 - Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. ASTM E96 - Water Vapor Transmission Materials. ASTM E 119 - Fire Tests Of Building Construction And Materials. ASTM E152 - Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. ASTM E 330 - Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Doors, Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. ASTM E 648 - Critical Radiant Flux of Floor -Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source. ASTM E 662 - Specific Optical Density of Smoke Generated by Solid Materials. ASTM E 709 - Standard Guide for Magnetic Particle Testing ASTM E 1886 - Standard Test Method for Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, Doors, and Impact Protective Systems Impacted by Missile(s) and Exposed to Cyclic Pressure Differentials. ASTM E 1996 - Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, Doors, and Impact Protective Systems Impacted by Windbome Debris in Hurricanes. ASTM E 2129 - Standard Practice for Data Collection for Sustainability Assessment of Building Products. ASTM F439 - Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80. ASTM F441 - Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40 And 80. ASTM F493 - Solvent Cements for CPVC Pipe and Fittings. ASTM F656 - Primers For Use in Solvents Cement Joints of Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings. ASTM F 710 - Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring. ASTM F876 - Crosslinked Polyethylene (PEX) Tubing. ASTM F877 - Crosslinked Polyethylene (PEX) Plastic Hot and Cold Water Distribution Systems. Appendix A-6 88. ASTM F 1066 - Vinyl Composition Floor Tile. 89. ASTM F 1700 - Solid Vinyl Floor Tile. 90. ASTM F1807 - Metal Insert Fittings Utilizing a Copper Crimp Ring for SDR9 Cross-linked Polyethylene (PEX) tubing. 91. ASTM F 1861 - Resilient Wall Base 92. ASTM F 1869 - Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission Rate of Concrete Subfloor Using Anhydrous Calcium Chloride. 93. ASTM F 2389 - Pressure -rated Polypropylene (PP) Piping Systems. 94. ASTM F 1807 - Metal Insert Fittings Utilizing a Copper Crimp Ring for SDR9 Cross-linked Polyethylene (PEX) tubing. 95. ASTM F 1960 - Cold Expansion Fittings with PEX Reinforcing Rings for Use with Cross-linked Polyethylene (PEX) Tubing. 96. ASTM F2014 - Non -Reinforced Extruded Tee Connections for Piping Applications. 97. ASTM F2023 - Standard Test Method for Evaluating the Oxidative Resistance of Plastic Piping to Hot Chlorinated Water. 98. ASTM F2098 - Stainless Steel Clamps for Securing SDR9 Cross-linked Polyethylene (PEX) Tubing to Metal Insert Fittings. 99. ASTM -F2389 - Pressure -rated Polypropylene (PP) Piping Systems. D. Air Movement and Control Association (AMCA): 1. AMCA 500-D - Laboratory Methods for Testing Dampers for Rating. 2. AMCA 500-L - Laboratory Methods for Testing Louvers for Rating. E. Aluminum Association (AA): 1. Specifications for Aluminum Structures. F. American Association of Automatic Door Manufacturers (AAADM): 1. AAADM Inspector Certification Program. G. American Petroleum Institute (API): 1. API 1615 - Installation of Underground Petroleum Storage Systems. H. American Plywood Association (APA): APA - Grades & Specifications. 1. American Society of Civil Engineers/Structural Engineering Institute (ASCE/SEI) 1. ASCE/SEI 7 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): 1. ASME A13.1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems. 2. ASME B 1.1 - Unified Inch Screw Threads (UN and UNR Thread Form). 3. ASME B 16.1 - Cast Iron Pipe Flanges And Flanged Fittings. 4. ASME B 16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings. 5. ASME B 16.4 - Gray Iron Threaded Fittings. 6. ASME B 16.5 - Pipe Flanges And Flanged Fittings NPS 1/2 Through NPS 24 Metric/Inch Standard. 7. ASME B 16.9 - Factory -Made Wrought Buttwelding Fittings. 8. ASME B 16.11 - Forged Fittings, Socket -Welding And Threaded. 9. ASME B 31.5 - Refrigeration Piping Standard 10. ASME /ANSI A112.18.1 - Plumbing Fixture Fittings. K. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE): 1. ASHRAE Standard 90.1 -Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low -Rise Residential Buildings. 2. ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 15 - Safety Standard for Refrigeration Systems. L. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA): 1. 28 CFR Part 36 - ADA Standards for Accessible Design. Appendix A-7 M. American Water Works Association (AWWA): 1. AWWA C104 - Cement -Mortar Lining for Ductile -Iron Pipe and Fittings for Water. 2. AWWA C115 - Flanged Ductile -Iron Pipe with Ductile -Iron or Gray -Iron Threaded Flanges. 3. AWWA C151 - Ductile -Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast. 4. AWWA C651 - Disinfecting Water Mains. N. American Welding Society (AWS): 1. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code. 2. AWS D1.3 - Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel. O. Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI) / Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada (AWMAC) / Woodwork Institute (WI) - Joint Publication: 1. AWI/AWMAC/WI - Architectural Woodwork Standards. P. British Standards Institution (BSI): 1. BS 302 - Stranded Steel Wire Ropes. Q. Carpet and Rug Institute (CRI): 1. CRI 104 - Standard for Installation of Commercial Carpet. R. Consumer Product Safety Commission (CPSC): 1. CPSC 16 CPR Part 1201. S. Door and Access Systems Manufacturer's Association International (DASMA) 1. DASMA 102 - Sectional Overhead -Type Doors 2. DASMA 108 - Standard Method for Testing Sectional Garage Doors and Rolling Doors: Determination of Structural Performance Under Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. T. Factory Mutual System (FM): 1. FM - Approval Guide, Chapter 18 - Building Materials. 2. FM Standard 4430 - Test Criteria for Heat and Smoke Vents. 3. Approval Guide, Latest edition. 4. FM Data Sheet 8-3, Current Edition - Rubber Tire Storage. U. Hydraulic Institute (HI): 1. HI M103 (ANSI/HI 1.4) - Centrifugal Operations. V. International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials (IAPMO): 1. IAPMO/ANSI Z1001- Prefabricated Gravity Grease Interceptors. W. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM): 1. Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products. X. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA): 1. NEMA AB 1 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Molded Case Switches. 2. NEMA LD3 - High -Pressure Decorative Laminates. Y. National Fenestration Rating Council (NFRC): 1. NFRC 100 - Procedure for Determining Fenestration Product U -Factors. 2. NFRC 200 - Procedure for Determining Fenestration Product Solar Heat Gain Coefficient and Visible Transmittance of Normal Incidence. Z. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. NFPA 13 - Installation of Sprinkler Systems. 2. NFPA 20 - Installation of Stationary Pumps for Fire Protection. 3. NFPA 24 - Standard for the Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and their Appurtenances. 4. NFPA 30 - Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code. Appendix A-8 5. NFPA 30A - Automotive and Marine Service Station Code. 6. NFPA 54 - National Fuel Gas Code. 7. NFPA 70 - National Electric Code. 8. NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows. 9. NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. 10. NFPA 90B - Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air -Conditioning Systems 11. NFPA 96 - Ventilation Control And Fire Protection Of Commercial Cooking Operations 12. NFPA 101 - Code for Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings and Structures. 13. NFPA 252 - Fire Tests for Door Assemblies. 14. NFPA 701 - Fire Tests for Flame Propagation of Textiles and Films. AA. North American Fenestration Standard (NAFS): 1. AAMA\WDMA\CSA\101\I.S.2\A440 - The Voluntary Performance Specification for Windows, Doors, and Skylights. BB. North American Insulation Manufacturer's Association (NAIMA) 1. AH 124 - Fibrous Glass Duct Liner Standard CC. NSF International (NSF): 1. NSF 14- Plastic Piping System Components and Related Materials. 2. NSF 51 - Food Equipment Materials 3. NSF 61 - Drinking Water System Components -Health Effects. 4. NSF 61 Annex G - Weighted Average Lead Content Evaluation Procedure to a 0.24 Percent Lead Requirement. DD. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA): 1. OSHA 1910.23 Walking Working Surfaces. 2. OSHA 1926.502 Fall Protection. 3. OSHA 1926.1153 Respirable Crystalline Silica. EE. Plumbing and Drainage Institute (PDI): 1. PDI WH 201- Water Hammer Arrestors. FF. Research Council on Structural Connections (RCSC): 1. RCSC Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts.] GG. Sheet Metal Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA): 1. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible HH. Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE): 1. SAE J525 - Welded and Cold Drawn Low Carbon Steel Tubing Annealed for Bending and Flaring. II. Steel Deck Institute (SDI): 1. ANSI/SDI-RD Standard for Steel Roof Deck (SDI Standard). 2. ANSI/SDI-NC Standard for Non -Composite Steel Floor Deck (SDI Standard). 3. ANSI/SDI-C Standard for Composite Steel Floor Deck (SDI Standard). JJ. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC): 1. SSPC-SP 2 - Hand Tool Cleaning. 2. SSPC SP -3 - Power Tool Cleaning. 3. SSPC-Paint 20 - Zinc -Rich Coating Type I - Inorganic And Type II - Organic. 4. SSPC-Paint 25 - Red Iron Oxide, Zinc Oxide, Raw Linseed Oil, and Alkyd Primer. 5. SSPC-Paint 20 - Zinc -Rich Coating Type I - Inorganic and Type II - Organic. 6. SSPC-Paint 25 - Zinc Oxide, Alkyd, Linseed Oil Primer for Use Over Hand Cleaned Steel Type I And Type II. 7. SSPC-PA 1 - Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel. Appendix A-9 KK. Tile Council of North America, Inc. (TCNA): 1. TCNA Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation. LL. Underwriters Laboratories (UL): 1. UL l OB - Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. 2. UL 305 - Panic Hardware. 3. UL 508 - Standard of Safety for Industrial Control Equipment. 4. UL Fire Protection Directory - Latest Edition. 5. UL 778 - Motor -Operated Water Pumps. 6. UL 857 - Busways. 7. UL Fire Protection Directory - Latest Edition END OF REFERENCES Appendix A-10